YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA
6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.
135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.
SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.
RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.
YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.
J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.
17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
©
2006 All rights reserved.
RX-V2700
Printed in Malaysia WJ55210
RX-V2700
AV Receiver
OWNER’S MANUAL
U
RX-V2700_U-cv.fm Page 1 Thursday, August 24, 2006 3:36 PM
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Caution-i
• Explanation of Graphical Symbols
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within
the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to
persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle
is intended to alert you to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in
the literature accompanying the appliance.
1 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions
should be read before the product is operated.
2 Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions
should be retained for future reference.
3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the
operating instructions should be adhered to.
4 Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions
should be followed.
5 Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before
cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.
6 Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by
the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.
7 Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water –
for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or
laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool;
and the like.
8 Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart,
stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall,
causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious
damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod,
bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold
with the product. Any mounting of the product should
follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a
mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer.
9 A product and cart combination should be moved with care.
Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may
cause the product and cart combination to
overturn.
10 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided
for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the
product and to protect it from overheating, and these
openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings
should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed,
sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not
be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack
unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s
instructions have been adhered to.
11 Power Sources – This product should be operated only from
the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If
you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home,
consult your product dealer or local power company. For
products intended to operate from battery power, or other
sources, refer to the operating instructions.
12 Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped
with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having
one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the
power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you
are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try
reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact
your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not
defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug.
13 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be
routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched
by items placed upon or against them, paying particular
attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the
point where they exit from the product.
14 Lightning – For added protection for this product during a
lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for
long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and
disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent
damage to the product due to lightning and power-line
surges.
15 Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be
located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other
electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such
power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna
system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching
such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be
fatal.
16 Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension
cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result
in a risk of fire or electric shock.
17 Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind
into this product through openings as they may touch
dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result
in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on
the product.
18 Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself
as opening or removing covers may expose you to
dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
19 Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the
wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel
under the following conditions:
a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,
b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the
product,
c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water,
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
CAUTION
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE
COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
Caution-ii
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING
MAST
GROUND
CLAMP
ANTENNA
LEAD IN
WIRE
ANTENNA
DISCHARGE UNIT
(NEC SECTION 810–20)
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
(NEC SECTION 810–21)
GROUND CLAMPS
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING
ELECTRODE SYSTEM
(NEC ART 250. PART H)
ELECTRIC
SERVICE
EQUIPMENT
NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
d) If the product does not operate normally by following
the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls
that are covered by the operating instructions as an
improper adjustment of other controls may result in
damage and will often require extensive work by a
qualified technician to restore the product to its normal
operation,
e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any
way, and
f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in
performance - this indicates a need for service.
20 Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required,
be sure the service technician has used replacement parts
specified by the manufacturer or have the same
characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized
substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other
hazards.
21 Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to
this product, ask the service technician to perform safety
checks to determine that the product is in proper operating
condition.
22 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted
to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the
manufacturer.
23 Heat – The product should be situated away from heat
sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other
products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or
cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna
or cable system is grounded so as to provide some
protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.
Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70,
provides information with regard to proper grounding of the
mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire
to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors,
location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding
electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode.
Note to CATV system installer:
This reminder is provided to call the CATV system
installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that
provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in
particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be
connected to the grounding system of the building, as
close to the point of cable entry as practical.
FCC INFORMATION (for US customers)
1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS
UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the
instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC
requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by
Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to
use the product.
2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to
accessories and/or another product use only high quality
shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST
be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to
follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to
use this product in the USA.
3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply
with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15
for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these
requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that
your use of this product in a residential environment will
not result in harmful interference with other electronic
devices.
This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if
not installed and used according to the instructions found
in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the
operation of other electronic devices.
Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that
interference will not occur in all installations. If this
product is found to be the source of interference, which
can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”,
please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the
following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being
affected by the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit
breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient
the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead,
change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory
results, please contact the local retailer authorized to
distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the
appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics
Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA
90620.
The above statements apply ONLY to those products
distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its
subsidiaries.
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
Caution-iii
1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual
carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.
2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean
place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration,
dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least
30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on
the back of this unit.
3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors,
or transformers to avoid humming sounds.
4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from
cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with
high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent
condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical
shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign objects may fall onto
this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or
splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:
– Other components, as they may cause damage and/or
discoloration on the surface of this unit.
– Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire,
damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
– Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid
may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to
this unit.
6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,
etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature
inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,
and/or personal injury.
7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections
are complete.
8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat,
possibly causing damage.
9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.
10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet,
grasp the plug; do not pull the cable.
11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might
damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.
12
Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit
with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause
fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will
not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of
this unit with a voltage other than specified.
13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and
outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit
during a lightning storm.
14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified
YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The
cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.
15
When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e.
vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet.
16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power
plug can be reached easily.
17 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on
common operating errors before concluding that this unit is
faulty.
18 Before moving this unit, press MASTER ON/OFF to release it
outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit, the main
room, Zone 2 and Zone 3 and then disconnect the AC power
plug from the AC wall outlet.
19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only)
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit
must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging
into the AC wall outlet. Voltages are as follows:
................................. 110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
Responsible Party: Yamaha Electronics Corporation, U.S.A.
Address: 6660 Orangethorpe Avenue
Buena Park, CA 90620
Telephone: 714-522-9105
Fax: 714-670-0108
Type of Equipment: AV Receiver
Model Name: RX-V2700
• This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
• Operation is subject to the following conditions:
– This device may not cause harmful interference.
– This device must accept any interference received including
interference that may cause undesired operation.
See the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section at the end of this
manual if interference to radio reception is suspected.
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN
OR MOISTURE.
As long as this unit is connected to the AC wall outlet,
it is not disconnected from the AC power source even
if you turn off this unit by MASTER ON/OFF. In this
state, this unit is designed to consume a very small
quantity of power.
FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS
To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to
wide slot and fully insert.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian
ICES-003.
POUR LES CONSOMMATEURS CANADIENS
Pour éviter les chocs électriques, introduire la lame la
plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de
la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à
la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
IMPORTANT
Please record the serial number of this unit in the space
below.
MODEL:
Serial No.:
The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.
Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future
reference.
COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT (DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE)
1 En
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks
of Dolby Laboratories.
Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
“DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “NEO:6”, and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks
of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996, 2003 Digital
Theater Systems, Inc. All right reserved.
“iPod” is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the
U.S. and other countries.
MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from
Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson.
This receiver supports network connections.
“HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia
Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA
CORPORATION.
The XM name and related logos are registered trademarks of XM
Satellite Radio Inc.
Neural Surround
™
name and related logos are trademarks owned
by Neural Audio Corporation.
Windows XP, Windows Media Audio, Windows Media Connect
are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
corporation in the United States and/or countries.
Note on Source Code Distribution
This product includes software code subject to the GNU General
Public License (GPL) or the GNU Lesser General Public License
(LGPL). The copy, distribution, or change of this software code is
licensed under the terms of the GPL or the LGPL. The source
code is available at the following website:
http://www.global.yamaha.com/download/
The source code is also available on a physical media (such as a
CD-ROM) at actual cost.
Contact: AV products division, YAMAHA CORPORATION,
10-1 Nakazawa-cho, Hamamatsu 430-8650, Japan
In principle, the source code is offered for 3 years from the day of
purchase.
We Want You Listening For A Lifetime
YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries
Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want
you to get the most out of your equipment by
playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound
come through loud and clear without annoying
blaring or distortion – and, most importantly,
without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage
from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late,
YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer
Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure
from excessive volume levels.
TRADEMARK NOTICES
iPod
®
2 En
FEATURES .............................................................4
GETTING STARTED............................................5
Supplied accessories.................................................. 5
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS..........................6
Front panel................................................................. 6
Remote control .......................................................... 8
Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control ................................. 10
Preparing the remote control ................................... 11
Front panel display .................................................. 12
Rear panel ................................................................ 14
CONNECTIONS...................................................15
Placing speakers ...................................................... 15
Connecting speakers................................................ 16
Using bi-amplification connections......................... 19
Information on jacks and cable plugs...................... 20
Information on HDMI ............................................. 21
Audio and video signal flow.................................... 22
Connecting a TV monitor or projector .................... 23
Connecting other components ................................. 24
Connecting a multi-format player
or an external decoder ......................................... 28
Connecting a YAMAHA iPod universal dock ........ 29
Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel.... 29
Connecting the network........................................... 30
Connecting the FM and AM antennas..................... 31
Connecting the power cable .................................... 32
Setting the speaker impedance ................................ 33
Turning on and off the power.................................. 34
AUTO SETUP .......................................................35
Using Auto Setup..................................................... 35
PLAYBACK ..........................................................40
Basic procedure ....................................................... 40
Selecting audio input jacks (AUDIO SELECT)...... 42
Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component......... 43
Using your headphones ........................................... 43
Muting the audio output .......................................... 43
Operating the amplifier functions of this unit
by using the graphical user interface (GUI)
screen................................................................... 44
Playing video sources
in the background of an audio source.................. 45
Using the sleep timer ............................................... 45
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS.............................46
Selecting sound field programs ............................... 46
Sound field program descriptions............................ 47
Enjoying unprocessed input sources........................ 51
USING AUDIO FEATURES............................... 52
Enjoying pure hi-fi sound ........................................ 52
Adjusting the tonal quality ...................................... 52
Adjusting the speaker level...................................... 53
Enjoying multi-channel sources
in 2-channel stereo .............................................. 53
Selecting the Compressed Music
Enhancer mode .................................................... 54
Selecting the night listening mode........................... 55
FM/AM TUNING ................................................. 56
FM/AM controls and functions ............................... 56
Automatic tuning ..................................................... 57
Manual tuning.......................................................... 58
Automatic preset tuning........................................... 59
Manual preset tuning ............................................... 60
Selecting preset stations........................................... 61
Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 62
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING .................. 63
Connecting the XM Passport System ...................... 63
XM Satellite Radio controls and functions.............. 64
Activating XM Satellite Radio ................................ 65
Basic XM Satellite Radio operations....................... 67
Setting the XM Satellite Radio preset channels ...... 72
Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information...... 73
USING iPod........................................................... 75
Controlling iPod ...................................................... 75
USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES.............. 77
Navigating the network and USB menus ................ 77
Using a PC server or YAMAHA MCX-2000 ......... 79
Using the Internet Radio.......................................... 80
Using a USB memory device
or a USB portable audio player ........................... 81
Using shortcut buttons............................................. 81
RECORDING ....................................................... 83
ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS .... 84
Selecting decoders ................................................... 84
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI)
SCREEN............................................................ 87
Stereo/Surround (Stereo/Surround menu) ............... 88
Input Select.............................................................. 94
Manual Setup (Sound)............................................. 97
Manual Setup (Video) ........................................... 101
Manual Setup (Basic) ............................................ 104
Manual Setup (NET/USB)..................................... 109
Manual Setup (Option) .......................................... 111
System Memory..................................................... 115
Signal Info. (Input signal information).................. 116
Language ............................................................... 117
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERATION
ADVANCED OPERATION
CONTENTS
3 En
PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION
BASIC
OPERATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
APPENDIX
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES................. 118
Controlling this unit, a TV,
or other components .......................................... 118
Setting remote control codes ................................. 120
Programming codes from other remote controls ... 122
Changing source names in the display window..... 123
Macro programming features ................................ 124
Clearing configurations ......................................... 127
USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION .. 130
Connecting the Zone 2 and Zone 3 components ... 130
Controlling Zone 2 or Zone 3 ................................ 131
ADVANCED SETUP ......................................... 134
Using ADVANCED SETUP ................................. 134
Setting remote control ID ...................................... 137
TROUBLESHOOTING..................................... 139
RESETTING THE SYSTEM............................ 149
GLOSSARY ........................................................ 150
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM
INFORMATION ............................................ 153
PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER
INFORMATION ............................................ 154
SPECIFICATIONS ............................................ 155
(at the end of this manual)
SOUND OUTPUT
IN EACH SOUND FIELD PROGRAM ............ i
GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE.................. v
GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC
LICENSE............................................................ vi
LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODE ............. ix
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
APPENDIX
About this manual
• y indicates a tip for your operation.
• Some operations can be performed by using either the
buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote
control. In case the button names differ between the front
panel and the remote control, the button name on the
remote control is given in parentheses.
• This manual is printed prior to production. Design and
specifications are subject to change in part as a result of
improvements, etc. In case of differences between the
manual and product, the product has priority.
• This unit equips GUI display menu language switching
capability. In this manual, the illustrations of the GUI are
examples when you set the GUI language to English.
FEATURES
4 En
Built-in 7-channel power amplifier
◆ Minimum RMS output power
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω)
Front: 140 W + 140 W
Center: 140 W
Surround: 140 W + 140 W
Surround back: 140 W + 140 W
Sound field programs
◆ Proprietary YAMAHA technology for the creation of sound
fields
◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder
◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS Neo:6,
DTS 96/24 decoder
◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic IIx
decoder
◆ Neural Surround decoder (U.S.A. and Canada models only)
◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP
◆ SILENT CINEMA
Sophisticated AM/FM tuner
◆ 40-station random and direct preset tuning
◆ Automatic preset tuning
◆ Preset station shifting capability (preset editing)
XM Satellite Radio
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)
◆ XM Satellite Radio tuning capability (using the “XM Passport
System” sold separately)
◆ Neural Surround decoder to play back the surround sound
content of XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels,
resulting in a full surround sound experience
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface)
◆ HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or
high-definition video (includes 1080p video signal
transmission) as well as multi-channel digital audio based on
HDMI version 1.2a
◆ Analog video to HDMI digital video up-conversion
(composite video ↔ S-video ↔ component video → HDMI
digital video) capability for monitor out
◆ Analog video up-scaling from 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) or
480p/576p to 720p or 1080i
iPod controlling capability
◆ DOCK terminal to connect a YAMAHA iPod universal dock
(such as the YDS-10, sold separately), which supports iPod
(Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini
Network features
◆ NETWORK port to connect a PC and YAMAHA MCX-2000
or access the Internet Radio via a LAN
◆ DHCP automatic or manual network configuration
USB features
◆ USB port to connect a USB memory device or a USB portable
audio player
Other features
◆ YPAO (YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) for
automatic speaker setup
◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter
◆ GUI (graphical user interfece) menus that allows you to
optimize this unit to suit your individual audio/video system
◆ GUI display menu language switching capability
(English, Japanese, French, German, Spanish and Russian)
◆ 6 or 8-channel additional input jacks for discrete multi-
channel input
◆ Analog video interlace/progressive conversion from 480i
(NTSC)/576i (PAL) to 480p/576p
◆ S-video signal input/output capability
◆ Component video input/output capability includes (3
COMPONENT VIDEO INs and 1 MONITOR OUT)
◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks
◆ Pure Direct mode for pure hi-fi sound for all sources
◆ Cinema and music night listening modes
◆ Compressed Music Enhancer mode to improve the sound
quality of compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) to
that of a high-quality stereo
◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes, learning,
macro and buttons and display backlight capability
◆ ZONE 2/ZONE 3 custom installation facility
◆ Zone switching capability between the main zone and
ZONE 2/ZONE 3 using ZONE CONTROLS
◆ Zone 2 OSD (on-screen display) capability
◆ Sleep timer
FEATURES
GETTING STARTED
5 En
INTRODUCTION
Check that you received all of the following parts.
GETTING STARTED
Supplied accessories
ON
OFF
CLEAR
LEARN
RENAME
MACRO
REC
NET RADIO
USB
PC/MCX
VOLUME
CH
TV VOL
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
A/B/C/D/E
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
B
AND
LEVEL
ENHANCER
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
NIGHT
MEMORY
1
2
TV
SOURCE
AMP
SELECT
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
AUDIO SEL
POWER
POWER
POWER
STANDBY
NET/USB
FREQ/TEXT
EON
MODE PTY SEEK
START
–
2
+
+
––
+
ENTER
DISPLAY
AUDI O
MENU
TITLE
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
4
3
ENT
+
10
0
9
5
1
AV
TV
7
6
8
RETURN
V
-
AUX/DOCK
Remote control
Batteries (6)
(AAA, LR03)
AM loop antenna
Optimizer microphoneSpeaker terminal wrench Power cable
Indoor FM antenna
(U.S.A., Canada, China, Asia, General,
and Korea models)
Indoor FM antenna
(Europe, U.K. and Australia models)
TUNER
CD
CD-R
DTV
NET/USB
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
VCR 1
DVD
V-AUX/DOCK
DVR/VCR 2
POWER
STANDBY
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET
VOLUME
ZONE 3
ZONE 2
ID2
ID1
MUTE
Zone 2/Zone 3
remote control
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
6 En
This section describes only the amplifier controls and functions of this unit. See the following pages for details about
other control and functions.
• AM/FM tuning .......................................... see page 56
• XM satellite radio tuning .......................... see page 64
1 MASTER ON/OFF
Turns this unit on or off (see page 34).
2 MAIN ZONE ON/OFF
Turns on the main zone or sets it to the standby mode
(see page 34).
• In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of
power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote
control.
• When you turn on this unit, there will be a 4 to 5-second delay
before this unit can reproduce sound.
• This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF is
pressed inward to the ON position.
3 INPUT selector
Selects the desired input source (see page 40).
4 AUDIO SELECT
Toggles the priority for the type of audio input jack
between “AUTO”, “HDMI”, “COAX/OPT” and
“ANALOG” when one component is connected to two or
more input jacks (see page 42).
5 TONE CONTROL
Adjusts the bass/treble balance of the front left, front right
and center channels in conjunction with the PROGRAM
selector (see page 52).
6 REC OUT/ZONE2
Selects the input source you want to direct to the audio/
video recorder and Zone 2 outputs independently of the
input source you are listening to or watching in the main
zone (see page 83).
7 STRAIGHT
Turns the sound field programs off or on. When the
“STRAIGHT” mode is selected, 2-channel or multi-
channel input signals are output directly from their
respective speakers without effect processing (see
page 51).
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
Front panel
ON/OFF
MASTER
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
ENHANCER
NIGHT
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROLS
MODE
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
MULTI ZONE
FM/AM
PRESET/
TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MIC
OPTIMIZER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
CONTROL
SELECT
AUDIO
TONE
REC OUT/
ZONE2
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
YPAO
ZONE 3
R
L
OPTICAL
USB
ZONE 2
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
32 BCA09
GHIFED
876541
(U.S.A. model)
Notes
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
7 En
INTRODUCTION
8 MULTI ZONE buttons
ZONE 2 ON/OFF
Turns on Zone 2 only or sets it to the standby mode
(see page 131).
ZONE 3 ON/OFF
Turns on Zone 3 only or sets it to the standby mode
(see page 131).
These buttons are operational only when MASTER ON/OFF
is pressed inward to the ON position.
ZONE CONTROLS
Switches the zone you want to control between the
main zone, Zone 2 and Zone 3 (see page 131).
y
After you press ZONE CONTROLS, the indicator for the
currently selected zone flashes in the front panel display for
approximately 5 seconds. While the indicator is flashing,
perform the desired operation.
9 Front panel display
Shows information about the operational status of this unit
(see page 12).
0 ENHANCER
Turns on or off the Compressed Music Enhancer mode
(see page 54).
A Remote control sensor
Receives signals from the remote control (see page 11).
B NIGHT
Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 55).
C PURE DIRECT
Turns on or off the Pure Direct mode (see page 52).
D PROGRAM selector
• Selects sound field programs (see page 46).
• Adjusts the bass/treble balance in conjunction with
TONE CONTROL (see page 52).
E OPTIMIZER MIC jack
Use to connect and input audio signals from the supplied
optimizer microphone in the “Auto Setup” procedure (see
page 35).
F PHONES jack
Outputs audio signals for private listening with
headphones (see page 43).
G VIDEO AUX jacks
Input audio and video signals from a portable external
source such as a game console or a video camera
(see page 29).
y
To reproduce the source signals input at these jacks, select
“V-AUX” as the input source.
The audio signals input at the DOCK terminal on the rear panel
take priority over the ones input at the VIDEO AUX jacks.
H USB port
Use to connect a USB memory device or a USB portable
audio player (see page 81).
I VOLUME
Controls the output level of all audio channels.
y
This does not affect the AUDIO OUT (REC) level.
■ Opening and closing the front panel
door
When you want to use the controls behind the front panel
door, open the door by gently pressing on the lower part of
the panel. Keep the door closed when not using these
controls.
Note
Note
To open, press gently on the lower part of the panel.
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
8 En
■ Remote control controls and functions
This section describes only the amplifier controls and functions of this unit. See the following pages for details about
other control and functions.
• AM/FM tuning .......................................... see page 56
• XM satellite radio tuning .......................... see page 64
• Controlling a TV ..................................... see page 118
• Controlling other components ................. see page 119
• Controlling option components ............... see page 120
The operation mode of the remote control buttons in the shaded
area below depends on the operation mode selector position. Set
the operation mode selector to AMP to control this unit.
1 Infrared window
Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the
component you want to operate (see page 11).
2 TRANSMIT indicator
Flashes while the remote control is sending infrared
signals.
3 Input selector buttons
Select the input source you want to control.
y
The selected input source name appears in the display window on
the remote control showing which source is currently operational.
4 Display window
Shows the name of the selected input source that you can
control.
5 LIGHT
Lights up the remote control buttons and the display
window.
6 LEVEL
Selects the speaker channel to be adjusted and sets the
output level (see page 53).
7 Cursor buttons k / n / l / h, ENTER
Move the items or cursor and adjust the parameters in the
GUI screens or front panel display.
8 Sound field program selector buttons
Select sound field programs (see page 46).
9 SUR. DECODE
Activates decoders to play back 2-channel sources in
surround (see page 84).
0 MEMORY 1/2
Recalls “MEMORY 1” or “MEMORY 2” of “System
Memory” (see page 115).
A Network and USB input selector buttons
Select the sub input source of NET/USB (see page 78).
PC/MCX
Selects a PC server or YAMAHA MCX-2000 as the
sub input source of NET/USB.
Remote control
ON
OFF
CLEAR
LEARN
RENAME
MACRO
REC
NET RADIO
USB
PC/MCX
VOLUME
CH
TV VOL
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
A/B/C/D/E
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
BAND
LEVEL
ENHANCER
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
NIGHT
MEMORY
1
2
TV
SOURCE
AMP
SELECT
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
AUDIO SEL
POWER
POWER
POWER
STANDBY
NET/USB
–
2
+
+
––
+
ENTER
DISPLAY
AUDIO
MENU
TITLE
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
4
3
ENT
+
10
0
9
5
1
AV
TV
7
6
8
RETURN
V
-
AUX/DOCK
FREQ/TEXT
EON
MODE PTY SEEK
START
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
B
C
A
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
U
t
S
R
(U.S.A. model)
Note
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
9 En
INTRODUCTION
NET RADIO
Selects the Internet radio as the sub input source of
NET/USB.
USB
Selects a USB memory device or a USB portable
audio player as the sub input source of NET/USB.
• Press NET/USB to select “NET/USB” as the input source
before you press any of the network and USB input selector
buttons stated above to select the corresponding sub input
source of NET/USB.
• When you press any of the network and USB input selector
buttons, the contents previously played for the corresponding
sub input source of NET/USB is automatically played.
B MACRO ON/OFF
Turns on or off the macro function (see page 124).
C MACRO
Programs a series of operations to be controlled with a
single button (see page 124).
D STANDBY
Sets the main zone to the standby mode (see page 34).
This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the
front panel is pressed inward to the ON position.
E POWER
Turns on the main zone (see page 34).
This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the
front panel is pressed inward to the ON position.
F AUDIO SEL
Toggles the priority for the type of audio input jack
between “AUTO”, “HDMI”, “COAX/OPT” and
“ANALOG” when one component is connected to two or
more input jacks (see page 42).
G SLEEP
Sets the sleep timer (see page 45).
H SELECT k / n
Selects another input source that you can control
independently of the input source selected with the input
selector buttons.
I Operation mode selector
Selects the operation mode of the remote control buttons
in the shaded area.
AMP
Operates the amplifier function of this unit.
SOURCE
Operates the component selected with an input
selector button (see page 119).
TV
Operates the TV assigned to either DTV or PHONO
(see page 118).
• To set the remote control codes for other components, see
page 120.
• When you set the remote control codes for both DTV and
PHONO (see page 120), priority is given to the one set for
DTV.
J VOLUME +/–
Increases or decreases the volume level.
K MUTE
Mutes the audio output. Press again to restore the audio
output to the previous volume level (see page 43).
L PURE DIRECT
Turns on or off the pure direct mode (see page 52).
M SET MENU
Activates the GUI screen (see page 44).
N STRAIGHT
Turns the sound field programs off or on. When the
“STRAIGHT” mode is selected, 2-channel or multi-
channel input signals are output directly from their
respective speakers without effect processing (see
page 51).
O EXTD SUR.
Switches between 5.1 and 6.1/7.1-channel playback of
multi-channel sources (see page 84).
P SELECT
Selects decoders for 2-channel sources (see pages 84 and
85).
Q ENHANCER
Turns on or off the Compressed Music Enhancer mode
(see page 54).
R NIGHT
Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 55).
S RENAME
Changes the name of the input source in the display
window (see page 123).
T CLEAR
Clears remote control functions acquired from the learn,
macro and/or rename features (see page 127).
U LEARN
Programs remote control codes of functions from other
remote controls (see page 122).
Notes
Note
Note
Notes
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
10 En
This section describes the function of each control on the
Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control used to control the amplifier
functions of Zone 2 or Zone 3.
See the following pages for details about other controls
and functions.
• AM/FM tuning ........................................ see page 56
• XM Satellite Radio tuning ...................... see page 64
1 Input selector buttons
Select the desired input source of Zone 2 or Zone 3.
2 ID1/ID2 switch
Switches the remote control ID between ID1 and ID2
(see page 121).
3 POWER
Turns on Zone 2 or Zone 3.
This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the
front panel is pressed inward to the ON position.
4 STANDBY
Sets Zone 2 or Zone 3 to the standby mode.
This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the
front panel is pressed inward to the ON position.
5 VOLUME +/–
Increases or decreases the volume level of Zone 2 or
Zone 3.
6 MUTE
Mutes the sound of Zone 2 or Zone 3. Press again to
restore the audio output to the previous volume level.
7 ZONE 2/ZONE 3 switch
Switches between the operation mode of Zone 2 and that
of Zone 3.
Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control
TUNER
CD
CD-R
DTV
NET/USB
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
VCR 1
DVD
V-AUX/DOCK
DVR/VCR 2
POWER
STANDBY
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET
VOLUME
ZONE 3
ZONE 2
ID2
ID1
MUTE
2
7
6
5
4
3
1
(U.S.A. model)
Note
Note
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
11 En
INTRODUCTION
■ Installing batteries in the remote control
1 Press the part and slide the battery
compartment cover off.
2 Insert the four supplied batteries
(AAA, LR03) according to the polarity
markings (+ and –) on the inside of the
battery compartment.
3 Slide the cover back until it snaps into place.
■ Installing batteries in the Zone 2/Zone 3
remote control
1 Take off the battery compartment cover.
2 Insert the two supplied batteries (AAA, LR03)
according to the polarity markings
(+ and –) on the inside of the battery
compartment.
3 Snap the battery compartment cover back
into place.
• Change all of the batteries if you notice the following
conditions:
– the operation range of the remote control decreases.
– the TRANSMIT indicator does not flash or its light becomes
dim.
• Do not use old batteries together with new ones.
• Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and
manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as
these different types of batteries may have the same shape and
color.
• We strongly recommend using alkaline batteries.
• If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid
touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with
clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before
installing new batteries.
• Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose
of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations.
• If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2
minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control,
the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory
is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the remote control code
and program any acquired functions that may have been
cleared.
■ Using the remote control
The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray.
Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote
control sensor on this unit during operation.
• Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control.
• Do not drop the remote control.
• Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types
of conditions:
– places of high humidity, such as near a bath
– places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove
– places of extremely low temperatures
– dusty places
Preparing the remote control
1
3
2
1
3
2
Notes
Notes
30 30
Approximately 6 m (20 ft)
Remote control sensor
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
12 En
The XM indicator is only applicable to the U.S.A. and Canada models and the cursor on the left of the XM indicator lights up only when
“XM” is selected as the input source. For details, see “Basic XM Satellite Radio operations” on page 67.
1 HDMI indicator
Lights up when the signal of the selected input source is
input at HDMI IN 1, HDMI IN 2 or HDMI IN 3 jacks
(see page 21).
2 RECOUT indicator
Lights up when this unit is in the recording input source
selecting mode (see page 83).
3 DOCK indicator
Lights up when you station your iPod in a YAMAHA iPod
universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately)
connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit
(see page 29).
4 Battery charge indicator
Lights up when this unit charges the battery of the
stationed iPod in the standby mode of this unit (see
page 75).
5 Input source indicators
The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently
selected input source.
6 VOLUME level indicator
Indicates the current volume level.
7 MUTE indicator
Flashes while the MUTE function is on (see page 43).
8 Multi-information display
Shows the name of the current sound field program and
other information when adjusting or changing settings.
9 96/24 indicator
Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit.
0 Input channel and speaker indicators
Input channel indicators
Indicate the channel components of the current digital
input signal.
Presence and surround back speaker
indicators
Light up according to the number of presence and
surround back speakers set for “Presence” (see
page 106) and “Surround Back” (see page 106) in
“Speaker Set” when “Test Tone” in “Basic” is set to
“ON” (see page 105).
y
You can make settings for the presence and surround back
speakers automatically by running “Auto Setup” (see page 35) or
manually by adjusting settings for “Presence” (see page 106) and
“Surround Back” (see page 106) in “Speaker Set”.
Front panel display
Note
CD-R
CD
PHONO
MULTI CH
TUNER
XM
MD/TAPE
DVD
DTV
MUTE
VOLUME
dB
LFE
LL C R
SL SB SR
RECOUT
HiFi DSP
DIGITAL
EX
PL x
MP3
WMA
DSD
neural
PCM
VIRTUAL
YPAO
ENHANCER
MATRIX
DISCRETE
CINEMA
SILENT
24
96
96/24
TUNED
STEREO
AUTO
MEMORY
PS
ZONE2
ZONE3
SLEEP
PTY HOLD
PTY
RT
CT
EON
NIGHT
NET/USB
DOCK
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DVR/VCR 2
V-AUX
DSD
neural
PCM
TUNED
STEREO
AUTO
MEMORY
PS
ZONE2
ZONE3
SLEEP
PTY HOLD
PTY
RT
CT
EON
NIGHT
HiFi DSP
DIGITAL
EX
PL x
VIRTUAL
YPAO
ENHANCER
MATRIX
DISCRETE
CINEMA
SILENT
24
96
MP3
WMA
K
J
I
H
G
D
C
B
A
P
O
N
M
L
0
98
765431
2
F
E
A........ U.S.A. and Canada models only
P........ U.K. and Europe models only
Presence speaker indicators
Input channel indicators
Surround back speaker indicators
L CR
SL SB SR
LFE
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
13 En
INTRODUCTION
A neural indicator
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)
Lights up when the Neural Surround decoder is activated
(see page 85).
B DSP indicators
The respective indicator lights up when any of the DSP
sound field programs are selected.
CINEMA DSP indicator
Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound
field program (see page 47).
HiFi DSP indicator
Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field
program (see page 47).
C VIRTUAL indicator
Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see
page 51).
D YPAO indicator
Lights up when you run “Auto Setup” and when the
speaker settings set in “Auto Setup” are used without any
modifications (see page 35).
E ENHANCER indicator
Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is
turned on (see page 54).
F Signal format indicators
The respective indicator lights up when this unit is
reproducing DSD (Direct Stream Digital), PCM (Pulse
Code Modulation), WMA (Windows Media Audio), WAV
(RIFF Wave Form Audio) or MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer-
3) audio signals.
G Dolby decoder indicators
The respective indicator lights up when any of the Dolby
decoders of this unit function.
H Sound field indicators
Light up to indicate the active DSP sound fields.
I Headphones indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected (see page 43).
J SILENT CINEMA indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound
field program is selected (see page 51).
K DTS decoder indicators
The respective indicator lights up when any of the DTS
decoders of this unit function.
L Tuner indicators
Lights up when this unit is in the FM, AM or XM Satellite
Radio tuning mode.
TUNED indicator
Lights up when this unit is tuned into a station
(see page 56).
STEREO indicator
Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal
for an FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator
is lit (see page 56).
AUTO indicator
Lights up when this unit is in the automatic tuning
mode (see page 56).
MEMORY indicator
Flashes to show that a station can be stored
(see page 59).
M ZONE2/ZONE3 indicators
Lights up when Zone 2 or Zone 3 is turned on
(see page 131).
N NIGHT indicator
Lights up when you select a night listening mode
(see page 55).
O SLEEP indicator
Lights up while the sleep timer is on (see page 45).
P Radio Data System indicators
(U.K. and Europe models only)
PS, PTY, RT and CT
Light up according to the selected Radio Data System
display mode.
EON
Lights up when the EON data service is being
received.
PTY HOLD
Lights up while searching for the Radio Data System
stations in the PTY SEEK mode.
Presence DSP sound field
Listening position
Surround left
DSP sound field
Surround right
DSP sound field
Surround back DSP sound field
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
14 En
1 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
See pages 23 and 24 for connection information.
20 Audio component jacks
See page 26 for connection information.
3 Video component jacks
See pages 23 and 24 for connection information.
4 ANTENNA terminals
See page 31 for connection information.
5 WRENCH HOLDER
Use to hook the supplied speaker terminal wrench when
not in use (see page 18).
6 VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(Asia and General models only)
See page 32 for details.
7 AC IN/OUTLET(S)
See page 32 for connection information.
8 HDMI connectors
See page 21 for connection information.
9 REMOTE jacks
See page 130 for details.
A DOCK terminal
See page 29 for connection information.
B NETWORK port
Use to connect a network cable for network connections.
See page 30 for connection information.
C XM jack (U.S.A. and Canada models only)
See page 63 for connection information.
D DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT jacks
See page 24 for connection information.
E CONTROL OUT jack
This is a control expansion terminal for custom
installation.
F RS-232C terminal
This is a control expansion terminal for factory use only.
Consult your dealer for details.
G Speaker terminals
See page 16 for connection information.
H MULTI CH INPUT jacks
See page 28 for connection information.
I PRE OUT jacks
See page 27 for connection information.
J ZONE OUT jacks
See page 130 for connection information.
Rear panel
AC IN
AC OUTLETS
HOLDER
WRENCH
SPEAKERS
CENTER
BI-AMP
PRESENCE
SURROUND BACK/
SP1
FRONT
SURROUND
SINGLE
ANTENNA
FM
GND
AM
VIDEO
S VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
REMOTE
PHONO
GND
CD
IN(PLAY)
OUT(REC)
CD-R
HDMI
AUDIO
DOCK
DIGITAL INPUT
MULTI CH INPUT
PRE OUT
CONTROL OUT
RS-232C
DIGITAL OUTPUT
ZONE OUT
SUB
WOOFER
SUB
WOOFER
CENTER
CENTER
FRONT(6CH)
FRONT
SURROUND
SURROUND
PRESENCE
SUR.BACK/
SINGLE(SB)
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
ZONE
VIDEO
CD
DV
D
DVR/
VCR2
COAXIAL
1
2
CD
DVD
DTV
CBL/
SAT
MD/
TAP E
CD-R
OPTICAL
987
65
4
321
SB(8CH)
DTV
TAP E
MD/
(REC)
(PLAY)
IN
OUT
DVD
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
OUT
OUT
IN
IN
DVD
DTV
CBL/SAT
MONITOR OUT
Y
Y
P
R
PR
PB
P
B
IN
OUT
1
2
IN
OUT
IN1
CBL/
SAT
IN2
IN3
OUT
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
A B
C
R
R
R
R
L
L
L
R
L
R
L
L
SP2
NETWORK
DTV
DVD
MULTI CH INPUT
PRE OUT
ZONE OUT
SUB
WOOFER
SUB
WOOFER
CENTER
CENTER
FRONT(6CH)
FRONT
SURROUND
SURROUND
PRESENCE
SUR.BACK/
SINGLE(SB)
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
ZONE
VIDEO
SB(8CH)
7654321
IGH
FCDEB
A08 9
(U.S.A. model)
CONNECTIONS
15 En
PREPARATIONPREPARATION
The speaker layout below shows the speaker setting we
recommend. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP and
multi-channel audio sources.
Front left and right speakers (FL and FR)
The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus
effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance from
the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker
from each side of the video monitor should be the same.
Center speaker (C)
The center speaker is for the center channel sounds
(dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical
to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results,
however, are obtained with the full system. Place the
center speaker centrally between the front speakers and as
close to the monitor as possible, such as directly over or
under it.
Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR)
The surround speakers are used for effect and surround
sounds. Place these speakers behind your listening
position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m (6 ft) above
the floor.
Surround back left and right speakers
(SBL and SBR)
The surround back speakers supplement the surround
speakers and provide more realistic front-to-back
transitions. Place these speakers directly behind the
listening position and at the same height as the surround
speakers. They should be positioned at least 30 cm (12 in)
apart. Ideally, they should be positioned at the same width
as that of the front speakers.
Presence left and right speakers (PL and PR)
The presence speakers supplement the sound from the front
speakers with extra ambient effects produced by CINEMA
DSP (see page 153). These effects include sounds that
filmmakers intend to locate a little farther back behind the
screen in order to create more theater-like ambience. Place
these speakers at the front of the room about 0.5 to 1 m (1
to 3 ft) outside the front speakers, facing slightly inward,
and about 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor.
Subwoofer (SW)
The use of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as
the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer
System, is effective not only for reinforcing bass
frequencies from any or all channels, but also for high
fidelity sound reproduction of the LFE (low-frequency
effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS
sources. The position of the subwoofer is not so critical,
because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it
is better to place the subwoofer near the front speakers.
Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce
wall reflections.
CONNECTIONS
Placing speakers
SW
FR
PR
PL
FL
SBR
SBL
SL
SR
C
60˚
30˚
PL
PR
SBR
SBL
FL
FR
C
SL
SR
SR
80˚
SL
FR
PRPL
C
FL
1.8 m (6 ft)
30 cm (12 in) or more
1.8 m (6 ft)
0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft) 0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft)
16 En
CONNECTIONS
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty,
no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be
unnatural and lack bass.
• Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this unit is turned off (see page 34).
• Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do not let them touch any metal part of this
unit. This could damage this unit and/or speakers.
• Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speaker still creates interference with the
monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor.
• If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set “SPEAKER IMP.” to “6ΩMIN” before using this unit
(see page 33). 4 ohm speakers can be also used as the front speakers (see page 135).
• A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a
stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the
plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals.
• The low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “Small” or to “None” in “Speaker Set” (see pages 105 and 106) are directed to the
speakers selected in “Bass Out” (see page 107).
• You can connect both surround back and presence speakers to this unit, however they do not output sound simultaneously. You can set
to prioritize either set of speakers using the “PR/SB Priority” parameter in “Audio Option” (see page 101).
• You can use the PRESENCE terminals to connect the Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers as well as the presence speakers (see page 130).
Connecting speakers
Notes
CAUTION
SPEAKERS
CENTER
BI-AMP
PRESENCE
SURROUND BACK/
SP1
FRONT
SURROUND
SINGLE
PRE OUT
SUB
WOOFER
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
R
R
R
R
L
L
L
L
SP2
Front speakers
Surround speakers
(U.S.A. model)
Presence speakers
Subwoofer
Right
Left
Left
Center speaker
Surround back speakers
Right
Left
Left
Right
Right
Zone 2 or Zone 3
speakers
(see page 130)
17 En
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
FRONT terminals
Connect front left and right speakers to these terminals.
CENTER terminals
Connect a center speaker to these terminals.
SURROUND terminals
Connect surround left and right speakers to these
terminals.
SURROUND BACK terminals
Connect surround back left and right speakers to these
terminals.
When you use a surround back speaker, connect the speaker to the
left SURROUND BACK terminal (SINGLE).
PRESENCE terminals
Connect presence left and right speakers to these
terminals.
SUBWOOFER jack
Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier (such as the
YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System)
to this jack.
■ Connecting the speaker cable
1 Remove approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) of
insulation from the end of each speaker
cable and then twist the exposed wires of the
cable together to prevent short circuits.
2 Loosen the knob using the supplied speaker
terminal wrench.
3 Insert one bare wire into the hole on the side
of each terminal.
4 Tighten the knob to secure the wire using the
supplied speaker terminal wrench.
Note
10 mm (0.4 in)
Speaker terminal wrench
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
18 En
CONNECTIONS
5 Hook the speaker terminal wrench onto the
WRENCH HOLDER on the rear panel of this
unit when not in use.
■ Connecting to the SP2 speaker
terminals
Connect Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers to these terminals (see
page 130).
1 Open the tab.
2 Insert one bare wire into the hole on the
terminal.
3 Close the tab to secure the wire.
■ Connecting the banana plug
(except U.K., Europe, Asia and Korea
models)
The banana plug is a single-pole electrical connector
widely used to terminate speaker cables.
1 Tighten the knob using the supplied speaker
terminal wrench.
2 Insert the banana plug connector into the
end of the corresponding terminal.
y
You can also use the banana plug with the SP2 speaker terminals.
Open the tab and then insert one banana plug into the hole on the
terminal. Do not close the tab after connecting the banana plug.
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
Banana plug
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
Speaker terminal wrench
19 En
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
Some of the speakers have speaker wire connections that
allow bi-amplification to enhance the performance of the
speaker system. This unit allows you to make bi-
amplification connection to one speaker system. Check if
your speakers support bi-amplification. As these speakers
are shipped to you, you will note shorting bars or bridges,
one connecting the two red input terminals and the other
connecting the two black input terminals. Remove these
shorting bars or bridges only if you plan to bi-amplify
your speakers.
■ Conventional connection
If you want to connect your speakers as traditional
loudspeakers using the conventional connection method,
connect your speakers using the regular left and right
speaker wire connections and ignore the second set of
terminals.
■ Bi-amplification connection
To make the bi-amplification connections, use the FRONT
and SURROUND BACK terminals as shown below. To
activate the bi-amplification connections, set “BI-AMP”
to “ON” in “ADVANCED SETUP” (see page 136).
Remove the shorting bars or bridges to separate the LPF (low
pass filter) and HPF (high pass filter) crossovers.
Using bi-amplification connections
FRONT
+ +
R
L
This unit
Shorting bars
or bridges
Shorting bars
or bridges
Front speakers
Right Left
Note
BI-AMP
SURROUND BACK/
FRONT
SINGLE
+
+
+
R
L
+
This unit
Front speakers
Left
Right
20 En
CONNECTIONS
■ Audio jacks
This unit has three types of audio jacks. Connection
depends on the availability of audio jacks on your other
components.
AUDIO jacks
For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left
and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the
right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks.
DIGITAL COAXIAL jacks
For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital
audio cables.
DIGITAL OPTICAL jacks
For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital
audio cables.
You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and
DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the
COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the signals
input at the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are
compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital signals.
■ Video jacks
This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection
depends on the availability of input jacks on your video
monitor.
VIDEO jacks
For conventional composite video signals transmitted via
composite video cables.
S VIDEO jacks
For S-video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and
chrominance (C) video signals transmitted on separate
wires of S-video cables.
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
For component video signals, separated into the
luminance (Y) and chrominance (P
B, PR) video signals
transmitted on separate wires of component video cables.
y
This unit equips the video conversion function. See pages 22 and
102 for details.
Information on jacks and cable plugs
VIDEO S VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
Y R PB P
PB
Y
P
R
S
V
COAXIAL
DIGITAL
AUDIO
OPTICAL
DIGITAL
R
L
C
O
R
L
Left and right
analog audio
cable plugs
Optical
digital
audio cable
plug
Coaxial
digital audio
cable plug
Composite
video cable
plug
S-video
cable plug
Component
video cable
plugs
Audio jacks and cable plugs Video jacks and cable plugs
(Red)(White) (Orange) (Yellow) (Green) (Blue) (Red)
Note
21 En
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
This unit has the HDMI IN 1, HDMI IN 2, HDMI IN 3 and HDMI OUT jacks for digital audio and video signal input/
output. Connect the HDMI IN 1, HDMI IN 2 or HDMI IN 3 jack of this unit to the HDMI output jack of other HDMI
components (such as a DVD player). Connect the HDMI OUT jack of this unit to the HDMI IN jack of other HDMI
components (such as a TV and a projector).
The video or audio signals input at the HDMI IN 1, HDMI IN 2 or HDMI IN 3 jack of the selected input source are
output at the HDMI OUT jack of this unit.
You can check the potential problem about the HDMI connection (see page 117).
■ HDMI compatibility with this unit
• When CPPM copy-protected DVD audio is played back, video
and audio signals may not be output depending on the type of
the DVD player.
• This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or
DVI components.
■ HDMI jack and cable plug
y
• We recommend using an HDMI cable shorter than 5 meters (16
feet) with the HDMI logo printed on it.
• Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack
↔ DVI-D jack) to connect
this unit to other DVI components.
• Do not disconnect or connect the cable or turn off the power of
the HDMI components connected to the HDMI OUT jack of
this unit while data is being transferred. Doing so may disrupt
playback or cause noise.
• Audio signals input at input jacks other than the HDMI IN 1,
HDMI IN 2 or HDMI IN 3 of this unit cannot be digitally
output at the HDMI OUT jack.
• If you turn off the power of the video monitor connected to the
HDMI OUT jack via a DVI connection, this unit may fail to
establish the connection to the component.
• The analog video signals input at the composite video, S-video
and component video jacks can be digitally up-converted to be
output at the HDMI OUT jack. Set “Conversion” to “On” in
“Video” (see page 102) to activate this feature.
Information on HDMI
Note
Audio signal
types
Audio signal
formats
Compatible
HDMI
components
2ch Linear
PCM
2ch, 32-192 kHz,
16/20/24 bit
CD, DVD-Video,
DVD-Audio, etc.
Multi-ch
Linear PCM
8ch, 32-192 kHz,
16/20/24 bit
DVD-Audio, etc.
DSD 2/5.1ch,
2.8224 MHz, 1 bit
SACD, etc.
Bitstream Dolby Digital,
DTS
DVD-Video, etc.
This unit’s HDMI interface is based on the following
standards:
• HDMI Version 1.2a (High-Definition Multimedia
Interface Specification Version 1.2a) licensed by
HDMI Licensing, LLC.
• HDCP Revision 1.1 (High-bandwidth Digital
Content Protection System Revision 1.1) licensed
by Digital Content Protection, LLC.
Notes
Notes
HDMI
HDMI cable plug
22 En
CONNECTIONS
■ Audio signal flow
• 2-channel as well as multi-channel PCM, Dolby Digital and
DTS signals input at the HDMI IN 1, HDMI IN 2 or HDMI IN
3 jack can be output at the HDMI OUT jack only when
“Support Audio” is set to “Other” (see page 115).
• Audio signals input at the HDMI IN jacks are not output at the
analog AUDIO OUT and DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks.
■ Video signal flow
• When the analog video signals are input at the COMPONENT
VIDEO, S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks, the priority order of the
input signals is as follows:
1. COMPONENT VIDEO
2. S VIDEO
3. VIDEO
• The analog video signals output at the COMPONENT VIDEO
jacks can be deinterlaced from 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) to
480p/576p. Set “Component I/P” to “On” in “Video” to activate
this feature (see page 102).
• Digital video signals input at the HDMI IN 1, HDMI IN 2 or HDMI IN
3 jack cannot be output to analog video output jacks.
• The analog component video signals with 480i (NTSC)/576i
(PAL) of resolution are converted to the s-video or composite
video signals and output at the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT and
VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks.
• Component interlace/progressive conversion (see page 102) and
HDMI up-scaling (see page 102) are available only when
“Conversion” is set to “On” (see page 102).
• Use the “HDMI Up-Scaling” parameter in “Video” to
deinterlace and convert the resolution of the analog video
signals output at the HDMI OUT jack (see page 102).
• The GUI screen signal is not output at the VCR 1 OUT and
DVR/VCR 2 OUT jacks and is not recorded.
Audio and video signal flow
Notes
DIGITAL AUDIO
(OPTICAL)
DIGITAL AUDIO
(COAXIAL)
HDMI
AUDIO
OutputInput
Analog output
Digital output
Notes
S VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
HDMI
Through
Output
HDMI interlace/progressive
up-conversion and resolution up-
scaling (see page 102)
Component interlace/progressive
up-conversion (see page 102)
Input
Video conversion (see page 102)
23 En
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
Connect your TV (or projector) to the HDMI OUT jack, the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks, the S
VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack or the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit.
Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between
components are complete.
y
You can select to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack on the
rear panel of this unit. Use the “Support Audio” parameter in “Option” to select the component to play back HDMI audio signals (see
page 115).
• Some video monitors connected to this unit via a DVI connection fail to recognize the HDMI audio/video signals being input if they
are in the standby mode. In this case, the HDMI indicator flashes irregularly.
• Set “Conversion” in “Video” to “On” (see page 102) to display the short message displays.
• Set “Wall Paper” in “Video” to “Yes” or “Gray” (see page 104) to display the parameter displays.
• The GUI screen appears with the wall paper or gray background depending on the input video signal format and the setting of the
parameters in “Wall Paper” (see page 104).
Connecting a TV monitor or projector
Notes
CAUTION
VIDEO
S VIDEO
MONITOR OUT
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
MONITOR OUT
Y
PR
PB
OUT
PRPB
V
S
Y
TV
(or projector)
(U.S.A. model)
Video in
Component video in
S-video in
HDMI in
indicates recommended connections
indicates alternative connections
24 En
CONNECTIONS
Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between
components are complete.
• When “Conversion” is set to “Off” (see page 102), be sure to make the same type of video connections as those made for your TV (see
page 23). For example, if you connected your TV to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit, connect your other components to
the VIDEO jacks.
• When “Conversion” is set to “On” (see page 102), the converted video signals are output only at the MONITOR OUT jacks. When
recording a source, you must make the same type of video connections between each component.
• To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT or DIGITAL
OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for “Option”, “Optical Output”, or “Coaxial Input” in “I/O Assignment” (see
page 96).
• If you connect your DVD player to both the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) and the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jacks, priority is
given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack.
• The short message display does not appear when the component video signals with 720p, 1080i or 1080p resolutions are input.
• The short message display does not appear when the component video signals with 480p/576p resolutions are input and output at the
VIDEO or S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack.
■ Connecting a DVD player
Connecting other components
Notes
CAUTION
VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
HDMI
DIGITAL INPUT
DVD
COAXIAL
DVD
OPTICAL
5
2
DVD
DVD
Y
P
R
P
B
IN1
A
R
L
DVD
LR
C
O
V
S
PR PB Y
(U.S.A. model)
DVD player
HDMI out
Coaxial out
Component out
S-video out Video out
Optical out
Audio out
indicates recommended connections
indicates alternative connections
25 En
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
■ Connecting a DVD recorder, PVR or VCR
*1
When you connect another VCR to this unit, connect it to the VCR 1 terminals (S VIDEO IN, VIDEO IN, AUDIO IN, S VIDEO
OUT, VIDEO OUT and AUDIO OUT jacks) same as DVR/VCR 2 terminals except the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack.
■ Connecting set-top boxes
Note
VIDEO
DIGITAL INPUT
DIGITAL OUTPUT
DVR/
VCR2
COAXIAL
CD-R
OPTICAL
93
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
OUT
OUT
IN
IN
R
L
DVR/VCR 2
O
UT
IN
R
L
R
L
V
V
S
S
C
*1
(U.S.A. model)
DVD recorder, PVR or VCR
Coaxial out
S-video out
Video out
Audio in
Video in
S-video in
Audio out
VIDEO
C
OMPONE
NT VIDEO
HDMI
DIGITAL INPUT
DTV
CBL/
SAT
OPTICAL
7
6
DTV
CBL/SAT
DTV
CBL/SAT
Y
P
R
P
B
CBL/
SAT
IN2
IN3
R
L
DTV
LR
O
O
VV
S
PR PB Y
L R
S
PR PB Y
(U.S.A. model)
HDTV decoder
Satellite receiver,
cable TV receiver
HDMI out
Component out
Video out
Audio out
S-video out
S-video out
Video out
Audio out
Optical out
Component out
Optical out
HDMI out
26 En
CONNECTIONS
■ Connecting audio components
• To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to either the DIGITAL INPUT jack or the
DIGITAL OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for “Option”, “Optical Output”, or “Coaxial Input” in “I/O Assignment”
(see page 96).
• Connect your turntable to the GND terminal of this unit to reduce noise in the signal. However, you may hear less noise without the
connection to the GND terminal for some turntables.
• The PHONO jacks are only compatible with a turntable with an MM or a high-output MC cartridge. To connect a turntable with a low-
output MC cartridge to the PHONO jacks, use an in-line boosting transformer or an MC-head amplifier.
• When you connect both the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) jack and the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack to an audio component,
the priority is given to the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack.
Notes
PHONO
GND
CD
IN(PLAY)
OUT(REC)
CD-R
AUDIO
DIGITAL INPUT
DIGITAL OUTPUT
CD
COAXIAL
CD
MD/
TA PE
CD-R
OPTICAL
98
4
1
TA PE
MD/
(REC)
(PLAY)
IN
OUT
R
L
R
L
LR LRLRLR
L
R
L
R
C
O
O
O
(U.S.A. model)
CD recorder
Turntable
CD player
MD recorder or
tape deck
Audio in
Optical inAudio out
Optical
out
Audio
in
Audio
out
Optical in
Ground
Audio out
Coaxial
out
Audio
out
27 En
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
■ Connecting an external amplifier
This unit has more than enough power for any home use.
However, if you want to add more power to the speaker
output or if you want to use another amplifier, connect an
external amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks.
• When you make connections to the PRE OUT jacks, do not
make connections to the SPEAKERS terminals.
• The signals output at the FRONT PRE OUT and CENTER PRE
OUT jacks are affected by the TONE CONTROL settings (see
page 52).
• Each PRE OUT jack outputs the same channel signals as the
corresponding SPEAKERS terminals.
• Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on
the subwoofer (see page 53).
• Some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER PRE
OUT jack depending on the settings for “Speaker Set” (see
page 105) and “Bass Out” (see page 107).
1 CENTER PRE OUT jack
Center channel output jack.
2 FRONT PRE OUT jacks
Front channel output jacks.
3 SURROUND PRE OUT jacks
Surround channel output jacks.
4 SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT
jacks
Surround back or presence channel output jacks. When
you only connect one external amplifier for the surround
back channel, connect it to the SINGLE (SB) jack.
y
• Set the “Surround Back” to “Large x2”, “Large x1”, “Small x2”
or “Small x1” and “Presence” to “None” (see page 106) to
output the surround back channel signals at SURROUND
BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks.
• Set the “Presence” to “Yes” and “Surround Back” to “None”
(see page 106) to output the presence channel signals at
SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks.
5 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack
Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier.
Notes
PRE OUT
SUB
WOOFER
CENTER
FRONT
SURROUND
PRESENCE
SUR.BACK/
SINGLE(SB)
5
4321
R
L
28 En
CONNECTIONS
This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and
SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder, sound processor or
pre-amplifier.
If you set “Input Channels” to “8ch” in “MULTI CH” (see page 97), you can use the input jacks assigned as “Front
Input” in “Multi CH Assign” (see page 97) together with the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to input 8-channel signals.
Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to
match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels.
• When you select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 43), this unit automatically
turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot select sound field programs.
• This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that
you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature.
For 6-channel input For 8-channel input
*1
The analog audio input jacks assigned as “Front Input” in
“Multi CH Assign” (see page 97).
Connecting a multi-format player or an external decoder
Notes
MULTI CH INPUT
SUB
WOOFER
CENTER
FRONT(6CH)
SURROUND
SB(8CH)
R
L
LR
LR
Subwoofer
out
Multi-format player/
External decoder
Center out
Surround
out
Front out
Note
MULTI CH INPUT
SUB
WOOFER
SUB
WOOFER
CENTER
CENTER
FRONT(6CH)
SURROUND
SB(8CH)
TAPE
MD/
(REC)
(PLAY)
UT
R
L
*1
R
L
LR
LRLR
Multi-format player/
External decoder
Front out
Subwoofer
out
Center out
Surround back out
Surround out
29 En
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
This unit is equipped with the DOCK terminal on the rear
panel that allows you to connect a YAMAHA iPod
universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately)
where you can station your iPod and control playback of
your iPod using the supplied remote control. Connect a
YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold
separately) to the DOCK terminal on the rear panel of this
unit using its dedicated cable.
Do not connect this unit to the AC power supply
until all connections between components are
complete.
Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a
game console or a video camera to this unit.
Be sure to turn off the volume of this unit and
other components before making connections.
The audio signals input at the DOCK terminal on the rear panel
take priority over the ones input at the VIDEO AUX jacks.
Connecting a YAMAHA iPod
universal dock
CAUTION
DOCK
YAMAHA iPod universal dock
(such as the YDS-10,
sold separately)
Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the
front panel
Note
CAUTION
ON/OFF
MASTER
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
ENHANCER
NIGHT
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROLS
MODE
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
MULTI ZONE
FM/AM
PRESET/
TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MIC
OPTIMIZER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
CONTROL
SELECT
AUDIO
TONE
REC OUT/
ZONE2
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
YPAO
ZONE 3
R
L
OPTICAL
USB
ZONE 2
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
R
L
OPTICAL
AUDIO
S VIDEO
VIDEO
O
V
S
L
R
Game console or
video camera
(U.S.A. model)
Optical
output
Video
output
S-Video
output
Audio
output
30 En
CONNECTIONS
To connect this unit to your network, plug one end of a network cable (CAT-5 or higher straight cable) into the
NETWORK port of this unit, and plug the other end into one of the LAN ports on your router that supports the DHCP
(Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server function. The following diagram shows a connection example where this
unit is connected to one of the LAN ports on a 4-port router. To enjoy music files saved on your PC and YAMAHA
MCX-2000 or access the Internet Radio, each device must be connected properly in the network.
If the DHCP server function on your router is disabled, you need to configure the network settings manually (see page 109).
Connecting the network
Note
NETWORK
LAN
WAN
Router
PC
Modem
YAMAHA MCX-2000
Internet
YAMAHA MCX-C15
YAMAHA MCX-A10
(with optional
speakers)
Network cable
31 En
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
Both FM and AM indoor antennas are supplied with this
unit. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated
terminals. In general, these antennas should provide
sufficient signal strength.
• Be sure to set the tuner frequency step (Asia and General
models only) according to the frequency spacing in your area
(see page 136).
• The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.
• The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an
outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.
• A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception
than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality,
install an outdoor antenna. Consult the nearest authorized
YAMAHA dealer or service center about outdoor antennas.
■ Connecting the AM loop antenna
1 Set up the AM loop antenna.
2 Press and hold the tab of the AM ANT
terminal.
3 Insert one of the AM loop antenna lead wires
into the AM ANT terminal.
4 Release the tab of the AM ANT terminal.
5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 to connect the
other lead wire to the GND terminal.
y
Once you have properly connected the AM loop antenna to
this unit, orient the AM loop antenna for the best reception
when you tune into AM stations (see page 56).
Connecting the FM and AM antennas
Notes
ANTENNA
FM
GND
AM
Indoor FM
antenna
(supplied)
Ground (GND terminal)
For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the
antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth
ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth.
AM loop
antenna
(supplied)
(U.S.A. model)
Outdoor AM antenna
Use a 5 to 10 m (16.4 to 32.8
ft) vinyl-covered wire
extended outdoors from a
window.
32 En
CONNECTIONS
■ Connecting the AC power cable
Use the supplied AC cable. Do not use other AC power cables as doing so may result in fire or
electrical shock.
Plug the supplied AC power cable into the AC inlet after all other connections are complete, then plug the AC power
cable into an AC wall outlet.
■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(Asia and General models only)
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of
this unit must be set for your local voltage
BEFORE plugging the power cable into the AC
wall outlet. Improper setting of the VOLTAGE
SELECTOR may cause damage to this unit and
create a potential fire hazard.
Rotate the VOLTAGE SELECTOR clockwise or
counterclockwise to the correct position using a
straight slot screwdriver.
Voltages are as follows:
..............................110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED)
U.K. and Australia models..................................... 1 outlet
Korea model............................................................... None
Other models......................................................... 2 outlets
Use these outlet(s) to supply power to any connected
components. Connect the power cable of your other
components to these outlet(s). Power to these outlet(s) is
supplied when this unit is turned on. However, power to
these outlet(s) is cut off when this unit is turned off. For
information on the maximum power or the total power
consumption of the components that can be connected to
these outlet(s), see “SPECIFICATIONS” on page 155.
Connecting the power cable
CAUTION
AC IN
AC OUTLETS
(U.S.A. model)
To the AC wall outlet
CAUTION
230-
240V
VOLTAGE
SELECTOR
Voltage indication
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.
However, the stored data will be lost in case the power
cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet or if the
power supply is cut off for more than one week.
33 En
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, set “SPEAKER
IMP.” to “6ΩMIN” as follows BEFORE using this
unit. 4 ohm speakers can be also used as the
front speakers.
1 Make sure this unit is turned off.
See page 34 for details about turning on or off this
unit.
2 Press and hold STRAIGHT on the front panel
and then press MASTER ON/OFF inward to
the ON position to turn on this unit.
This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu
appears in the front panel display.
3 Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front
panel to select “SPEAKER IMP.”.
The following display appears in the front panel
display.
4 Press STRAIGHT on the front panel
repeatedly to select “6ΩMIN”.
The following display appears in the front panel
display.
5 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to
release it outward to the OFF position to save
the new setting and turn off this unit.
The setting you made is reflected next time you turn on this
unit.
Setting the speaker impedance
CAUTION
ON/OFF
MASTER
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
ENHANCER
NIGHT
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROLS
MODE
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
MULTI ZONE
FM/AM
PRESET/
TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MIC
OPTIMIZER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
CONTROL
SELECT
AUDIO
TONE
REC OUT/
ZONE2
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
YPAO
ZONE 3
R
L
OPTICAL
USB
ZONE 2
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
2,432,5
(U.S.A. model)
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
MASTER
While holding
down
PROGRAM
8
MIN
IMP.SPEAKER
Note
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
6
MIN
IMP.SPEAKER
MASTER
34 En
CONNECTIONS
When all connections are complete, turn on this unit.
■ Turning on this unit
Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel
inward to the ON position to turn on this
unit.
When you turns on this unit by pressing MASTER ON/
OFF, the main zone is turned on.
■ Turning off this unit
Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel
again to release it outward to the OFF
position to turn off this unit.
• MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel as well as POWER
and STANDBY on the remote control are operational only
when MASTER ON/OFF is pressed inward to the ON position.
• As usual, we recommend using the standby mode to turn off this
unit.
■ Turning on the main zone from the
standby mode
Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front
panel (or POWER on the remote control) to
turn on the main zone.
■ Set the main zone to the standby mode
Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front
panel (or STANDBY on the remote control)
to set the main zone to the standby mode.
Turning on and off the power
ON/OFF
MASTER
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
ENHANCER
NIGHT
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROLS
MODE
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
MULTI ZONE
FM/AM
PRESET/
TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MIC
OPTIMIZER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
CONTROL
SELECT
AUDIO
TONE
REC OUT/
ZONE2
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
YPAO
ZONE 3
R
L
OPTICAL
USB
ZONE 2
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
PHONO
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
AUDIO SEL
POWER
POWER
POWER
STANDBY
NET/USB
AV
TV
(U.S.A. model)
(U.S.A. model)
MAIN ZONE ON/OFF
MASTER ON/OFF
STANDBY
POWER
Notes
MASTER
Front panel
MASTER
Front panel
MAIN ZONE
ON/OFF
POWER
Front panel
or
Remote control
MAIN ZONE
ON/OFF
STANDBY
Front panel Remote control
or
AUTO SETUP
35 En
PREPARATIONPREPARATION
This unit employs the YPAO (YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) technology which lets you avoid
troublesome listening-based speaker setup and achieves highly accurate sound adjustments automatically. The supplied
optimizer microphone collects and this unit analyzes the sound your speakers produce in your actual listening
environment.
Once you have connected the supplied optimizer
microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front
panel and have placed it in a suitable location in your
listening room, run “Auto Setup” in the GUI screen.
• Connect a video monitor to run “Auto Setup” (see page 23).
• Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output
during the “Auto Setup” procedure.
• To achieve the best results, make sure the room is as quiet as
possible while the “Auto Setup” procedure is in progress. If
there is too much ambient noise, the results may not be
satisfactory.
y
• If an error occurs during the “Auto Setup” procedure and an
error or warning message appears in the GUI screen or in the
front panel display, see the “Auto Setup” section in
“TROUBLESHOOTING” on pages 147 and 148 for a complete
list of error and warning messages and proper remedies.
• The initial setting for each parameter is indicated in bold.
• If the volume level and the crossover frequency of your
subwoofer can be adjusted, set the volume level to about half
way (or slightly less) and set the crossover frequency to the
maximum.
1 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone
to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front
panel.
2 Place the optimizer microphone at your
normal listening position on a flat level
surface with the omni-directional
microphone heading upward.
y
It is recommended that you use a tripod (etc.) to affix the
optimizer microphone at the same height as your ears would be
when you are seated in your listening position. You can use a 6
mm diameter screw to fix the optimizer microphone to a tripod
(etc.).
AUTO SETUP
Using Auto Setup
Notes
(U.S.A. model)
VOLUME
CH
TV VOL
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
A/B/C/D/E
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
BAND
LEVEL
TV
SOURCE
AMP
–
+
+
––
+
ENTER
DISPLAY
AUDIO
MENU
TITLE
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
RETURN
5-12
4,13
4
ENHANCER
NIGHT
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROLS
MODE
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
MULTI ZONE
FM/AM
PRESET/
TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MIC
OPTIMIZER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
CONTROL
SELECT
AUDIO
TONE
REC OUT/
ZONE2
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
YPAO
ZONE 3
R
L
OPTICAL
USB
ZONE 2
AUDI O
VIDEO AUX
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
(U.S.A. model)
Omni-directional
microphone
Optimizer microphone
36 En
AUTO SETUP
3 Make sure of the following check points
before starting the Auto Setup operations.
• Speakers are connected appropriately.
• Supplied optimizer microphone is connected to this
unit and placed appropriately.
• Headphones are disconnected from this unit.
• The room is sufficiently quiet.
• The video monitor connected to this unit is turned on.
4 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and
then press SET MENU to turn on the GUI
screen.
The GUI screen appears on the video monitor.
5 Press k / n repeatedly and then h to select
“Auto Setup”.
“Setup Menu” is selected as the currently selected
menu item.
6 Press h to enter “Setup Menu”.
7 Press k / n repeatedly to select “Wiring”,
“Distance”, “Size”, “Equalizing”, or “Level”,
and then press h to set the selected
parameter.
8 Press k / n repeatedly to select the desired
parameter and then ENTER to confirm the
selection.
\
MENU
SRCH MODE
SET MENU
Sound
Video
Option
Basic
NET/USB
Manual Setup
Auto Setup
System Memory
Input Select
Stereo/Surround
TV
SOURCE
AMP
Currently
selected menu
item
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
Information
Start
Setup Menu
Auto Setup
System Memory
Signal Info.
Manual Setup
Input Select
Setup Menu
Start
Wiring
Distance
Size
Information
Wiring
Distance
Skip
Check
Size
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
37 En
AUTO SETUP
PREPARATION
9 Repeat steps 7 and 8 until you set all the
desired parameters.
This unit performs the following checks:
Wiring (Speaker wiring)
Checks which speakers are connected and the
polarity of each speaker.
Distance (Speaker distance)
Checks the distance of each speaker from the
listening position and adjusts the timing of each
channel.
Size (Speaker size)
Checks the frequency response of each speaker and
sets the appropriate low-frequency crossover for each
channel.
Choices: Check, Skip
• Select “Check” to automatically check and adjust
the item.
• Select “Skip” to skip the item and perform no
adjustments.
Equalizing (Parametric equalizer level)
Adjusts the frequency and the parametric equalizer
level of each channel to reduce coloration across the
channels and create a cohesive sound field. This is
particularly important if you use different brands or
sizes of speakers for some channels or have a room
with unique sonic characteristics. In addition, the
frequency response of each channel is adjusted in
accordance with the sound output from your front
speakers.
Choices: Check:Natural, Check:Flat, Check:Front,
Skip
• Select “Check:Natural” to average out the
frequency response of all speakers with higher
frequencies being less emphasized. Recommended
if the “Check:Flat” setting sounds a little harsh.
• Select “Check:Flat” to average the frequency
response of all speakers. Recommended if all of
your speakers are of similar quality.
• Select “Check:Front” to adjust the frequency
response of each speaker in accordance with the
sound of your front speakers. Recommended if
your front speakers are of much higher quality than
your other speakers.
• Select “Skip” to skip the selected item and perform
no adjustments.
Level (Volume level)
Checks and adjusts the volume level of each speaker.
Choices: Check, Skip
• Select “Check” to automatically check and adjust
this item.
• Select “Skip” to skip this item and perform no
adjustments.
10 Once you have selected the desired settings
of each parameter, press l to return to the
previous menu level and then press n to
select “Start”.
Skip
Check
Wiring
Distance
Size
Skip
Check
Distance
Size
Equalizing
Wiring
Skip
Check
Size
Equalizing
Level
Distance
Wiring
Skip
Check: Natural
Check: Flat
Check: Front
Equalizing
Level
Size
Distance
Skip
Check
Level
Equalizing
Size
Start: ENTERStart
Setup Menu
Information
38 En
AUTO SETUP
11 Press ENTER to start the setup procedure.
This unit starts the auto setup procedure. Loud test
tones are output from each speaker during the auto
setup procedure. During the setup procedure,
“Measuring...” appears in the GUI screen. We
recommend getting out of the room while thus unit is
in the auto setup procedure. The necessary time for
the auto setup procedure depends on the environment
of the listening room and connected speaker (from 30
seconds to 3 minutes).
y
• To stop the Auto Setup procedure and set this unit to the
pause mode, press one of the cursor buttons (
k / n / l /
h) or ENTER. In the pause mode, press k to retry the
procedure, and
l to cancel the Auto Setup procedure.
• If an error message appears and this unit stops the setup
procedure, see the “Auto Setup” section in
“TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 147, and after carrying
out the remedy, retry the Auto Setup procedure.
12 Once all items are set successfully, following
display appears in the GUI screen.
• Press n and select “Setup” to set the measured
values.
• Press k and select “Retry” to retry the Auto Setup
procedure.
• Press h and select “Detail” to view information
about measurement results and warning messages.
For more details about warning messages, see the
“Auto Setup” section in “TROUBLESHOOTING”
on page 147.
• Press l and select “Exit” to exit from the Auto
Setup procedure. If you select “Exit”, “Don’t
Setup?” appears on the screen. To set the measured
values and exit, select “Yes”. To cancel the settings
and exit, select “No”.
y
If you are not satisfied with the results or want to manually
adjust each parameter, set the parameters in “Basic” (see
page 104).
• If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of
your listening environment, run “Auto Setup” again to
recalibrate your system.
• The distances displayed in the “Distance” results may be
longer than the actual distance depending on the
characteristics of your subwoofer.
• In the “Equalizing” results, different values may be set for
the same band to provide finer adjustments.
13 Press SET MENU to exit from the GUI screen.
• After you have completed the “Auto Setup” procedure, be
sure to disconnect the optimizer microphone.
• The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. Keep it
away from direct sunlight and do not place it on top of this
unit.
■ Reviewing the result of the auto setup
Use this feature to review the result of the auto setup.
1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and
then press SET MENU to turn on the GUI
screen.
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
Measurement Over
Successfully
Result
Level
Equalizing
Retry
Setup
Exit Detail
Notes
Notes
MENU
SRCH MODE
SET MENU
MENU
SRCH MODE
SET MENU
Sound
Video
Option
Basic
NET/USB
Manual Setup
Auto Setup
System Memory
Input Select
Stereo/Surround
TV
SOURCE
AMP
39 En
AUTO SETUP
PREPARATION
2 Press k / n repeatedly and then h to select
“Auto Setup”.
3 Press k to select “Information”.
4 Press h and then n repeatedly to select the
desired check items.
Wiring (Speaker wiring)
Displays the polarity of each connected speaker.
• “NRM” appears when the polarity of the connected
speaker is normal.
• “REV” appears when the polarity of the connected
speaker is reversed.
“---” appears when no speaker is connected to the
corresponding speaker channel.
Distance (Speaker distance)
Displays the speaker distance from the listening
position. Press l / h to switch the unit to display the
value of the each speaker distance.
“---” appears when no speaker is connected to the
corresponding speaker channel.
Size (Speaker size)
Displays the size of the connected speakers. The bass
cross over frequency (“Cross”) appears at the bottom
of the menu area.
• “LRG” appears when the connected speaker has
the ability to reproduce the low-frequency signals
effectively.
• “SML” appears when the connected speaker does
not have the ability to reproduce the low-frequency
signals effectively.
“---” appears when no speaker is connected to the
corresponding speaker channel.
Equalizing (Speaker equalizing)
Displays the result of the adjustment of the frequency
responses of each connected speaker.
Gray line appears when no speaker is connected to the
corresponding speaker channel.
Level (speaker level)
Displays the speaker output level of the connected
speakers.
Gray line appears when no speaker is connected to the
corresponding speaker channel.
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
Setup Menu
Start
Wiring
Distance
Size
Information
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
Distance
Size
Front
Center
Sur.
S.Back
PRNS
SubWfr
Reload:ENTER
Left
NRM
NRM
NRM
NRM
NRM
NRM
NRM
NRM
NRM
NRM
Right
Wiring
Note
Note
Note
Note
Note
PLAYBACK
40 En
Extreme caution should be exercised when you play back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD
encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player, you will only hear some unwanted noise that may
damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the
sound output level of your CD player before you play back a CD encoded in DTS.
y
To play DTS-encoded CDs when using a digital audio connection, set “Decoder Mode” in “Input Select” to “DTS” before the playback
(see page 96).
1 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
y
• You can control this unit by using the graphical user
interface (GUI) screen. See page 44 for details.
• You can turn on or off the short message displays on the
video monitor. See page 103 for details.
2 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel
(or set the operation mode selector to AMP
and then press one of the input selector
buttons on the remote control) to select the
desired input source.
The name of the currently selected input source
appears in the front panel display and in the short
message display for a few seconds.
For details about controlling XM Satellite Radio when
“XM” is selected as the input source, see page 67.
PLAYBACK
CAUTION
Basic procedure
ON/OFF
MASTER
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
ENHANCER
NIGHT
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROLS
MODE
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
MULTI ZONE
FM/AM
PRESET/
TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MIC
OPTIMIZER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
CONTROL
SELECT
AUDIO
TONE
REC OUT/
ZONE2
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
YPAO
ZONE 3
R
L
OPTICAL
USB
ZONE 2
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
452
VOLUME
CH
TV VOL
TV
SOURCE
AMP
SELECT
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
AUDIO SEL
POWER
POWER
POWER
STANDBY
NET/USB
–
+
+
––
+
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
AV
TV
V
-
AUX/DOCK
ON
OFF
CLEAR
LEARN
RENAME
MACRO
REC
NET RADIO
USB
PC/MCX
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
A/B/C/D/E
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
BAND
LEVEL
ENHANCER
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
NIGHT
MEMORY
1
2
2
ENTER
DISPLAY
AUDIO
MENU
TITLE
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
4
3
ENT
+
10
0
9
5
1
7
6
8
RETURN
FREQ/TEXT
EON
MODE PTY SEEK
START
2
4
2
5
(U.S.A. model)
(U.S.A. model)
Note
V
-
AUX/DOCK
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
NET/USB
INPUT
TV
SOURCE
AMP
Front panel
Remote control
or
CD-R
CD
PHONO
M
ULTI
CH
TUNER
MD/TAPE
DVD
DTV
NET/USB
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DVR/VCR 2
V-AUX
INPUT: DVD
Currently selected input source
Available input sources
41 En
PLAYBACK
BASIC
OPERATION
3 Start playback on the selected source
component or select a broadcast station.
• Refer to the operating instructions for the source
component.
• See page 56 for details about tuning instructions.
• See page 67 for details about XM Satellite Radio
tuning instructions.
4 Rotate VOLUME on the front panel (or press
VOLUME +/– on the remote control) to adjust
the volume to the desired output level.
y
See page 53 to adjust the level of each speaker.
5 Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front
panel (or press one of the sound field
program selector buttons on the remote
control repeatedly) to select the desired
sound field program.
The name of the selected sound field program appears
in the front panel display and in the short message
display. See page 47 for details about sound field
programs.
Sound field programs and the Compressed Music Enhancer
mode cannot be selected when the component connected to
the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source
(see page 43) and Audio input jack select is set to
“ANALOG” (see page 42).
y
• Choose a sound field program based on your listening
preference, not merely on the name of the program.
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically
selects the last sound field program used with the
corresponding input source.
■ Guide to contents
VOLUME
+
–
VOLUME
or
Remote controlFront panel
PROGRAM
4
3
2
5
1
STEREO
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
Front panel
or
Remote control
Sci-Fi
MOVIE
Currently selected sound field program
Currently selected sound field program category
Note
When you want to...
See
page
Enjoy pure hi-fi stereo sound 52
Adjust the tonal quality of the front speakers 52
Enjoy the compressed music sources in enhanced
sound
54
Edit parameters of sound field programs 88
Enjoy the sources which have wide dynamic range at
night
55
Use headphones 43
Enjoy multi-channel sources in 2-channel stereo 53
Select a decoder to play back sources with 84
Set this unit to the standby mode automatically 45
42 En
PLAYBACK
This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Use this
feature (Audio input jack select) to switch the input jack
assigned to an input source when more than one jacks are
assigned to an input source.
y
• We recommend setting Audio input jack select to “AUTO” in
most cases.
• You can adjust the default Audio input jack select of this unit by
using “Audio Select” in “Option” (see page 114).
• You can also set Audio input jack select setting in “Audio
Select” in “Input Select” (see page 96).
1 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel
(or press one of the input selector buttons on
the remote control) to select the desired
input source.
2 Press AUDIO SELECT on the front panel (or
AUDIO SEL on the remote control) repeatedly
to select the desired Audio input jack select
setting.
AUTO Automatically selects input signals in
the following order:
(1)HDMI
(2)Digital signals
(3)Analog signals
HDMI Selects only HDMI signals. When
HDMI signals are not input, no sound
is output.
COAX/OPT Automatically selects input signals in
the following order:
(1)Digital signals input at the
COAXIAL jack.
(2)Digital signals input at the
OPTICAL jack.
When no signals are input, no sound is
output.
ANALOG Selects only analog signals. If no
analog signals are input, no sound is
output.
This feature is not available when no digital input jack
(OPTICAL, COAXIAL and HDMI) are assigned. Use “I/O
Assignment” in “Input Select” to reassign the respective
input jack (see page 96).
Selecting audio input jacks
(AUDIO SELECT)
INPUT
V
-
AUX/DOCK
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
CD
MULTI CH IN
or
Front panel
Remote control
CD-R
CD
PHONO
M
ULTI
CH
TUNER
MD/TAPE
DVD
DTV
NET/USB
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DVR/VCR 2
V-AUX
A.SEL: AUTO
AUDIO SEL
Currently selected
Audio input jack
select setting
Available input sources
or
SELECT
AUDIO
Note
43 En
PLAYBACK
BASIC
OPERATION
Use this feature to select the component connected to the
MULTI CH INPUT jacks (see page 28) as the input
source.
Rotate the input selector on the front panel to
select MULTI CH INPUT (or MULTI CH IN on the
remote control).
y
Use “MULTI CH” menu in “Input Select” to set the parameters
for MULTI CH INPUT (see page 97).
Sound field programs and the Compressed Music Enhancer mode
cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI
CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 46) and
Audio input jack select is set to “ANALOG” (see page 42).
Connect a pair of headphones with a stereo
analog audio cable plug to the PHONES jack on
the front panel.
y
When you select a sound field program, SILENT CINEMA mode
activates automatically (see page 51).
• When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the
speaker terminals.
• When headphones are used, only front L/R channel signals are
output.
• All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the
left and right headphone channels.
Press MUTE on the remote control to mute the
audio output. Press MUTE again to resume the
audio output.
y
• You can also rotate VOLUME on the front panel or press
VOLUME +/– on the remote control to resume the audio
output.
• You can adjust the muting level by using the “Muting Type”
parameter in “Sound” (see page 100).
• The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel display when the
audio output is muted and disappears from the front panel
display when the audio output is resumed.
Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT
component
Note
INPUT
MULTI CH IN
Front panel
Remote control
or
Using your headphones
Notes
Muting the audio output
ON/OFF
MASTER
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
ENHANCER
NIGHT
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROLS
MODE
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
MULTI ZONE
FM/AM
PRESET/
TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MIC
OPTIMIZER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
CONTROL
SELECT
AUDIO
TONE
REC OUT/
ZONE2
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
YPAO
ZONE 3
R
L
OPTICAL
USB
ZONE 2
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
MUTE
44 En
PLAYBACK
This unit features a sophisticated graphical user interface (GUI) screen that helps you to control the amplifier function of
this unit. With the GUI screen, you can view the information of the signals being input and the status of this unit. You can
also set up this unit using the GUI screen (see page 87).
■ Items in GUI screen
y
• Set the operation mode selector to AMP when you operate this unit by using GUI screen.
• See page 87 for details about the contents in the menu area.
• This unit reserves the previously selected GUI screen.
■ Basic controls in the GUI screen
1 ENTER
Press to select the currently selected menu item and move
to the next menu level.
2 Cursor l
Press to return to the previous menu level.
3 SET MENU
Press to display or turn off the GUI screen.
4 Cursor k / n
Press to select the item in the current menu level.
5 Cursor h
Press to select the currently selected menu item and move
to the next menu level.
Operating the amplifier functions of this unit by using the graphical user
interface (GUI) screen
Sound
Video
NET/USB
Basic
Option
Manual Setup
Auto Setup
System Memory
Input Select
Stereo/Surround
DVD
Manual Setup -40.0dB
Pro Logic Sci-Fi
Currently selected
decoder
Currently selected
sound field program
Menu area
Currently selected
input source
Currently selected
menu item
Current menu directory
Volume level
(see page 41)
VOLUME
CH
TV VOL
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
A/B/C/D/E
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
BAND
LEVEL
TV
SOURCE
AMP
–
+
+
––
+
ENTER
DISPLAY
AUDIO
MENU
TITLE
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
RETURN
3
4
5
1
2
Set to AMP
45 En
PLAYBACK
BASIC
OPERATION
You can combine a video image from a video source with
sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy
listening to classical music while viewing beautiful
scenery from the video source on the video monitor.
Press the input selector buttons on the remote
control to select a video source and then an
audio source.
y
Set the “BGV” parameter in the “MULTI CH” menu to the
desired setting to select the default background video input source
of the MULTI CH INPUT sources (see page 97).
Use this feature to automatically set the main zone to the
standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep
timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit
is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also
automatically turns off any external components
connected to the AC OUTLET(S) (see page 32).
1 Press one of the input selector buttons on
the remote control to select the desired input
source.
2 Start playback on the selected source
component or select a broadcast station.
Refer to the operating instructions for the source
component.
See page 56 for details about tuning instructions.
3 Press SLEEP on the remote control
repeatedly to set the amount of time.
Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display
changes as shown below.
The SLEEP indicator flashes while you are switching
the amount of time for the sleep timer. Once the sleep
timer is set, the SLEEP indicator lights up in the front
panel display, and the display returns to the selected
sound field program.
■ Canceling the sleep timer
Press SLEEP on the remote control repeatedly
until “SLEEP OFF” appears in the front panel
display.
The SLEEP indicator turns off, and “SLEEP OFF”
disappears from the front panel display after a few
seconds.
y
The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing
STANDBY on the remote control (or MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on
the front panel) to set the main zone to the standby mode.
Playing video sources in the
background of an audio source
Using the sleep timer
V
-
AUX/DOCK
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
NET/USB
Audio sources
Video sources
V
-
AUX/DOCK
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
NET/USB
SLEEP
SLEEP 120min. SLEEP 90min.
SLEEP 60min.SLEEP 30min.SLEEP OFF
SLEEP
SLEEP 120min.
Flashes
SLEEP
STRAIGHT
Analog
Lights up
SLEEP
SLEEP OFF
Disappears
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
46 En
This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from
almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source. This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA digital sound field
processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience.
y
• When you set the “Decoder Mode” parameter in “Input Select” to “Auto”, this unit selects the appropriate digital decoder according to
the input signal.
• The YAMAHA CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources.
• The YAMAHA HiFi DSP sound field programs recreate real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in
actual concert halls, music venues, movie theaters, etc. Thus, you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from
the front, back, left and right.
• You can select sound field programs and adjust the parameters by using the GUI screen. See page 88 for details.
• When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with the corresponding input source.
• Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input
source (see page 43) and Audio input jack select is set to “ANALOG” (see page 42).
• When you play back DSD sources with any sound field program, this unit converts the DSD signals to PCM signals and then applies
the selected program.
• When you play back DTS 96/24 sources with any sound field program, this unit applies the selected program without activating the
DTS 96/24 decoder.
• Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz are sampled down to 48 kHz or lower and then sound field programs are applied.
y
You can select the desired sound field programs and setting the parameters by using GUI screen. see page 88 for details.
■ Front panel operations
Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel.
The name of the selected sound field program appears in
the front panel display and in the short message display.
■ Remote control operations
Set the operation mode selector to AMP and then
press one of the sound field program selector
buttons on the remote control repeatedly.
The name of the selected sound field program appears in
the front panel display and in the short message display.
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
Selecting sound field programs
Notes
ON/OFF
MASTER
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
ENHANCER
NIGHT
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROLS
MODE
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
MULTI ZONE
FM/AM
PRESET/
TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MIC
OPTIMIZER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
CONTROL
SELECT
AUDIO
TONE
REC OUT/
ZONE2
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
YPAO
ZONE 3
R
L
OPTICAL
USB
ZONE 2
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
(U.S.A. model)
PROGRAM selector
VOLUME
CH
TV VOL
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
A/B/C/D/E
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
BAND
LEVEL
ENHANCER
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
NIGHT
MEMORY
1
2
TV
SOURCE
AMP
–
2
+
+
––
+
ENTER
DISPLAY
AUDI O
MENU
TITLE
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
4
3
ENT
+
10
0
9
5
1
7
6
8
RETURN
(U.S.A. model)
AMP
Sound field program
selector buttons
47 En
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
BASIC
OPERATION
y
Select a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program, etc.
■ For music audio sources
y
For audio music sources, we also recommend using the Pure Direct mode (see page 52), the “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 51) or
surround decode mode (see page 84).
Sound field program descriptions
CLASSICAL Hall in Munich
This is a large fan-shaped concert hall which has approximately 2500 seats. Almost the whole interior is made of wood. There is relatively
little reflection from the walls, and sound spreads finely and beautifully.
DSP Level
Init. Delay
Room Size
Liveness
Dialogue Lift
CLASSICAL Hall in Vienna
A classic shoe-box type concert hall with approximately 1700 seats. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections which
produce a very full, rich sound.
DSP Level
Init. Delay
Room Size
Liveness
Dialogue Lift
Dialogue Lift
SB Room SizeSur. Room Size
SB. Init. DelaySur. Init. Delay
Room Size
Sci-Fi
MOVIE
Init. Delay
DSP Level
4
MOVIE
This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive
cinematic space amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and
DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques.
Available sound field parameters (see page 89)
Program description
Remote control
button
Name of the
program
Created sound
fields
(see page 13)
CINEMA DSP
or
HiFi DSP
Category of the
program
3
ENTERTAIN
1
CLASSICAL
HiFi DSP
3
ENTERTAIN
1
CLASSICAL
HiFi DSP
CLASSICAL
Hall in Amsterdam
This is a large 2200 seat shoe-box type concert hall in Amsterdam. It has a circular stage with seats located behind the stage.
DSP Level
Init. Delay
Room Size
Liveness
Dialogue Lift
CLASSICAL
Church in Freiburg
This program creates the acoustic environment of a big church located in south Germany. The reverberation delay is very long while the early
reflections are smaller than with other sound field programs.
DSP Level
Init. Delay
Liveness
Rev. Time
Rev. Delay
Rev. Level
Dialogue Lift
3
ENTERTAIN
1
CLASSICAL
HiFi DSP
3
ENTERTAIN
1
CLASSICAL
HiFi DSP
48 En
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
■ For various sources
The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit.
CLASSICAL Chamber
This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are
suitable for courtly music and chamber music.
DSP Level
Init. Delay
Liveness
Rev. Time
Rev. Delay
Rev. Level
Dialogue Lift
LIVE/CLUB Village Vanguard
A traditional jazz club in New York, located on 7th Avenue. This room has a low ceiling, and the “stage” is located at the corner of the room.
This program creates an intimate “close-to-the music” feel.
DSP Level
Init. Delay
Room Size
Liveness
Dialogue Lift
LIVE/CLUB Warehouse Loft
This program simulates a space enclosed by concrete. An energetic sound field is created with relatively clear reflections from the walls.
DSP Level
Init. Delay
Room Size
Liveness
Rev. Time
Rev. Delay
Rev. Level
Dialogue Lift
LIVE/CLUB Cellar Club
This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field features powerful sound as if the
listener is in a row in front of a small stage.
DSP Level
Init. Delay
Room Size
Liveness
Dialogue Lift
LIVE/CLUB The Roxy Theatre
The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was recorded at LA’s hottest rock club. The listener’s virtual seat
is at the center-left of the hall.
DSP Level
Init. Delay
Room Size
Liveness
Rev. Time
Rev. Delay
Rev. Level
Dialogue Lift
LIVE/CLUB The Bottom Line
This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a
sound field offering real and vibrant sound.
DSP Level
Init. Delay
Room Size
Liveness
Dialogue Lift
Note
ENTERTAINMENT Sports
This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts and studio variety programs with enriched live feeling. In sports broadcasts,
the voices of the commentator and sportscaster are positioned clearly on the center while the atmosphere of the stadium expands in an
optimum space to offer the listeners with a feeling of presence in the stadium.
DSP Level
Init. Delay
Room Size
Sur. Init. Delay
Sur. Room Size
SB Init. Delay
SB Room Size
Dialogue Lift
1
CLASSICAL
HiFi DSP
2
LIVE/CLUB
HiFi DSP
2
LIVE/CLUB
HiFi DSP
2
LIVE/CLUB
HiFi DSP
2
LIVE/CLUB
HiFi DSP
2
LIVE/CLUB
HiFi DSP
3
ENTERTAIN
49 En
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
BASIC
OPERATION
■ For visual sources of music
The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit.
■ For movie sources
y
You can select the desired decoder used with following sound field program (except “Mono Movie”). See page 85 for details.
The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit.
ENTERTAINMENT Action Game
This sound field has been optimized for action games such as car racing and FPS games. It uses the reflection data that limits the effects range
per channel in order to offer a powerful playing environment with a being-there feeling by enhancing various effects tones while maintaining
a clear sense of directions.
DSP Level
Init. Delay
Room Size
Sur. Init. Delay
Sur. Room Size
SB Init. Delay
SB Room Size
Dialogue Lift
ENTERTAINMENT Roleplaying Game
This sound field has been optimized for role-playing and adventure games. It combines the sound field effects for movies and the sound field
design used with “Action Game” to represent the depth and 3D feeling of the field during play, while offering movie-like surround effects in
the movie scenes in the game.
DSP Level
Init. Delay
Room Size
Sur. Init. Delay
Sur. Room Size
SB Init. Delay
SB Room Size
Dialogue Lift
Note
ENTERTAINMENT Music Video
This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live performance of pop, rock and jazz music. The listener can indulge oneself in a hot
live space thanks to the presence sound field that emphasizes the vividness of vocals and solo play and the beat of rhythm instruments, and to
the surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall.
DSP Level
Init. Delay
Room Size
Sur. Init. Delay
Sur. Room Size
SB Init. Delay
SB Room Size
Dialogue Lift
ENTERTAINMENT Recital/Opera
This program controls the amount of reverberations at an optimum level and emphasizes the depth and clarity of human voices. “Opera”
offers the reverberations of an orchestra box in front of the listener at the same time as providing the acoustic positioning and feeling of
presence on the stage. The surround sound field is relatively moderate, but the data for concert hall effects are used to represent the inherent
beauty of music. The listener will not be fatigued even after long hours of opera entertainment.
DSP Level
Init. Delay
Room Size
Sur. Init. Delay
Sur. Room Size
SB Init. Delay
SB Room Size
Dialogue Lift
Note
3
ENTERTAIN
3
ENTERTAIN
2
LIVE/CLUB
3
ENTERTAIN
HiFi DSP
3
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE Standard
This program create a sound field emphasizing the surrounding feeling without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multi-channel
audio such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It has been designed with the concept of “an ideal movie theater”, in which the audience is surrounded
by beautiful reverberations from the left, right and rear.
DSP Level
Sur. Init. Delay
Sur. Room Size
Sur. Liveness
SB Init. Delay
SB Room Size
SB Liveness
Dialogue Lift
4
MOVIE
50 En
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
■ Stereo playback
MOVIE Spectacle
This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making
both the video and the sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or
DTS (especially large-scale movie productions).
DSP Level
Init. Delay
Room Size
Sur. Init. Delay
Sur. Room Size
SB Init. Delay
SB Room Size
Dialogue Lift
4
MOVIE
MOVIE Sci-Fi
This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad and
expansive cinematic space amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround,
Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques.
DSP Level
Init. Delay
Room Size
Sur. Init. Delay
Sur. Room Size
SB Init. Delay
SB Room Size
Dialogue Lift
4
MOVIE
MOVIE Adventure
This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is
made to be similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible.
DSP Level
Init. Delay
Room Size
Sur. Init. Delay
Sur. Room Size
SB Init. Delay
SB Room Size
Dialogue Lift
4
MOVIE
MOVIE Drama
This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The
reverberations are modest but offer an optimum 3D feeling, reproducing effects tones and background music softly but cubically around clear
words and center positioning in a way that does not fatigue the listener even after long hours of viewing.
DSP Level
Init. Delay
Room Size
Sur. Init. Delay
Sur. Room Size
SB Init. Delay
SB Room Size
Dialogue Lift
4
MOVIE
MOVIE Mono Movie
This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The program produces the optimum reverberation to
create sound depth using only the presence sound field.
DSP Level
Init. Delay
Room Size
Liveness
Rev. Time
Rev. Level
Rev. Delay
Dialogue Lift
STEREO 2ch STEREO
Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels. See page 53 for details.
Direct
4
MOVIE
5
STEREO
STEREO 7ch STEREO
Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multi-channel sources, this unit downmixes the source to 2
channels, and then output the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties,
etc.
Center Level
Surround L Level
Surround R Level
Sur. Back Level
Presence L Level
Presence R Level
5
STEREO
HiFi DSP
51 En
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
BASIC
OPERATION
■ Using sound field programs without
surround speakers
(Virtual CINEMA DSP)
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA
DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates
virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field.
When you set “Surround” to
“None” (see page 106),
Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever
you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program (see
page 47).
Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate even when “Surround” is
set to “None” (see page 106) in the following cases:
– when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks is selected as the input source (see page 43).
– when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.
– when the Pure Direct (see page 52) or “2ch Stereo” mode (see
page 53) is selected, or when this unit is in the “STRAIGHT”
mode (see page 51).
■ Enjoying multi-channel sources and
sound field programs with headphones
(SILENT CINEMA)
SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel
music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS
sources, through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA
activates automatically whenever you connect headphones
to the PHONES jack while listening to CINEMA DSP or
HiFi DSP sound field programs (see page 47). When
activated, the SILENT CINEMA indicator lights up in the
front panel display.
• SILENT CINEMA does not activate when the component
connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the
input source (see page 43).
• SILENT CINEMA is not effective when the Pure Direct (see
page 52) or “2ch Stereo” mode (see page 53) is selected, or
when this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 51).
When this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode, 2-channel
stereo sources are output from only the front left and right
speakers. Multi-channel sources are decoded straight into
the appropriate channels without any additional effect
processing.
y
You can also select the “STRAIGHT” mode by using GUI screen.
See page 88 for details.
Press STRAIGHT on the front panel (or on the
remote control) to select “STRAIGHT”.
■ Deactivating the “STRAIGHT” mode
Press STRAIGHT on the remote control so that
“STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel
display.
The sound effect is turned back on.
Note
Notes
Enjoying unprocessed input
sources
Format Description
Dolby Digital
Standard processing for Dolby
Digital sources.
DTS
Standard processing for DTS
sources. When the input source is
DTS-ES Discrete or DTS-ES
Matrix format, the respective
indicator appears in the front
panel display.
DSD
Plays back DSD (Direct Stream
Digital) sources.
PCM
Plays back PCM (Pulse Code
Modulation) sources.
MPCM
Plays back multi-channel PCM
(Pulse Code Modulation) sources.
Analog
Plays back analog sources.
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
or
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
or
USING AUDIO FEATURES
52 En
Use the Pure Direct mode to enjoy the pure fidelity sound
of the selected source. When the Pure Direct mode is
activated, this unit plays back the selected source with the
least circuitry.
Press PURE DIRECT on the front panel (or on the
remote control) to turn on or off the Pure Direct
mode.
The PURE DIRECT button on the front panel lights up
while this unit is in the Pure Direct mode. The front panel
display automatically dims.
• When you play back the multi-channel PCM sources (less than
192 kHz), this unit downmixes the multi-channel signals
according to the “Speaker Set” in “Basic” (see page 105).
• When the component connected to the HDMI IN jacks is
selected as the input source and Audio input jack select is set to
“AUTO” or “HDMI”, this unit does not turn off the video
circuitry in the Pure Direct mode.
• When you set Audio input jack select to “AUTO”, “HDMI” or
“COAX/OPT” (see page 42) and play back the Dolby Digital,
DTS or multi channel PCM sources, this unit activates the
corresponding decoder.
• The following operations are not possible when this unit is in
the Pure Direct mode:
– switching the sound field program
– displaying the GUI screen
– operating video functions (video conversion, etc.)
• The Pure Direct mode is automatically canceled whenever this
unit is turned off.
y
The front panel display turns on momentarily when an operation
is performed.
Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble for
the front L/R, center, presence L/R speaker channels and
the subwoofer channel.
1 Press TONE CONTROL on the front panel
repeatedly to select the high-frequency
response (TREBLE) or the low-frequency
response (BASS).
2 Rotate the PROGRAM selector to adjust the
high-frequency response (TREBLE) or the
low-frequency response (BASS).
■ Bypassing the tone control circuitry
Press TONE CONTROL repeatedly to select
BYPASS and cancel the tone control.
• If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the
low-frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of
the surround speakers may not match that of the front L/R,
center, presence L/R speakers and the subwoofer.
• TONE CONTROL is not effective when PURE DIRECT is
selected, or when MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input
source.
y
Use “Tone Control” parameter in “Sound” menu to adjust the
balance of bass and treble output to your speakers or headphones
by using GUI screen. See page 99 for details.
USING AUDIO FEATURES
Enjoying pure hi-fi sound
Notes
PURE DIRECT
PURE DIRECT
Front panel
Remote control
or
Adjusting the tonal quality
Notes
CONTROL
TONE
PROGRAM
CONTROL
TONE
53 En
USING AUDIO FEATURES
BASIC
OPERATION
You can adjust the output level of each speaker while
listening to a music source. This is also possible when
playing sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.
This operation will override the level adjustments made in “Auto
Setup” (see page 35) and “Speaker Level” (see page 109).
1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and
then press LEVEL on the remote control
repeatedly to select the speaker you want to
adjust.
y
• Once you press LEVEL on the remote control, you can
also select the speaker by pressing k / n.
• Instead of “SB R” and “SB L”, “SB” is displayed if
“Surround Back” is set to either “Small x1” or “Large x1”
(see page 106).
2 Press l / h on the remote control to adjust
the speaker output level.
• Press h to increase the value.
• Press l to decrease the value.
Control range: –10 dB to +10 dB
You can mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels
and enjoy playback in 2-channel stereo.
Set the operation mode to AMP and then press
STEREO on the remote control repeatedly to
select “2ch Stereo”.
y
• You can use a subwoofer with this program when “Bass Out” is
set to “SWFR” or “Both” (see page 107).
• You can also select the “2ch Stereo” mode by rotating the
PROGRAM selector on the front panel.
• You can also select the “2ch Stereo” mode and adjust the
parameter by using GUI screen. See page 88 for details.
Adjusting the speaker level
Note
Display Adjusted speaker
FRONT L
Front left speaker
CENTER
Center speaker
FRONT R
Front right speaker
SUR. R
Surround right speaker
SB L
Surround back right speaker
SB R
Surround back left speaker
SUR. L
Surround left speaker
SWFR
Subwoofer
PRNS L
Presence left speaker
PRNS R
Presence right speaker
TITLE
BAND
LEVEL
TV
SOURCE
AMP
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
Enjoying multi-channel sources in
2-channel stereo
5
STEREO
2ch Stereo
TV
SOURCE
AMP
54 En
USING AUDIO FEATURES
Compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) are
created by a lossy compression scheme where the audio is
resampled to lower the bit rate and to remove sounds that
are indistinguishable to typical human hearing. The
Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit enhances
your listening experience by regenerating the missing
harmonics in a compression artifact. As a result, flattened
complexity due to the loss of high-frequency fidelity as
well as lack of bass due to the loss of low-frequency bass
is compensated, providing improved performance of the
overall sound system.
• When you play back DSD sources or PCM sources whose
sampling frequencies are higher than 48 kHz, this unit samples
them down to 48 kHz or lower and applies the Compressed
Music Enhancer mode.
• The Compressed Music Enhancer mode is not effective with
any of the sound field programs.
y
You can also select the Compressed Music Enhancer mode and
adjust the parameter by using GUI menu. See page 88 for details.
Press ENHANCER on the front panel (or set the
operation mode selector to AMP and then press
ENHANCER on the remote control) repeatedly to
select the desired Compressed Music Enhancer
mode.
The following short message appears on the video monitor
and the ENHANCER indicator lights up in the front panel
display.
Choices: 2ch Enhancer, 7ch Enhancer, Off
• Select “2ch Enhancer” to play back compression
artifacts in 2-channel stereo.
• Select “7ch Enhancer” to play back compression
artifacts in 7-channel stereo.
• Select “Off” to turn off the Compressed Music
Enhancer mode.
When you select “Off”, this unit returns to the previously
selected sound field program.
Selecting the Compressed Music
Enhancer mode
Notes
ENT
ENHANCER
MUSICENHANCER
2chEnhancer
ENHANCER
TV
SOURCE
AMP
ENHANCER
Lights up
or
Note
55 En
USING AUDIO FEATURES
BASIC
OPERATION
The night listening modes are designed to improve
listenability at lower volumes or at night. Choose either
“NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” depending on
the type of material you are playing.
1 Press NIGHT on the front panel (or set the
operation mode selector to AMP and then
press NIGHT on the remote control)
repeatedly to select “NIGHT:CINEMA” or
“NIGHT:MUSIC”.
Choices: NIGHT:CINEMA, NIGHT:MUSIC, OFF
• Select “NIGHT:CINEMA” when watching films to
reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and
make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes.
• Select “NIGHT:MUSIC” when listening to music
sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds.
• Select “OFF” if you do not want to use this feature.
y
When a night listening mode is selected, the NIGHT
indicator lights up in the front panel display.
2 Press l / h on the remote control to adjust
the effect level while “NIGHT:CINEMA” or
“NIGHT:MUSIC” is displayed in the front
panel display.
Choices: MIN, MID, MAX
• Select “MIN” for minimum compression.
• Select “MID” for standard compression.
• Select “MAX” for maximum compression.
y
“NIGHT:CINEMA” and “NIGHT:MUSIC” adjustments are
stored independently.
• You cannot use the night listening modes in the following
cases:
– when the Pure Direct mode (see page 52) is selected.
– when the component connected to the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see
page 43).
– when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.
• The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness
depending on the input source and surround sound settings
you use.
Selecting the night listening mode
+
10
NIGHT
TV
SOURCE
AMP
NIGHT
or
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
Effect.Lvl:MID
Remote control
Notes
FM/AM TUNING
56 En
There are 2 tuning methods: automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and
there is no interference. If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. You can also use
the automatic and manual preset tuning features to store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of
the 5 preset station groups). Furthermore, you can recall any preset stations and exchange the assignment of two preset
stations with each other.
Orient the connected FM and AM antennas for the best reception.
■ Front panel functions
1 INPUT selector
Selects “TUNER” as the input source.
2 A/B/C/D/E
Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E) (see
page 59).
3 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h
• Selects one of the 8 preset station numbers (1 to 8)
when the colon (:) is displayed in the front panel
display (see page 59).
• Selects the tuning frequency when the colon (:) is not
displayed in the front panel display (see page 58).
4 PRESET/TUNING, EDIT
• Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING/CH
l
/
h
between selecting preset station numbers and selecting
the tuning frequency.
• Edits the assignments of preset stations (see page 60).
5 FM/AM
Switches the reception band between FM and AM (see
page 57).
6 MEMORY
Stores a preset station in the memory. Hold down this
button for more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset
tuning (see page 59).
7 TUNING MODE
Switches between automatic tuning (the AUTO indicator
is turned on) and manual tuning (the AUTO indicator is
turned off) (see page 57).
■ Remote control functions
1 TUNER
Selects “TUNER” as the input source. This unit is turned
into the last selected station.
2 BAND
Switches the reception band between FM and AM (see
page 57). This unit is turned into the last selected AM or
FM station.
3 PRESET/CH k / n
Selects one of the 8 preset station numbers (1 to 8) when
the colon (:) is displayed in the front panel display (see
page 60).
4 Numeric buttons
Use numbers 1 through 8 to select preset stations (see
page 61).
5 A-E/CAT. l / h, A/B/C/D/E
Selects one of the preset station groups (A to E) (see
page 59).
FM/AM TUNING
Note
FM/AM controls and functions
INPUT
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROLS
MODE
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
MULTI ZONE
FM/AM
PRESET/
TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MIC
OPTIMIZER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
CONTROL
SELECT
AUDIO
TONE
REC OUT/
ZONE2
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
YPAO
ZONE 3
R
L
OPTICAL
ZONE 2
AUDI O
VIDEO AUX
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
75432 6
1
(U.S.A. model)
TUNER
CD
CD-R
DTV
NET/USB
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
VCR 1
DVD
V-AUX/DOCK
DVR/VCR 2
POWER
STANDBY
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET
VOLUME
ZONE 3
ZONE 2
ID2
ID1
MUTE
5
3
1
VOLUME
CH
TV VOL
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
A/B/C/D/E
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
BAND
LEVEL
ENHANCER
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
NIGHT
MEMORY
1
2
TV
SOURCE
AMP
SELECT
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
–
2
+
+
––
+
ENTER
DISPLAY
AUDIO
MENU
TITLE
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
4
3
ENT
+
10
0
9
5
1
7
6
8
RETURN
V
-
AUX/DOCK
5
3
2
4
1
(U.S.A. model)
Set to
SOURCE
57 En
FM/AM TUNING
BASIC
OPERATION
Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are
strong and there is no interference.
1 Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER”
as the input source.
2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band.
“FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display.
3 Press TUNING MODE so that the AUTO
indicator lights up in the front panel display.
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning
is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING to turn the
colon (:) off.
4 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h once to
begin automatic tuning.
When this unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED
indicator lights up and the frequency of the received
station is shown in the front panel display.
•Press h to tune into a higher frequency.
•Press l to tune into a lower frequency.
Automatic tuning
ON/OFF
MASTER
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
ENHANCER
NIGHT
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROLS
MODE
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
EDIT
MULTI ZONE
FM/AM
PRESET/
TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MIC
OPTIMIZER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
CONTROL
SELECT
AUDIO
TONE
REC OUT/
ZONE2
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
YPAO
ZONE 3
R
L
OPTICAL
USB
ZONE 2
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
4 3231
(U.S.A. model)
INPUT
Front panel
FM/AM
FM AM
or
MODE
TUNING
AUTO
A FM 97.70MHz
Lights upNo colon (:)
EDIT
TUNIN
G
PRESET/
TUNED
A FM 97.70MHz
PRESET/TUNING
Lights up
58 En
FM/AM TUNING
If the signal received from the station you want to select is
weak, tune into it manually.
Manually tuning into an FM station automatically switches the
tuner to monaural reception to increase the signal quality.
1 Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER”
as the input source.
2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band.
“FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display.
3 Press TUNING MODE so that the AUTO
indicator disappears from the front panel
display.
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning
is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to
turn the colon (:) off.
4 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h to tune
into the desired station manually.
Hold down the button to continue searching.
Manual tuning
Note
ON/OFF
MASTER
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
ENHANCER
NIGHT
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROLS
MODE
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
MULTI ZONE
FM/AM
PRESET/
TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MIC
OPTIMIZER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
CONTROL
SELECT
AUDIO
TONE
REC OUT/
ZONE2
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
YPAO
ZONE 3
R
L
OPTICAL
USB
ZONE 2
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
4 3231
(U.S.A. model)
INPUT
Front panel
FM/AM
FM AM
or
MODE
TUNING
A FM 97.70MHz
No colon (:)
EDIT
TUNING
PRESET/
PRESET/TUNING
59 En
FM/AM TUNING
BASIC
OPERATION
You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store up
to 40 FM stations with strong signals (A1 to E8: 8 preset
station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups) in
order. You can then recall any preset station easily by
selecting the preset station number.
1 Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER”
as the input source.
2 Press FM/AM to select “FM” as the reception
band.
“FM” appears in the front panel display.
3 Press and hold MEMORY for more than 3
seconds.
The preset station number as well as the MEMORY
and AUTO indicators flashes. After approximately 5
seconds, automatic presetting starts from the current
frequency and proceeds toward higher frequencies.
When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front
panel display shows the frequency of the last preset
station.
y
• You can specify the preset number from which this unit
stores FM stations. Press A/B/C/D/E and then PRESET/
TUNING/CH l / h repeatedly after you perform step 3
to select the preset station number under which the first
station will be stored.
• You can begin tuning toward lower frequencies to store
FM stations automatically. Press PRESET/TUNING so
that the colon (:) disappears from the front panel display
and then press PRESET/TUNING/CH l after pressing
and holding MEMORY for more than 3 seconds.
• Any stored station data existing under a preset station
number is cleared when you store a new station under the
same preset station number.
• If the number of received stations does not reach 40 (E8),
automatic preset tuning automatically stops after
searching for all the available stations.
• Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored
automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station
you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it
manually and store it as described in “Manual preset
tuning” on page 60.
Automatic preset tuning
ON/OFF
MASTER
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
ENHANCER
NIGHT
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROLS
MODE
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
MULTI ZONE
FM/AM
PRESET/
TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MIC
OPTIMIZER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
CONTROL
SELECT
AUDIO
TONE
REC OUT/
ZONE2
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
YPAO
ZONE 3
R
L
OPTICAL
USB
ZONE 2
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
321
(U.S.A. model)
INPUT
Front panel
FM/AM
FM
Notes
AUTO
MEMORY
A1:FM 97.70MHz
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
Flashes
Flashes
60 En
FM/AM TUNING
You can also store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset
station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups)
manually.
1 Tune into a station automatically or manually.
See pages 57 and 58 for tuning instructions.
2 Press MEMORY.
The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel
display for approximately 5 seconds.
3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset
station group (A to E) while the MEMORY
indicator is flashing.
The selected preset station group letter appears.
Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel
display.
4 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h to select a
preset station number (1 to 8) while the
MEMORY indicator is flashing.
•Press h to select a higher preset station number.
•Press l to select a lower preset station number.
5 Press MEMORY while the MEMORY indicator
is flashing.
The station band and frequency appear in the front
panel display with the preset station group and
number you have selected. The MEMORY indicator
disappears from the front panel display.
• Any stored station data existing under a preset station
number is cleared when you store a new station under the
same preset station number.
• The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along
with the station frequency.
Manual preset tuning
ON/OFF
MASTER
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
ENHANCER
NIGHT
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROLS
MODE
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
MULTI ZONE
FM/AM
PRESET/
TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MIC
OPTIMIZER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
CONTROL
SELECT
AUDIO
TONE
REC OUT/
ZONE2
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
YPAO
ZONE 3
R
L
OPTICAL
USB
ZONE 2
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
4 2,53
(U.S.A. model)
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MEMORY
Flashes
A/B/C/D/E
MEMORY
A :FM 97.70MHz
Preset station
group
Flashe
s
Colon (:)
Notes
PRESET/TUNING
MEMORY
A1:FM 97.70MHz
Preset station number
Flashes
A1:FM 97.70MHz
The displayed station has been stored as A1.
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
61 En
FM/AM TUNING
BASIC
OPERATION
You can tune into any desired station simply by selecting
the preset station group and number under which it was
stored.
y
When performing this operation with the remote control, set the
operation mode selector to SOURCE and then press TUNER to
select “TUNER” as the input source.
1 Press A/B/C/D/E on the front panel (or set the
operation mode selector to SOURCE and
then press A-E/CAT. l / h on the remote
control) to select the desired preset station
group (A to E).
The preset station group letter appears in the front
panel display and changes each time you press the
button.
2 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the
front panel (or PRESET/CH k / n on the
remote control) to select the desired preset
station number (1 to 8).
The preset station group and number appear in the
front panel display along with the station band and
frequency.
Selecting preset stations
ON/OFF
MASTER
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
ENHANCER
NIGHT
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROLS
MODE
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
MULTI ZONE
FM/AM
PRESET/
TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MIC
OPTIMIZER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
CONTROL
SELECT
AUDIO
TONE
REC OUT/
ZONE2
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
YPAO
ZONE 3
R
L
OPTICAL
USB
ZONE 2
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
21
(U.S.A. model)
(U.S.A. model)
VOLUME
CH
TV VOL
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
A/B/C/D/E
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
BAND
LEVEL
TV
SOURCE
AMP
–
+
+
––
+
ENTER
DISPLAY
AUDIO
MENU
TITLE
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
RETURN
1,2
1
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
TV
SOURCE
AMP
or
Front panel
Remote control
PRESET/TUNING
A1:FM 97.70MHz
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
or
Front panel
Remote control
62 En
FM/AM TUNING
You can exchange the assignments of two preset stations
with each other. The example below describes the
procedure to exchange preset station “E1” with “A5”.
1 Select preset station “E1” using A/B/C/D/E
and PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h.
See “Selecting preset stations” on page 61.
2 Press and hold EDIT for more than 3
seconds.
“E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front
panel display.
3 Select preset station “A5” using A/B/C/D/E
and PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h.
“A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front
panel display.
See “Selecting preset stations” on page 61.
4 Press EDIT again.
“EDIT E1–A5” appears in the front panel display and
the assignments of the two preset stations are
exchanged.
Exchanging preset stations
ON/OFF
MASTER
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
ENHANCER
NIGHT
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROLS
MODE
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
MULTI ZONE
FM/AM
PRESET/
TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MIC
OPTIMIZER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
CONTROL
SELECT
AUDIO
TONE
REC OUT/
ZONE2
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
YPAO
ZONE 3
R
L
OPTICAL
USB
ZONE 2
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
3 2,43
(U.S.A. model)
EDIT
TUNING
PRESET/
MEMORY
E1:FM 97.70MHz
FlashesFlashes
MEMORY
A5:FM 97.70MHz
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/TUNING
Flashes
Flashes
EDIT E1-A5
EDIT
TUNING
PRESET/
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
63 En
BASIC
OPERATION
XM Satellite Radio is a satellite radio service with millions of listeners across the United States and Canada,
broadcasting live daily. The XM Satellite Radio channel lineup includes over 160 digital channels of choice from coast to
coast: 67 commercial-free music channels, featuring hip hop to opera, classical to country, bluegrass to blues; 33
channels of premier sports, talk, comedy, children’s and entertainment programming; and more than 20 channels of the
traffic and weather information for major metropolitan areas nationwide.
Because XM Satellite Radio is a subscription service, you will need to set up an account and activate service with XM
using your XM Satellite Radio ID number. To check your ID number, follow “Activating XM Satellite Radio” on
page 65. For further information on XM Satellite Radio services, visit the XM Satellite Radio website at
“http://www.xmradio.com/” (for residents in the United States) or “http://www.xmradio.ca/” (for residents in Canada).
This unit is equipped with the Neural Surround decoder (U.S.A. and Canada models only) that plays back the surround
sound content of the XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels, resulting in a full surround sound experience.
• The XM Satellite Radio service is only available in the 48
contiguous United States (not available in Alaska and Hawaii)
and Canada.
• XM Passport System and monthly subscription are sold
separately. For details, visit the XM Satellite Radio website at
“http://www.xmradio.com/” (for residents in the United States)
or “http://www.xmradio.ca/” (for residents in Canada).
• For information on obtaining the XM Passport System, visit the
XM Satellite Radio website at
“http://www.xmradio.com/” (for residents in the United States)
or “http://www.xmradio.ca/” (for residents in Canada), or
consult your local retailer that sells XM Ready products.
• To ensure optimal reception of the XM Satellite Radio signals,
the XM Passport System must be placed at or near a southerly
facing window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. You can
mount it indoors or outdoors.
■ Information from XM Satellite Radio Inc.
XM monthly service subscription sold separately. XM
Passport and XM Passport Home Dock required to receive
XM service (sold separately). Installation costs and other
fees and taxes, including a one-time activation fee may
apply. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and
programming subject to change. Channels with frequent
explicit language are indicated with an “XL”. Channel
blocking is available for XM radio receivers by calling “1-
800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346)” (for residents in the
United States) or “1-877-GET-XMSR (1-877-438-9677)”
(for residents in Canada). Subscriptions subject to
Customer Agreement available at “http://
www.xmradio.com/” (for residents in the United States) or
“http://www.xmradio.ca/” (for residents in Canada). XM
service only available in the 48 continuous United States
and Canada. “XM Ready” is a trademark of XM Satellite
Radio Inc. © 2006 XM Satellite Radio Inc. All rights
reserved.
Connect XM Passport and XM Passport Home Dock (sold
separately) to the XM jack on the rear panel of this unit.
For details, see the operating instructions provided with
XM Passport System.
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
Notes
Connecting the XM Passport System
XM
XM Passport and
XM Passport Home Dock
(sold separately)
(U.S.A. model)
64 En
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
The following controls are available only when “XM” is selected as the input source. Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or
set the operation mode selector to SOURCE and then press XM on the remote control) to select “XM” as the input source.
■ Front panel functions
1 INPUT selector
Selects “XM” as the input source.
2 CATEGORY
(All Channel Search mode)
Changes the channel category while staying in the All
Channel Search mode.
(Category Search mode)
Changes the channel category.
(Preset Search mode)
Changes the preset channel group (A to E).
3 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h
(All Channel Search mode)
Searches for a channel within all channels. Press and hold
for quick search.
(Category Search mode)
Searches for a channel within the selected category. Press
and hold for quick search.
(Preset Search mode)
Changes the preset channel number (1 to 8).
4 SEARCH MODE
Changes the search mode between the All Channel
Search, Category Search, and Preset Search modes
(see page 68).
5 MEMORY
Stores a preset channel in the memory (see page 72).
6 DISPLAY
Displays the XM Satellite Radio information such as
channel number, channel name, category, artist name, or
song title displayed in the front panel display or in the
OSD (see page 73).
■ Remote control functions
1 XM
Selects “XM” as the input source.
2 PRESET/CH k / n
(All Channel Search mode)
Searches for a channel within all channels. Press and hold
for quick search.
(Category Search mode)
Searches for a channel within the selected category. Press
and hold for quick search.
(Preset Search mode)
Changes the preset channel number (1 to 8).
3 MEMORY
Stores a preset channel in the memory (see page 72).
4 Numeric buttons
(All Channel Search or Category Search mode)
Use 1 to 9 and 0 to enter a channel number directly.
(Preset Search mode)
Use 1 to 8 to enter a preset channel number directly.
XM Satellite Radio controls and functions
Note
INPUT
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROLS
DISPLAY
MODE
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
SEARCH MODE
EDIT
MULTI ZONE
FM/AM
PRESET/
TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MIC
OPTIMIZER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
CATEGORY
CONTROL
SELECT
AUDIO
TONE
REC OUT/
ZONE2
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
YPAO
ZONE 3
R
L
OPTICAL
ZONE 2
AUDI O
VIDEO AUX
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
6432 5
1
(U.S.A. model)
ON
OFF
CLEAR
LEARN
RENAME
MACRO
REC
NET RADIO
USB
PC/MCX
VOLUME
CH
TV VOL
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
A-E/CAT.
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
BAND
LEVEL
ENHANCER
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
NIGHT
MEMORY
1
2
TV
SOURCE
AMP
SELECT
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
AUDIO SEL
POWER
POWER
POWER
STANDBY
XM
NET/USB
–
2
+
+
––
+
ENTER
DISPLAY
AUDI O
MENU
TITLE
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
4
3
ENT
+
10
0
9
5
1
AV
TV
7
6
8
RETURN
V
-
AUX/DOCK
6
2
3
4
8
1
7
5
TUNER
CD
CD-R
DTV
NET/USB
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
VCR 1
DVD
V-AUX/DOCK
DVR/VCR 2
POWER
XM
STANDBY
A-E/CAT.
PRESET/CH
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET
VOLUME
ZONE 3
ZONE 2
ID2
ID1
NUMBER
CAT.
ALL
PRESET
DISPLAY
MUTE
1
2
3
4
5
ENT
6
7
8
9
0
4
1
0
B
A
7
8
9
2
6
(U.S.A. model)
Set to
SOURCE
65 En
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
BASIC
OPERATION
5 SRCH MODE
Changes the search mode between the All Channel
Search, Category Search, and Preset Search modes
(see page 68).
6 A-E/CAT. l / h
(All Channel Search mode)
Changes the channel category.
(Category Search mode)
Changes the channel category.
(Preset Search mode)
Changes the preset channel group (A to E).
7 DISPLAY
Displays the XM Satellite Radio information such as
channel number, channel name, category, artist name, or
song title displayed in the front panel display or on the
video monitor (see page 73).
8 ENT
Confirms an entered channel number in the Direct
Number Access mode (see page 71).
9 ALL
Selects the All Channel Search mode (see page 68).
0 NUMBER
Press and hold before you press the input selector or
numeric buttons to switch the function to entering
numbers.
A PRESET
Selects the Preset Search Mode (see page 70).
B CAT.
Selects the Category Search mode (see page 69).
To sign up for an account with the XM Satellite Radio
service, an XM Satellite Radio ID number is required.
Follow the procedure below to check your ID number, and
then visit the website or call toll-free with a major credit
card handy for signing up.
For residents in the United States
URL: http://activate.xmradio.com/
Toll-free: 1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346)
For residents in Canada
URL: https://activate.xmradio.ca/on-line-activation/
activation.jsp
Toll-free: 1-877-GET-XMSR (1-877-438-9677)
Activating XM Satellite Radio
66 En
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
1 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel
(or set the operation mode selector to
SOURCE and then press XM on the remote
control) to select “XM” as the input source.
The cursor on the left of the XM indicator lights up in
the front panel display.
2 Check the XM Satellite Radio reception level
and adjust the orientation of XM Passport
System for a better percentage of the
reception level.
y
You can display the XM Satellite Radio reception level by
using the “Antenna Level” parameter in “Input Select” (see
page 94).
• If “CHECK ANTENNA” appears in the front panel
display, XM Passport System may not be connected to the
XM jack on the rear panel of this unit properly. See
“Connecting the XM Passport System” on page 63 and
check the connection.
• The “Antenna Level” parameter in “Input Select” (See
page 94) cannot be adjusted by using the remote control.
Instead, you need to adjust the orientation of XM Passport
System connected to the XM jack of this unit for a better
percentage of the reception level.
3 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the
front panel (or PRESET/CH k / n on the
remote control) to select channel “0”.
You cannot select channel “0” if the All Channel Search
mode (see page 68) is not selected.
4 Check the XM Satellite Radio ID number
displayed in the front panel display and write
it down.
ID:_____________________________________
ON/OFF
MASTER
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
ENHANCER
NIGHT
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROLS
DISPLAY
MODE
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
SEARCH MODE
EDIT
MULTI ZONE
FM/AM
PRESET/
TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MIC
OPTIMIZER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
CATEGORY
CONTROL
SELECT
AUDIO
TONE
REC OUT/
ZONE2
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
YPAO
ZONE 3
R
L
OPTICAL
USB
ZONE 2
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
31
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
AUDIO SEL
POWER
POWER
POWER
STANDBY
XM
NET/USB
AV
TV
V
-
AUX/DOCK
VOLUME
CH
TV VOL
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
A-E/CAT.
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
BAND
LEVEL
TV
SOURCE
AMP
–
+
+
––
+
ENTER
DISPLAY
AUDIO
MENU
TITLE
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
RETURN
1
3
1
(U.S.A. model)
(U.S.A. model)
INPUT
XM
CD-R
CD
PHONO
M
ULTI
CH
TUNER
XM
MD/TAPE
DVD
DTV
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DVR/VCR 2
V-AUX
TV
SOURCE
AMP
or
Front panel
Lights up
Remote control
Notes
Note
PRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
Remote control
Front panel
or
67 En
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
BASIC
OPERATION
1 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel
(or set the operation mode selector to
SOURCE and then press XM on the remote
control) to select “XM” as the input source.
The cursor on the left of the XM indicator lights up in
the front panel display and the XM Satellite Radio
information (such as channel number, channel name,
category, artist name, or song title) for the currently
selected channel appears in the front panel display.
y
When you select “XM” as the input source, this unit
automatically recalls the previously selected channel.
The XM Satellite Radio signals cannot be output at the
AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks.
2 Search for a channel by using one of the XM
Satellite Radio search modes.
• To select a channel from the all channel list, see
“All Channel Search mode” on page 68.
• To select a channel by category, see “Category
Search mode” on page 69.
• To select a channel from the preset channels, see
“Preset Search mode” on page 70.
• To select the desired channel directly by entering
the channel number, see “Direct Number Access
mode” on page 71.
y
• You can use the Neural Surround decoder to enjoy the
surround sound content of XM Satellite Radio broadcasts
in multi-channels (see page 84).
• You can set the XM Satellite Radio preset channels (see
page 72).
• You can display the XM Satellite Radio information in the
front panel display or on the video monitor (see page 73).
Basic XM Satellite Radio
operations
VOLUME
CH
TV VOL
TV
SOURCE
AMP
SELECT
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
AUDIO SEL
POWER
POWER
POWER
STANDBY
XM
NET/USB
–
+
+
––
+
AV
TV
V
-
AUX/DOCK
(U.S.A. model)
ON/OFF
MASTER
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
ENHANCER
NIGHT
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROLS
DISPLAY
MODE
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
SEARCH MODE
EDIT
MULTI ZONE
FM/AM
PRESET/
TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MIC
OPTIMIZER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
CATEGORY
CONTROL
SELECT
AUDIO
TONE
REC OUT/
ZONE2
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
YPAO
ZONE 3
R
L
OPTICAL
USB
ZONE 2
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
(U.S.A. model)
INPUT selector
XM button
Set to SOURCE
Note
INPUT
XM
CD-R
CD
PHONO
MULTI CH
TUNER
XM
MD/TAPE
DVD
DTV
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DVR/VCR 2
V-AUX
[001] Preview
TV
SOURCE
AMP
Lights up
Remote control
or
Front panel
68 En
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
■ All Channel Search mode
1 Press SEARCH MODE on the front panel (or
SRCH MODE on the remote control)
repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH”.
2 Press CATEGORY on the front panel (or
A-E/CAT. l / h on the remote control)
repeatedly to change the channel category.
3 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the
front panel (or PRESET/CH k / n on the
remote control) repeatedly to search for a
channel within all channels.
y
You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and
holding PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel
(or PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control).
ON/OFF
MASTER
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
ENHANCER
NIGHT
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROLS
DISPLAY
MODE
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
SEARCH MODE
EDIT
MULTI ZONE
FM/AM
PRESET/
TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MIC
OPTIMIZER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
CATEGORY
CONTROL
SELECT
AUDIO
TONE
REC OUT/
ZONE2
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
YPAO
ZONE 3
R
L
OPTICAL
USB
ZONE 2
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
2 3 1
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
A-E/CAT.
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
BAND
LEVEL
ENTER
DISPLAY
AUDI O
MENU
TITLE
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
RETURN
2,3
1
(U.S.A. model)
(U.S.A. model)
EDIT
TUNING
PRESET/
MENU
SRCH MODE
SET MENU
ALL CH SEARCH
or
Front panel Remote control
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
Front panel Remote control
or
PRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
Remote control
Front panel
or
69 En
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
BASIC
OPERATION
■ Category Search mode
1 Press SEARCH MODE on the front panel (or
SRCH MODE on the remote control)
repeatedly to select “CAT SEARCH”.
2 Press CATEGORY on the front panel (or
A-E/CAT. l / h on the remote control)
repeatedly to change the channel category.
3 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the
front panel (or PRESET/CH k / n on the
remote control) repeatedly to search for a
channel within the selected channel
category.
y
You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and
holding PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel
(or PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control).
ON/OFF
MASTER
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
ENHANCER
NIGHT
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROLS
DISPLAY
MODE
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
SEARCH MODE
EDIT
MULTI ZONE
FM/AM
PRESET/
TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MIC
OPTIMIZER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
CATEGORY
CONTROL
SELECT
AUDIO
TONE
REC OUT/
ZONE2
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
YPAO
ZONE 3
R
L
OPTICAL
USB
ZONE 2
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
2 3 1
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
A-E/CAT.
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
BAND
LEVEL
ENTER
DISPLAY
AUDI O
MENU
TITLE
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
RETURN
2,3
1
(U.S.A. model)
(U.S.A. model)
EDIT
TUNIN
G
PRESET/
MENU
SRCH MODE
SET MENU
CAT SEARCH
or
Front panel Remote control
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
Front panel Remote control
or
PRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
Remote control
Front panel
or
70 En
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
■ Preset Search mode
Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search
mode, you must preset XM Satellite Radio channels. For
details, see “Setting the XM Satellite Radio preset
channels” on page 72.
y
The initial factory setting of all preset channels (A1 to E8) is
“[001] Preview”.
1 Press SEARCH MODE on the front panel (or
SRCH MODE on the remote control)
repeatedly to select “PRESET SEARCH”.
2 Press CATEGORY on the front panel (or
A-E/CAT. l / h on the remote control)
repeatedly to change the preset channel
group (A to E).
3 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the
front panel (or PRESET/CH k / n on the
remote control) repeatedly to change the
preset channel number (1 to 8).
y
You can also select the preset channel number directly by
pressing the numeric buttons (1 to 8) on the remote control.
ON/OFF
MASTER
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
ENHANCER
NIGHT
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROLS
DISPLAY
MODE
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
SEARCH MODE
EDIT
MULTI ZONE
FM/AM
PRESET/
TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MIC
OPTIMIZER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
CATEGORY
CONTROL
SELECT
AUDIO
TONE
REC OUT/
ZONE2
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
YPAO
ZONE 3
R
L
OPTICAL
USB
ZONE 2
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
2 3 1
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
A-E/CAT.
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
BAND
LEVEL
ENTER
DISPLAY
AUDI O
MENU
TITLE
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
RETURN
2,3
1
(U.S.A. model)
(U.S.A. model)
EDIT
TUNING
PRESET/
MENU
SRCH MODE
SET MENU
PRESET SEARCH
or
Front panel Remote control
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
Front panel Remote control
or
PRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
Remote control
Front panel
or
71 En
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
BASIC
OPERATION
■ Direct Number Access mode
1 Press SRCH MODE on the remote control
repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH” or
“CAT SEARCH”.
2 Press the numeric buttons on the remote
control to enter the desired three-digit
channel number.
For example, to enter the number 123, press the
numeric buttons as shown below.
The display changes as follows.
y
• To enter a one-digit or two-digit channel number, press the
numeric buttons on the remote control and then press ENT
to confirm the input number.
• Instead of pressing ENT to tune into the channel
immediately, you can wait a few seconds until this unit
confirms the entered channel number.
• If no button is pressed within a few seconds after you enter
a one-digit or two-digit number, this unit automatically
confirms the entered channel number.
• Pressing a button other than the numeric buttons or ENT
cancels the Direct Number Access mode procedure.
EFFECT
PARAMETER
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
A-E/CAT.
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
BAND
LEVEL
ENHANCER
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
NIGHT
MEMORY
1
2
2
ENTER
DISPLAY
AUDI O
MENU
TITLE
4
3
ENT
+
10
0
9
5
1
7
6
8
RETURN
2
1
(U.S.A. model)
ALL CH SEARCH
CAT SEARCH
or
MENU
SRCH MODE
SET MENU
Remote control
1
CLASSICAL
2
LIVE/CLUB
3
ENTERTAIN
<XM> --1
<XM> -12
<XM>123
72 En
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
You can use this feature to store up to 40 XM Satellite
Radio channels (A1 to E8: 8 preset channel numbers in
each of the 5 preset channel groups). You can then recall
any preset channel easily by selecting the preset channel
group and number as described in “Preset Search mode”
on page 70.
1 Search for a channel you want to set as a
preset channel by using one of the XM
Satellite Radio search modes.
See “Basic XM Satellite Radio operations” on
page 67 for details.
2 Press MEMORY on the front panel (or
MEMORY on the remote control).
The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel
display for approximately 5 seconds.
You must proceed to and carry out steps 3 through 5 while
the MEMORY indicator is flashing in the front panel
display.
3 Press CATEGORY on the front panel (or
A-E/CAT. l / h on the remote control)
repeatedly to select a preset channel group
(A to E) while the MEMORY indicator is
flashing.
The preset channel group letter appears in the front
panel display.
Setting the XM Satellite Radio
preset channels
ON/OFF
MASTER
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
ENHANCER
NIGHT
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROLS
DISPLAY
MODE
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
SEARCH MODE
EDIT
MULTI ZONE
FM/AM
PRESET/
TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MIC
OPTIMIZER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
CATEGORY
CONTROL
SELECT
AUDIO
TONE
REC OUT/
ZONE2
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
YPAO
ZONE 3
R
L
OPTICAL
USB
ZONE 2
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
4 2,53
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
A-E/CAT.
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
BAND
LEVEL
ENTER
DISPLAY
AUDI O
MENU
TITLE
RETURN
3,4
2,5
(U.S.A. model)
(U.S.A. model)
[043] XMU
Currently selected channel number
Note
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MEMORY
RETURN
MEMORY
Flashes
or
Front panel Remote control
MEMORY
C [043] XMU
C
urrently selected preset channel group
A/B/C/D/E
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
Front panel
Remote control
or
Flashes
73 En
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
BASIC
OPERATION
4 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the
front panel (or PRESET/CH k / n on the
remote control) repeatedly to select a preset
channel number (1 to 8) while the MEMORY
indicator is flashing.
The preset channel number appears in the front panel
display.
5 Press MEMORY on the front panel (or
MEMORY on the remote control) to set the
selected XM Satellite Radio channel as a
preset channel while the MEMORY indicator
is flashing.
A colon (:) appears next to the preset channel number
for confirmation, and the MEMORY indicator turns
off in the front panel display.
Once you set a new preset channel, the one previously
stored in the same preset channel group and number is
cleared.
You can display the XM Satellite Radio information (such
as channel number, channel name, category, artist name,
or song title) for the currently selected channel in the front
panel display or in the OSD.
If a status message or an error message appears in the front panel
display or on the video monitor, see the “XM Satellite Radio
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)” section in
“TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 139 for appropriate remedies.
■ Displaying the XM Satellite Radio
information in the front panel display
Press DISPLAY on the front panel or on the
remote control repeatedly to toggle between the
following XM Satellite Radio information display
modes.
Note
MEMORY
C5 [043] XMU
Currently selected preset channel number
PRESET/TUNING
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
Remote control
Front panel
or
Flashes
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
RETURN
MEMORY
Front panel
Remote control
or
C5: [043] XMU
Colon (:)
Displaying the XM Satellite Radio
information
Note
ON/OFF
MASTER
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
ENHANCER
NIGHT
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROLS
DISPLAY
MODE
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING/CH
SEARCH MODE
EDIT
MULTI ZONE
FM/AM
PRESET/
TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MIC
OPTIMIZER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
CATEGORY
CONTROL
SELECT
AUDIO
TONE
REC OUT/
ZONE2
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
YPAO
ZONE 3
R
L
OPTICAL
USB
ZONE 2
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
(U.S.A. model)
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
A-E/CAT.
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
BAND
LEVEL
ENTER
DISPLAY
AUDI O
MENU
TITLE
RETURN
(U.S.A. model)
DISPLAY
DISPLAY
MODE
TUNING
DISPLAY
Channel number / name
Channel category
Artist name / Song title
or
Front panel
Remote control
74 En
XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING
When the channel number / name is displayed:
When the channel category is displayed:
When the artist name / song title is displayed:
y
• The front panel display can indicate up to 14 alphanumeric
characters at once. You can set whether to display the XM
Satellite Radio information in the front panel display in a
continuous manner or by 14 alphanumeric characters at once by
using the “Scroll” parameter in “Front Panel Disp.” (see
page 112).
• If the XM Satellite Radio information contains a character that
cannot be recognized by this unit, the character will be
displayed with a space.
If you press DISPLAY while the XM Satellite Radio information
display is scrolling from right to left in the front panel display, the
XM Satellite Radio information display mode toggles as
described above.
■ Displaying the XM Satellite Radio
information on the video monitor
Press DISPLAY on the remote control.
The following information screen is displayed on the
video monitor.
y
• To turn off the displayed information screen, press DISPLAY
on the front panel (or on the remote control).
• You can select the amount of time the XM Satellite Radio
information is displayed in on the video monitor by using the
“On Screen” parameter in “Manual Setup” (see page 103).
• To hold the XM Satellite Radio information screen, press
ENTER on the remote control while it is being displayed on the
video monitor.
• The XM Satellite Radio information screen on hold is released
if you press ENTER on the remote control again or if you
change the XM Satellite Radio channel.
• This unit can save up to two XM Satellite Radio information
screens for future reference. To view the previous two XM
Satellite Radio information screens, press TITLE on the remote
control repeatedly while the current XM Satellite Radio
information screen is being hold.
Note
[043] XMU
<CAT>Rock
Coldplay / Spe
DISPLAY
MODE
TUNING
Hold : ENTER
All CH Search
XM Information
Speed of soundTITLE
ColdplayNAME
043CH NUMBER
XMUCH NAME
RockCATEGORY
Remote controlFront panel
or
USING IPOD
75 En
BASIC
OPERATION
Once you have stationed your iPod in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected
to the DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 29), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control.
You can also use the Compressed Music Enhancer mode of this unit to improve the sound quality of the compression
artifacts (such as the MP3 format) stored on your iPod (see page 54).
• Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported.
• Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod.
y
• For a complete list of the remote control functions used to control your iPod, see the “iPod” column in “Controlling other
components” on page 119.
• For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and on the video monitor, see the “iPod” section in
“TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 147.
• Once your iPod is stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK
terminal of this unit, this unit begins signal transmission with your iPod.
• Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod connected” appears in the front panel display and the DOCK
indicator lights up in the front panel display.
• Only the analog audio and video signals of your iPod are input at the DOCK terminal, and the analog audio signals can be output at the
analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording.
• Your iPod battery is automatically charged when your iPod is stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold
separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit as long as this unit is turned on. You can also select whether this unit charges
the battery of the stationed iPod or not when this unit is in the standby mode by selecting the “Standby Charge” parameter in “iPod”
(see page 104).
• While the stationed iPod is being charged in the standby mode of this unit, the battery charge indicator (see page 12) appears in the
front panel display. Once the charge is complete (or after 4 hours from the start of the charge), the indicator disappears.
You can control your iPod when “V-AUX” is selected as
the input source. The operations of your iPod can be done
with the aid of the GUI screen of this unit (menu browse
mode) or without it (simple remote mode).
■ Controlling iPod in the simple remote
mode
You can perform the basic operations of your iPod (play,
stop, skip, etc.) using the supplied remote control without
the aid of the GUI screen of this unit.
y
• You can view the photos or video clips stored on your iPod.
• Operations can be also done with the controls on your iPod.
■ Controlling iPod in the menu browse
mode
You can perform the advanced operations of your iPod
using the supplied remote control with the aid of the GUI
screen of this unit. The name of the song being played
appears in the front panel display according to the “Scroll”
parameter in “Front Panel Disp.” (see page 112). You can
also browse the songs stored on your iPod in the GUI
screen. Further, you can change or adjust settings for your
iPod to suit your personal preferences.
• Operations cannot be done with the controls on your iPod.
• The YAMAHA logo appears in the display window of your
iPod.
• There are some characters that cannot be displayed in the front
panel display or in the GUI screen of this unit. Those characters
are replaced with underscores “_”.
• The “Settings” parameters can be changed or adjusted only in
the GUI screen. Press ENTER on the remote control to toggle
between the “Settings” parameter settings.
• You cannot browse the photos or video clips stored on your
iPod in the GUI screen. Instead, you must use the controls on
your iPod to select the desired photos or video clips.
• You can select the amount of time the GUI screen of iPod is
displayed in on the video monitor by using the “On Screen”
parameter in “Manual Setup” (see page 103).
USING iPod
Notes
Controlling iPod
Notes
76 En
USING iPod
1 Set the operation mode selector to SOURCE
and then press DISPLAY on the remote
control.
The following display appears in the video monitor.
2 Press k / n / l / h on the remote control to
navigate the iPod menu and then press
ENTER to begin playback of the selected
song.
Choices: Playlists (playlists), Artists (artists),
Albums (albums), Songs (songs),
Genres (genres), Composers (composers),
Settings (settings)
• Playlists > Songs
• Artists > Albums > Songs
• Albums > Songs
• Songs
• Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs
• Composers > Albums > Songs
• Settings > Shuffle, Repeat
Shuffle (Shuffle)
Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in
random order.
Choices: Off, Songs, Albums
• Select “Off” to deactivate this feature.
• Select “Songs” to set this unit to play songs in random
order.
• Select “Albums” to set this unit to play albums in
random order.
When “Shuffle” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, “ ” appears
in the top right corner while songs or albums are being shuffled.
Repeat (Repeat)
Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a
sequence of songs.
Choices: Off, One, All
• Select “Off” to deactivate this feature.
• Select “One” to set this unit to repeat one song.
• Select “All” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of
songs.
When “Repeat” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, “ ” or “ ”
appears in the top right corner while one song or a sequence of
songs are being repeated.
■ The functions of the play information
display
1 Track number/total tracks
2 Name of the album
3 Name of the song
4 Elapsed time
5 h (playback) or e (pausing)
6 Shuffle and repeat icons
7 Name of the artist
8 Progress bar
9 Remaining time
DISPLAY
TV
SOURCE
AMP
Top
Playlists
Artists
Albums
Songs
Genres
Composers
Settings
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
Note
Note
0:51 -7:44
Play Information
Road to India
Made-to-order
Frankie Zipper
1/9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES
77 En
BASIC
OPERATION
This unit is equipped with network and USB features that allow you to enjoy WAV (PCM format only), MP3 and WMA
files saved on your PC, YAMAHA MCX-2000, USB memory device and USB portable audio player or access the
Internet Radio.
• YAMAHA MCX-2000 may not be for sale in some locations.
• For further details about networking, refer to the operation manuals supplied with your network devices. Also refer to technical
reference books, if needed.
• Some WAV, MP3 and WMA files may not be playable or may be noisy when played.
y
• For a complete list of the remote control functions used to control the network and USB features, see the “PC/MCX-2000/Internet
Radio/USB” column in “Controlling other components” on page 119.
• For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and on the video monitor, see the “Network and USB”
section in “TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 144.
The following diagram shows the construction of the network and USB menu.
*
Only the available PC servers and MCX-2000 are displayed.
USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES
Notes
Navigating the network and USB menus
Note
NET/USB
PC/MusicCAST
(MCX-2000)
Artists
Albums
Songs
Genres
Popular Stations
New Stations
USB
Recall Play
Server* Playlists
Internet Radio
Files/Directories
Help
Locations
Podcasts
Bookmarks
Genres
Selects a song by playlist stored on the server. Refer to the documents of
the server for details about the playlist file format, the process of creating
the playlist file, etc.
Makes this unit recall play from MCX-2000 or another client. For details,
refer to the instruction manual of MCX-2000.
Selects a song by genre. In addition, you can select an album within the
genre (MCX-2000 only).
Selects a song by album.
Selects a song by artist. In addition, you can select an album within the
artist (MCX-2000 only).
Selects an Internet Radio station that has been added to the “Bookmarks” list (see page 80).
Selects an Internet Radio station or a Podcast service by location.
Broadcasts voice-assisted guidelines on various topics of the related Internet service.
Selects a file by navigating directories.
Selects an Internet Radio station or a Podcast service by genre.
Selects an Internet Radio station from the ones that have recently started the service.
Selects an Internet Radio station from the list of popular stations.
Selects a Podcast service by location or genre.
Selects a song directly.
78 En
USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES
The following procedure shows the basic steps to navigate
the network and USB menus. See pages 79 and 80 for
details about each sub input source.
“Please wait” may appear whenever it takes time for
communication. This is not a system malfunction. Wait for a
while.
1 Set the operation mode selector to SOURCE
and then press NET/USB on the remote
control to select “NET/USB” as the input
source.
The cursor on the left of the NET/USB indicator
lights up in the front panel display, and the contents
previously played for the corresponding sub input
source of NET/USB is automatically played.
2 Press DISPLAY on the remote control to
display the top NET/USB menu.
The following display appears on the video monitor.
If any other screen appears on the video monitor,
press MENU on the remote control repeatedly until
the top NET/USB menu appears.
3 Press k / n to select the desired sub input
source and then press h or ENTER.
y
You can also select the desired sub input source by pressing
the corresponding button on the remote control (see page 8).
4 Press k / n / l / h on the remote control to
select the desired song or Internet Radio
station.
•Press k / n to select the desired menu.
•Press h to enter the selected menu.
•Press l to return to the previous menu level.
y
•“h” in the right corner of each menu line indicates that
there is a submenu available in the next menu level.
• You can press ENTER or MENU to enter the selected
menu or to return to the previous menu level.
5 Press ENTER to play the selected song or to
listen to the selected station.
y
• See page 76 for details about the functions of the play
information display.
• Some items do not appear in the play information display
depending on the selected sub input source.
Note
TV
SOURCE
AMP
NET/USB
CD-R
CD
PHONO
M
ULTI
CH
TUNER
MD/TAPE
DVD
DTV
NET/USB
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DVR/VCR 2
V-AUX
Lights up
DISPLAY
Top
PC/MusicCAST
Internet Radio
USB
REC
NET RADIO
FREQ/TEXT EON
USB
PC/MCX
79 En
USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES
BASIC
OPERATION
Use this feature to enjoy music files saved on your PC or
YAMAHA MCX-2000. MCX-2000 is a music server that
enhances the concept of YAMAHA exclusive
MusicCAST, a digital music delivery method over a
personal network.
1 Install Windows Media Connect 2.0 on your
PC, or register this unit on your YAMAHA
MCX-2000.
• Refer to “Installing Windows Media Connect 2.0
on your PC” on page 79 and “Registering this unit
on the YAMAHA MCX-2000” on page 80.
• This procedure is needed only the first time.
2 Turn on your PC or MCX-2000.
The PC server or MCX-2000 is added to the server
list on the submenu of PC/MusicCAST.
3 Select a desired server or MusicCAST to
begin playback.
• YAMAHA MCX-2000 may not be for sale in some locations.
• You can connect this unit to up to 4 PC servers and 1
MCX-2000, and each server must be connected to the same
subnet as this unit.
• Some WAV, MP3 and WMA files on your PC may not be
playable or may be noisy when played.
• (MCX-2000 only) Files marked with an asterisk (*) have not
been converted to MP3 format. You cannot play back such files
immediately unless you set the “Receive PCM Stream” setting
of this unit to “ON” on MCX-2000. For details, refer to the
instruction manual of MCX-2000.
y
• While a song is being played, the time elapsed is displayed at
the bottom of the playback information screen.
• You can use b / a to skip backward/forward and h / s
to start/stop playback independently from the menu on the
video monitor.
• You can set the settings for repeat and shuffle mode by using the
“Play Style” parameters in “NET/USB” (see page 110).
• You can set whether to display the operation status in the front
panel display in a continuous manner or by the first 14
characters after scrolling all characters once by using “Scroll”
in “Front Panel Disp.” (see page 112).
■ Installing Windows Media Connect 2.0
on your PC
With Windows Media Connect 2.0, you can play back the
audio files on your PC. For details refer to the documents
of Windows Media Connect 2.0.
1 Install Windows Media Connect 2.0 on your
PC.
You can download the installer of Windows Media
Connect 2.0 from the Microsoft website.
2 Turn on your PC and then share a folder on
the PC.
The Shared folder is added to the server list on the
submenu of PC/MusicCAST.
• Some security software installed on your PC (anti-virus
software, firewall software, etc.) may block the access of this
unit to your PC. In such cases, configure the security software
appropriately.
• If you are using a PC with Windows XP Professional, and the
PC is logging on to a domain, you may not be able to connect
the PC server. In such cases, log on to the local machine instead
of the domain.
Using a PC server or YAMAHA
MCX-2000
Notes
Notes
80 En
USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES
■ Registering this unit on the YAMAHA
MCX-2000
You must register this unit on your YAMAHA MCX-2000
so that this unit can be recognized by your YAMAHA
MCX-2000. For details, refer to the operation manual
supplied with your YAMAHA MCX-2000.
1 Turn off this unit.
2 Set your YAMAHA MCX-2000 to the “Auto
Config” mode.
3 Turn on this unit.
• MCX-2000 is added to the server list on the
submenu of PC/MCX.
• The client ID of this unit appears in the OSD of
your YAMAHA MCX-2000 (shown as CL-
XXXXX), and this completes the automatic
configuration procedure.
• The latter part of the client ID of this unit is same as the last 5
digits of the MAC address of this unit. For details about MAC
address, see page 111.
• To clear the registered client ID of this unit, use the “Manual
Config” mode of your YAMAHA MCX-2000 (refer to the
instruction manual of MCX-2000) and then set “N-RESET” in
the advanced setup menu of this unit to “RESET” (see
page 136).
• The client control functions of MusicCAST over this unit other
than “View Play Info”, “Receive PCM Stream” and “Edit Client
title” are not available. Avoid using these functions as it will
stop the playback on this unit.
Use this feature to listen to Internet Radio stations. This
unit uses the vTuner Internet Radio station database
service particularly customized for this unit, providing
over 2000 radio station database. Further, you can store
your favorite stations with bookmarks.
• This service may be discontinued without notice.
• Some Internet Radio stations may not be played even if they are
selected in the NET RADIO menu.
• To listen to the Internet Radio, connect this unit to your network
(see page 30).
• A narrowband Internet connection (i.e. 56K modem, ISDN) will
not provide satisfactory results, and a broadband connection is
strongly recommended (i.e. a cable modem, an xDSL modem,
etc.). For detailed information, consult with your ISP.
y
• You can use h / s to start/stop playback independently from
the menu on the video monitor.
• “Podcast” is a type of the Internet Radio service, and there are a
number of Podcast services available on the Internet. The
Podcast is not a continuous service. That is, this unit stops
playback when an episode of the Podcast ends.
• Some security devices (such as firewall) may block the access
of this unit to Internet Radio stations. In such cases, configure
the security settings appropriately.
■ Storing your favorite Internet Radio
stations with bookmarks
Use this feature to select your favorite Internet Radio
stations quickly.
Press and hold TITLE on the remote control while
the selected Internet Radio station service is
being broadcast.
The stored Internet Radio station is added to the
“Bookmarks” list (see page 77).
y
To remove the stored station from the list, select the item in the
first level of the “Bookmarks” list and then press and hold TITLE
on the remote control.
Notes
Using the Internet Radio
Notes
81 En
USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES
BASIC
OPERATION
Use this feature to enjoy WAV (PCM format only), MP3
and WMA files saved on your USB memory device or
USB portable audio player connected to the USB port on
the front panel of this unit.
• This unit supports USB mass storage class devices using FAT
16 or FAT 32.
• Only the first partition is displayed in the GUI menu. You
cannot select files in other partitions.
• Up to 8 levels of directory hierarchy and 500 music files per
directory are recognized.
• Some devices may not work properly even if they meet the
requirements.
• Some WAV, MP3 and WMA files may not be playable or may
be noisy when played.
• When you connect your USB memory device or USB portable
audio player, there may be an about 10 seconds delay.
y
• While a song is being played, the time elapsed is displayed at
the bottom of the playback information screen.
• You can use b / a to skip backward/forward and h / s
to start/stop playback independently from the menu in the OSD.
• You can set the settings for repeat and shuffle mode by using the
“Play Style” parameters in “NET/USB” (see page 110).
• You can set whether to display the operation status in the front
panel display in a continuous manner or by the first 14
characters after scrolling all characters once by using “Scroll”
in “Front Panel Disp.” (see page 112).
■ Connecting a USB memory device or a
USB potable audio player
Connect a USB jack of a USB memory device or
USB portable audio player to the USB port on the
front panel of this unit.
Use this feature to access the desired music sources (WAV,
MP3 and WMA files on the connected PC, MCX-2000 or
USB storage devices and Internet Radio stations) directly.
You can preset 8 items in each sub input sources.
■ Assigning the items to the numeric
button (1-8)
1 Set the operation mode selector to SOURCE
and then press NET/USB on the remote
control to select “NET/USB” as the input
source.
2 Select a desired music source you want to
assign to the numeric button (1-8), and then
play back the source.
See page 78 for details.
3 Press MEMORY.
This unit in the memory preset mode. The MEMORY
indicator flashes and following message appears in
the video monitor and front panel display.
y
When you do not complete each of the following steps within 5
seconds, the memory preset mode is automatically canceled. In
this case, start over from step 3.
Using a USB memory device or a
USB portable audio player
Notes
ENHANCER
NIGHT
S
USB
USB memory device or USB
portable audio player
Using shortcut buttons
TV
SOURCE
AMP
NET/USB
RETURN
MEMORY
MEMORY
-:PC/MCX
FlashesPreset number
82 En
USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES
4 Press desired numeric buttons (1-8).
The number of the selected numeric button appears in
the video monitor or front panel display.
5 Press ENTER or MEMORY to confirm the
preset.
■ Select an item by using numeric buttons
(1-8)
1 Set the operation mode selector to SOURCE
and then press NET/USB on the remote
control to select “NET/USB” as the input
source.
2 Select the desired sub input source.
3 Press one of the numeric button (1-8) which
the desired item is assigned to select the
item as the input source.
The selected preset number appears in the front panel
display, and this unit starts the playback of the source
assigned to the selected numeric button.
• “Empty Memory!” appears in the front panel display and
the short message display when you press the numeric
button (1-8) to which no items are assigned.
• This unit does not recall the correct item assigned to the
selected numeric button (1-8) in the following cases:
– the connected USB device is incorrect.
– the PC or MCX-2000 which stores the selected item is
turned off or disconnected from the network.
– the selected Internet Radio station is temporary
unavailable or out of service.
– the directory of the selected item has been changed.
y
This unit stores the relative position of the preset items in a
directory or playlist, and does not recall the correct item by
using numeric buttons (1-8) if you add or delete music files
to or from the same directory or playlist as the preset items.
In such cases, preset the desired item to the numeric buttons
(1-8) again.
We recommend the following methods:
PC server/MCX-2000
Create eight playlists which contain desired items, and then
preset the top item of each playlist to the numeric buttons
(1-8). When you change the items which are preset to the
numeric buttons (1-8), replace the registered items in the
playlist with the desired items without deleting the playlist.
USB devices
Create eight directories which contain desired items in a
directory beside the directory which contains all music files,
and then preset the top item of each directory to the numeric
buttons (1-8). When you change the items which are preset
to the numeric buttons (1-8), replace the items in the
directory to the desired items without deleting the directory.
CD-R
CD
PHONO
M
ULTI
CH
TUNER
MD/TAPE
DVD
DTV
MEMORY
NET/USB
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DVR/VCR 2
V-AUX
1:PC/MCX
4
3
2
5
1
7
6
8
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
FlashesSelected preset number
RETURN
MEMORY
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
or
TV
SOURCE
AMP
NET/USB
REC
NET RADIO
FREQ/TEXT EON
USB
PC/MCX
Notes
CD-R
CD
PHONO
M
ULTI
CH
TUNER
MD/TAPE
DVD
DTV
NET/USB
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DVR/VCR 2
V-AUX
1:PC/MCX
4
3
2
5
1
7
6
8
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
Selected preset number
RECORDING
83 En
BASIC
OPERATION
Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating
instructions for those components.
The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in
noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources encoded in DTS, the
following considerations and adjustments need to be made. To play DTS-encoded DVDs and CDs
(when using a digital audio connection) on your DTS-compatible player, follow its operating
instructions to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output from the player.
• When this unit is set to the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit.
• The settings of TONE CONTROL (see page 52), VOLUME, the speaker level (see page 109) and the sound field programs (see
page 47) do not affect recorded material.
• The source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded.
• The XM Satellite Radio signals (U.S.A. and Canada models only) cannot be output at the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks.
• Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. Likewise,
analog signals input at the AUDIO IN jacks are not output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your source component is
connected to provide only digital or analog signals, you can only record digital or analog signals.
• A given input source is not output on the same OUT (REC) channel.
• S-video and composite video signals pass independently through the video circuits of this unit. Therefore, when recording or dubbing
video signals input from a video source component that provides only an S-video or a composite video signal, you can record only an
S-video or a composite video signal on your VCR.
• The analog audio signals input at the DOCK terminal can be output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording.
• Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright
laws.
y
Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.
1 Turn on all the connected components.
2 Press REC OUT/ZONE 2 repeatedly until the
RECOUT indicator lights up in the front panel
display.
3 Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front
panel to select the source component you
want to record from.
Select “SOURCE” to record the currently selected
input source.
4 Start playback on the selected source
component or select a broadcast station.
5 Start recording on the recording component.
RECORDING
Notes
If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture
itself may be disturbed due to those signals.
CAUTION
ON/OFF
MASTER
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
ENHANCER
NIGHT
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROLS
MODE
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
MULTI ZONE
FM/AM
PRESET/
TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MIC
OPTIMIZER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
CONTROL
SELECT
AUDIO
TONE
REC OUT/
ZONE2
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
YPAO
ZONE 3
R
L
OPTICAL
USB
ZONE 2
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
23
(U.S.A. model)
REC OUT/
ZONE2
RECOUT
PROGRAM
Front panel
ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS
84 En
■ Selecting decoders for 2-channel
sources (surround decode mode)
Use this feature to play back sources with selected
decoders. You can play back 2-channel sources on multi-
channels.
1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and
then press SUR. DECODE on the remote
control to select the surround decode mode.
2 Press SELECT on the remote control
repeatedly to select the desired decoder.
You can select from the following modes depending
on the type of source you are playing and your
personal preference.
y
• You can select the desired decoder by pressing SELECT
and then press l / h repeatedly on the remote control.
• You can select the desired decoder and adjust the decoder
parameter settings by using GUI screen. See page 88 for
details.
■ Decoder descriptions
ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS
Selecting decoders
6
SUR. DECODE
TV
SOURCE
AMP
7
SELECT
SUR. DECODE PRO LOGIC
Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources.
SUR. DECODE
PLIIx Movie
PL II Movie
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for movie sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “Surround
Back” is set to “None” (see page 106).
SUR. DECODE
PLIIx Music
PL II Music
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “Surround
Back” is set to “None” (see page 106).
Panorama Dimension Center Width
Center WidthDimension
PLIIMusic
PLIIxMusic
SUR. DECODE
Panorama
6
SUR.DECODE
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not
available when “Surround Back” is set to “None” (see page 106).
Available sound field parameters (see page 89)
Program description
Remote control
button
Name of the
decoder
(Decoder Type)
Category of the
program
6
SUR.DECODE
6
SUR.DECODE
6
SUR.DECODE
85 En
ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS
ADVANCED
OPERATION
y
When you select the surround decode mode for Dolby Digital, DTS or DTS 96/24 sources, this unit automatically selects “SURROUND
DECODE Dolby Digital”, “SURROUND DECODE DTS” or “SURROUND DECODE DTS 96/24” program.
■ Selecting decoders used with sound field programs
Use this feature to select the desired decoder used with
MOVIE sound field programs (except “Mono Movie”).
See page 49 for details about MOVIE sound field
program.
1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and
then press MOVIE on the remote control
repeatedly to select the desired MOVIE
sound field programs.
2 Press SELECT repeatedly to select the
desired decoder used with the selected
sound field program.
You can select from the following decoders
depending on the type of source you are playing and
your personal preference.
y
• You can select the desired decoder by pressing SELECT
and then press l / h repeatedly on the remote control.
• You can also select decoders used with sound field
programs by using GUI screen. Set “Decoder Type” in
Stereo/Surround” to the desired setting (see page 88).
Available decoders (Decoder Type)
SUR. DECODE
PLIIx Game
PL II Game
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for game sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “Surround
Back” is set to “None” (see page 106).
6
SUR.DECODE
SUR. DECODE Neo: 6 Cinema
DTS processing for movie sources.
6
SUR.DECODE
SUR. DECODE Neo:6 Music
DTS processing for music sources.
Center Image
SUR. DECODE
neural sur.
(U.S.A. and Canada
models only)
Neural Surround processing for any sources.
The Neural Surround decoder is compatible with PCM signals (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz and 96 kHz) and analog 2-
channel input sources. When Neural Surround-incompatible signals are being input while the Neural Surround decoder is selected, multi-
channel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels without any additional effect processing and the Neural Surround-
incompatible PCM signals are played back in stereo. The Neural Surround decoder is especially suitable for the XM HD Surround program of
XM Satellite Radio.
6
SUR.DECODE
6
SUR.DECODE
4
MOVIE
TV
SOURCE
AMP
Decoder Functions
PRO LOGIC
Dolby Pro Logic processing for
any sources
PLIIx Movie
PLII Movie
Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby
Pro Logic II) processing for
movie sources.
The Pro Logic IIx
decoder is not available when
“Surround Back” is set to “None”
(see page 106).
Neo:6 Cinema
DTS processing for movie
sources
86 En
ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS
■ Selecting decoders for multi-channel
sources
If you connected surround back speakers, use this feature
to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for multi-channel
sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital EX
or DTS-ES decoders.
1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and
then press EXTD SUR. on the remote control
repeatedly to switch between 5.1 and 6.1/7.1-
channel playback.
2 Press l / h repeatedly to select a decoder
while the name of the decoder is displayed.
Auto AUTO
When a signal flag that can be recognized by this unit is
input, this unit selects the optimum decoder to play back
the signal in 6.1/7.1 channels.
If this unit cannot recognize the flag or no flag is present
in the input signal, it cannot automatically be played in
6.1/7.1 channels.
Decoders
You can select from the following decoders depending on
the format of the source you are playing.
Off OFF
Decoders are not used to create 6.1/7.1 channels.
• “PLIIx Movie” is available only when “Surround Back” (see
page 106) is set to “Small x2” or “Large x2”.
• Some 6.1/7.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal flag
that can be automatically detected by this unit. When playing
these kinds of discs in 6.1/7.1 channels, select a decoder
manually from “PLIIx Music”, “EX/ES” or “EX”.
• 6.1/7.1-channel playback is not possible even if you press
EXTD SUR. in the following cases:
– when “Surround” (see page 106) or “Surround Back” (
see
page 106) is set to “None”.
– when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks is being played.
– when the source being played does not contain surround left
and right channel signals.
– when a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played.
– when the “2ch Stereo” (see page 53) or Pure Direct (see
page 52) mode is selected.
• When this unit is turned off, this setting will be reset to “Auto”.
• The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “Surround
Back” is set to “None” (see page 106).
8
EXTD SUR.
TV
SOURCE
AMP
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
Decoder Functions
PLIIxMovie
q D+PLIIx Movie
DTS+PLIIx Movie
MPCM+PLIIx Movie
DSD+PLIIx Movie
Plays back multi-channel
sources in 7.1 channels using
the Pro Logic IIx movie
decoder.
PLIIxMusic
q D+PLIIx Music
DTS+PLIIx Music
MPCM+PLIIx Music
DSD+PLIIx Music
Plays back multi-channel
sources in 6.1/7.1 channels
using the Pro Logic IIx music
decoder.
DTS ES
DTS 96/24 ES
Plays back DTS signals in 6.1/
7.1 channels using the DTS-ES
decoder.
DOLBY D EX
DTS+DOLBY EX
MPCM+DOLBY EX
DSD+DOLBY EX
Plays back multi-channel
sources in 6.1/7.1 channels
using the Dolby Digital EX
decoder.
Notes
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
87 En
ADVANCED
OPERATION
This unit features a sophisticated graphical user interface (GUI) screen that helps you to control the amplifier function of
this unit. With the GUI screen, you can view the information of the signals being input and the status of this unit.
■ Stereo/Surround (Stereo/Surround menu)
Use this feature to select the sound field programs and customize the program parameter settings (see page 88).
■ Input Select (Input select menu)
Use this feature to select the input source and customize the parameters of each input source.
■ Manual Setup (Manual setup menu)
Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters (see page 97).
Sound (Sound menu)
Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings, alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system or
compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors (see page 97).
Video (Video menu)
Use this feature to manually adjust the video parameters (see page 101).
Basic (Basic menu)
Use this feature to manually adjust the basic speaker parameters (see page 104).
NET/USB (Network and USB menu)
Use this menu to manually adjust the network and USB system parameters (see page 109).
Option (Option menu)
Use this feature to manually adjust the optional system parameters (see page 111).
■ Auto Setup (Auto setup menu)
Use this menu to run Auto Setup and specify which speaker parameters to be adjusted (see page 35).
■ System Memory (System memory menu)
Use this feature to store and recall various settings of this unit (see page 115).
■ Signal Info. (Signal information)
Use this feature to check audio signal information (see page 116).
■ Language (GUI language menu)
Use this feature to select the language of your choice that appears in the GUI screen of this unit (see page 117).
y
• You can also select the GUI language using “GUI LANGUAGE” parameter in “ADVANCED SETUP” in the front panel display (see
page 136).
• See page 44 for details about the operations in GUI screen.
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
Sound
Video
Option
Basic
NET/USB
Manual Setup
Auto Setup
System Memory
Input Select
Stereo/Surround
88 En
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
Use this feature to select the sound field programs (see
page 46), the surround decode mode, the “STRAIGHT”
mode (See page 51) or the Compressed Music Enhancer
mode (See page 54), and adjust the parameters of each
program.
■ Selecting sound field programs and
setting the parameters by using GUI
screen
1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and
then press SET MENU on the remote control.
2 Press k / n / l / h on the remote control to
select “Stereo/Surround” and then press h.
3 Press k / n repeatedly to select the desired
category of the programs and then press h.
4 Press k / n repeatedly to select the desired
programs.
5 Press h on the remote control and then k / n
to select the desired parameter.
y
You can select “Initialize” to set all the parameters of the selected
sound field program to the default values. See page 93 for details.
6 Press h and then press l / h to adjust the
selected parameter.
7 Press ENTER or k / n to confirm the setting
of the selected parameter.
Stereo/Surround
(Stereo/Surround menu)
MENU
SRCH MODE
SET MENU
TV
SOURCE
AMP
Support Audio
Input Select
Manual Setup
Stereo/Surround
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAINMENT
Dimmer
Dimmer
Input Assign
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
or
89 En
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Sound field parameter descriptions
You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so that the sound fields are recreated accurately in your
listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program.
Sound field parameter Features
Decoder Type
Decoder type. Selects the decoder used with the SUR. DECODE or MOVIE programs. See
pages 84 and 85 for details.
DSP Level
DSP level. Adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range. Depending on
the acoustics of your listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP effect level
relative to the level of the direct sound.
Control range: –6 dB to +3 dB
Init. Delay
Sur. Init. Delay
SB Init. Delay
Initial delay. Presence, surround, and surround back initial delay. Changes the apparent distance
from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection
heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. The
larger the value, the farther it seems. For a small room, set to a small value. For a large room, set
to a large value.
Control range: 1 to 99 ms (Init. Delay)
1 to 49 ms (Sur. Init. Delay and SB Init. Delay)
Source sound
Early
reflections
Time
Time
Time
Delay
Delay
Delay
Sound source
Reflection face
Level
Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms
Level
Level
90 En
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
Room Size
Sur. Room Size
SB Room Size
Room size. Presence, surround, and surround back room size. Adjusts the apparent size of the
surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the
sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between
the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the
reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter
from one to two doubles the apparent length of the room.
Control range: 0.1 to 2.0
Liveness
Sur. Liveness
SB Liveness
Liveness. Surround and surround back liveness. Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the
hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of a sound
source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which
has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as
“dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. This parameter lets
you adjust the early reflection decay rate and thus the “liveness” of the room.
Control range: 0 to 10
Sound field parameter Features
Level
Level
Level
Time Time Time
Source sound
Early
reflections
Small value = 0.1
Large value = 2.0
Sound source
Source sound
Level
Level
Level
Dead
Live
Time
Time Time
Small reflected
sound
Large reflected
sound
Small value = 0 Large value = 10
91 En
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Rev. Time
Reverberation time. Adjusts the amount of time taken for the dense, subsequent reverberation
sound to decay by 60 dB at 1 kHz. This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment
over an extremely wide range. Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening
room environments, and a shorter time for “live” sources and listening room environments.
Control range: 1.0 to 5.0 s
Rev. Delay
Reverberation delay. Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and
the beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound
begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel as if you are in a larger acoustic environment.
Control range: 0 to 250 ms
Sound field parameter Features
Reverberation
ReverberationSource sound
Rev. Time
Rev. Time
Rev. Time
Sound source
Short
reverberation
Long
reverberation
Small value = 1.0 s Large value = 5.0 s
Early reflections
60 dB 60 dB 60 dB
(dB)
Level
Source sound
Reverberation
Rev. Time
Rev. Delay
Time
60 dB
92 En
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
■ Stereo program parameter descriptions
Sound field parameter Features
Rev. Level
Reverberation level. Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the
stronger the reverberation becomes.
Control range: 0 to 100%
Dialogue Lift
Dialogue lift. Adjusts the height of the front and center channel sounds by assigning some of the
front and center channel elements to the presence speakers. The larger the parameter, the higher
the position of the front and center channel sound.
Choices: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
Sound field parameter Features
2ch Stereo
Direct
2-channel stereo direct. Bypasses the decoders and DSP processors of this unit for pure hi-fi stereo
sound when playing 2-channel analog sources.
Choices: Auto, Off
y
• Select “Auto” to bypass the decoders, DSP processors and the tone control circuitry only when
“BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB (see page 52).
• Select “Off” not to bypass the decoders, DSP processors and the tone control circuitry when
“BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB.
• When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input, they are downmixed to 2
channels and output from the front left and right speakers.
• The low-frequency signals input from the front left and right speakers are redirected to the
subwoofer in the following cases:
– “Bass Out” is set to “Both” (see page 107).
– “Front” is set to “Small” (see page 105) and “Bass Out” is set to “SWFR” (see page 107).
7ch Stereo
Center Level
Surround L Level
Surround R Level
Sur. Back Level
Presence L Level
Presence R Level
7-channel stereo center, surround left, surround right, surround back, presence left and presence right
levels. Adjusts the volume level of each channel in the 7-channel stereo mode.
Control range: 0 to 100%
Source sound
Level
Rev. Level
Time
93 En
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ The Compressed Music Enhancer mode parameter descriptions
■ Decoder parameter descriptions
■ Initialize (Program parameters initialization)
Use this feature to initialize the parameter of the selected sound field program.
Choices: No, Yes
• Select “Yes” to set the program parameters to the factory default settings.
• Select “No” to cancel the program parameter initialization.
y
Use the “Sur. Initialize” feature in “Option” to initialize the parameters of each sound field program within a sound field program group
(see page 114).
The Compressed Music
Enhancer mode
Features
2ch Enhancer
7ch Enhancer
2-channel enhancer or 7-channel enhancer effect level. Select “High” or “Low” to adjust the effect for
the high-frequency.
Choices: High, Low
Decoder parameter Features
Pro Logic IIx Music
PRO LOGIC II Music
Panorama
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music panorama. Sends stereo signals to the surround speakers as
well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect.
Choices: Off, On
PRO LOGIC IIx Music
PRO LOGIC II Music
Dimension
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music dimension. Adjusts the sound field either towards the front
or towards the rear.
Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front)
Initial setting: STD (standard)
PRO LOGIC IIx Music
PRO LOGIC II Music
Center Width
Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music center width. Moves the center channel output completely
towards the center speaker or towards the front left and right speakers. A larger value moves the center
channel output towards the front left and right speakers.
Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from the center speaker) to
7 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers)
Initial setting: 3
DTS Neo:6 Music
Center Image
DTS Neo:6 Music center image. Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the center
channel to make the center channel more or less dominant as necessary.
Control range: 0.0 to 1.0
Initial setting: 0.3
No
Yes
Initialize
Dialogue Lift
SB Room Size
94 En
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
Use this feature to reassign digital input/outputs, select the
input signal, rename the inputs, or adjust the level of the
signal input at each input source.
• Some parameters described above may not be available for all
input sources and some parameters are only available for
specific input sources.
• When iPod is stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock
(such as YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK
terminal of this unit, “DOCK” appears in the “Input Select”
menu instead of “V-AUX”. In such cases, the parameters
marked with asterisk (*) in the above table does not appears in
the input source parameter menu.
• When you select “NET/USB” as the input source, selected sub
input source (PC/MCX, NET RADIO or USB) appears in the
Input Select menu.
1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and
then press SET MENU on the remote control.
The top display appears.
2 Select “Input Select” and then press h.
3 Select the desired input source (CD, DVD,
etc.) and then press h or ENTER to access
and adjust.
■ Antenna Level (Antenna level)
Use this feature to check the current reception level of the
XM Passport System connected to the XM jack of this
unit (see page 63). For the best reception, orient the XM
Passport System so that a value of 60% or more is
displayed here.
Display status: None, 0 to 100%
• “None” is displayed if the XM Passport System is not connected to
this unit. In this case, check the antenna connections (see page 63).
• The “Antenna Level” parameter cannot be adjusted by using the
remote control. Instead, you need to adjust the orientation of the
XM Passport System connected to the XM jack of this unit for a
better percentage of the reception level.
Input Select
Input source Parameter
XM
(U.S.A. and Canada models
only)
Antenna Level
Volume Trim
Rename
TUNER
Volume Trim
Rename
PHONO
CD
CD-R
MD/TAPE
DVD
DTV
CBL/SAT
VCR1
DVR/VCR2
I/O Assignment
Audio Select
Decoder Mode
Volume Trim
Rename
V-AUX or DOCK
I/O Assignment*
Audio Select*
Decoder Mode*
Volume Trim
Rename
PC/MCX, NET RADIO or
USB
Volume Trim
MULTI CH
I/O Assignment
Audio Select
Decoder Mode
Volume Trim
Rename
Multi CH Assign
BGV
Notes
Notes
MENU
SRCH MODE
SET MENU
TV
SOURCE
AMP
Sound
Video
Option
Basic
NET/USB
Manual Setup
Auto Setup
System Memory
Input Select
Stereo/Surround
MD/TAPE
CD-R
DTV
CBL/SAT
DVD
Input Select
Manual Setup
Auto Setup
Stereo/Surround
100%
Antenna Level
Antenna Level
Volume Trim
Rename
95 En
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Volume Trim (Volume trimming)
Use this feature to adjust the level of the signal input at
each input source. This is useful if you want to balance the
level of each input source to avoid sudden changes in
volume when switching between input sources.
Control range: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB
Initial setting: 0.0 dB
y
This parameter also affects the signals output at ZONE OUT
jacks.
• You can only adjust the volume for the current input source
using this setting.
■ Rename (Rename)
Use this feature to change the name of the inputs in the
GUI screen or the front panel display menu. (DVD is used
as the source component in the following example.)
1 Press l / h to place the _ (under-bar) under
the space or character you want to edit.
2 Press ENTER repeatedly to select a character
type (CAPITAL/SMALL/FIGURE/MARK).
3 Press k / n to select the character you want
to use and l / h to move to the next one.
• You can use up to 8 characters for each input.
•Press n to change the character in the following
order, or press k to go in the reverse order:
CAPITAL A to Z, space
SMALL a to z, space
FIGURE 0 to 9, space
MARK !, #, %, &, etc.
• Press ENTER to switch between character types.
• Repeat steps 1 to 3 to rename each input.
Even if you select “Français”, “Deutsch”, Espaсol” or
“Русский” in “Language” (see page 117), you cannot use
accent symbols or cyrillic alphabets for the name of each
input.
4 Press l / h to select OK and press ENTER
when complete.
y
• Select “RESET” to set the name of the selected input to default.
• This feature is useful when you change the input or output
assignment for digital jacks and component video input jacks.
• You can also change the name of the input source that appears
in the display window on the remote control. Refer to
“Changing source names in the display window” on page 123”.
You can only change the name of the current input source
(except for multi channel input sources) using this setting.
Note
Volume Trim
Rename
Decoder Mode
Audio Select
0.0dB
CAPITAL
OK RESET
DVD
Decoder Mode
Volume Trim
Rename
Note
Note
96 En
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
■ I/O Assignment
(Input/output assignment)
Use this feature to assign the input/output jacks according
to the component to be used if the initial settings of this
unit do not correspond to your needs. Change the
following parameters to reassign the respective jacks and
effectively connect more components.
Once the input/output jacks are reassigned, you can select
the corresponding component by using the INPUT
selector on the front panel (or the input selector buttons on
the remote control).
Example 1: Assigning the COAXIAL 1 CD jack to
the DVD input.
1 Select “Input Select” in the GUI screen and
then select “DVD”.
2 Select “I/O Assignment” and then “Coaxial
Input”.
3 Select “1 CD”.
Example 2: Clearing a jack assignment.
1 Select “Input Select” and then select the
desired input source (“DVD”, etc.).
2 Select “I/O Assignment” and then select the
desired jack assignment (“Coaxial Input”,
“Optical Input”, “Optical Output”,
“Component Video”, or “HDMI”).
3 Select “None” and then press ENTER to clear
the assignment.
• You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same
type of jack.
• When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and
OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to signals input at the
COAXIAL jack.
■ Audio Select (Audio input jack select)
This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. You can
select the type of input signal you want to use.
Choices: Auto, HDMI, Coax/Opt, Analog
• Select “Auto” when you want signals to be input to this
unit in the following order: HDMI signals, digital
signals and analog signals.
• Select “HDMI” when you only want HDMI signals to
be input to this unit. If no HDMI signals are input, no
sound is output.
• Select “Coax/Opt” when you want digital signals to be
input to this unit at the OPTICAL or COAXIAL jacks.
Use if HDMI signals are also being input.
• Select “Analog” when you only want analog signals to
be input to this unit. If no analog signals are input, no
sound is output.
y
• You can also select the audio input jack by pressing AUDIO
SELECT on the front panel (or AUDIO SEL on the remote
control). See page 42 for details.
• You can set the default Audio input jack select of this unit by
using “Audio Select” in “Option” (see page 114).
This feature is not available when no digital input jack
(OPTICAL, COAXIAL and HDMI) are assigned. In addition,
“HDMI” is not available as an Audio input jack select setting
when the HDMI IN 1, HDMI IN 2 and HDMI IN 3 jacks are not
used. Use “I/O Assignment” in “Input Select” to reassign the
respective input jack (see page 96).
■ Decoder Mode (Decoder mode)
Use this feature to switch the input mode. You can
designate the reassigned digital input jacks (see page 96)
for specific audio signals (DTS, etc.).
Choices: Auto, DTS
• Select “Auto” if you want this unit to automatically
detect input signal types and select the appropriate
input mode.
• Select “DTS” if you want this unit to select DTS as the
input mode.
Notes
Component Video
Optical Output
HDMI
I/O Assignment
Audio Select
Decoder Mode
Note
HDMI
Coax/Opt
Auto
Audio Select
Decoder Mode
Volume Trim
I/O Assignment
DTS
Auto
Decoder Mode
Volume Trim
Rename
Audio Select
I/O Assignment
97 En
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Multi CH Assign
(Multi channel assignment)
Use this feature to set the direction of the signals input
into the center, subwoofer and surround channels when a
source component is connected to the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks. If you input 8-channel signals from an external
decoder, use this feature to select jacks for the additional
front signals.
Input Channels (Input channels)
This setting is used to select the number of channels input
from an external decoder.
Choices: 6ch, 8ch
If “Zone2 Amplifier” (page 113) is set to “INT:[SP1]”,
“INT:[SP2]” or “INT:Both”, no sound is output from the surround
back speakers even if you select “8ch”. In this case, select “6ch”
and set the output setting of the external component to 6 channels.
Front Input (Front input)
If you selected “8ch” in Input Channels, you can select
analog jacks at which front signals from an external
decoder will be input.
Choices: DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR1, DVR/VCR2,
V-AUX, CD, CD-R, MD/TAPE
■ BGV (Back ground video)
Use this feature to select the video source played in the
background of the sources input from the MULTI CH
INPUT jacks.
Choices: DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2,
V-AUX, Last, Off
• Select “Last” to set this unit to automatically select the
last selected video source as the background video
source.
• Select “Off” to set this unit not to play the video source
in the background.
Use this menu to adjust the sound parameters.
1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and
then press SET MENU on the remote control.
2 Press k / n on the remote control to select
“Manual Setup” and then press h.
3 Press k / n / l / h on the remote control to
select “Sound” and then press h.
4 Select the desired parameters and then press
h to access and adjust.
Note
Input Channels
Front Input
Multi CH Assign
Rename
Volume Trim
BGV
V-AUX
DVR/VCR 2
Last
Off
BGV
Multi CH Assign
Rename
Manual Setup (Sound)
MENU
SRCH MODE
SET MENU
TV
SOURCE
AMP
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
Dynamic Range
LFE Level
Tone Control
Audio Option
Parametric EQ
Sound
Video
Basic
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
98 En
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
■ LFE Level (Low-frequency effect level)
Use this feature to adjust the output level of the
LFE (low-frequency effect) channel according to the
capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE
channel carries low-frequency special effects which are
only added to certain scenes. This setting is effective only
when this unit decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
Control range: –20.0 to 0.0 dB
Control step: 1.0 dB
Speaker (Speaker low-frequency effect level)
Select to adjust the speaker LFE level.
Headphone (Headphone low-frequency effect
level)
Select to adjust the headphone LFE level.
Depending on the settings of “LFE Level”, some signals may not
be output at the SUBWOOFER jack.
■ Dynamic Range (Dynamic range)
Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range
compression to be applied to your speakers or
headphones. This setting is effective only when the unit is
decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals.
Choices: MAX (maximum), STD (standard),
MIN (minimum)
Speaker (Speaker dynamic range)
Select to adjust the speaker compression.
Headphone (Headphone dynamic range)
Select to adjust the headphone compression.
• Select “MAX” to preserve the greatest amount of
dynamic range.
• Select “STD” for general use.
• Select “MIN” for listening to sources at low volume
levels.
■ Parametric EQ (Parametric equalizer)
Use this feature to adjust the parametric equalizer of each
speaker.
1 Press k / n / l / h to select Test Tone or the
speaker you want to adjust.
• Select “Test Tone” to choose whether turns on or
off the test tone output when adjusting the tonal
quality of each speaker.
• Select “Front L” to adjust the tonal quality of the
front left speaker.
• Select “Front R” to adjust the tonal quality of the
front right speaker.
• Select “Center” to adjust the tonal quality of the
center speaker.
• Select “Surround L” to adjust the tonal quality of
the surround left speaker.
• Select “Surround R” to adjust the tonal quality of
the surround right speaker.
• Select “Surround Back L” to adjust the tonal
quality of the surround back left speaker.
• Select “Surround Back R” to adjust the tonal
quality of the surround back right speaker.
• Select “Presence L” to adjust the tonal quality of
the presence left speaker.
• Select “Presence R” to adjust the tonal quality of
the presence right speaker.
• Select “Subwoofer” to adjust the tonal quality of
the subwoofer.
2 Press h to access the settings window.
3 Press k / n / l / h to select “PARAM” and
then press ENTER to select a parameter from
“Band” (band), “Freq.” (frequency) or “Q” (Q
factor).
y
You cam adjust the gain with any parameter.
Note
Speaker
Headphone
0.0dB
Speaker
Headphone
STD
MIN
MAX
Front L
Front R
Test Tone
Dynamic Range
LFE Level
Tone Control
Audio Option
Parametric EQ
Front L
Band / Gain
PARAM RESET
EDIT EXIT
Front R
Center
Test Tone
99 En
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
ADVANCED
OPERATION
4 Press n to select “EDIT” and press ENTER to
access the edit window.
The parameter selected in “PARAM” is highlighted.
• Press l / h to adjust the parameter.
• Press k / n to adjust the “Gain”.
• Press ENTER to exit the edit window.
y
• When you select “Band” in step 3, you can use this menu
as a graphic equalizer.
• The “Band #1” and “Band #2” can adjust the frequencies
below of 198.4 Hz.
• When you select “Subwoofer” in step 1 and “Band” in
step 3, you can adjust “Band #1” and “Band #2” only.
• For more information on the parametric equalizer, see
page 98.
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 until you are satisfied
with the results.
y
If you want to reset all “Parametric EQ” parameter settings
for the selected speaker, select “RESET” and press ENTER.
6 Select “EXIT” and press ENTER to exit the
settings window.
■ Tone Control (Tone control)
Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble
output to your speakers or headphones.
Choices: Control, Bass, Treble, Audio Bypass
Tone Control is not effective when:
– PURE DIRECT (see page 52) is selected.
– MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source.
Control (Tone control)
Choices: Speakers, Headphones
• Select “Speakers” to adjust the bass/treble balance of
your speakers.
• Select “Headphones” to adjust the bass/treble balance
of your headphones.
y
“Speaker” and “Headphone” adjustments are stored
independently. The adjustments for “Speaker” affects the
front left/right, center, presence left/right speaker channels
and Subwoofer channel.
Bass (Bass control)
Use this feature to adjust low-frequencies output to your
speakers or headphones.
Choices: 125Hz, 350Hz, 500Hz
Control range: – 6.0 dB to +6.0 dB
Initial setting: 0.0 dB
Treble (Treble control)
Use this feature to adjust high-frequencies output to your
speakers or headphones.
Choices: 2.5kHz, 3.5kHz, 8.0kHz
Control range: – 6.0 dB to +6.0 dB
Initial setting: 0.0 dB
Note
Front L
Q
Freq.
Gain
Band
1.000
125.0Hz
0.0dB
#1
Front R
Center
Test Tone
Headphones
Speakers
Bass
Treble
Control
Bass
Treble
Control
Speaker
Freq : 350Hz
Gain : 0.0dB
+6
+0
-6
Audio Bypass
Auto Bypass
Bass
Treble
Control
Speaker
Freq : 3.5kHz
Gain : 0.0dB
+6
+0
-6
100 En
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
Auto Bypass (Auto bypass)
Use this feature to select whether the audio output
bypasses the tone control circuitry when “TREBLE” and
“BASS” are set to 0 dB (see page 52).
Choices: Auto, Off
• Select “AUTO” if you want the signals to bypass the
tone control circuitry to provide the purest signal
possible.
• Select “OFF” if you do not want the signals to bypass
the tone control circuitry.
■ Audio Option (Audio options)
Use this feature to adjust the overall audio settings of this
unit.
Muting Type (Muting type)
Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function
reduces the output volume.
Choices: Full, –20dB
• Select “Full” to completely mute all the audio output.
• Select “–20dB” to reduce the current volume by 20 dB.
Audio Delay (Audio delay)
Use this feature to delay the sound output and synchronize
it with the video image. This may be necessary when
using certain LCD monitors, projectors or high definition
monitors.
Control range: 0 to 240 ms
Max Volume (Maximum volume)
Use this feature to set the maximum volume level in the
main zone. This feature is useful to avoid the unexpected
laud sound by mistake. For example, the original volume
range is 16.5 dB to –80.0 dB. However, when “Max
Volume” is set to –5.0 dB, the volume range becomes
–5.0 dB to –80.0 dB.
Control range: 16.5 dB, 15.0 dB to –30.0 dB
Control step: 5.0 dB
• When a test tone is output, the “Max Volume” setting is
automatically deactivated because the volume level is
automatically set to 0 dB regardless of the current “Max
Volume” setting.
• The “Max Volume” setting takes priority over the “Initial
Volume” setting (see page 100). For example, “Initial Volume”
is set to –20.0 dB and then “Max Volume” is set to –30.0 dB,
the volume level is automatically set to -30.0 dB when you turn
on the power of this unit next time.
Initial Volume (Initial volume)
Use this feature to set the volume level of the main zone
when the power of this unit is turned on.
Choices: Off, –80 dB to +16.5 dB
Control step: 0.5 dB
Off
Auto
Treble
Bass
Auto Bypass
Muting Type
Audio Delay
Max Volume
-20dB
Full
Notes
Muting Type
Audio Delay
Initial Volume
Max Volume
0ms
Audio Delay
Muting Type
Initial Volume
Max Volume
+16.5dB
Max Volume
Audio Delay
Initial Volume
Off
101 En
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
ADVANCED
OPERATION
The “Max Volume” setting takes priority over the “Initial
Volume” setting. Therefore, Initial Volume cannot be set beyond
the existing “Max Volume” setting.
■ Channel Mute (Channel mute)
Use this feature to mute specific speaker channels.
Mode (Mode)
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the “Channel
Mute” setting for each speaker.
Choices: Off, On
• Select “Off” to deactivate the “Channel Mute” settings.
• Select “On” to activate the “Channel Mute” settings.
Each speaker settings
Choices: Mute, Off
• Select “Mute” to mute the selected speaker channel.
• Select “Off” not to mute the selected speaker channel.
• “Front L” sets whether to mute the audio output from
the front left speaker.
• “Front R” sets whether to mute the audio output from
the front right speaker.
• “Center” sets whether to mute the audio output from
the center speaker.
• “Surround L” sets whether to mute the audio output
from the surround left speaker.
• “Surround R” sets whether to mute the audio output
from the surround right speaker.
• “Surround Back L” sets whether to mute the audio
output from the surround back left speaker.
• “Surround Back R” sets whether to mute the audio
output from the surround back right speaker.
• “Presence L” sets whether to mute the audio output
from the presence left speaker.
• “Presence R” sets whether to mute the audio output
from the presence right speaker.
• “Subwoofer” sets whether to mute the audio output
from the subwoofer.
Use this menu to adjust the video parameters.
1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and
then press SET MENU on the remote control.
2 Press k / n on the remote control to select
“Manual Setup” and then press h.
3 Press k / n / l / h on the remote control to
select “Video” and then press h.
4 Select the desired parameters and then press
h to access and adjust.
Note
On
Off
Subwoofer
Presence R
Front L
Front R
Mode
Off
Mode
Subwoofer
Front R
Center
Front L
Mute
Manual Setup (Video)
MENU
SRCH MODE
SET MENU
TV
SOURCE
AMP
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
Component I/P
HDMI Up-Scaling
Conversion
Video
Basic
NET/USB
Sound
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
102 En
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
Use the “V-RESET” in “ADVANCED SETUP” to set the
parameters in “Manual Setup (Video)” (except “Short Message”
and “On Screen”) to the factory presets (see page 136).
■ Conversion (Video conversion)
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the video
conversion as well as the HDMI up-conversion of the
analog video signals input at the composite video, S-video
and component video jacks.
Choices: Off, On
• Select “Off” to deactivate the video conversion as well
as the HDMI up-conversion of the analog video
signals.
• Select “On” to activate the video conversion as well as
the HDMI up-conversion of the analog video signals.
• This unit does not convert 480 line video signals and 576 line
video signals interchangeably.
• The analog component video signals with 480i (NTSC)/576i
(PAL) of resolution are converted to the s-video or composite
video signals and output at the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT and
VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks.
• The converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR
OUT jacks. When recording a video source, you must make the
same type of video connections between each component.
• When composite video or S-video signals from a VCR are
converted to component video signals, the picture quality may
suffer depending on your VCR.
• Even when “Conversion” is set to “On”, HDMI digital signals
are not converted to analog video signals.
• If “Conversion” is set to “Off”, the “Component I/P” and
“HDMI Up-Scaling” features are deactivated.
• Set “Conversion” to “On” to display the short message display.
• Unconventional signals input at the composite video or S-video
jacks cannot be converted or may be output abnormally. In such
cases, set “Conversion” to “Off”.
• When non-standard video signals (such as video signals from a
game console) are input, this unit may not convert the signals
even if you “Conversion” to “On”.
• When the analog component video signals with 480p of
resolution are input at the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks and the
video monitor is connected to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT or
S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit, the GUI screen is
not displayed on the video monitor.
■ Component I/P
(Component interlace/progressive
conversion)
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the analog
interlace/progressive conversion of the analog video
signals input at the composite video, S-video and
component video jacks so that the analog video signals
deinterlaced from 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) to 480p/576p
are output at the COMPONENT MONITOR OUT jacks.
Choices: Off, On
• Select “On” to activate the analog interlace/progressive
up-conversion of the analog video signals.
• Select “Off” to deactivate the analog interlace/
progressive up-conversion of the analog video signals.
• This menu item is not available and hence not visible in the GUI
screen if “Conversion” is set to “Off”.
• If your video monitor does not support analog video signals
with 480p/576p of resolution, the GUI screen may not be
displayed on your video monitor when “Component I/P” is set
to “On”. Use “V-RESET” in “ADVANCED SETUP” to set the
“Component I/P” parameter to the factory preset setting (see
page 136).
■ HDMI Up-Scaling (HDMI up-scaling)
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the HDMI up-
conversion of the analog video signals input at the
composite video, S-video and component video jacks so
that the up-scaled analog video signals are output at the
HDMI OUT jack.
This unit up-scales the analog video signals as follows:
• 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) → 480p/576p, 1080i or
720p
• 480p/576p → 1080i or 720p
Choices: Through, 480p (or 576p), 1080i, 720p
• Select “Through” not to up-scale any analog video
signals.
• Select “480p” (or “576p”), “1080i” or “720p” to up-
scale analog video signals to 480p or 576p, 1080i or
720p of resolution.
Note
Notes
Off
On
Conversion
Component I/P
HDMI Up-Scaling
Notes
On
Off
Component I/P
HDMI Up-Scaling
HDMI Aspect
Conversion
Through
1080i
720p
480p
HDMI Up-Scaling
HDMI Aspect
Short Message
Component I/P
Conversion
103 En
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
ADVANCED
OPERATION
• This menu item is not available and hence not visible in the GUI
menu if “Conversion” is set to “Off” (see page 102).
• When you set “TV FORMAT” in “ADVANCED SETUP” to
“NTSC” (see page 136), “480p” appears in the choices of
“HDMI Up-Scaling”, and when you set “TV FORMAT” to
“PAL”, “576p” appears in the choices of “HDMI Up-Scaling”.
■ HDMI Aspect (HDMI aspect ratio)
Use this feature to select the adjustment of aspect ratio for
HDMI video signal sources.
Choices: Through, 16:9 Normal, Smart Zoom
• Select “Through” if you do not make any adjustments
to the aspect ratio for HDMI video signal sources.
• Select “16:9 Normal” to display video images with 4:3
of aspect ratio on your video monitor with 16:9 of
aspect ratio. Black stripes appear on the right and left
sides as a result.
• Select “Smart Zoom” to fit video images with 4:3 of
aspect ratio to your video monitor with 16:9 of aspect
ratio.
• When “HDMI Up-Scaling” is set to “Through”, you cannot
make any adjustments to “HDMI Aspect”.
• When “HDMI Aspect” is set to “Smart Zoom”, the video
images of the edge of the video monitor are rather stretched.
• When the video signals are input at HDMI IN jacks or the
signals are input with 720p or 1080i of resolution, the setting of
“HDMI Aspect” does not affect the video signals output at the
HDMI OUT jack.
■ Short Message (Short message display)
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the short message
display function.
Choices: Off, On
• Select “On” to activate the short message display
function. The contents of the front panel display appear
at the bottom of the screen each time you operate this
unit.
• Select “Off” to deactivate the short message display
function.
The short message display does not appear in the following cases:
– when the component video signals with 720p, 1080i or 1080p
resolutions are input
– When HDMI video signals are input
■ On Screen (On-screen display time)
Use this feature to set the amount of time to display the
XM Satellite Radio information, iPod or NET/USB menu
on the video monitor after you perform a certain
operation.
Choices: Always, 10sec, 30sec
• Select “Always” to display the menu screen
unceasingly during an operation.
• Select “10sec” to turn off the menu screen 10 seconds
after you perform a certain operation.
• Select “30sec” to turn off the menu screen 30 seconds
after you perform a certain operation.
Notes
Notes
16:9 Normal
Through
HDMI Aspect
Short Message
On Screen
HDMI Up-Scaling
Component I/P
Smart Zoom
Note
Off
On
Short Message
On Screen
Position
HDMI Aspect
HDMI Up-Scaling
10sec
30sec
Always
Short Message
On Screen
Position
HDMI Aspect
Wall Paper
104 En
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
■ Position (GUI screen position)
Use this feature to adjust the vertical and horizontal
position of the GUI screen.
Control range: –5 (downward/left) to +5 (upward/right)
• Press k to raise the position of the GUI display.
• Press n to lower the position of the GUI display.
• Press h to shift the position of the GUI display to the
right.
•
Press
l
to shift the position of the GUI display to the left.
■ Wall Paper (Wall paper)
Use this feature to display the wall paper or gray
background in your video monitor when there is no video
signal being input.
Choices: None, Yes, Gray
• Select “None” not to display any background in your
video monitor.
• Select “Yes” to display a background image (the
photograph of a piano) in your monitor when there is
no video signal being input.
• Select “Gray” to display a gray background in your
monitor when there is no video signal being input.
When “Conversion” is set to “Off”, no background is displayed
even if “Wall Paper” is set to “Yes”.
Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker setting.
1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and
then press SET MENU on the remote control.
2 Press k / n on the remote control to select
“Manual Setup” and then press h.
3 Press k / n / l / h on the remote control to
select “Basic” and then press h.
4 Select the desired parameters and then press
h to access and adjust.
Note
Position
Wall Paper
On Screen
Short Message
:-5
+
:+5 //
None
Gray
Yes
Wall Paper
Position
On Screen
Manual Setup (Basic)
MENU
SRCH MODE
SET MENU
TV
SOURCE
AMP
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
Test Tone
Speaker Distance
Speaker Level
Speaker Set
Basic
NET/USB
Option
Video
Sound
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
105 En
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
ADVANCED
OPERATION
y
• Most of the parameters described in the basic menu are set
automatically when you run “Auto Setup”. You can use the
basic menu to make further adjustments, but we recommend
running “Auto Setup” first.
• You can reset these parameters by performing the “Auto Setup”
procedure (see page 35).
■ Test Tone (Test tone)
Turns the test tone output on or off for “Speaker Set”,
“Speaker Distance” and “Speaker Level” settings.
Choices: Off, On
y
If you use a handheld sound pressure level meter, hold at arm’s
length and point upwards so that the meter is in the listening
position. With the meter set to the 70 dB scale and to C SLOW,
calibrate each speaker to 75 dB.
• Loud test tones will be output when “On” is selected. In this
case, make sure no children are present in the listening room.
• If you select “On” and enter the “Speaker Set”, “Speaker Level”
or “Speaker Distance” menu, the test tone is output from the
selected speakers.
■ Speaker Set (Speaker settings)
Use to manually adjust any speaker setting.
y
• If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers,
you can change these settings according to your preference.
• When the diameter of the woofer section of the speaker unit is
larger than 16 cm (6.5 in), set the correspondent speaker setting
parameter to “Large”.
Front (Front speakers)
Choices: Large, Small
• Select “Large” (large) if you have large front speakers
that reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. All
the front left and right channel signals are directed to
the front left and right speakers.
• Select “Small” (small) if you have small front speakers
that do not reproduce low-frequency signals
effectively. The low-frequency signals of the front left
and right channels are directed to the speakers selected
in “Bass Out” (see page 107).
• When “Bass Out” is set to “Front” (see page 107), the LFE
signals found in Dolby Digital or DTS sources, the low-
frequency signals of the front left and right channels, and the
low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “Small” are all
directed to the front left and right speakers regardless of the
“FRONT SP” setting.
• When “Bass Out” is set to “Front” (see page 107), you can
select only “Large” in “Front”. If the value of “Front” is set to
other than “Large” in advance, this unit change the value to
“Large” automatically.
Center (Center speaker)
Choices: Large, Small, None
• Select “Large” (large) if you have a large center
speaker that reproduces low-frequency signals
effectively. All the center channel signals are directed
to the center speaker.
• Select “Small” (small) if you have a small center
speaker that does not reproduce low-frequency signals
effectively. The low-frequency signals of the center
channel are directed to the speakers selected in “Bass
Out”.
• Select “None” (none) if you did not connect a center
speaker. The center channel signals are directed to the
front left and right speakers.
Notes
Off
On
Speaker Set
Speaker Distance
Test Tone
Front
Surround
Center
Speaker Distance
Speaker Level
Test Tone
Speaker Set
Notes
Large
Small
Center
Surround
Front
Large
Small
NoneSurround
Surround Back
Center
Front
106 En
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
Surround (Surround left/right speakers)
Choices: Large, Small, None
• Select “Large” (large) if you have large surround left
and right speakers that reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively. All the surround channel signals are
directed to the surround left and right speakers.
• Select “Small” (small) if you have small surround left
and right speakers that do not reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the
surround left and right channels are directed to the
speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT”.
• Select “None” (none) if you did not connect surround
speakers. This unit is set to the Virtual CINEMA DSP
mode (see page 51) and “Surround Back” is
automatically set to “None”.
Surround Back (Surround back left/right
speakers)
Choices: Large x1, Small x1, Small x2, Large x2, None
• Select “Large x1” (large x 1) if you have a large
surround back speaker that reproduces low-frequency
signals effectively. All the surround back left and right
channel signals are directed to the surround back left
speaker.
• Select “Small x1” (small x 1) if you have a small
surround back speaker that does not reproduce low-
frequency signals effectively. The low-frequency
signals of the surround back left and right channels are
directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT”
and the rest of the signals are directed to the surround
back left speaker.
• Select “Small x2” (small x 2) if you have two small
surround back speakers that do not reproduce low-
frequency signals effectively. The low-frequency
signals of the surround back left and right channels are
directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT”.
• Select “Large x2” (large x 2) if you have two large
surround back speakers that reproduce low-frequency
signals effectively. All the surround back left and right
channel signals are directed to the surround back left
and right speakers.
• Select “None” (none) if you did not connect surround
back speakers. The surround back channel signals are
directed to the surround left and right speakers.
Presence (Presence speakers)
Use this feature if you want to use the presence speakers
connected to this unit.
Choices: Yes, None
• Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect presence
speakers.
• Select “YES” (yes) if you connected presence speakers
and want to use them.
Large
Small
NoneSurround Back
Presence
Surround
Center
Front
Large x1
Small x1
Large x2
Small x2
Surround Back
Presence
Bass Out
Surround
Center
None
Yes
Surround Back
Presence
Bass Out
Bass Cross Over
Surround
107 En
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Bass Out (Bass out)
Use this feature to select the speakers that output the LFE
(low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency signals.
Choices: Both, SWFR, Front
• Select “Both” (both) if you connected a subwoofer.
The low-frequency signals of any source are output
from the subwoofer. The LFE signals as well as the
low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “Small”
are directed to the subwoofer. The low-frequency
signals of the front left and right channels are directed
to the front left and right speakers and the subwoofer
regardless of the “Front” setting (see page 107).
• Select “SWFR” (subwoofer) if you connected a
subwoofer. The LFE signals as well as the low-
frequency signals of other speakers set to “Small” are
directed to the subwoofer.
• Select “Front” (front) if you did not connect a
subwoofer. The LFE signals, the low-frequency signals
of the front left and right channels, and the low-
frequency signals of other speakers set to “Small” are
all directed to the front left and right speakers
regardless of the “Front” setting (see page 107).
Bass Cross Over (Bass cross over)
Use this feature to select the crossover frequency of all the
speakers set to “Small” or to “None” in “Speaker Set” (see
pages 105 and 106). All frequencies below the selected
frequency will be sent to the subwoofer or to the speakers
set to “Large” in “Speaker Set” (see pages 105 and 106).
Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz,
120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz
SWFR Phase (Subwoofer Phase)
Use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer if
bass sounds are lacking or unclear.
Choices: Normal, Reverse
• Select “Normal” if you do not want to reverse the
phase of your subwoofer.
• Select “Reverse” to reverse the phase of your
subwoofer.
PR/SB Priority
(Presence/surround back speaker priority)
Use this feature to prioritize either the presence or the
surround back speakers when playing sources that contain
surround back channel signals using the CINEMA DSP
sound field programs.
Choices: Presence, Surround Back
• Select “Presence” to use the presence speakers even
when surround back channel signals are input. The
signals for the surround back channel will be output
from the surround speakers.
• Select “Surround Back” to use the surround back
speakers when surround back channel signals are
detected in a CINEMA DSP program. The presence
channel signals are output from the front speakers.
Notes
Both
SWFR
Front
Surround Back
Presence
Bass Out
Bass Cross Over
SWFR Phase
60Hz
40Hz
80Hz
90Hz
100Hz
Presence
Bass Out
Bass Cross Over
SWFR Phase
PR/SB Priority
Normal
Reverse
Bass Out
Bass Cross Over
PR/SB Priority
SWFR Phase
Bass Cross Over
SWFR Phase
PR/SB Priority
Surround Back
Presence
108 En
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
■ Speaker Distance (Speaker distance)
Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each
speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel.
Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the
main listening position. However, this is not possible in
most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay
must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all
sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same
time.
Speaker distances
Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft)
Initial setting:
Front L/Front R/Subwoofer/Presence L/
Presence R/Subwoofer: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
CENTER: 2.60 m (8.5 ft)
Surround L/Surround R/Surround Back L/
Surround Back R: 2.40 m (8.0 ft)
Control step: 0.1 m (0.5 ft)
• Select “Front L” to adjust the distance of the front left
speaker.
• Select “Front R” to adjust the distance of the front right
speaker.
• Select “Center” to adjust the distance of the center
speaker.
• Select “Surround L” to adjust the distance of the
surround left speaker.
• Select “Surround R” to adjust the distance of the
surround right speaker.
• Select “Surround Back L” to adjust the distance of the
surround back left speaker.
• Select “Surround Back R” to adjust the distance of the
surround back right speaker.
• Select “Presence L” to adjust the distance of the
presence left speaker.
• Select “Presence R” to adjust the distance of the
presence right speaker.
• Select “Subwoofer” to adjust the distance of the
subwoofer.
• You cannot adjust the distance of speakers set to “None” in
Speaker Set.
• If you are only using one surround back speaker, connect it to
the SURROUND BACK (SINGLE) jack, and adjust the
distance in “Surround Back L”.
• “Center”, “Surround L”, “Surround R”, “Surround Back L”,
“Surround Back R”, “Subwoofer”, “Presence L” and “Presence
R” cannot be adjusted if “Center” (see page 105), “Surround”
(see page 106), “Surround Back” (see page 106), “Bass Out”
(see page 107) and “Presence” (see page 106) are set to “None”
respectively.
• Instead of “Surround Back L” and “Surround Back R”,
“Surround Back” is displayed if “Surround Back” is set to either
“Small x1” or “Large x1” (see page 106).
Unit (Unit)
Selects the unit for displaying the values of “Speaker
Distance” parameter.
Choices: Meter (m), Feet (ft)
Initial setting:Feet (U.S.A. and Canada models)
Meter (Other models)
• Select “Meter” to input speaker distances in meters.
• Select “Feet” to input speaker distances in feet.
Speaker Distance
Speaker Level
Test Tone
Speaker Set
Front L
Front R
Subwoofer
Unit
Center
Notes
Meter
Feet
Front L
Front R
Subwoofer
Unit
Presence R
109 En
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Speaker Level (Speaker level)
Use this feature to manually balance the speaker levels
between the front left or surround left speakers and each
speaker selected in “SPEAKER SET” (see page 105).
Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB
Initial setting:
Front L/Front R/Subwoofer/Presence L/
Presence R/Subwoofer: 0.0 dB
CENTER/Surround L/Surround R/Surround Back L/
Surround Back R: –1.0 dB
Control step: 0.5 dB
• Select “Front L” to adjust the balance of the front left
speaker.
• Select “Front R” to adjust the balance of the front right
speaker.
• Select “Center” to adjust the balance of the center
speaker.
• Select “Surround L” to adjust the balance of the
surround left speaker.
• Select “Surround R” to adjust the balance of the
surround right speaker.
• Select “Surround Back L” to adjust the balance of the
surround back left speaker.
• Select “Surround Back R” to adjust the balance of the
surround back right speaker.
• Select “Presence L” to adjust the balance of the
presence left speaker.
• Select “Presence R” to adjust the balance of the
presence right speaker.
• Select “Subwoofer” to adjust the balance of the
subwoofer.
• You cannot adjust the level of channels set to “None” in
Speaker Set.
• If you are only using one surround back speaker, connect it to
the SURROUND BACK (SINGLE) jack, and adjust the balance
in “Surround Back L”.
Use this menu to adjust the network and USB system
parameters.
■ Network (Network settings)
Use this feature to view the network parameters (IP
address, etc.) or to change them manually.
The above display is an example.
DHCP (DHCP setting)
When this parameter is set to “ON”, network parameters
for “IP Address”, “Subnet Mask”, “Default Gateway”,
“DNS Server (P)” and “DNS Server (S)” obtained from a
DHCP enabled router are displayed. If DHCP server
function is not available, set this parameter to “Off” to
configure the network parameters manually.
Choices: On, Off
IP Address (IP address)
Use this parameter to specify an IP address assigned to
this unit. This value must not duplicate the one used for
other devices in the target network.
Subnet Mask (Subnet mask)
Use this parameter to specify the subnet mask value
assigned to this unit.
y
For most of the cases, the subnet mask value can be set as
“255.255.255.0”.
Default Gateway (Default gateway)
Use this parameter to specify the IP address of the default
gateway.
Notes
Speaker Distance
Presence R
Subwoofer
Speaker Level
Speaker Set
Front R
Center
Front L
Manual Setup (NET/USB)
Note
Play Style
Information
Network
Basic
NET/USB
Option
Video
IP Address
Subnet Mask
DHCP
Play Style
Information
Network
110 En
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
DNS Server (P) (Primary DNS server)
DNS Server (S) (Secondary DNS server)
Use this parameter to specify the IP address of the primary
and secondary DNS (Domain Name System) servers.
If you have only one DNS address, enter the DNS address in
“DNS Server (P)”. If you have two or more DNS addresses, enter
one of them in “DNS Server (P)” and another in
“DNS Server (S)”.
Setup (Setup)
Select “Setup” to confirm the settings of the “Network”
parameters.
1 Press k / n on the remote control repeatedly
and then press h to select and enter the
desired network parameter.
When “DHCP” is set to “ON”, you cannot select and adjust
any other network settings. To specify the other parameters,
you need to first set “DHCP” to “OFF”.
2
To specify the parameter, press
k
/
n
repeatedly
to change the number and press
l
/
h
to select
the digit to change.
3 Press ENTER to confirm the parameter.
4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 to configure each
network parameter.
5 Select “Setup” and then press ENTER to
finish configuration.
In case you have changed your network configuration, you may
need to reconfigure the network settings again.
y
You can reset the network settings of this unit to the initial factory
settings by using “N-RESET” in the advanced setup menu (see
page 136).
■ Play Style (Playback styles)
Use this feature to adjust the playback style according to
your preference. You can shuffle songs in a random order
or repeat one specific song or a sequence of songs.
Repeat (Repeat)
Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a
sequence of songs.
Choices: Off, Single, All
• Select “Off” to deactivate this feature.
• Select “Single” to set this unit to repeat one song.
• Select “All” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of
songs.
• When “Repeat” is set to a setting other than “Off”, “ ” or
“ ” appears in the top right corner of the playback status
screen while one song or a sequence of songs are being
repeated.
• If “Repeat” is set to “Single”, the setting will be reset to “Off”
when the main zone, Zone 2 and Zone 3 are turned off.
Shuffle (Shuffle)
Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in a
random order.
Choices: Off, On
• Select “Off” to deactivate this feature.
• Select “On” to set this unit to play songs or albums in a
random order.
When “Shuffle” is set to “On”, “ ” appears in the top right
corner of the playback status screen while songs or albums are
being shuffled.
Note
Note
Note
Notes
Note
Shuffle
Repeat
Information
Network
Play Style
111 En
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Information (Network information)
Use this feature to display the network system
information.
The above display is an example.
MAC Address
(MAC (Media Access Control) address)
This information displays the MAC address that is
assigned to this unit.
Status (Network status)
This information displays the current link status of the
network.
Display status: 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX,
Full Duplex, Half Duplex, No Link
“No Link” appears when network connection is not made.
System (System ID)
This information displays the system ID that is assigned to
this unit.
This menu adjusts the optional system settings.
1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and
then press SET MENU on the remote control.
2 Press k / n on the remote control to select
“Manual Setup” and then press h.
3 Press k / n / l / h on the remote control to
select “Option” and then press h.
4 Select the desired parameters and then press
h to access and adjust.
Note
Note
MAC Address
Status
System
100 BASE-TX
Full Duplex
ABCDE123
00:00:00:00:00:00
Information
Network
Play Style
Manual Setup (Option)
MENU
SRCH MODE
SET MENU
TV
SOURCE
AMP
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
iPod
Front Panel Disp.
Zone2 Set
Zone3 Set
Zone OSD
Option
Basic
Video
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
112 En
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
■ Front Panel Disp.
(Front panel display setting)
Dimmer (Dimmer)
Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel
display.
Control range: – 4 to 0
Scroll (Front panel display message scroll)
Use this feature to set whether to display the information
(such as song title or channel name) in the front panel
display in a continuous manner or by the first 14
alphanumeric characters after scrolling all characters once
when “XM”, “DOCK” or “NET/USB” is selected as the
input source.
Choices: Continue, Once
• Select “Continue” to display the operation status in the
front panel display in a continuous manner.
• Select “Once” to display the operation status in the
front panel display by the first 14 alphanumeric
characters after scrolling all characters once.
■ iPod (iPod settings)
Standby Charge
(iPod Charge on the standby mode)
Use this feature to select whether this unit charges the
battery of the stationed iPod or not when this unit is in the
standby mode (see page 75).
Choices: Off, Auto
• Select “Off” to charge the battery of the stationed iPod
only when this unit is turned on.
• Select “Auto” to charge the battery of the stationed
iPod when this unit is turned on and in the standby
mode.
■ Zone OSD (on-screen display)
Use this feature to display the operational status of Zone 2
as well as Zone 3 on the Zone 2 video monitor connected
to the ZONE VIDEO jacks on the rear panel of this unit.
The Zone 2 and Zone 3 information to be displayed is
listed as follows:
• The input source of Zone 2 and Zone 3
• The volume level of Zone 2 and Zone 3
• The audio mute status of Zone 2 and Zone 3
• The tonal quality status of Zone 2 and Zone 3
• The XM Satellite Radio information when XM is
selected as the input source of Zone 2 and Zone 3
Choices: Off, Zone2, Zone2&Zone3
• Select “Off” not to display any operational status of
Zone 2 and Zone 3 on the Zone 2 video monitor.
• Select “Zone2” to display the operational status of
Zone 2 only on the Zone 2 video monitor.
• Select “Zone2&Zone3” to display the operational
status of Zone 2 and Zone 3 on the Zone 2 video
monitor.
• If “Zone OSD” is set to “Zone2&Zone3”, changes to the
operational status of Zone 3 is displayed on the Zone 2 video
monitor. For example, if the input source of Zone 3 is changed
while you are watching TV in Zone 2, the name of the changed
input source of Zone 3 is displayed on your TV in Zone 2.
• If “Zone OSD” is set to “Zone2&Zone3”, the display contents
of Zone 2 and Zone 3 depends on whether or not Zone 2 and
Zone 3 are turned on with ZONE 2 ON/OFF and ZONE 3 ON/
OFF on the front panel (see page 131).
– If both Zone 2 and Zone 3 are turned on, the video signals of
the current input source of Zone 2 and the corresponding OSD
are displayed on the Zone 2 video monitor.
– If Zone 2 is turned off and Zone 3 is turned on, only the
corresponding OSD is displayed in the gray background
regardless of the REC OUT/ZONE 2 status on the front panel.
– If Zone 2 is turned on and Zone 3 is turned off, the video
signals of the current input source of Zone 2 and the
corresponding OSD are displayed on the Zone 2 video
monitor.
– If both Zone 2 and Zone 3 are turned off, no video signals and
no OSD are displayed on the Zone 2 video monitor.
Dimmer
Scroll
0
Dimmer
Scroll
Continue
Once
Standby Charge
Off
Auto
Notes
Front Panel Disp.
iPod
Zone3 Set
Zone2 Set
Zone OSD
Off
Zone2
Zone2&Zone3
113 En
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Zone2 Set/Zone3 Set
(Zone 2/Zone 3 setting)
Zone2 Amplifier/Zone3 Amplifier
(Zone 2/Zone 3 amplifier)
Use to select how the Zone 2 and/or Zone 3 speakers are
amplified.
Choices: EXT, INT:[SP1], INT:[SP2], INT:Both
• Select “EXT” if you want to connect your Zone 2 or
Zone 3 speakers through an external amplifier
connected to the ZONE 2 OUTPUT or ZONE 3
OUTPUT jacks on the rear panel of this unit.
• Select “INT:[SP1]” to use the internal surround back
amplifier of this unit when you want to connect your
Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers directly to the SP1 speaker
terminals on the rear panel of this unit.
• Select “INT:[SP2]” to use the internal surround
amplifier of this unit when you want to connect your
Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers directly to the SP2 speaker
terminals on the rear panel of this unit.
• Select “INT:Both” to use the internal surround and
surround back amplifiers of this unit when you want to
connect your Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers directly to
both the SP1 and the SP2 speaker terminals on the rear
panel of this unit.
• When “BI-AMP” is set to “ON” in the “ADVANCED SETUP”
menu, “INT:[SP1]”, “INT:[SP2]” and “INT:Both” cannot be
selected.
• When “INT:Both” is selected for “ZONE2 AMP”, only “EXT”
can be selected for “ZONE3 AMP”.
• When “INT:Both” is selected for “ZONE3 AMP”, only “EXT”
can be selected for “ZONE2 AMP”.
• When you set “ZONE2 AMP” or “ZONE3 AMP” to
“INT:[SP1]” or “INT:[SP2]” and the corresponding zone is
turned on, no sound is output from the surround back speakers.
• When you set “ZONE2 AMP” or “ZONE3 AMP” to
“INT:Both” and the corresponding zone is turned on, no sound
is output from both the surround speakers and the surround back
speakers in the main zone.
• When both “ZONE2 AMP” and “ZONE3 AMP” are set to
“INT:[SP1]” or “INT:[SP2]” and Zone 2 and Zone 3 are turned
on, no sound is output from both the surround speakers and the
surround back speakers in the main zone.
• When you use internal amplifiers for Zone 2 or Zone 3, some
surround field programs may not work in the same way as when
you do not use the internal amplifiers for Zone 2 or Zone 3.
Zone2 Volume/Zone3 Volume
(Zone 2/Zone 3 volume)
Use this feature to select how the volume control will
operate with regard to the ZONE 2 OUTPUT or ZONE 3
OUTPUT jacks.
Choices: Fixed, Variable
• Select “Fixed” to fix the ZONE 3 OUTPUT volume
level to a standard line level.
• Select “Variable” to adjust the ZONE 3 OUTPUT
volume simultaneously using VOL +/– on the remote
control.
Zone2 Max Vol./Zone3 Max Vol.
(Zone 2/Zone 3 Maximum volume)
Use this feature to set the maximum volume level in the
Zone 2 or Zone 3.
Control range: 16.5 dB, 15.0 dB to – 30.0 dB
Control step: 5.0 dB
The “Zone2 Max Vol.” or “Zone3 Max Vol.” setting takes priority
over the “Zone2 Initial Vol.” or “Zone3 Initial Vol.” setting. For
example, “Zone2 Initial Vol.” is set to –20.0 dB and then “Zone2
Max Vol.” is set to –30.0 dB, the volume level is automatically set
to –30.0 dB when you turn on the power of this unit next time.‘
Notes
Zone2 Volume
Zone2 Max Vol.
Zone2 Amplifier
EXT
INT:[SP1]
INT:[SP2]
Note
Zone2 Amplifier
Zone2 Max Vol.
Zone2 Initial Vol.
Zone2 Volume
Variable
Fixed
Zone2 Volume
Zone2 Amplifier
Zone2 Initial Vol.
Zone2 Max Vol.
+16.5dB
114 En
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
Zone2 Initial Vol./Zone3 Initial Vol.
(Zone 2/Zone 3 Initial volume)
Use this feature to set the volume level of Zone 2 or Zone
3 when the power of this unit is turned on.
Choices: Off, –80 dB to +16.5 dB
Control step: 0.5 dB
The “Zone2 Max Vol.” or “Zone3 Max Vol.” setting takes priority
over the “Zone2 Initial Vol.” or “Zone3 Initial Vol.” setting.
■ Sur.Initialize (Surround initialize)
Use this feature to initialize the parameters for each sound
field program within sound field program groups. When
you initialize a sound field program group, all of the
parameter values within that group revert to their initial
settings.
Adjusted sound field parameter settings are displayed in
blue.
Choices: CLASSICAL, LIVE/CLUB,
ENTERTAINMENT, MOVIE, STEREO,
SUR. DECODE, All
• Press k / n / l / h to select the sound field program
you want to initialize and then press ENTER.
• Select “All” to initialize settings for all sound field
program parameters.
Sound field program groups cannot be initialized when “Memory
Guard” is set to “On” (see page 114).
■ Audio Select
(Default Audio input jack select)
Use this feature to designate the default Audio input jack
select setting when you turn on the power of this unit.
Choices: Auto, Last
• Select “Auto” if you want this unit to automatically
detect the type of input signals and select the
appropriate Audio input jack select setting.
• Select “Last” if you want this unit to automatically
select the last selected Audio input jack select setting
used for the connected input source.
■ Decoder Mode (Default decoder mode)
You can select the decoder used by this unit.
Choices: Auto, Last
• Select “Auto” if you want this unit to automatically
detect input signal types and select the appropriate
decoder.
• Select “Last” if you want this unit to automatically
select the last decoder used for the connected source.
■ Memory Guard (Memory Guard)
Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP
program parameter values and other system settings.
Choices: Off, On
Select “On” to protect:
• DSP program parameters
• All menu items except “Memory Guard” and “System
Memory” – “Load”.
• The start and reload of the “Auto Setup” procedure.
Note
Note
Zone2 Max Vol.
Zone2 Volume
Zone2 Initial Vol.
Off
Zone3 Set
Zone2 Set
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAINMENT
MOVIE
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
Audio Select
Decoder Mode
Sur.Initialize
All
Zone3 Set
Audio Select
Sur.Initialize
Decoder Mode
Auto
Last
Memory Guard
Sur. Initialize
Decoder Mode
Audio Select
HDMI Set
Memory Guard
Auto
Last
HDMI Set
Decoder Mode
Audio Select
Memory Guard
Off
On
115 En
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
ADVANCED
OPERATION
y
When you select the protected parameter, “ ” appears at the
bottom left of the GUI screen.
■ HDMI Set (HDMI settings)
Use this feature to adjust the HDMI support audio.
Support Audio (Support audio)
Use this feature to select whether to play back HDMI
audio signals on this unit or on another HDMI component
connected to the HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this
unit.
Choices: RX-V2700, Other
• Select “RX-V2700” to play back HDMI audio signals
on this unit. The HDMI audio signals input at the
HDMI IN jacks of this unit are not output to the HDMI
component connected to the HDMI OUT jack on the
rear panel of this unit.
• Select “Other” to play back HDMI audio signals on
another HDMI component connected to the HDMI
OUT jack.
The HDMI video signals input at the HDMI IN 1, HDMI IN 2 or
HDMI IN 3 jack of this unit are always output at the HDMI OUT
jack of this unit.
Use this feature to save up to six of your favorite settings
that can be easily recalled when needed. You can save
settings such as the following:
• Sound field program parameters
• Speaker settings
• Speaker channel settings
• LFE level
• Dynamic range settings
• Parametric equalizer settings
■ To save settings
1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and
then press SET MENU on the remote control.
2 Press k / n / l / h on the remote control
repeatedly to select “System Memory” and
then press h.
3 Select “Save” and then press ENTER.
The display of the current settings appears in the GUI
screen.
4 Press k / n on the remote control repeatedly
to select the desired memory number to save
the current settings of this unit and then
press h.
“Save: ENTER” appears in the bottom right corner of
the window.
5 Press ENTER to save the current settings of
this unit.
Note
Memory Guard
Decoder Mode
HDMI Set
Support Audio
Support Audio
Other
RX-V2700
System Memory
MENU
SRCH MODE
SET MENU
TV
SOURCE
AMP
Sci-Fi
SpeakerCH
LFE Level
D-Range
PEQ
3/4/0.1
0dB
MAX
YPAO Natural
Current
Memory 1
Memory 2
116 En
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
■ To load settings
1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and
then press SET MENU on the remote control.
2 Press k / n / l / h on the remote control
repeatedly to select “System Memory” and
then press h.
3 Select “Load” and then press ENTER.
4 Press k / n on the remote control repeatedly
to select the desired memory number to load
and then press h.
“Load: ENTER” appears in the bottom right corner of
the window.
5 Press ENTER to load settings.
y
“Memory 1” and “Memory 2” settings can be recalled simply by
pressing MEMORY 1 or MEMORY 2 on the remote control.
When you press MEMORY 1, “Load Memory 1? Yes:Press
Again” appears in the GUI and “Press MEMORY1!” appears in
the front panel display. Press MEMORY 1 once more to recall the
settings.
When you press MEMORY 2, “Load Memory 2? Yes:Press
Again” appears in the GUI and “Press MEMORY2!” appears in
the front panel display. Press MEMORY 2 once more to recall the
settings.
You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel,
bit rate and flag data of the current input signal.
You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel,
bit rate and flag data of the current input signal.
1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and
then press SET MENU on the remote control.
The top display appears.
2 Press k / n repeatedly to select “Signal
Info.”.
The audio information about the input source appears
in the GUI screen.
3 Press l / h repeatedly to select “Audio
Info.” or “Video Info.”.
MENU
SRCH MODE
SET MENU
TV
SOURCE
AMP
Sci-Fi
SpeakerCH
LFE Level
D-Range
PEQ
3/4/0.1
0dB
MAX
Reset
Current
Memory 1
Memory 2
Memory 3
0
MEMORY1 2
9
0
MEMORY1 2
9
Signal Info.
(Input signal information)
MENU
SRCH MODE
SET MENU
TV
SOURCE
AMP
Sound
Video
Option
Basic
NET/USB
Manual Setup
Auto Setup
System Memory
Input Select
Stereo/Surround
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
HDMI Resolution
HDMI Signal
480i
Analog Resolution
- - -
- - -
HDMI Error
- - -
- - -
- - -
480i
Auto Setup
Signal Info.
System Memory
Language
Sampling
Bitrate
Channel
Audio Info. Video
Format
Flag1
Flag2
Dialogue
48kHz
- - -
???
- - -
- - -
- - -
- - -
Auto Setup
Signal Info.
System Memory
Language
Video Info. Audio
117 En
GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Audio information
Format (Signal format)
Signal format. When this unit cannot detect a digital
signal, it automatically switches to analog input.
“---” appears when this unit cannot detect any signals.
Sampling (Sampling frequency)
The number of samples per second taken from a
continuous signal to make a discrete signal.
“---” appears when this unit cannot detect the sampling
frequency.
Channel (Input channel)
The number of source channels in the input signal
(front/surround/LFE). For example, a multi-channel
soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2 surround
channels and LFE, is displayed as “3/2/0.1”.
“---” appears when there is no source channel available.
Bitrate (Bit rate)
The number of bits passing a given point per second.
“---” appears when this unit cannot detect the bit rate.
Dialogue
(Dialogue normalization level)
The dialogue normalization level preset to the current
input Dolby Digital and DTS signal.
Flag1/Flag2 (Signal flags)
Flag data encoded in DTS, Dolby Digital, or PCM
signals that cue this unit to automatically switch
decoders.
■ Video information
HDMI Signal (HDMI signal type)
Type of the source video signals and the video signals
output at the HDMI OUT jack of this unit.
HDMI Resolution (HDMI resolution)
Resolution of the source video signals and the video
signals output at the HDMI IN jacks of this unit.
Analog Resolution (Analog resolution)
Resolution of the source video signals and the analog
video signals output at the COMPONENT
MONITOR OUT jacks of this unit.
HDMI Error (HDMI Error)
Error message for HDMI sources or connected
HDMI devices. See page 144 for details.
Use this feature to select the language of the menu items
and messages that appears in the GUI (graphical user
interface) screen of this unit.
Choices: English (English), (Japanese),
Français (French), Deutsch (German),
Español (Spanish), Русский (Russian)
y
You can also select the GUI language using the “GUI
LANGUAGE” parameter in “ADVANCED SETUP” in the front
panel display (see page 136).
1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and
then press SET MENU on the remote control.
The top display appears.
2 Press n on the remote control repeatedly to
select Language and then press h.
3 Press k / n on the remote control repeatedly
to select the language of your choice.
4 Press ENTER to confirm your selection.
Note
Note
Note
Note
Language
MENU
SRCH MODE
SET MENU
TV
SOURCE
AMP
Sound
Video
Option
Basic
NET/USB
Manual Setup
Auto Setup
System Memory
Input Select
Stereo/Surround
Français
English
Language
Signal Info.
System Memory
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
118 En
In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by YAMAHA
and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set up the appropriate remote control code
for each input source (see page 120).
■ Controlling this unit
Set the operation mode selector to AMP to control this
unit (see page 8).
*1
These buttons always control this unit regardless of the
operation mode selector position.
*2
These buttons control this unit only when the component
operation mode selector is set to AMP.
■ Controlling a TV
Set the operation mode selector to TV to control your TV.
To control your TV, you must set the appropriate remote
control code for DTV or PHONO (see page 120). When
you set the remote control codes for both DTV and
PHONO, priority is given to the one set for DTV.
*1
These buttons always control your TV regardless of the
operation mode selector position.
*2
These buttons control your TV only when the operation mode
selector is set to TV. For details, see the “TV” column on
page 119.
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components
Notes
ON
OFF
CLEAR
LEARN
RENAME
MACRO
REC
NET RADIO
USB
PC/MCX
VOLUME
CH
TV VOL
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
A/B/C/D/E
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
BAND
LEVEL
ENHANCER
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
NIGHT
MEMORY
1
2
TV
SOURCE
AMP
SELECT
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
AUDIO SEL
POWER
POWER
POWER
STANDBY
NET/USB
–
2
+
+
––
+
ENTER
DISPLAY
AUDIO
MENU
TITLE
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
4
3
ENT
+
10
0
9
5
1
AV
TV
7
6
8
RETURN
V
-
AUX/DOCK
FREQ/TEXT
EON
MODE PTY SEEK
START
*2
*1
*1
*1
(U.S.A. model)
Notes
Remote control Digital TV/Cable TV
TV POWER Turns on or off the power.
TV VOL +/–
Increases or decreases the volume
level.
TV MUTE Mutes the audio output.
TV INPUT Changes the input source.
ON
OFF
CLEAR
LEARN
RENAME
MACRO
REC
NET RADIO
USB
PC/MCX
VOLUME
CH
TV VOL
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
A/B/C/D/E
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
BAND
LEVEL
ENHANCER
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
NIGHT
MEMORY
1
2
TV
SOURCE
AMP
SELECT
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
AUDIO SEL
POWER
POWER
POWER
STANDBY
NET/USB
–
2
+
+
––
+
ENTER
DISPLAY
AUDI O
MENU
TITLE
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
4
3
ENT
+
10
0
9
5
1
AV
TV
7
6
8
RETURN
V
-
AUX/DOCK
FREQ/TEXT
EON
MODE PTY SEEK
START
*1
*1
*2
*2
(U.S.A. model)
119 En
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Controlling other components
Set the operation mode selector to SOURCE to control
other components selected with the input selector buttons.
You must set the appropriate remote control code for each
input source in advance (see page 120). The following
table shows the function of each control button used to
control other components assigned to each input selector
button. Be advised that some buttons may not correctly
operate the selected component.
y
The remote control has 14 modes (input areas) to control
components so that the remote control can operate up to 14
different components.
See page 120 for details about the items marked with asterisk (*).
VOLU ME
CH
TV VOL
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
BAND
LEVEL
TV
SOURCE
AMP
SELECT
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
AUDIO SEL
POWER
POWER
POWER
STANDBY
NET/USB
–
+
+
––
+
ENTER
AUDIO
MENU
TITLE
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
AV
TV
V
-
AUX/DOCK
ON
OFF
CLEAR
LEARN
RENAME
MACRO
REC
NET RADIO
USB
PC/MCX
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
A/B/C/D/E
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
BAND
LEVEL
ENHANCER
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
NIGHT
MEMORY
1
2
2
ENTER
DISPLAY
AUDIO
MENU
TITLE
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
4
3
ENT
+
10
0
9
5
1
7
6
8
RETURN
FREQ/TEXT
EON
MODE PTY SEEK
START
7
6
5
4
A
0
9
8
3
1
2
(U.S.A. model)
DVD player/
DVD
recorder
VCR
Cable TV/
Satellite
tuner
TV LD player CD player
MD
recorder/
CD
recorder
Tape deck Tuner iPod
PC/MCX-
2000/
Internet
Radio/USB
1 AV
POWER
Power
*1
Power
*1
Power
*1
VCR power
*2
Power
*1
Power
*1
Power
*1
Power
*1
Power
*1
2 CH +
TV
channel up
*3
Channel up Channel up Channel up
TV
channel up
*3
TV
channel up
*3
TV
channel up
*3
TV
channel up
*3
TV
channel up
*3
TV
channel up
*3
TV
channel up
*3
CH –
TV channel
down
*3
Channel
down
Channel
down
Channel
down
TV channel
down
*3
TV channel
down
*3
TV channel
down
*3
TV channel
down
*3
TV channel
down
*3
TV channel
down
*3
TV channel
down
*3
3 TITLE
Title Title Title Title Band
Bookmark
*7
4 ENTER
Menu enter Menu select Menu select
Subsequent
menu
PRESET/CH k Menu up Menu up Menu up
Preset up
(1 to 8)
Up Up
PRESET/CH n Menu down Menu down Menu down
Preset down
(1 to 8)
Down Down
A-E/CAT. l Menu left Menu left Menu left
Preset down
(A to E)
Previous
menu
*6
Previous
menu
A-E/CAT. h Menu right Menu right Menu right
Direction
A/B
Preset up
(A to E)
Subsequent
menu
*6
Subsequent
menu
5 RETURN,
MEMORY
Return Return Return Return Memory
6 1-9, 0, +10
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
Numeric
buttons
*9
7 ll
Search
backward
Search
backward
VCR search
backward
*2
VCR search
backward
*2
Search
backward
Search
backward
Search
backward
Search
backward
Search
backward
*4
Select NET
RADIO
hh
Search
forward
Search
forward
VCR search
forward
*2
VCR search
forward
*2
Search
forward
Search
forward
Search
forward
Search
forward
Search
forward
*4
Select USB
b
Skip
backward
Chapter/
Skip
backward
Skip
backward
Skip
backward
Direction
back
Skip
backward
Skip
backward
*8
a Skip forward
Chapter/
Skip forward
Skip forward Skip forward
Direction
forward
Skip forward
Skip
forward
*8
REC/
DISC
SKIP
Disc skip
(player)
Rec (recorder)
Rec
VCR rec
*2
VCR rec
*2
Disc skip Rec Rec
Select PC/
MCX
s Stop Stop
VCR stop
*2
VCR stop
*2
Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop
e Pause Pause
VCR pause
*2
VCR pause
*2
Pause Pause Pause Pause
Pause
(Play/
Pause)
*5
p Play Play
VCR play
*2
VCR play
*2
Play Play Play Play
Play
(Play/
Pause)
*5
Play
8 MENU
Menu Menu Menu
Previous
menu
Previous
menu
9 AUDIO
Audio Audio
0 DISPLAY
Display Display Display Display Display Display Display Display
A ENT
Enter Enter/recall Enter
Note
120 En
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
*1
This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a POWER button.
*2
These buttons operate your VCR only when you set the appropriate remote control code for VCR 1 (see page 120).
*3
These buttons always control your TV regardless of the operation mode selector position.
*4
Press and hold to search backward or forward.
*5
Simple remote mode (see page 75).
*6
Menu browse mode only (see page 75).
*7
Press and hold to store your favorite Internet Radio stations with bookmarks (see page 80).
*8
These buttons are not operational when the Internet Radio is selected as the sub input source of NET/USB.
*9
Press 1-8 to assign or recall the preset items (see page 81).
■ Selecting a component to be controlled
You can select a component to be controlled
independently of the input source selected with the input
selector buttons.
Press SELECT k / n repeatedly to select the
desired component.
The name of the component to be controlled appears in the
display window on the remote control.
■ Controlling optional components
(Option mode)
“OPTN” is an optional component control area that can be
programmed with remote control functions independently
from any input source. This area is useful for
programming commands that are to be used only as a part
of a macro function or for components that do not have a
valid remote control code.
To select the option mode, press SELECT n
repeatedly until “OPTN” appears in the display
window on the remote control.
You cannot set a remote control code for the optional area. See
page 122 to program buttons operated within this component
control area.
You can control other components by setting the
appropriate remote control codes. Codes can be set up for
each input area. For a complete list of available remote
control codes, refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL
CODES” at the end of this manual.
The following table shows the default component
(Library: component category) and the remote control
code for each input area.
Remote control code default settings
You may not be able to operate your YAMAHA component even
if a YAMAHA remote control code is preset as listed above.
In this case, try setting another YAMAHA remote control code.
Notes
Note
SELECT
SELECT
Setting remote control codes
Input area
Library
(component
category)
Manufacturer
Default
code
XM TUNER YAMAHA 2604
NET/USB TUNER YAMAHA 2607
PHONO TV – –
TUNER TUNER YAMAHA 2602
CD CD YAMAHA 2300
MULTI CH
INPUT
DVD YAMAHA 2100
V-AUX/
DOCK
TUNER YAMAHA 2606
CBL/SAT CABLE – –
MD/TAPE MD YAMAHA 2500
CD-R CD-R YAMAHA 2400
DTV TV – –
VCR 1 VCR – –
DVR/VCR2 DVR YAMAHA 2807
DVD DVD YAMAHA 2100
Note
121 En
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
ADVANCED
OPERATION
1 Set the operation mode selector to SOURCE
and then press an input selector button to
select the input area you want to set up.
2 Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds
using a ballpoint pen or similar object.
The library name (ex. L;DVD) and the name of the
selected input area (ex. DVD) appear alternately in
the display window on the remote control.
y
• You can set a remote control code of a different type of
component to an input area. Press l / h repeatedly to
change the library (component category).
Library choices: L;DVD, L;DVR, L;LD, L;CD, L;CDR,
L;MD, L;TAP (tape), L;TUN (tuner),
L;AMP, L;TV, L;CAB (cable),
L;SAT (satellite), L;VCR
• If you want to setup for another input area, press the input
selector button, or press SELECT k / n repeatedly to
select the input area.
• Be sure to press and hold LEARN for at least 3 seconds,
otherwise the learning process will start.
• If you do not complete each of the following steps within
30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically
canceled. In this case, start over from step 2.
3 Press ENTER.
The four-digit code set for the selected component
appears in the display window.
0000 appears in the display window if no code has been set.
4 Press the numeric buttons to enter the
four-digit remote control code for the
component you want to use.
For a complete list of available remote control codes,
refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at
the end of this manual.
5 Press ENTER to set the number.
“OK” appears in the display window on the remote
control if setting was successful.
“NG” appears in the display window on the remote
control if the setting was unsuccessful. In this case,
start over from step 3.
y
If you continuously want to set up another code for another
component, press the input selector button, or
SELECT k / n repeatedly to select the component, then
repeat steps 2 through 5.
6 Press LEARN again to exit from the setup
mode.
7 Press p or AV POWER to confirm whether
you can control your component using the
remote control.
y
If operation is not possible and the manufacturer of your
component has more than one code, try each of them until
you find the correct one.
• “ERROR” appears in the display window on the remote control
if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or
when you press more than one button simultaneously.
• The supplied remote control does not contain all possible codes
for commercially available audio and video components
(including YAMAHA components). If operation is not possible
with any of the remote control codes, program the new remote
control function using the learn feature (see “Programming
codes from other remote controls”) or use the remote control
supplied with the component.
• Functions programmed using the learn feature take priority over
remote control code functions.
Notes
Note
V
-
AUX/DOCK
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
NET/USB
TV
SOURCE
AMP
LEARN
Notes
4
3
2
0
9
5
1
7
6
8
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
LEARN
AV
POWER
or
122 En
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
You can program remote control codes from other remote
controls. Use the learn feature if you want to program
functions not included in the basic operations covered by
the remote control codes, or an appropriate remote control
code is not available. You can program the function of
other remote control to the buttons in the highlighted areas
in the following illustration. The buttons can be
programmed independently for each input area.
The remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote
control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn most
of its functions. However, you may not be able to program some
special signals or extremely long transmissions. Refer to the
operating instructions for the other remote control.
1 Set the operation mode selector to SOURCE
and then press an input selector button to
select an input area.
Make sure that the operation mode selector is set to SOURCE.
When you set the operation mode selector to AMP and program a
remote control codes from other remote controls, the
programmed key cannot operate the amplifier function of this
unit.
2 Place this remote control about 5 to 10 cm
(2 to 4 in) apart from the other remote control
on a flat surface so that their infrared
transmitters are aimed at each other.
3 Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar
object.
“LEARN” and the name of the selected input area
(ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display window
on the remote control.
• Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for
more than 3 seconds, the remote enters the remote control
code setting mode.
• If you do not complete each of the following steps within
30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically
canceled. In this case, start over from step 3.
4 Press the button for which you want to
program the new function.
“LEARN” appears in the display window on the
remote control.
Programming codes from other
remote controls
Note
Note
FREQ/TEXT
EON
MODE PTY SEEK
START
ON
OFF
CLEAR
LEARN
RENAME
MACRO
REC
NET RADIO
USB
PC/MCX
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
A/B/C/D/E
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
BAND
LEVEL
ENHANCER
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
NIGHT
MEMORY
1
2
2
ENTER
DISPLAY
AUDIO
MENU
TITLE
4
3
ENT
+
10
0
9
5
1
7
6
8
RETURN
VOLUME
CH
TV VOL
TV
SOURCE
AMP
SELECT
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
AUDIO SEL
POWER
POWER
POWER
STANDBY
NET/USB
–
+
+
––
+
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
AV
TV
V
-
AUX/DOCK
(U.S.A. model)
V
-
AUX/DOCK
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
NET/USB
TV
SOURCE
AMP
(U.S.A. model)
Notes
SELECT
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
AUDIO SEL
POWER
POWER
POWER
STANDBY
NET/USB
AV
TV
V
-
AUX/DOCK
5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in)
(U.S.A. model)
Other remote control
LEARN
ON
OFF
CLEAR
LEARN
RENAME
MACRO
REC
NET RADIO
USB
PC/MCX
VOLUME
CH
TV VOL
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
MEMORY
A/B/C/D/E
SRCH MODE
PURE DIRECT
PRESET/CH
SET MENU
BAND
LEVEL
ENHANCER
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
NIGHT
MEMORY
1
2
TV
SOURCE
AMP
SELECT
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
AUDIO SEL
POWER
POWER
POWER
STANDBY
NET/USB
–
2
+
+
––
+
ENTER
DISPLAY
AUDI O
MENU
TITLE
TV MUTE
TV INPUT
MUTE
4
3
ENT
+
10
0
9
5
1
AV
TV
7
6
8
RETURN
V
-
AUX/DOCK
(U.S.A. model)
123 En
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
ADVANCED
OPERATION
5 Press and hold the button you want to
program on the other remote control until
“OK” appears in the display window on the
remote control.
“NG” appears in the display window on the remote
control if learning was unsuccessful. In this case, start
over from step 4.
y
• If you want to program another function, repeat steps 4
and 5.
• If you continuously want to program another function for
another component, press SELECT k / n to select the
component, and then repeat steps 4 and 5.
6 Press LEARN again to exit the learning
mode.
• “ERROR” appears in the display window on the remote control
if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or
when you press more than one button simultaneously.
• This remote control can learn approximately 200 functions.
However, depending on the signals learned, “FULL” may
appear in the display before you program 200 functions. In this
case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make room
for further learning.
• Learning may not be possible in the following cases:
– when the batteries in the remote control for this unit or other
components are weak.
– when the distance between the two remote controls is too
great or too small.
– when the remote control infrared windows are not facing each
other at the appropriate angle.
– when the remote control is exposed to direct sunlight.
– when the function to be programmed is continuous or
uncommon.
You can change the name of the input source that appears
in the display window on the remote control if you want to
use a different name than the factory preset. This feature is
useful when you have set an input area to control a
different component.
1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP or
SOURCE and then press an input selector
button to select the input area you want to
rename.
The name of the selected input area appears in the
display window.
2 Press RENAME using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30
seconds, the renaming mode will be automatically canceled.
In this case, start over from 2.
Notes
SELECT
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
AUDIO SEL
POWER
POWER
POWER
STANDBY
NET/USB
AV
TV
V
-
AUX/DOCK
(U.S.A. model)
Other remote control
LEARN
Changing source names in the
display window
Note
V
-
AUX/DOCK
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
NET/USB
TV
SOURCE
AMP
TV
SOURCE
AMP
(U.S.A. model)
or
RENAME
124 En
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
3 Press k / n to select and enter a character.
Pressing n changes the character as follows:
A to Z, 1 to 9, 0, + (plus), – (hyphen), ; (semicolon),
/ (slash), and space.
Pressing k changes the characters in reverse order.
4 Press h to move the cursor to the next
position.
y
Press l to move the cursor to the previous position.
5 Press ENTER to set the new name.
“OK” appears in the display window on the remote
control if renaming was successful.
“NG” appears in the display window on the remote
control if renaming was unsuccessful. In this case,
start over from step 3.
y
If you continuously want to rename another input area, press
the input selector button, or press SELECT k / n repeatedly
to select the component, then repeat steps 3 through 5.
6 Press RENAME again to exit the renaming
mode.
“ERROR” appears in the display window on the remote control if
you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or when
you press more than one button simultaneously.
y
This feature is useful when you change the input or output
assignment for digital jacks and component video input jacks.
Refer to “Rename” on page 95.
The macro programming feature makes it possible to
perform a series of operations with the press of a single
button. For example, when you want to play a CD,
normally you would turn on the components, select the
CD input, and press the play button to start playback. The
macro programming feature lets you perform all of these
operations simply by pressing the CD macro button. The
buttons listed as macro buttons below are factory set with
macro programs. You can also program your own macros
(see page 126).
■ MACRO operations
1 Set the MACRO ON/OFF selector to ON.
2 Press the desired macro button.
3 Set the MACRO ON/OFF selector to OFF
when you finish to using the macro
programming operation.
• While the remote control is running a macro program, it does
not accept any other operation until it has completed running
the program (the transmission indicator stops flashing).
• Continue to aim the remote control at the component the macro
is operating until the macro operation is complete.
Note
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
RENAME
Macro programming features
Notes
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
AUDIO SEL
POWER
POWER
POWER
STANDBY
NET/USB
AV
TV
V
-
AUX/DOCK
ON
OFF
CLEAR
LEARN
RENAME
MACRO
REC
NET RADIO
USB
PC/MCX
ENHANCER
NIGHT
MEMORY
1
2
ENT
+
10
0
9
FREQ/TEXT
EON
MODE PTY SEEK
START
MACRO
MACRO ON/OFF
Macro buttons
(U.S.A. model)
ON
OFF
CLEAR
LEARN
MACRO
ON
OFF
CLEAR
LEARN
MACRO
125 En
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Default macro functions
*1
You can turn on some components (including YAMAHA components) connected to this unit by connecting them to the AC
OUTLETS on the rear panel of this unit. Power control may not be synchronized with this unit depending on the component.
For details, refer to the operating instructions for the connected component.
*2
When the remote control code for your TV is set up for either DTV or PHONO (see page 120), you can turn on the power of your TV
without selecting an input source. The remote control code set up for DTV takes priority over the one for PHONO.
*3
When TUNER is selected as the input source, this unit plays the last station received before the unit was set in the standby mode.
*4
Playback can be started for any YAMAHA remote control-compatible MD recorder, CD player, CD recorder, DVD player, or DVD
recorder. When using macros to operate other components, you will need to program the play button on the input area of that
component (see page 122) or set a remote control code (see page 120).
Pressing
macro button
To automatically transmit these signals in order
First Second Third
—
—
—
—
—
(*1)
—
—
(CD area) (*4)
—
—
—
(MD/TAPE area) (*4)
(CD-R area) (*4)
—
(VCR 1 area) (*4)
(DVR/VCR 2 area) (*4)
(DVD area) (*4)
STANDBY STANDBY
POWER
POWER
(*1)
TV
POWER
(*2)
XM
POWER
XM
NET/USB
POWER
NET/USB
PHONO
POWER
PHONO
TUNER
TUNER
(*3)
CD CD
MULTI CH IN MULTI CH IN
V
-
AUX/DOC
K
V
-
AUX/DOC
K
CBL/SA
T
CBL/SA
T
MD/TAP
E
MD/TAP
E
CD-R CD-R
DTV DTV
VCR 1 VCR 1
DVR/VCR
2
DVR/VCR
2
DVD DVD
126 En
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
■ Programming macro operations
You can program your own macro and use the macro
programming feature to transmit several remote control
commands in sequence at the press of a button. Be sure to
set up remote control codes or perform learning operations
before programming the macro.
• The default macro is not cleared when a new macro is
programmed for a button. The default macro can be used again
when the programmed macro is cleared.
• It is not possible to add a new signal (macro step) to the default
macro. Programming a macro changes all macro contents.
• We do not recommend programming continuous operations
such as volume control in a macro.
1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP or
SOURCE and then press MACRO using a
ballpoint pen or similar object.
“MCR ?” appears in the display window on the
remote control.
If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30
seconds, the macro programming mode will be
automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 1.
2 Press the macro button you want to use to
operate the macro.
The macro button name (ex. “M;DVD”) and the
selected component name (ex. “DVD”) appear
alternately in the display window on the remote
control.
“AGAIN” appears in the display window if you press a
button other than a macro button.
3 Press the buttons for the functions you want
to include in the macro operation in
sequence.
You can set up to 10 steps (10 functions). After you
have set 10 steps, “FULL” appears and the remote
control automatically exits the macro mode. The
following example is for programming the following
procedure:
Step 1 (“MCR 1”): Press DVD.
Step 2 (“MCR 2”): Press AV POWER.
Step 3 (“MCR 3”): Press SLEEP.
To change the selected input area, press SELECT k / n.
Pressing the input selector buttons will program a macro step,
whereas SELECT k / n only changes the selected input area.
4 Press MACRO again using a ballpoint pen or
similar object when the operation sequence
you want to program is complete.
“ERROR” appears in the display window if you press more
than one button simultaneously.
Notes
Note
MACRO
TV
SOURCE
AMP
TV
SOURCE
AMP
or
V
-
AUX/DOCK
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
POWER
STANDBY
NET/USB
(U.S.A. model)
Note
Note
Note
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
AUDIO SEL
POWER
POWER
POWER
STANDBY
NET/USB
AV
TV
V
-
AUX/DOCK
1
2
3
Indicates the
number of macro
steps entered
Flashes alternately so you can
set the next step
MCR 1: DVD
MCR 2: AV POWER
MCR 3: SLEEP
(U.S.A. model)
127 En
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
ADVANCED
OPERATION
You can clear all changes made in each function set, such
as learned functions, macros, renamed input area names
and setup remote control ID.
■ Clearing function sets
1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP or
SOURCE and then press CLEAR by using a
ballpoint pen or similar object.
“CLEAR” appears in the display window.
If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30
seconds, the clearing mode will be automatically canceled.
In this case, start over from step 1.
2 Press k / n to select the clear mode.
L;CD (etc.) (L; Name of an input area)
Clears all learned functions in the respective
input area. The name of a component is shown
after a semicolon (;). Press an input selector
button to select the input area.
L;AMP Clears all learned functions for controlling the
amplifier functions of this unit.
L;ALL Clears all learned functions.
M;ALL Clears all programmed macros.
RNAME Clears all renamed source names.
FCTRY Clears all remote functions and returns the
remote to the factory settings.
3 Press and hold CLEAR again for about 3
seconds.
“WAIT” appears in the display window. If clearing
was successful, “C;OK” appears in the display
window on the remote control.
y
Once you have cleared a learned function for a button, the
button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer
setting, if you have set remote control codes).
• “L;ALL” and “FCTRY” may take about 30 seconds to
complete.
• “C;NG” appears in the display window if clearing was
unsuccessful. In this case start over from step 2.
• “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a
button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press
more than one button simultaneously.
Clearing configurations
Note
CLEAR
TV
SOURCE
AMP
TV
SOURCE
AMP
or
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
Notes
CLEAR
128 En
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
■ Clearing a learned function
You can clear the function learned for a certain button in
each control area.
1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP or
SOURCE and then press an input selector
button to select the input area containing the
function you want to clear.
The selected component name appears in the display
window.
2 Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar
object.
“LEARN” and the selected component name
(ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display
window.
• Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for
more than 3 seconds, the remote control enters the remote
control code setting mode.
• If you do not complete each of the following steps within
30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically
canceled. In this case, start over from step 2.
3 Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen
or similar object and then press the button
you want to clear for about 3 seconds.
“C;OK” appears in the display window if clearing
was successful. Once “C;OK” appears in the display
window on the remote control, release the ballpoint
pen or similar object used to press CLEAR to exit the
clearing mode. The remote control returns to the
learning mode.
y
• If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat
step 4.
• If you continuously want to clear another function for
another component, press SELECT k / n to select the
input area, then repeat step 4.
• Once you clear a learned function, the button reverts to the
factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have
set remote control codes).
4 Press LEARN again to exit.
• “C;NG” appears in the display window on the remote control if
clearing was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 2.
• “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press more than
one button simultaneously.
Notes
V
-
AUX/DOCK
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
NET/USB
TV
SOURCE
AMP
TV
SOURCE
AMP
(U.S.A. model)
or
LEARN
Notes
CLEAR
LEARN
RENAME
MODE PTY SEEK
START
(U.S.A. model)
129 En
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Clearing a macro function
You can clear the function programmed for a certain
macro button.
1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP or
SOURCE and then press MACRO using a
ballpoint pen or similar object.
“MCR ?” appears in the display window on the
remote control.
If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30
seconds, the macro programming mode will be
automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 1.
2 Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen
or similar object, then press the macro
button you want to clear for about 3 seconds.
“C;OK” appears in the display window on the remote
control if clearing was successful.
y
• If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat
step 2.
• Once you clear a programmed function, the button reverts
to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you
have set remote control codes).
3 Press MACRO again to exit the macro
programming mode.
• “C;NG” appears in the display window on the remote control if
clearing was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 2.
• “ERROR” appears in the display window on the remote control
if you press more than one button simultaneously.
Note
Notes
MACRO
TV
SOURCE
AMP
TV
SOURCE
AMP
or
ON
OFF
CLEAR
LEARN
RENAME
MACRO
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
V
-
AUX/DOCK
(U.S.A. model)
USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION
130 En
This unit allows you to configure a multi-room audio/video system. The multi-zone configuration feature enables you to
set this unit to reproduce separate input sources in the main room, second room (Zone 2) and third room (Zone 3). You
can control this unit from the second or third room using the supplied remote control.
You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-room functions of this unit:
• An infrared signal receiver in the second and/or third room.
• An infrared emitter in the main room. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control in the second
and/or third room to the main room (to a CD player or DVD player, for example).
• An amplifier and speakers for the second and/or third room.
• A video monitor for the second room
y
• You do not need an extra amplifier and speakers for the second and/or third room if you want to use the internal amplifiers of this unit.
• Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-room configuration, we recommend that you consult with
your nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center for the Zone 2 and Zone 3 connections that best meet your requirements.
■ Using external amplifiers
To use an external amplifier in Zone 2 or Zone 3, connect the external amplifier to ZONE OUT terminals and select
“EXT” in “Zone2 Amplifier” or “Zone3 Amplifier” (see page 113).
• Adjust the Zone 2/Zone 3 volume by using the amplifier in the second/third room when “Zone2 Volume” or “Zone3 Volume” are set to
“Fixed” (see page 113).
• To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT use the Zone 2/Zone 3 feature with CDs encoded in DTS.
USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION
Only analog signals are sent to the second and third rooms. Any source you want to listen to in the second or third
room must be connected using the analog (AUDIO L/R) input jacks on this unit.
Connecting the Zone 2 and Zone 3 components
Notes
OUTOUT
IN
REMOTE
IN
REMOTE
OUT
IN
REMOTE
REMOTE
This unit
YAMAHA
component
YAMAHA
component
Infrared signal
receiver
REMOTE OUT
VIDEO IN
AUDIO IN
MONITOR OUT
SP OUT
REMOTE IN
ZONE 2 AUDIO OUT
ZONE 3 AUDIO OUT
REMOTE IN
MAIN
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
ZONE 2 VIDEO OUT
Infrared emitter
DVD player
(or other component)
Amplifier
Remote control
Infrared signal
receiver
Amplifier
Remote control
Infrared signal
receiver
Second room
(Zone 2)
Third room
(Zone 3)
Main room
(Main zone)
SYSTEM
This unit
131 En
USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Using the internal amplifiers of this unit
If you want to use one internal amplifier (SP1 or SP2) of this unit
Connect the Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers directly to the SP1 or SP2 speaker terminals and select either “INT:[SP1]” or
“INT:[SP2]” for “Zone2 Amplifier” or “Zone3 Amplifier” (see page 113).
If you want to use two internal amplifiers (both SP1 and SP2) of this unit
Connect the Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers directly to the SP1 and SP2 speaker terminals and select “Both” for “Zone2
Amplifier” or “Zone3 Amplifier” (see page 113).
You can select the zone you want to control by using the
control buttons on the front panel or on the remote control.
■ Selecting Zone 2 or Zone 3
Front panel operations
1 Press ZONE 2 ON/OFF or ZONE 3 ON/OFF on
the front panel to individually turn on or off
Zone 2 or Zone 3.
y
Once MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed
inward to the ON position, you can also press POWER and
STANDBY on the remote control to turn on the main zone,
Zone 2 and Zone 3.
2 Press ZONE CONTROLS on the front panel
repeatedly to select the zone you want to
control.
Each time you press ZONE CONTROLS, the front
panel display changes as shown below, and the
indicator for the currently selected zone flashes for
approximately 5 seconds. However, no indicator
flashes when the main zone is selected.
ZONE2
Controls the Zone 2 amplifier or tuner functions.
ZONE3
Controls the Zone 3 amplifier or tuner functions.
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE
The SP1 or SP2 speaker terminals of this Receiver should not be connected to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or
more than one loudspeaker per channel.
Connection to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or multiple speakers per channel could create an abnormally low
impedance load resulting in amplifier damage. See this owner’s manual for correct usage.
Compliance with minimum speaker impedance information for all channels must be maintained at all times. This
information is found on the back panel of your Receiver.
R
L
+
–
SP2
SINGLE
R
L
+
–
+
–
+
+
–
–
BI-AMP
SURROUND BACK/
PRESENCE
R
L
SP1
Third room
(Zone 3)
This unit
Second room
(Zone 2)
Controlling Zone 2 or Zone 3
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE 3
ZONE 2
ZONE CONTROLS
ZONE2
ZONE3
No indicator flashes when the main zone is
selected.
132 En
USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION
y
• You must complete this step within 5 seconds while the
selected zone flashes in the front panel display. Otherwise,
the currently selected zone mode is automatically
canceled. In this case, press ZONE CONTROLS again.
• The initial setting is ZONE2 when both Zone 2 and Zone 3
are turned on.
3 Refer to “Selecting the input source of Zone
2 or Zone 3”, “Adjusting the volume level of
Zone 2 or Zone 3”, “Adjusting the balance of
the speaker level in Zone 2 or Zone 3” or
“Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2 or
Zone 3” on page 133 to perform further
operations.
Remote control operations
1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and
then press SELECT k repeatedly to select the
zone you want to control.
“ZONE 2” or “ZONE 3” is displayed in the display
window on the remote control.
2 Refer to “Selecting the input source of Zone
2 or Zone 3”, “Adjusting the volume level of
Zone 2 or Zone 3”, “Adjusting the balance of
the speaker level in Zone 2 or Zone 3” or
“Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2 or
Zone 3” on page 133 to perform further
operations.
3 Press SELECT k / n to exit from the
Zone 2/Zone 3 mode.
■ Turning on or off Zone 2 and/or Zone 3
using the remote control
POWER and STANDBY on the remote control work
differently depending on the selected zone that appears in
the display window on the remote control.
• When the main zone, Zone 2 or Zone 3 mode is
selected (see page 132), you can turn on the main zone,
Zone 2 or Zone 3 or set them to the standby mode
individually.
• When the all mode is selected, pressing POWER turns
on the main zone, Zone 2 and Zone 3 simultaneously
and pressing STANDBY sets them to the standby mode
simultaneously.
• When the remote control is in the main zone mode, “MAIN”
appears for a few seconds when POWER or STANDBY is
pressed.
• “ALL” appears in the display window on the remote control
only when SELECT n is pressed.
■ Selecting the input source of Zone 2 or
Zone 3
Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or
set the operation mode selector to AMP and then
press one of the input selector buttons on the
remote control) to select the input source of the
selected zone.
If the remote control is used to select the input source, “2:
name of the selected input area” or “3: name of the
selected input area” is displayed in the display window on
the remote control when Zone 2 or Zone 3 is selected
respectively.
SELECT
TV
SOURCE
AMP
or
Control mode Display window
POWER
and
STANDBY
Main zone
mode
Name of the selected
input area
Turns on the main
zone only or sets it to
the standby mode.
Zone 2 mode
“ZONE 2” or “2;name
of the selected input
area”
Turns on Zone 2 or
sets it to the standby
mode.
Zone 3 mode
“ZONE 3” or “3;name
of the selected input
area”
Turns on Zone 3 or
sets it to the standby
mode.
All mode
“ALL”
POWER: turns on
the main zone, Zone
2 and Zone 3.
STANDBY: sets the
main zone, Zone 2
and Zone 3 to the
standby mode.
Notes
133 En
USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION
ADVANCED
OPERATION
• Select TUNER as the input source to use the TUNER
features in the selected zone. For details about the
TUNER operations, see “FM/AM TUNING” on
page 56.
• Select XM as the input source to use the XM Satellite
Radio features in the selected zone. For details about
the XM Satellite Radio operations, see “XM
SATELLITE RADIO TUNING” on page 63.
The selected input source is shared across all zones.
y
• You must complete this step within 5 seconds while the selected
zone flashes in the front panel display. Otherwise, the currently
selected zone mode is automatically canceled. In this case, press
ZONE CONTROLS on the front panel again.
• When a video monitor is connected to one of the ZONE VIDEO
jacks, you can display the control information of Zone 2 or
Zone 3 and XM Satellite Radio information on the video
monitor screen. Set “Zone OSD” to “Zone2&Zone3” or
“Zone2” (see page 112).
■ Adjusting the volume level of Zone 2 or
Zone 3
Rotate VOLUME on the front panel (or press
VOLUME +/– on the remote control) to adjust the
volume level of the selected zone.
y
Press MUTE on the remote control to mute the sound output to
the selected zone.
When you use the external amplifiers in Zone 2 or Zone 3,
VOLUME +/– can be used only when “Zone2 Volume” or
“Zone3 Volume” is set to “Variable” in “Zone2 Set” or “Zone3
Set” (see page 113).
■ Adjusting the balance of the speaker
level in Zone 2 or Zone 3
Press TONE CONTROL repeatedly to select
“BALANCE” and then rotate PROGRAM on the
front panel to adjust the balance of the front left
and right speaker level of the selected zone.
■ Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2 or
Zone 3
Set the operation mode selector to AMP and then
press CH +/– on the remote control to adjust the
high-frequency response (TREBLE) or
TV VOL +/– to adjust the low-frequency response
(BASS) respectively.
y
You can also adjust the tonal quality of Zone 2 or Zone 3 by using
TONE CONTROL on the front panel. For details, see “Adjusting
the tonal quality” on page 52.
Check that “ZONE 2” or “ZONE 3” is displayed in the display
window of the remote control before you adjust the tonal quality
of the corresponding zone (see page 132).
Note
INPUT
TV
SOURCE
AMP
or
V
-
AUX/DOCK
DTV
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
DVD
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO
TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
NET/USB
(U.S.A. model)
+
–
VOLUME
VOLUME
or
Note
Note
CONTROL
TONE
PROGRAM
–
+
TV VOL
+
–
CH
TV
SOURCE
AMP
TREBLE
BASS
ADVANCED SETUP
134 En
This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. The advanced setup menu offers additional
operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each
parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment.
• The settings you make are reflected next time you press MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit (see
page 34).
• Only MASTER ON/OFF, STRAIGHT and the PROGRAM selector are effective while you are using the advanced setup menu.
• All the other operations cannot be made while you are using the advanced setup menu.
• The advanced setup menu is only available in the front panel display.
1 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to
release it outward to the OFF position to turn
off this unit.
2 Press and hold STRAIGHT on the front panel
and then press MASTER ON/OFF inward to
the ON position to turn on this unit.
This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu
appears in the front panel display.
3 Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front
panel to select the parameter you want to
adjust.
The name of the selected parameter appears in the
front panel display.
See page 135 for a complete list of available
parameters.
4 Press STRAIGHT on the front panel
repeatedly to change the selected parameter
setting.
5 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to
release it outward to the OFF position to save
the new setting and turn off this unit.
y
The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on
this unit.
ADVANCED SETUP
Notes
Using ADVANCED SETUP
ON/OFF
MASTER
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
ENHANCER
NIGHT
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROLS
MODE
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
MULTI ZONE
FM/AM
PRESET/
TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MIC
OPTIMIZER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
CONTROL
SELECT
AUDIO
TONE
REC OUT/
ZONE2
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
YPAO
ZONE 3
R
L
OPTICAL
USB
ZONE 2
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
2,43
1-2,5
(U.S.A. model)
MASTER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
MASTER
While holding
down
PROGRAM
8
MIN
IMP.SPEAKER
Currently selected
parameter setting
Currently selected
parameter
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
MASTER
135 En
ADVANCED SETUP
ADVANCED
OPERATION
■ Speaker impedance SPEAKER IMP.
Use this feature to set the speaker impedance of this unit
so that it matches that of your speakers.
Choices: 8ΩMIN, 6ΩMIN
•Select “8ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 8 Ω .
• Select “6ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 6 Ω .
■ User presets USER PRESET
Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to
the initial factory settings (see page 149).
Choices: CANCEL, RESET
• Select “CANCEL” not to reset any parameters of this
unit.
• Select “RESET” to reset the parameters of this unit.
• This setting completely resets all the parameters of this unit.
However, the advanced setup menu parameters will not be
initialized.
• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on
this unit.
■ Remote sensor REMOTE SENSOR
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the signal-
receiving capability of the remote control sensor on the
front panel of this unit.
Choices: ON, OFF
• Select “ON” if you want to activate the signal-
receiving capability of the remote control sensor.
• Select “OFF” if you want to deactivate the signal-
receiving capability of the remote control sensor.
We recommend setting the parameter to “ON” in most cases.
■ Wake on RS-232C access
WAKE ON RS232C
Use this feature to set this unit to transmit data via the RS-
232C interface when this unit is in the standby mode.
Choices: YES, NO
Initial setting:
[U.S.A. and Canada models]: YES
[Other models]: NO
• Select “YES” to set this unit to transmit data via the
RS-232C interface.
• Select “NO” to set this unit not to transmit data via the
RS-232C interface.
■ Remote control AMP ID
RC AMP ID
Use this feature to set the AMP ID of this unit for remote
control recognition (see page 121).
Choices: ID1, ID2
• Select “ID1” when the remote control AMP ID library
code is set to “2001”.
• Select “ID2” when the remote control AMP ID library
code is set to “2002”.
You need to set the corresponding remote control AMP library
code for the remote control (see page 121).
■ Remote control TUNER ID
RC TUNER ID
Use this feature to set the TUNER ID of this unit for
remote control recognition (see page 138).
Choices: ID1, ID2
• Select “ID1” when the remote control TUNER ID
library code is set to “2602”.
• Select “ID2” when the remote control TUNER ID
library code is set to “2603”.
You need to set the corresponding remote control TUNER library
code for the remote control (see page 138).
■ Remote control XM ID RC XM ID
(U.S.A. and Canada models only)
Use this feature to set the XM ID of this unit for remote
control recognition (see page 138).
Choices: ID1, ID2
• Select “ID1” when the remote control XM ID library
code is set to “2604”.
• Select “ID2” when the remote control XM ID library
code is set to “2605”.
You need to set the corresponding remote control XM library
code for the remote control (see page 138).
SPEAKER
IMP.
Speaker Impedance level
8ΩMIN
Front
The impedance of each
speaker must be 8 Ω or
higher.
Center
The impedance of each
speaker must be 8 Ω or
higher.
Surround
Surround back
6ΩMIN
Front
The impedance of each
speaker must be 4 Ω or
higher.
Center
The impedance of each
speaker must be 6 Ω or
higher.
Surround
Surround back
Notes
Note
Note
Note
Note
136 En
ADVANCED SETUP
■ Tuner frequency step TUNER FRQ STEP
(Asia and General models only)
Use this feature to set the tuner frequency step according
to the frequency spacing in your area.
Choices: AM10/FM100, AM9/FM50
• Select “AM10/FM100” for North, Central and South
America.
• Select “AM9/FM50” for all other areas.
■ Bi-AMP BI-AMP
Use to activate or deactivate the bi-AMP function.
Choices: ON, OFF
• Select “ON” if you want to activate the bi-AMP
function.
• Select “OFF” if you want to deactivate the bi-AMP
function.
When “BI-AMP” is set to “ON”, the SURROUND BACK
terminals cannot be used to connect surround back speakers in
that the SURROUND BACK terminals are already used for the
bi-AMP connection (see page 19).
■ Video reset VIDEO RESET
Use to initialize the parameter settings for “Video” in
“Manual Setup” (see page 101).
Choices: YES, CANCEL
The parameter setting for “Short Message” or “On Screen” is not
initialized (see page 101).
■ Network reset NETWORK RESET
Use this feature to reset the network settings of this unit
(see page 109) to the initial factory settings.
Choices: CANCEL, RESET
• Select “CANCEL” not to reset any network settings of
this unit.
• Select “RESET” to reset the network settings of this
unit.
• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on
this unit.
• When the network settings are reset, “DHCP” in “NET/USB” is
automatically set to “On” (see page 109) and the registered
client ID of this unit on your YAMAHA MCX-2000 is cleared
(see page 80).
■ TV format TV FORMAT
Use this feature to set the color encoding format of your
television.
Choices: NTSC, PAL
Initial setting:
[U.S.A., Canada, General and Korea models]: NTSC
[Other models]: PAL
This parameter setting only affects the video monitor connected
to the MONITOR OUT jacks and does not affect the Zone 2
video monitor connected to the ZONE 2 VIDEO jacks.
■ Monitor check for HDMI up-scaling
MONITOR CHECK
Use this feature to activate or deactivate the monitor check
function of this unit. When this parameter is set to “YES”,
this unit receives the information of the available video
signal resolutions from the video monitor connected via
HDMI (see page 102).
Choices: YES, SKIP
■ GUI language GUI LANGUAGE
Use this feature to select the language of your choice that
appears in the GUI (graphical user interface) menu of this
unit.
Choices: ENGLISH (English), JAPANESE (Japanese),
FRENCH (French), GERMAN (German), SPANISH
(Spanish), RUSSIAN (Russian)
Note
Note
Notes
Note
137 En
ADVANCED SETUP
ADVANCED
OPERATION
When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you
may be able to operate the other components
simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case,
set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit
separately.
■ Setting remote control AMP ID
1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP or
SOURCE.
2 Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds
using a ballpoint pen or similar object and
then press l / h repeatedly until “L;AMP”
appears in the display window on the remote
control.
• Be sure to press and hold LEARN for at least 3 seconds,
otherwise the learning process will start.
• If you do not complete each of the following steps within
30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically
canceled. In this case, start over from step 1.
3 Press ENTER.
The four-digit code set for the selected input area
appears in the display window on the remote control.
4 Press the numeric buttons to enter the
four-digit remote control code for the input
area you want to use.
Remote control AMP codes
Select one of the following codes to set the remote control
AMP code for the input area you want to use.
You need to set the corresponding remote control AMP ID
(see page 135).
5 Press ENTER to set the number.
“OK” appears in the display window if setting was
successful.
“NG” appears in the display window if the setting
was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 1.
6 Press LEARN again to exit from the setup
mode.
Setting remote control ID
Notes
TV
SOURCE
AMP
TV
SOURCE
AMP
or
LEARN
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
AMP library
code
(remote control
setting)
Function
Remote
control AMP
ID
2001
(initial setting)
To operate this unit using the
default code.
ID1
(initial setting)
2002
To operate this unit using an
alternative code.
ID2
Note
4
3
2
0
9
5
1
7
6
8
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
LEARN
138 En
ADVANCED SETUP
■ Setting remote control tuner ID or XM ID
1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP or
SOURCE and then press TUNER or XM on
the remote control to select the tuner or XM
to change the remote control ID.
2 Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds
using a ballpoint pen or similar object and
then press l / h repeatedly until “L;TUN”
and “TUNER”, or “L;TUN” and “XM”
alternately appear in the display window on
the remote control.
• Be sure to press and hold LEARN for at least 3 seconds,
otherwise the learning process will start.
• If you do not complete each of the following steps within
30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically
canceled. In this case, start over from step 1.
3 Press ENTER.
The four-digit code set for the selected input area
appears in the display window on the remote control.
4 Press the numeric buttons to enter the
four-digit remote control code for the input
area you want to use.
Remote control tuner codes
Select one of the following codes to set the remote control
tuner code for the input area you want to use.
Remote control XM codes
Select one of the following codes to set the remote control
XM code for the input area you want to use.
You need to set the corresponding remote control tuner ID
or XM ID (see page 135).
5 Press ENTER to set the number.
“OK” appears in the display window if setting was
successful.
“NG” appears in the display window if the setting
was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 1.
6 Press LEARN again to exit from the setup
mode.
Notes
XM
TUNER
TV
SOURCE
AMP
TV
SOURCE
AMP
or
or
LEARN
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
Tuner library
code
(remote control
setting)
Function
Remote
control
tuner ID
2602
(initial setting)
To operate this unit using the
default code.
ID1
(initial setting)
2603
To operate this unit using an
alternative code.
ID2
XM library
code
(remote control
setting)
Function
Remote
control XM
ID
2604
(initial setting)
To operate this unit using the
default code.
ID1
(initial setting)
2605
To operate this unit using an
alternative code.
ID2
Note
4
3
2
0
9
5
1
7
6
8
STEREO
SUR. DECODE
SELECT
EXTD SUR.
CLASSICAL
LIVE/CLUB
ENTERTAIN
MOVIE
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
ENTER
LEARN
TROUBLESHOOTING
139 En
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below
or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized
YAMAHA dealer or service center.
■ General
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
This unit fails to turn
on or enters the
standby mode soon
after the power is
turned on.
The power cable is not connected or the
plug is not completely inserted.
Connect the power cable firmly.
—
The speaker impedance setting is
incorrect.
Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers.
33
The protection circuitry has been
activated.
Make sure that all speaker wire connections on this
unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire
for each connection does not touch anything other
than its respective connection.
16
This unit has been exposed to a strong
external electric shock (such as lightning
or strong static electricity).
Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the
power cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds and then
use it normally.
—
No sound. Incorrect input or output cable
connections.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
23-29
The optimizer microphone is connected. Disconnect the optimizer microphone.
38
Audio input jack select is set to “HDMI”,
“COAX/OPT” or “ANALOG”.
Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO”.
42
Audio input jack select is set to
“ANALOG” while playing a source
encoded in Dolby Digital or DTS.
Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO” or
“COAX/OPT”.
42
No appropriate input source has been
selected.
Select an appropriate input source with the INPUT
selector on the front panel (or the input selector
buttons on the remote control).
40, 43
Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections.
16
The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume.
—
The sound is muted. Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– on the remote control
to resume audio output and then adjust the volume.
43
Signals this unit cannot reproduce are
being input from a source component,
such as a CD-ROM.
Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this
unit.
—
The HDMI components connected to this
unit do not support the HDCP copy
protection standards.
Connect HDMI components that support the HDCP
copy protection standards.
21
“Support Audio” is set to “Other” and
“HDMI” audio signals are not being
played back on this unit.
Set “Support Audio” to “RX-V2700” in “Option”.
115
140 En
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
No picture. The output and input for the picture are
connected to different types of video
jacks.
Set “Conversion” to “On” or connect your source
components in the same way as you connect your
video monitor to this unit.
102
Non-standard video signals are input.
Short message
displays do not
appear in the video
monitor.
“Short Message” is set to “OFF”. Set “Short Message” to “On”.
103
“Wall Paper” is set to “None”. Set “Wall Paper” to “Yes” or “Gray”.
104
“Conversion” is set to “Off”. Set “Conversion” to “On”.
102
The signals input at the HDMI IN1,
HDMI IN2 or HDMI IN3 jack are being
output at the HDMI OUT jack.
Video signals in the progressive format or
HDTV video signals are being input.
The sound suddenly
goes off.
The protection circuitry has been activated
because of a short circuit, etc.
Check that the speaker impedance setting is correct.
33, 135
Check that the speaker wires are not touching each
other and then turn this unit back on.
—
The sleep timer has turned off this unit. Turn on this unit, and play the source again.
—
The sound is muted. Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– on the remote control
to resume audio output.
43
Sound is heard from
the speaker on one
side only.
Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
16
Incorrect settings in “Speaker Level”. Adjust the “Speaker Level” settings.
109
Only the center
speaker outputs
substantial sound.
When playing a monaural source with a
CINEMA DSP program, the source signal
is directed to the center channel, and the
front and surround speakers output effect
sounds.
No sound is heard
from the center
speaker.
“Center” in “Speaker Set” is set to
“None”.
Set “Center” to “Small” or “Large”.
105
One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for
“7ch Stereo”) has been selected.
Try another sound field program.
47
No sound is heard
from the presence
speakers.
The sound field programs are turned off. Press STRAIGHT to turn them on.
51
You are using a source or program
combination that does not output sound
from all channels.
Try another sound field program.
40
No sound is heard
from the surround
speakers.
“Surround” in “Speaker Set” is set to
“None”.
Set “Surround” to “Small” or “Large”.
106
This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode
and a monaural source is being played
back.
Press STRAIGHT on the front panel so that
“STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel
display.
51
No sound is heard
from the subwoofer.
“Bass Out” in “Speaker Set” is set to
“Front” when a Dolby Digital or DTS
signal is being played.
Set “Bass Out” to “SWFR” or “Both”.
107
“Bass Out” in “Speaker Set” is set to
“SWFR” or “Front” when a 2-channel
source is being played.
Set “Bass Out” to “Both”.
107
The source does not contain low-
frequency signals.
141 En
TROUBLESHOOTING
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
No sound is heard
from the surround
back speakers.
“Surround” in “Speaker Set” is set to
“None” and “Surround Back” is
automatically set to “None”.
Set “Surround” and “Surround Back” to a setting
other than “None”.
106
“Surround Back” in “Speaker Set” is set to
“None”.
Set “Surround Back” to a setting other than “None”.
106
Dolby Digital or DTS
sources cannot be
played. (Dolby Digital
or DTS indicator in
the front panel
display does not light
up.)
The connected component is not set to
output Dolby Digital or DTS digital
signals.
Make an appropriate setting following the operating
instructions for your component.
—
Audio input jack select is set to
“ANALOG”.
Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO”.
42
A humming sound is
heard.
Incorrect cable connections. Connect the audio cables firmly. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
—
No connection from the turntable to the
GND terminal.
Connect the grounding cable of your turntable to the
GND terminal of this unit.
26
The volume level is
low while a record is
being played.
The record is being played on a turntable
with an MC cartridge.
Connect your turntable to this unit through an MC-
head amplifier.
26
The volume level
cannot be increased,
or the sound is
distorted.
The component connected to the AUDIO
OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned
off.
Turn on the power of the component.
—
The sound effect
cannot be recorded.
It is not possible to record the sound effect
with a recording component.
A source cannot be
recorded by a digital
recording component
connected to the
DIGITAL OUTPUT
jack.
The source component is not connected to
the DIGITAL INPUT jacks of this unit.
Connect the source component to the DIGITAL
INPUT jacks.
24, 26
Some components cannot record Dolby
Digital or DTS sources.
A source cannot be
recorded by an
analog component
connected to the
AUDIO OUT (REC)
jacks.
The source component is not connected to
the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit.
Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO
IN jacks.
26
The sound field
parameters and some
other settings of this
unit cannot be
changed.
“Memory Guard” in “Option” is set to
“On”.
Set “Memory Guard” to “Off”.
114
142 En
TROUBLESHOOTING
■ Tuner
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
This unit does not
operate properly.
The internal microcomputer has been
frozen by an external electric shock (such
as lightning or excessive static electricity)
or by a power supply with low voltage.
Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet
and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.
—
“CHECK SP WIRES”
appears in the front
panel display.
Speaker cables are short-circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly.
16
There is noise
interference from
digital or radio
frequency equipment.
This unit is too close to the digital or high-
frequency equipment.
Move this unit further away from such equipment.
—
The picture is
disturbed.
The video source uses scrambled or
encoded signals to prevent dubbing.
This unit suddenly
enters the standby
mode.
The internal temperature becomes too
high and the overheat protection circuitry
has been activated.
Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then
turn it back on.
—
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
FM
FM stereo reception is
noisy.
The characteristics of FM stereo
broadcasts may cause this problem
when the transmitter is too far away or
the antenna input is poor.
Check the antenna connections.
31
Try using a high-quality directional FM
antenna.
—
Use the manual tuning method.
58
There is distortion, and
clear reception cannot
be obtained even with a
good FM antenna.
There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate
multi-path interference.
—
The desired station
cannot be tuned into
with the automatic
tuning method.
The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.
—
Use the manual tuning method.
58
Previously preset
stations can no longer
be tuned into.
This unit has been disconnected for a
long period.
Preset the stations again.
59, 60
AM
The desired station
cannot be tuned into
with the automatic
tuning method.
The signal is weak or the antenna
connections are loose.
Tighten the AM loop antenna connections
and orient it for the best reception.
—
Use the manual tuning method.
58
There are continuous
crackling and hissing
noises.
Noises can result from lightning,
fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats
and other electrical equipment.
Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.
This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to
eliminate all noise.
—
There are buzzing and
whining noises.
A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set.
—
143 En
TROUBLESHOOTING
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
■ XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only)
If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear in the front panel
display. In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies.
■ Remote control
Status message Cause Remedy
See
page
CHECK ANTENNA
The XM Passport and XM Passport Home
Dock are not connected to the XM jack of
this unit or do not work properly.
Check XM Passport and XM Passport Home Dock
connections and orient for the best reception level.
63
UPDATING
The XM user encryption code is being
updated.
Wait until the encryption code is updated.
—
NO SIGNAL
The signal is too weak. Adjust the orientation of the XM Passport System for
the best reception level.
63
LOADING
It takes longer than four seconds for audio
or text data to be decoded.
Wait until the decoding process has finished.
—
OFF AIR
The XM Satellite Radio channel you
selected is not currently broadcasting any
signals.
Check the channel number again or select another
XM Satellite Radio channel.
—
<XM> - - -
The Channel Station ID (SID) is no longer
available.
- - - / - - -
No artist name or song title is available.
<CAT> - - -
No channels are available for the selected
category.
Select another channel category by pressing
CATEGORY on the front panel (or A-E/CAT. j / i on
the remote control) repeatedly.
69
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
The remote control
does not work or
function properly.
Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum
range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees off-
axis from the front panel.
11
Direct sunlight or lighting (from an
inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is
striking the remote control sensor of this
unit.
Reposition this unit.
—
The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries.
11
The batteries do not last long and get
quickly exhausted.
Using alkaline batteries is strongly recommended.
—
The operation mode selector is set
incorrectly.
Set the operation mode selector correctly.
When operating this unit, set it to the AMP position.
When operating the component selected by the input
selector button, set it to the SOURCE position.
When operating the TV set in the DTV or PHONO
area, set it to the TV position.
—
The remote control code was not correctly
set.
Set the remote control code correctly using
“LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end
of this manual.
120
Try setting another code of the same manufacturer
using “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at
the end of this manual.
120
The library code of the remote control and
the remote control ID of this unit do not
match.
Match the remote control ID of this unit with the
corresponding remote control library code.
121, 135
144 En
TROUBLESHOOTING
■ HDMI
■ Network and USB
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
The remote control
does not work or
function properly.
Even if the remote control code is
correctly set, there are some models that
do not respond to the remote control.
Program the necessary functions independently into
the programmable buttons using the Learn feature.
122
The remote control
does not learn new
functions.
The batteries of this remote control and/or
the other remote control are too weak.
Replace the batteries.
11
The distance between the two remote
controls is too much or too little.
Place the remote controls at the proper distance.
122
The signal coding or modulation of the
other remote control is not compatible
with this remote control.
Learning is not possible.
—
Memory capacity is full. Delete other unnecessary functions to make room for
the new functions.
127
Error message Cause Remedy
See
page
Device Over
The number of the connected HDMI
components is over the limit.
Reduce the number of the connected HDMI
components.
—
HDCP Error
HDCP authentication failed.
Check that the connected HDMI components support
the HDCP copy protection standards.
—
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
The PC server/MCX-2000/
Internet Radio does not
function properly.
The IP address is not set properly. Set the DHCP server function of the router to ON.
Alternately, perform manual configuration
according to the current operating environment.
109
The network cable is not connected. Connect it properly.
30
The music in the PC
server cannot be played
back.
The PC does not have Windows Media
Connect 2.0 installed in it.
Install Windows Media Connect 2.0 in the PC.
—
The music is recorded in a format that
cannot be played on this unit. This unit
cannot play music formats other than
WMA, MP3 and WAV (PCM format).
Also note that it cannot play certain
music files even if these are recorded in
the WMA, MP3 or WAV format.
Play music recorded in a format that this unit is
compatible with.
—
The music is copyright-protected. This unit cannot play copyright-protected music.
—
Windows Media Connect
2.0 cannot be connected.
The Windows XP PC is logging on to a
domain.
Log on to the local machine instead of the
domain.
—
The MusicCAST server
cannot be connected.
You are attempting to connect to
MCX-1000. The MusicCAST server that
can be connected by this unit is
MCX-2000.
Use MCX-2000 or the PC server.
—
Auto Configuration is not executed. Execute “Auto Configure”.
79
145 En
TROUBLESHOOTING
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Problem Cause Remedy
See
page
“Disconnected” is
displayed even when a
USB device is present.
This unit recognized the USB device as
an illegal device.
Turn this unit off then on again.
81
The Internet Radio cannot
be played.
The firewall of the network device is
activated. The Internet Radio can be
played only when it passes through the
port designated by each radio station.
The port number is variable depending
on radio station.
Check the firewall setting of the network device.
—
Connection to the Internet is
disconnected.
Check the configuration of the network device,
and then contact the network connection provider.
—
The music files and
directories in the USB
device cannot be viewed.
The music files and directories are placed
in locations other than the FAT area.
Place music files and directories in the FAT area.
—
You are attempting to browse directory
hierarchies of over 8 levels or a directory
with more than 500 files.
Modify the data structure on your USB device.
—
The USB device cannot
be recognized.
The connected USB device is other than
a USB mass storage class USB memory
device or USB portable audio player.
This unit can recognize only a USB mass storage
class USB memory device or USB portable audio
player. Also note that it cannot recognize certain
USB devices even when they are devices as
described above.
81
Some devices may become easier to recognize
when they are inserted before turning this unit on.
81
This unit does not recall
the correct item by using
numeric buttons (1-8).
The connected USB device is incorrect. Connect the USB device that stores the preset
item.
81
The directory that stores the selected item
is changed.
Preset the desired item to the numeric button (1-8)
again.
81
This unit does not recall
the selected item by using
numeric buttons (1-8).
The USB device is not connected
correctly.
Connect the correct USB device properly.
81
The PC or MCX-2000 that stores the
selected item is turned off.
Turn on the PC or MCX-2000.
79
The selected Internet Radio station is
temporary unavailable or out of service.
Try again when the selected Internet Radio is
providing the service.
80
Preset other Internet Radio stations.
81
Status message Cause Remedy
See
page
Please wait
This unit is in the middle of recognizing
the connection with your network.
This is not a system malfunction. Wait for a
while.
—
This unit is in the middle of recognizing
the connection with your USB memory
device or USB portable audio player.
This is not a system malfunction. Wait for a
while.
—
Please wait
(Starting Server)
This unit is in the middle of waking up
MCX-2000 that has been set to the
standby mode.
Wait for approximately 20 seconds.
—
146 En
TROUBLESHOOTING
Status message Cause Remedy
See
page
Connect error
There is a problem with the signal path
from your network to this unit.
Check the connection between this unit and the
LAN port on your router or hub.
30
Make sure your router is properly connected and
turned on. Also, make sure your modem is
properly connected and turned on when you are
attempting to listen to Internet Radio.
30
Disconnected
Your USB memory device or USB
portable audio player has been
disconnected from the USB port of this
unit.
Check the connection between this unit and your
USB memory device or USB portable audio
player.
—
The PC server or MCX-2000 previously
connected to this unit no longer exists.
Connect this unit to the available PC server or
MCX-2000.
79
There is a problem with the signal path
from your USB memory device or USB
portable audio player to this unit.
Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB
memory device or USB portable audio player to
the USB port of this unit.
34
Try resetting your USB memory device or USB
portable audio player.
—
Access error
This unit cannot access your USB
memory device or USB portable audio
player.
Try another USB memory device or USB portable
audio player.
—
There is a problem with the signal path
from your USB memory device or USB
portable audio player to this unit.
Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB
memory device or USB portable audio player to
the USB port of this unit.
34
Try resetting your USB memory device or USB
portable audio player.
—
Unable to play This unit cannot play back the songs
currently stored on your PC.
Make sure Windows Media Connect 2.0 is
installed on your PC.
—
Check that the songs currently stored on your PC
are playable (MP3, WMA, and WAV).
—
Store some other playable music files (MP3,
WMA, and WAV) on your PC.
—
The network may be overloaded with
heavy traffic, and playback is interrupted.
Try preparing a network exclusively for use with
this unit to separate it from general network
traffic.
—
List updated The list of the contents stored on your PC
server or MCX-2000 has been updated.
Bookmark ON
The desired Internet Radio station has
been added to the “Bookmarks” list.
Bookmark OFF
The stored Internet Radio station has
been removed from the “Bookmarks”
list.
Empty Memory!
No items are assigned to the selected
numeric button.
Assign the desired item to the numeric button.
81
Not found!
This unit cannot find the assigned item
for the selected numeric button.
Connect the USB device that stores the preset
item.
Turn on the PC or MCX-2000.
79
Try again when the selected Internet Radio is
providing the service.
80
Preset the desired item to the numeric button (1-8)
again.
81
147 En
TROUBLESHOOTING
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
■ iPod
In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing in the front panel and on the video monitor, check the connection to
your iPod (see page 29).
■ Auto Setup
Before Auto Setup
Note
Status message Cause Remedy
See
page
Loading...
This unit is in the middle of recognizing
the connection with your iPod.
This unit is in the middle of acquiring
song lists from your iPod.
Connect error
There is a problem with the signal path
from your iPod to this unit.
Turn off this unit and reconnect the YAMAHA iPod
universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit.
29
Try resetting your iPod.
—
Unknown iPod
The iPod being used is not supported by
this unit.
Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod
mini are supported.
—
iPod connected
Your iPod is properly stationed in a
YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as
the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to
the DOCK terminal of this unit, and the
connection between your iPod and this
unit is complete.
Disconnected
Your iPod was removed from a YAMAHA
iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold
separately) connected to the DOCK
terminal of this unit.
Station your iPod back in a YAMAHA iPod universal
dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to
the DOCK terminal of this unit.
29
Unable to play
This unit cannot play back the songs
currently stored on your iPod.
Check that the songs currently stored on your iPod
are playable.
—
Store some other playable music files on your iPod.
—
Error message Cause Remedy
See
page
Connect MIC! Optimizer microphone is not connected. Connect the supplied optimizer microphone
to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front
panel.
35
Unplug Phones! Headphones are connected. Unplug the headphones.
—
No Setup Menu! All setup menu are set to “Skip”. Set the desired menu item to “Check”. 36
Memory Guard! “Memory Guard” is set to “On”. Set “Memory Guard” to “Off”. 114
148 En
TROUBLESHOOTING
During Auto Setup
After Auto Setup
• If the “ERROR” or “WARNING” screens appears, check the cause of the problem, then run “Auto Setup” again.
• If warning “W1” appears, corrections are made, but they may not be optimal.
• If warning “W2” or “W3” appears, no corrections are made.
• If error “E10” occurs repeatedly, please contact a qualified YAMAHA service center.
Error message Cause Remedy
See
page
E01:No Front SP Front L/R channel signals are not detected. Check the front L/R speaker connections. 16
E02:No Sur. SP A surround channel signal is not detected. Check the surround speaker connections. 16
E03:No PRNS SP A presence channel signal is not detected. Check the presence speaker connections. 16
E04:SBR->SBL Only right surround back channel signal is
detected.
Connect the surround back speaker to the
LEFT SURROUND BACK SPEAKERS
terminal if you only have one surround
back speaker.
16
E05:Noisy Background noise is too loud. Try running “Auto Setup” in a quiet
environment.
—
Turn off noisy electric equipment like air
conditioners or move them away from the
optimizer microphone.
—
E06:Check Sur. Surround back speakers are connected,
though surround L/R speakers are not.
Connect surround speakers when you use
surround back speakers.
16
E07:No MIC The optimizer microphone was unplugged
during the “Auto Setup” procedure.
Connect the supplied optimizer microphone
to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front
panel.
35
E08:No Signal The optimizer microphone does not detect
test tones.
Check the microphone setting. 35
Check the speaker connections and
placement.
16
E09:User Cancel The “Auto Setup” procedure was cancelled
due to user activity.
Run “Auto Setup” again.
35
E10:Internal Err. An internal error occurred. Run “Auto Setup” again. 35
Warning message Cause Remedy
See
page
W1:Out of Phase Speaker polarity is not correct. This
message may appear depending on the
speakers even when the speakers are
connected correctly.
Check the speaker connections for proper
polarity (+ or –).
16
W2:Over Distance The distance between the speaker and the
listening position is over 24 m (80 ft).
Bring the speaker closer to the listening
position.
—
W3:Level Error The difference of volume level among
speakers is excessive.
Readjust the speaker installation so that all
speakers are set in locations with similar
conditions.
—
Check the speaker connections. 16
Use speakers of similar quality.
—
Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer. 35
W4:SP Mismatch The result of the wiring check of “Auto
Setup” is different from “Speaker Set” in
“Manual Setup”.
Use “Speaker Set” in “Manual Setup” to
adjust the speaker settings manually.
105
Notes
RESETTING THE SYSTEM
149 En
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings.
• This procedure completely resets all the parameters of this unit. However, the advanced setup menu parameters will not be initialized.
• The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit.
y
To cancel the initialization procedure at any time without making any changes, press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it
outward to the OFF position.
1 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to
release it outward to the OFF position to turn
off this unit.
2 Press and hold STRAIGHT on the front panel
and then press MASTER ON/OFF inward to
the ON position to turn on this unit.
This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu
appears in the front panel display.
3 Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front
panel to select “PRESET”.
4 Press STRAIGHT on the front panel
repeatedly to select “RESET”.
y
Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization procedure
without making any changes.
5 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to
release it outward to the OFF position to
confirm your selection and turn off this unit.
RESETTING THE SYSTEM
Notes
ON/OFF
MASTER
PURE DIRECT
VOLUME
MAIN ZONE
INPUT
ON
OFF
ENHANCER
NIGHT
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE CONTROLS
MODE
TUNING
PRESET/TUNING
EDIT
MULTI ZONE
FM/AM
PRESET/
TUNING
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MIC
OPTIMIZER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
CONTROL
SELECT
AUDIO
TONE
REC OUT/
ZONE2
A/B/C/D/E
PROGRAM
YPAO
ZONE 3
R
L
OPTICAL
USB
ZONE 2
AUDIO
VIDEO AUX
SILENT CINEMA
S VIDEO
VIDEO
PHONES
2,43
1-2,5
(U.S.A. model)
MASTER
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
MASTER
While holding
down
PROGRAM
CANCEL
USERPRESET
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
RESET
USERPRESET
MASTER
GLOSSARY
150 En
■ Bi-amplification connection
A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a
speaker. One amplifier is connected to the woofer section
of a loudspeaker while the other is connected to the
combined mid and tweeter section. With this arrangement
each amplifier operates over a restricted frequency range.
This restricted range presents each amplifier with a much
simpler job and each amplifier is less likely to influence
the sound in some way. The internal crossover of the
speaker consists of a LPF (low pass filter) and a HPF (high
pass filter). As its name implies, the LPF passes
frequencies below a cutoff and rejects frequencies above
the cutoff frequency. Likewise, the HPF passes
frequencies above its cutoff.
■ Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal
is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB
and P
R signals for the chrominance. Color can be
reproduced more faithfully with this system because each
of these signals is independent. The component signal is
also called the “color difference signal” because the
luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A
monitor with component input jacks is required in order to
output component signals.
■ Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, the video signal
is composed of three basic elements of a video picture:
color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite
video jack on a video component transmits these three
elements combined.
■ Dialogue normalization
Dialogue Normalization is a feature of Dolby Digital or
DTS, which is used to keep the programs at the same
average listening level so the user does not have to change
the volume control between Dolby Digital or DTS
programs.
■ Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives
you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3
front channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround
stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio
channels. With an additional channel especially for bass
effects, called LFE (Low Frequency Effect), the system
has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1
channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround
speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and
surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby
Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to
minimum volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels
and the precise sound orientation generated using digital
sound processing provide listeners with unprecedented
excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound
environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel
configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment.
■ Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output
channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a
matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the
2 in the original recording. For the best results, Dolby
Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks
recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this
additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and
realistic moving sound especially with scenes with “fly-
over” and “fly-around” effects.
■ Dolby Pro Logic II
Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to
decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources.
This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel
playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center
channel, and 2 surround left and right channels instead of
only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic
technology. There are three modes available: “Music
mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie
sources and “Game mode” for game sources.
■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx
Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete
multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel
sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode”
for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources (for
2-channel sources only) and “Game mode” for game
sources.
GLOSSARY
151 En
GLOSSARY
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
■ Dolby Surround
Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system
to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front
left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog
(monaural), and a surround channel for special sound
effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces
sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is
widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs,
and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby
Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital
signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the
volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects
and directionality.
■ DSD
Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio
signals on digital storage media, such as Super Audio
CDs. Using DSD, signals are stored as single bit values at
a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz, while
noise shaping and oversampling are used to reduce
distortion, a common occurrence with very high
quantization of audio signals. Due to the high sampling
rate, better audio quality can be achieved than that offered
by the PCM format used for normal audio CDs.
■ DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality
for multi-channel sound on DVD video, and is fully
backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers
to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to the typical 48 kHz
sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length.
DTS 96/24 offers sound quality transparent to the original
96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-
quality full-motion video for music programs and motion
picture soundtracks on DVD video.
■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems)
Digital Surround
DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog
soundtracks of movies with a 6.1-channel digital sound
track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie
theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc.
has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy
the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of
DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces
practically distortion-free 6.1-channel sound (technically,
front left and right, center, surround left and right, and
LFE 0.1 (subwoofer) channels for a total of 5.1 channels).
This unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1-
channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel
to the existing 5.1-channel format.
■ HDMI
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first
industry-supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video
interface. Providing an interface between any source (such
as a set-top box or AV receiver) and an audio/video
monitor (such as a digital television), HDMI supports
standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as
multi-channel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI
transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and supports 8-
channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to
accommodate future enhancements and requirements.
When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth
Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure
audio/video interface that meets the security requirements
of content providers and system operators. For further
information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at
“http://www.hdmi.org/”.
■ LFE 0.1 channel
This channel reproduces low-frequency signals. The
frequency range of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz.
This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a
low-frequency range compared to the full-range
reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or
DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.
■ MP3
One of the audio compression methods used by MPEG. It
employs the irreversible compression method, which
achieves a high compression rate by thinning out the data
of hardly audible part to the human ears. It is said to be
capable of compressing the data quantity by about 1/11
(128 kbps) while maintaining a similar audio quality to
music CD.
■ Neo:6
Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6-
channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables
playback with the full-range channels with higher
separation just like digital discrete signal playback. There
are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources
and “Cinema mode” for movie sources.
■ Neural Surround
Neural Surround
™
represents the latest advancement in
surround technology and has been adopted by XM
Satellite Radio for digital radio broadcast of surround
recordings and live events in surround sound. Neural
Surround
™
employs psychoacoustic frequency domain
processing which allows delivery of a more detailed sound
stage with superior channel separation and localization of
audio elements. System playback is scalable from 5.1 to
7.1 multi-channel surround playback.
152 En
GLOSSARY
■ PCM (Linear PCM)
Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog
audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without
using any compression. This is used as a method of
recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a
technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per
very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code
Modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and
then modulated for recording.
■ Sampling frequency and number of
quantized bits
When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of
times the signal is sampled per second is called the
sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when
converting the sound level into a numeric value is called
the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can
be played back is determined based on the sampling rate,
while the dynamic range representing the sound level
difference is determined by the number of quantized bits.
In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider
the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the
higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the
sound level can be reproduced.
■ S-video signal
With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally
transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted
as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the
chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the
S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss
and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful
images.
■ WAV
Windows standard audio file format, which defines the
method of recording the digital data obtained by
converting audio signals. It does not specify the
compression (coding) method so a desired compression
method can be used with it. By default, it is compatible
with the PCM method (no compression) and some
compression methods including the ADPCM method.
■ WMA
An audio compression method developed by Microsoft
Corporation. It employs the irreversible compression
method, which achieves a high compression rate by
thinning out the data of hardly audible part to the human
ears. It is said to be capable of compressing the data
quantity by about 1/22 (64 kbps) while maintaining a
similar audio quality to music CD.
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM INFORMATION
153 En
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
■ Elements of a sound field
What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument
are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In
addition to making the sound live, these reflections enable
us to tell where the player is situated as well as the size
and shape of the room in which we are sitting.
There are two distinct types of sound reflections that
combine to make up the sound field in addition to the
direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s
instrument.
Early reflections
Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms
to 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one
surface only (for example, from a wall or the ceiling).
Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound.
Reverberations
These are caused by reflections from more than one
surface (for example, from the walls, and the ceiling) so
numerous that they merge together to form a continuous
sonic afterglow. They are non-directional and lessen the
clarity of the direct sound.
Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent
reverberations taken together help us to determine the
subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this
information that the digital sound field processor
reproduces in order to create sound fields.
If you could create the appropriate early reflections and
subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you
would be able to create your own listening environment.
The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a
concert hall, a dance floor, or a room with virtually any
size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is
exactly what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound
field processor.
■ CINEMA DSP
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were
originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect
is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for
acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room
size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can
differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in
the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured
data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original
sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic,
Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the audiovisual
experience of a movie theater in the listening room of your
own home.
■ SILENT CINEMA
YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect
DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for
headphones have been set for each sound field so that
accurate representations of all the sound field programs
can be enjoyed on headphones.
■ Virtual CINEMA DSP
YAMAHA has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP
algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field
surround effects even without any surround speakers by
using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to
enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker
system that does not include a center speaker.
■ Sound output from each speaker
Sound output from each speaker depends on the type of
audio signals being input. Refer to the diagrams in the
table below to understand the speaker layout for each
sound field program. For details about the sound output
from each speaker in sound field programs, refer to
“SOUND OUTPUT IN EACH SOUND FIELD
PROGRAM” in “APPENDIX” at the end of this manual.
Be advised that there may be no or not enough sound output from
speakers depending on the type of input source being played
back. Furthermore, there may be some channels that can only be
used partially when they are adjusted to specific aspects of
movies, such as special sound effects, etc.
y
Except for “2ch Stereo”, “7ch Stereo”, and “STRAIGHT”, you
can select a decoder to output sound from the surround back
speakers (see page 47).
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM INFORMATION
Note
PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION
154 En
This unit employs YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic
Optimizer (YPAO) technology, together with the
Parametric EQ settings (see page 98), to optimize the
frequency characteristics of its parametric equalizer to
match your listening environment. YPAO uses a
combination of the following three parameters
(Frequency, Gain and Q factor) to provide highly precise
adjustment of the frequency characteristics.
■ Frequency
This parameter is adjustable in one-third octave
increments between 32 Hz and 16 kHz.
■ Gain
This parameter is adjustable in increments of 0.5 dB
between –20 and +6 dB.
■ Q factor
The width of the specified frequency band is referred to as
the Q factor. This parameter is adjustable between the
values 0.5 and 10.
YPAO adjusts frequency characteristics to suit your
listening requirements using a combination of the above
three parameters (Frequency, Gain and Q factor) for each
equalizer band in this unit’s parametric equalizer. This unit
has 7 equalizer bands for each channel.
The use of multiple equalizer bands enables more precise
adjustments of frequency characteristics (as in Figure 2).
This is not possible using only a single equalizer band (as
in Figure 1).
Figure 1
Figure 2
PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION
Gain
Frequency
Original frequency
characteristic
Band 1
Frequency
characteristic after
correction
Gain
Frequency
Band 1
Band 2
Frequency
characteristic after
correction
Original frequency
characteristic
SPECIFICATIONS
155 En
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
AUDIO SECTION
• Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround,
Surround back
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω .................................... 140 W
• Dynamic Power (IHF)
8/6/4/2 Ω ........................................................ 170/205/265/345 W
• Maximum Useful Output Power (JEITA)
[Asia, General, China and Korea models]
1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ........................................................ 185 W
• Maximum Output Power [U.K. and Europe models]
1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ....................................................... 200 W
• Dynamic Headroom
8 Ω .................................................................................... 0.84 dB
• IEC Output Power [U.K. and Europe models]
1 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω ..................................................... 145 W
• Damping Factor (IHF)
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω ................................................. 150 or more
• Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance
PHONO .................................................................. 3.5 mV/47 kΩ
CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ
MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ
• Maximum Input Voltage
PHONO (1 kHz, 0.1% THD) ................................ 60 mV or more
CD, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .................................. 2.4 V or more
• Rated Output Voltage/Output Impedance
OUT (REC) ........................................................... 200 mV/900 Ω
PRE OUT .................................................................. 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ
SUBWOOFER .......................................................... 2.0 V/1.2 kΩ
ZONE 2/ZONE 3 OUT ............................................. 1.0 V/1.4 kΩ
• Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance
CD, etc. (1 kHz, 40 mV, 8 Ω) ............................... 150 mV/100 Ω
• Frequency Response
CD to Front L/R, Pure Direct .......... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, +0/–3 dB
• RIAA Equalization Deviation
PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) .......................................... 0 ± 0.5 dB
• Total Harmonic Distortion
PHONO to OUT (REC)
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) ......................................... 0.02% or less
CD, etc. to Front L/R
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 70 W, 8 Ω) ............................... 0.04% or less
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
PHONO (5 mV) to Front L/R
[Australia, U.K. and Europe models] .................... 81 dB or more
[Other models] ....................................................... 86 dB or more
CD, etc. (250 mV) to Front L/R .......................... 100 dB or more
• Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Front L/R ............................................................... 150 µV or less
• Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)
PHONO (shortened) to Front L/R ............... 60 dB/55 dB or more
CD, etc.
(5.1 kΩ shortened) to Front L/R ............... 60 dB/45 dB or more
• Tone Control (Front L/R)
BASS Boost/Cut ........................................................ ±6 dB/50 Hz
BASS Turnover Frequency .................................. 125/350/500 Hz
TREBLE Boost/Cut ................................................ ±6 dB/20 kHz
TREBLE Turnover Frequency .............................. 2.5/3.5/8.0 kHz
• Zone 2/Zone 3 Tone Control (Front L/R)
BASS Boost/Cut .................................................... ±10 dB/100 Hz
BASS Turnover Frequency .................................................450 Hz
TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. ±10 dB/10 kHz
TREBLE Turnover Frequency ...........................................2.0 kHz
• Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround back) ...........12 dB/oct.
L.P.F. (Subwoofer) .........................................................24 dB/oct.
VIDEO SECTION
• Video Format [MONITOR OUT] (Wall Paper)
[U.S.A., Canada, General and Korea models] ............ NTSC/PAL
[U.K., Europe, Australia, Asia and China models]
................................................................................... PAL/NTSC
• Video Format (Video Conversion)
..........................................................................................NTSC/PAL
• Signal Level
Composite ................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω
S-video ............................ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω (C)
Component ................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (PB/PR)
• Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off)
............................................................................... 1.5 Vp-p or more
• Signal to Noise Ratio (Video Conversion Off)
.................................................................................... 60 dB or more
• Frequency Response [MONITOR OUT]
Component (Video Conversion Off)
............................................................. 5 Hz to 100 MHz, ±3 dB
• Video Format [ZONE OUT] (Gray Back)
[U.S.A., Canada, General and Korea models] .................... NTSC
[U.K., Europe, Australia, Asia and China models] ................ PAL
FM SECTION
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz
[Asia and General models] ........ 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz
[Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz
• 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF)
Mono/Stereo ........................................ 2.0/25 µV (17.3/39.2 dBf)
• Usable Sensitivity (IHF) ....................................... 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf)
• Selectivity (400 kHz) .............................................................. 70 dB
• Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB
• Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)
Mono/Stereo .................................................................... 0.2/0.3%
• Stereo Separation (1 kHz)
Stereo .....................................................................................42 dB
• Frequency Response
Stereo .............................................. 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2 dB
• Antenna Input (unbalanced) ..................................................... 75 Ω
SPECIFICATIONS
156 En
SPECIFICATIONS
AM SECTION
• Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 to 1710 kHz
[Asia and General models] ................. 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz
[Other models] ................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz
• Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m
GENERAL
• Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz
[General and Asia model]
....................................... AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz
[China model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz
[Korea model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 60 Hz
[Australia model] ............................................... AC 240 V, 50 Hz
[U.K. and Europe models] ................................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz
• Power Consumption
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 500 W/630 VA
[Other models] ................................................................... 500 W
• Standby Power Consumption
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .................................... 0.1 W or less
[General model] (AC 240 V, 50 Hz) ...................... 0.33 W or less
[Other models] ......................................................... 0.1 W or less
• Maximum Power Consumption [General model only]
6ch, 10% THD ................................................................. 1100 W
•AC Outlets
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .... 2 (Total 100 W/0.8 A maximum)
[Asia, General and China models] ....... 2 (Total 50 W maximum)
[Australia and U.K. models] .... 1 (Total 100 W/0.4 A maximum)
[Europe model] ......................... 2 (Total 100 W/0.4 A maximum)
• Dimensions (W x H x D) ............................. 435 x 171 x 438.5 mm
(17.1 x 6.7 x 17.3 in)
• Weight .................................................................. 17.2 kg (37.9 lbs)
* Specifications are subject to change without notice.
i
APPENDIX
SOUND OUTPUT IN EACH SOUND FIELD PROGRAM
*1
/ / : OFF
*2
/ / : ON, PRIORITY: PRNS
*3
/ / : ON, PRIORITY: SB
Front left speaker Surround left speaker Surround back right speaker
Center speaker Surround right speaker Presence left speaker
Front right speaker Surround back left speaker Presence right speaker
Speaker from which sound is being output
Speaker from which no sound is being output
Program
Input source
2-channel audio
(monaural)
2-channel audio
(stereo)
5.1/6.1-channel
audio *
1
5.1/6.1-channel
audio *
2
5.1/6.1-channel
audio *
3
CLASSICAL
Hall in Munich
Hall in Vienna
Hall in
Amsterdam
Church in
Freiburg
Chamber
LIVE/CLUB
Village
Vanguard
Warehouse Loft
Cellar Club
The Roxy
Theatre
The Bottom Line
ENTERTAINMENT
Sports
Music Video
Recital/Opera
ENTERTAINMENT
Action Game
Roleplaying
Game
MOVIE
STANDARD
(PRO LOGIC)
(Dolby Digital)
/
(DTS)
(Dolby Digital)
/
(DTS)
(Dolby Digital)
/
(DTS)
L
SL
SBR
C SR PL
R
SBL
PR
EX
PL x
EX
PL x
EX
PL x
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
ii
MOVIE
STANDARD
(PLII Movie)
(PLIIx Movie)
(Neo:6 Cinema)
PRIORITY: PRNS (Dolby Digital)
/
(DTS)
(Dolby Digital)
/
(DTS)
(Dolby Digital)
/
(DTS)
PRIORITY: SB
MOVIE
Spectacle
Sci-Fi
Adventure
Drama
Mono Movie
STEREO
2ch Stereo
Monaural playback
STEREO
7ch Stereo
Program
Input source
2-channel audio
(monaural)
2-channel audio
(stereo)
5.1/6.1-channel
audio *
1
5.1/6.1-channel
audio *
2
5.1/6.1-channel
audio *
3
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL SR
iii
APPENDIX
SURROUND DECODE
PRO LOGIC
PRO LOGIC Dolby Digital
/
DTS
Dolby Digital
/
DTS
Dolby Digital
/
DTS
Dolby Digital
/
DTS
SURROUND DECODE
PLII Movie
PLII Music
PLII Game
Movie/Game Movie/Music/Game Dolby Digital
/
DTS
Dolby Digital
/
DTS
Dolby Digital
/
DTS
Music
SURROUND DECODE
PLIIx Movie
PLIIx Music
PLIIx Game
Movie/Game Movie/Music/Game Dolby Digital
/
DTS
Dolby Digital
/
DTS
Dolby Digital
/
DTS
Music
Program
Input source
2-channel audio
(monaural)
2-channel audio
(stereo)
5.1/6.1-channel
audio *
1
5.1/6.1-channel
audio *
2
5.1/6.1-channel
audio *
3
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
iv
SURROUND DECODE
Neo:6 Cinema
Neo:6 Music
Cinema Cinema/Music Dolby Digital
/
DTS
Dolby Digital
/
DTS
Dolby Digital
/
DTS
Music
SURROUND DECODE
neural sur.
Dolby Digital
/
DTS
Dolby Digital
/
DTS
Dolby Digital
/
DTS
STRAIGHT
Monaural playback
PURE DIRECT
Monaural playback
Program
Input source
2-channel audio
(monaural)
2-channel audio
(stereo)
5.1/6.1-channel
audio *
1
5.1/6.1-channel
audio *
2
5.1/6.1-channel
audio *
3
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
L
PL
C
R
PR
SL
SBRSBL
SR
v
APPENDIX
GPL/LGPL
■ GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2, June 1991
Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place, Suite 330,
Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim
copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed.
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and
change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your
freedom to share and change free software–to make sure the software is free for all its
users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation’s
software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free
Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License
instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General
Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute
copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source
code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in
new free programs; and that you know you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you
these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain
responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you
must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too,
receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know
their rights.
We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this
license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software.
Also, for each author’s protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone
understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified
by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is
not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the
original authors’ reputations.
Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid
the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses,
in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any
patent must be licensed for everyone’s free use or not licensed at all.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND
MODIFICATION
0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed
by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this
General Public License. The “Program”, below, refers to any such program or
work, and a “work based on the Program” means either the Program or any
derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program
or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into
another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the
term “modification”.) Each licensee is addressed as “you”.
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this
License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and
the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on
the Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that
is true depends on what the Program does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program’s source code as you
receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately
publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty;
keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any
warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License
along with the Program.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your
option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus
forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications
or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of
these conditions:
a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you
changed the files and the date of any change.
b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in
part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be
licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this
License.
c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run,
you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most
ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate
copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that
you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under
these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License.
(Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print
such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to
print an announcement.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections
of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered
independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do
not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when
you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the
Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License,
whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each
and every part regardless of who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work
written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the
distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the
Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution
medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.
3. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2)
in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above
provided that you also do one of the following:
a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source
code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on
a medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any
third party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing
source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding
source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a
medium customarily used for software interchange; or,
c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute
corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only for
noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object
code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b
above.)
The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making
modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source
code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the
scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a
special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally
distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler,
kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that
component itself accompanies the executable.
If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a
designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same
place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not
compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as
expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify,
sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate
your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or
rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long
as such parties remain in full compliance.
5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it.
However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program
or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept
this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work
based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or
works based on it.
6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the
recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy,
distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may
not impose any further restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of the rights granted
herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this
License.
7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or
for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you
(whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of
this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you
cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not
distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit
royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly
or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this
License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular
circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole
is intended to apply in other circumstances.
vi
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other
property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole
purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is
implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous
contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance
on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or
she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence
of the rest of this License.
8. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries
either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who
places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical
distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted
only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License
incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License.
9. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the
General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in
spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or
concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a
version number of this License which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the
option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later
version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a
version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free
Software Foundation.
10. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose
distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For
software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free
Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will
be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our
free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally.
NO WARRANTY
11. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS
NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING
THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE
PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE
PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL
NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
12. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED
TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER
PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS
PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING
ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR
DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY
YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO
OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR
OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs
If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the
public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can
redistribute and change under these terms.
To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the
start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each
file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is
found.
<one line to give the program’s name and a brief idea of what it does.>
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the
terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software
Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version.
This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public
License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with
this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place,
Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA.
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an
interactive mode:
Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author Gnomovision comes with
ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type ‘show w’. This is free software, and
you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type ‘show c’ for details.
The hypothetical commands ‘show w’ and ‘show c’ should show the appropriate parts
of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may be called
something other than ‘show w’ and ‘show c’; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu
items–whatever suits your program.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if
any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample;
alter the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program
‘Gnomovision’ (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker.
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989
Ty Coon, President of Vice
This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into
proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more
useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you
want to do, use the GNU Library General Public License instead of this License.
■ GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE
Version 2.1, February 1999
Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document,
but changing it is not allowed.
[This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of
the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.]
Preamble
The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change
it. By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to
share and change free software–to make sure the software is free for all its users.
This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated
software packages–typically libraries–of the Free Software Foundation and other
authors who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully
about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy
to use in any particular case, based on the explanations below.
When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General
Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of
free software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can
get it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free
programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things.
To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you
these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain
responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it.
For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must
give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too,
receive or can get the source code. If you link other code with the library, you must
provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them with the
library after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them
these terms so they know their rights.
We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we
offer you this license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or
modify the library.
To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for
the free library. Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed on, the
recipients should know that what they have is not the original version, so that the
original author’s reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced
by others.
Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We
wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program
by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any
patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full
freedom of use specified in this license.
Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General
Public License. This license, the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain
designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License. We
use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into non-
free programs.
When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the
combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original
library. The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the
entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License
permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library.
We call this license the “Lesser” General Public License because it does Less to protect the
user’s freedom than the ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free
software developers Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These
disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries.
vii
APPENDIX
However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances.
For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest
possible use of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this,
non-free programs must be allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a free
library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to
gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser General
Public License.
In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a
greater number of people to use a large body of free software. For example, permission
to use the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many more people to use the
whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system.
Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users’ freedom, it
does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom
and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library.
The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay
close attention to the difference between a “work based on the library” and a “work that
uses the library”. The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter
must be combined with the library in order to run.
TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND
MODIFICATION
0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which
contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying
it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License (also
called “this License”). Each licensee is addressed as “you”.
A “library” means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be
conveniently linked with application programs (which use some of those functions and
data) to form executables.
The “Library”, below, refers to any such software library or work which has been
distributed under these terms. A “work based on the Library” means either the Library
or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library
or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated
straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without
limitation in the term “modification”.)
“Source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making
modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means all the source code for all
modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used
to control compilation and installation of the library.
Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this
License; they are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is
not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute
a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing
it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that
uses the Library does.
1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library’s complete source
code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and
appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and
disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to
the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the
Library.
You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your
option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee.
2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus
forming a work based on the Library, and copy and distribute such modifications
or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of
these conditions:
a) The modified work must itself be a software library.
b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you
changed the files and the date of any change.
c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third
parties under the terms of this License.
d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be
supplied by an application program that uses the facility, other than as an
argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good
faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such
function or table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its
purpose remains meaningful.
(For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is
entirely well-defined independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires
that any application-supplied function or table used by this function must be optional: if
the application does not supply it, the square root function must still compute square
roots.)
These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of
that work are not derived from the Library, and can be reasonably considered
independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not
apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you
distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the
distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for
other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of
who wrote it.
Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work
written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the
distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library.
In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library
(or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium
does not bring the other work under the scope of this License.
3. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License
instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all
the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU
General Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version
than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then
you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change
in these notices.
Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary
GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works
made from that copy.
This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a
program that is not a library.
4. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under
Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2
above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-
readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and
2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange.
If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated
place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place
satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even though third parties are not
compelled to copy the source along with the object code.
5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is
designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it, is called a
“work that uses the Library”. Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of
the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License.
However, linking a “work that uses the Library” with the Library creates an executable
that is a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather
than a “work that uses the library”. The executable is therefore covered by this License.
Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables.
When a “work that uses the Library” uses material from a header file that is part of the
Library, the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even
though the source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work
can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for this
to be true is not precisely defined by law.
If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and
accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then
the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative
work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall
under Section 6.)
Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code
for the work under the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also
fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself.
6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a “work that
uses the Library” with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the
Library, and distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that the
terms permit modification of the work for the customer’s own use and reverse
engineering for debugging such modifications.
You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it
and that the Library and its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of
this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include
the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing the
user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things:
a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable
source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the
work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the
work is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete machine-
readable “work that uses the Library”, as object code and/or source code, so
that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified
executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user
who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not
necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified
definitions.)
b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A
suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library
already present on the user’s computer system, rather than copying library
functions into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified
version of the library, if the user installs one, as long as the modified version
is interface-compatible with the version that the work was made with.
c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give
the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no
more than the cost of performing this distribution.
viii
d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a
designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above specified
materials from the same place.
e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you
have already sent this user a copy.
For an executable, the required form of the “work that uses the Library” must include
any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However,
as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is
normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components
(compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs,
unless that component itself accompanies the executable.
It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other
proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a
contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable
that you distribute.
7. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side
in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License,
and distribute such a combined library, provided that the separate distribution of
the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise
permitted, and provided that you do these two things:
a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the
Library, uncombined with any other library facilities. This must be distributed
under the terms of the Sections above.
b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a
work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying
uncombined form of the same work.
8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except
as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify,
sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and will automatically
terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received
copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses
terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance.
9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it.
However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library
or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept
this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work
based on the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and
all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Library or
works based on it.
10. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the
recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy,
distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions.
You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of the
rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third
parties with this License.
11. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or
for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you
(whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of
this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you
cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this
License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not
distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit
royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly
or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this
License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library.
If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular
circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole
is intended to apply in other circumstances.
It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other
property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole
purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is
implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous
contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance
on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or
she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot
impose that choice.
This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence
of the rest of this License.
12. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either
by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places
the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution
limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or
among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the
limitation as if written in the body of this License.
13. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the
Lesser General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be
similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new
problems or concerns.
Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version
number of this License which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the option
of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version
published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license
version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software
Foundation.
14. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose
distribution conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for
permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation,
write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this.
Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all
derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of
software generally.
NO WARRANTY
15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO
WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY
APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING
THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE
LIBRARY “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE
IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND
PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE
LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL
NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION.
16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED
TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER
PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS
PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING
ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE
LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA
BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR
THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH
ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY
HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES.
END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS
How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries
If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the
public, we recommend making it free software that everyone can redistribute and
change. You can do so by permitting redistribution under these terms (or, alternatively,
under the terms of the ordinary General Public License).
To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is safest to attach
them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of
warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where
the full notice is found.
<one line to give the library’s name and a brief idea of what it does.>
Copyright (C) <year> <name of author>
This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the
terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as published by the Free
Software Foundation; either version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any
later version.
This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY
WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or
FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General
Public License for more details.
You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License
along with this library; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59
Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA
Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail.
You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if
any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the library, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter
the names:
Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library ‘Frob’ (a
library for tweaking knobs) written by James Random Hacker.
<signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1990
Ty Coon, President of Vice
That’s all there is to it!
ix
APPENDIX
LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES
CABLE
ABC 0030, 0035
AMERICAST 0926
BELL SOUTH 0926
BIRMINGHAM CABLE
COMMUNICATIONS
0303
BRITISH TELECOM 0030
CABLE & WIRELESS
1095
DAERYUNG 0035, 0504, 0904,
1904
DIRECTOR 0503
FILMNET 0470
GENERAL INSTRUMENT
0030, 0303, 0503,
0837,
GOLDSTAR 0171
HAMLIN 0036, 0300
JERROLD 0030, 0303, 0503,
0837
LG 0171
MNET 0470
MEMOREX 0027
MOTOROLA 0303, 0503, 0837,
1133
NTL 1095
NOOS 0844
ONO 1095
PVP STEREO VISUAL MATRIX
0030
PACE 0264, 1087, 1095
PANASONIC 0027, 0035, 0134
PARAGON 0027
PHILIPS 0332, 0344
PIONEER 0171, 0560, 0904,
1904
PULSAR 0027
QUASAR 0027
REGAL 0300, 0306
RUNCO 0027
SAGEM 0844
SAMSUNG 0027, 0171
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA
0035, 0504, 0904,
1904
SONY 1033
STARCOM 0030
SUPERCABLE 0303
TS 0030
TELE+1 0470
TELEWEST 1095
TORX 0030
TOSHIBA 0027
TRANS PX 0303
UNITED CABLE 0030
ZENITH 0027, 0552, 0926
CD PLAYER
AIWA 0184
ARCAM 0184
AUDIO RESEARCH 0184
AUDIO TON 0184
AUDIOLAB 0184
AUDIOMECA 0184
CAIRN 0184
CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS
0056
CARVER 0184, 0206
CYRUS 0184
DKK 0027
DMX ELECTRONICS
0184
DENON 0900
DYNAMIC BASS 0206
EMERSON 0332
FISHER 0206
GENEXXA 0059, 0332
GOODMANS 0332
GRUNDIG 0184
HARMAN/KARDON
0184, 0200
HITACHI 0059
JVC 0099
KENWOOD 0055, 0064
KRELL 0184
LXI 0332
LINN 0184
MCS 0056
MAGNAVOX 0184, 0332
MARANTZ 0056, 0184
MATSUI 0184
MEMOREX 0332
MERIDIAN 0184
MICROMEGA 0184
MIRO 0027
MISSION 0184
MYRYAD 0184
NAD 0027
NSM 0184
NAIM 0184
OPTIMUS 0027, 0059, 0064,
0206, 0332
PANASONIC 0056
PHILIPS 0184
PIONEER 0059, 0332
POLK AUDIO 0184
PROTON 0184
QED 0184
QUAD 0184
QUASAR 0056
RCA 0059, 0206, 0332
REALISTIC 0206
REVOX 0184
ROTEL 0184
SAE 0184
SANSUI 0184, 0332
SANYO 0206
SCOTT 0332
SEARS 0332
SHARP 0064
SIMAUDIO 0184
SONIC FRONTIERS 0184
SONY 0027
SYMPHONIC 0332
TAG MCLAREN 0184
TANDY 0059
TECHNICS 0056
THORENS 0184
THULE 0184
UNIVERSUM 0184
VICTOR 0099
WARDS 0184
YAMAHA 2300, 2301
CD RECORDER
KENWOOD 0653
MARANTZ 0653
PHILIPS 0653
YAMAHA 2400
DVD PLAYER
ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS
0757
ALBA 0744
AMSTRAD 0740
APEX DIGITAL 0699, 0744,
0782, 0821, 0823,
0857, 1127
BLAUPINKT 0744
BLUE PARADE 0598
BUSH 0740
CENTREX 0699
CLATRONIC 0815
CYBERHOME 0741
DVD2000 0548
DAEWOO 0811, 0797
DANSAI 0797
DECCA 0797
DENON 0517
DIAMOND 0795
DIGITREX 0699
EMERSON 0618
ENTERPRISE 0618
FISHER 0697
GE 0549, 0744
GO VIDEO 0742
GOLDSTAR 0768
GRADIENTE 0678
GREENHILL 0744
GRUNDIG 0566
HITACHI 0600, 0691
HITEKER 0699
JVC 0585, 0650
KLH 0744
KENWOOD 0517, 0561
KOSS 0678
LG 0768
LIMIT 0795
MAGNAVOX 0530, 0702
MARANTZ 0566
MEMOREX 0858
MICO 0750
MICROSOFT 0549
MINTEK 0744
MITSUBISHI 0548
MUSTEK 0757
NESA 0744
ONKYO 0530
ORITRON 0678
PALSONIC 0699
PANASONIC 0517, 0659, 1389
PHILIPS 0530, 0566, 0673,
0881
PIONEER 0552, 0598, 0658,
0659
POLK AUDIO 0566
PROSCAN 0549
QWESTAR 0678
RCA 0549, 0598, 0744
ROTEL 0650
SM ELECTRONIC 0757
SAMSUNG 0600
SANYO 0697
SHARP 0657
SHERWOOD 0797
SHINSONIC 0560
SLIM ART 0811
SONY 0560, 0891
SYLVANIA 0702
TATUNG 0797
TEAC 0598, 0744
TECHNICS 0517
THETA DIGITAL 0598
THOMSON 0549
TOSHIBA 0530
URBAN CONCEPTS 0530
XBOX 0549
YAMAHA 0517, 0566, 0572,
2100
ZENITH 0530, 0618, 0768
ZEUS 0811
DVD RECORDER
HITACHI 2815
PANASONIC 2800, 2801, 2802
PHILIPS 2808
PIONEER 2804, 2805, 2806
SHARP 2812, 2813
SONY 2809, 2810, 2811
TOSHIBA 2803
VICTOR 2814
YAMAHA 2807
LD PLAYER
CARVER 0091
DENON 0086
MARANTZ 0091
MITSUBISHI 0086
NAD 0086
NAGSMI 0086
OPTIMUS 0086
PHILIPS 0091
PIONEER 0086
SALORA 0091
SONY 0228
TELEFUNKEN 0086
YAMAHA 2200
MD RECORDER
KENWOOD 0708
ONKYO 0895
SHARP 0888
SONY 0517
YAMAHA 2500, 2501, 2502
RECEIVER (TUNER)
ADC 0558
AIWA 0185, 1116, 1415,
1432, 1668
ALCO 1417
ANAM 1636
APEX DIGITAL 1284
AUDIOLAB 1216
AUDIOTRONIC 1216
AUDIOVOX 1417
BOSE 1256
x
CAMBRIDGE SOUNDWORKS
1397
CAPETRONIC 0558
CARVER 1116, 1216
CENTREX 1284
DENON 1387
FERGUSON 0558
FINE ARTS 1216
GRUNDIG 1216
HARMAN/KARDON
0137, 1331
INTEGRA 0162, 1325
JBL 0137, 1333
JVC 0101, 0558, 1401,
1522
KLH 1417, 1439
KENWOOD 1054, 1340
MCS 0066
MAGNAVOX 0558, 1116, 1216,
1296,
MARANTZ 0066, 1116, 1216,
1316
MICROMEGA 1216
MUSICMAGIC 1116
MYRYAD 1216
NAD 0347
NORCENT 1416
ONKYO 0162, 0869, 1325
OPTIMUS 0558, 1050
PANASONIC 0066, 1315, 1545,
1790
PHILIPS 1116, 1216, 1293,
1295, 1296, 1310,
1316
PIONEER 0041, 0558, 1050,
1411
POLK AUDIO 1316
PROSCAN 1281
QUASAR 0066
RCA 0558, 1050, 1281,
1417, 1636,
SABA 0558
SANSUI 1116
SCHNEIDER 0558
SONY 0185, 1085, 1185,
1685, 1785
STEREOPHONICS 1050
SUNFIRE 1340
TEAC 1417
TECHNICS 0066, 1335, 1336,
1545
TELEFUNKEN 0558
THOMSON 1281
THORENS 1216
UHER 0558
VENTURER 1417
VICTOR 0101
WARDS 0041, 0185
YAMAHA 0203, 1203, 1358,
2601
(TUNER ID1) 2602
(TUNER ID2) 2603
(XM ID1) 2604
(XM ID2) 2605
(iPod) 2606
(NET) 2607
SATELLITE TUNER
@SAT 1327
ABSAT 0150
ALBA 0482
ALPHASTAR 0799
AMSTRAD 0874
ASTON 0169, 1156
ASTRO 0200
ATSAT 1327
AVALON 0423
BLAUPUNKT 0200
BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING
0874, 1202
CANAL DIGITAL 0880
CANAL SATELLITE 0880
CANAL+ 0880
CHAPARRAL 0243
CITYCOM 1203
CONNEXIONS 0423
CROSSDIGITAL 1136
CYRUS 0227
D-BOX 0750, 1154
DMT 1102
DNT 0227, 0423
DAERYUNG 0423
DAEWOO 1323
DIGENIUS 0326
DIRECTV 0274, 0419, 0593,
0666, 0751, 0776,
0846, 1103, 1136,
1169, 1776, 1883
DISH NETWORK SYSTEM
0802, 1032
DISHPRO 0802, 1032
DISTRATEL 0111
DREAM MULTIMEDIA
1264
ECHOSTAR 0194, 0423, 0637,
0802, 0880, 0898,
1032, 1113
ENGEL 1044
EXPRESSVU 0802
FTE 0890
FINLUX 0482
FRACARRO 0898
FUBA 0423
GE 0593
GOI 0802
GALAXIS 0890, 1138
GENERAL INSTRUMENT
0896
GOLD BOX 0880
GRUNDIG 0200, 0874
HTS 0802
HIRSCHMANN 0200, 0423
HITACHI 0482, 0846
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEM
0776, 1169, 1776
HUMAX 0890, 1203
INVIDEO 0898
JVC 0802
KATHREIN 0150, 0200, 0227,
0276, 0685, 1248
KREISELMEYER 0200
LABGEAR 1323
LOGIX 1044
LORENZEN 0326
MAGNAVOX 0749, 0751
MANHATTAN 0482, 1044,
1110
MARANTZ 0227
MEDIASAT 0880
MEMOREX 0751
METRONIC 0111
MITSUBISHI 0776
MOTOROLA 0896
MYRYAD 0227
NEXT LEVEL 0896
NOKIA 0482, 0750, 0778,
1154, 1250, 1750
OCTALTV 1032
ORBITECH 1127
PACE 0482, 0874, 1202,
1350
PANASONIC 0274, 0728, 0874,
1347
PANDA 0482
PAYSAT 0751
PHILIPS 0160, 0227, 0482,
0749, 0751, 0776,
0880, 1103, 1169,
1776
PIONEER 0880
PROMAX 0482
PROSCAN 0419, 0593
RCA 0170, 0419, 0593,
0882
RFT 0227
RADIOSHACK 0896
RADIOLA 0227
RADIX 0423
SKY 0874, 0883, 1202
SM ELECTRONIC 1227
SABRE 0482
SAGEM 0847, 1141, 1280
SAMSUNG 1044, 1136, 1303,
1319
SAT CONTROL 1327
SATSTATION 1110
SCHWAIGER 1138
SEEMANN 0423
SIEMENS 0200
SONY 0666, 0874, 1666
STAR CHOICE 0896
STRONG 1327
TPS 0847, 1280
TANTEC 0482
TECHNISAT 1126, 1127
TELESTAR 1127
THOMSON 0482, 0880, 1073,
1318
TOPFIELD 1233
TOSHIBA 0776, 0817, 1776
ULTIMATETV 0419, 0666
UNIDEN 0749, 0751
UNIVERSUM 0200
VENTANA 0227
WISI 0200, 0423, 0482
XSAT 0150
ZEHNDER 1102
ZENITH 0883, 1883
TAPE DECK
AIWA 0056
CARVER 0056
GRUNDIG 0056
HARMAN/KARDON
0056
MAGNAVOX 0056
MARANTZ 0056
MYRYAD 0056
OPTIMUS 0054
PHILIPS 0056
PIONEER 0054
POLK AUDIO 0056
RCA 0054
REVOX 0056
SANSUI 0056
SONY 0270
THORENS 0056
WARDS 0054
YAMAHA 2700,2701
TV
AGB 0543
AOC 0036, 0057, 0087,
0119, 0120, 0135,
0205, 0207, 0478
ASA 0131
AWA 0036
ACURA 0036
ADDISON 0119, 0135, 0680
ADMIRAL 0120, 0190, 0490
ADVENT 0788
AIKO 0119
AKAI 0036, 0057, 0235,
0388, 0543, 0729,
0839
AKURA 0291
ALBA 0036, 0064, 0398,
0695
AMERICA ACTION 0207
AMPRO 0778
AMSTRAD 0036, 0064, 0198,
0398, 0439, 0460,
0543
ANAM 0036, 0207, 0277
ANAM NATIONAL 0277, 0677
ANITECH 0036
APEX DIGITAL 0775, 0792,
0794
AUDIOSONIC 0064, 0136
BANG & OLUFSEN 0592
BASIC 0036
BAUR 0064, 0388, 0539
BAYSONIC 0207
BEAUMARK 0205
BEKO 0397, 0513, 0741,
0742
BELL & HOWELL 0181
BEON 0064
BLAUPUNKT 0222
BLUE SKY 0695, 1064
BONDSTEC 0274
BRADFORD 0207
BRANDT 0136, 0362
BROKSONIC 0263, 0490
BUSH 0036, 0064, 0398,
0401, 0695, 1064
CCE 0064
CGE 0274
CTC 0274
CXC 0207
CANDLE 0057
CARNIVALE 0057
CARVER 0081, 0197
CASCADE 0036
CATHAY 0064
CELEBRITY 0027
CELERA 0792
CENTURION 0064
CHANGHONG 0792
CHING TAI 0036, 0119
CHUN YUN 0027, 0036, 0119,
0207
CHUNG HSIN 0080, 0135, 0207
CIMLINE 0036
CINERAL 0119, 0478
CITIZEN 0057, 0087, 0119
CLARION 0207
CLARIVOX 0064
CLATRONIC 0274, 0397
CONDOR 0347, 0397
CONRAC 0835
xi
APPENDIX
CONTEC 0036, 0207
CRAIG 0207
CROSLEY 0081
CROWN 0036, 0064, 0207,
0397, 0445
CURTIS MATHES 0057, 0074,
0081, 0087, 0120,
0172, 0181, 0193,
0478, 0729, 1174,
1374
DAEWOO 0036, 0057, 0064,
0119, 0135, 0181,
0197, 0205, 0207,
0401, 0478, 0650,
0661, 1688
DANSAI 0064
DAYTON 0036
DE GRAAF 0235, 0575
DECCA 0064, 0543
DENON 0172
DIGATRON 0064
DIXI 0036, 0064
DUMONT 0044
DWIN 0747, 0801
ECE 0064
ELBE 0286
ELECTROBAND 0027
ELIN 0064, 0575
ELITE 0347
ELTA 0036
EMERSON 0181, 0205, 0207,
0263, 0388, 0490,
0650
ENVISION 0057,0840
EPSON 0860
ERRES 0064
ETHER 0036, 0057
ETRON 0036
EUROPHON 0543
FERGUSON 0064, 0100, 0136,
0265, 0314, 0362,
0587
FIDELITY 0388
FINLANDIA 0235, 0373
FINLUX 0064, 0131, 0132,
0373, 0543
FIRSTAR 0036, 0263
FIRSTLINE 0036, 0274, 0695
FISHER 0131, 0181, 0235,
0397
FLINT 0482
FORMENTI 0064, 0347
FORTRESS 0120
FRONTECH 0190, 0274, 0291
FUJITSU 0710, 0836
FUNAI 0207, 0198, 0291
FUTURETECH 0207
GE 0057, 0074, 0078,
0119, 0205, 0207,
0478, 0587, 1174,
1374, 1481
GEC 0064, 0543
GATEWAY 1782, 1783
GELOSO 0036
GENEXXA 0190
GIBRALTER 0044, 0057
GOLDSTAR 0057, 0064, 0136,
0181, 0205, 0404
GOODMANS 0064, 0398, 0401,
0661
GOREMJE 0397
GRADIENTE 0080, 0197
GRAETZ 0190, 0388
GRANADA 0064, 0235, 0366,
0543
GRANDIN 0637
GRUNDIG 0064, 0222, 0514,
0583, 0614
GRUNPY 0207
HCM 0036, 0439
HALLMARK 0205
HANKOOK 0057, 0205, 0207
HANSEATIC 0064, 0347, 0388,
0455, 0583
HANTAREX 0543
HARMAN/KARDON 0081
HARVARD 0207
HAVERMY 0120
HELLO KITTY 0478
HINARI 0036, 0064
HISAWA 0482
HITACHI 0036, 0057, 0119,
0132, 0136, 0172,
0190, 0205, 0252,
0383, 0508, 0575,
0605, 1172, 1283
HUA TUN 0036
HUANYU 0401
HYPSON 0064, 0291
ICE 0291, 0398
ITS 0398
ITT 0190, 0388, 0575
IMPERIAL 0274, 0397, 0445
INDIANA 0064
INFINITY 0081
INGELEN 0190
INNO HIT 0543
INNOVA 0064
INTEQ 0044
INTERFUNK 0064, 0190, 0274,
0388, 0539
INTERVISION 0064, 0291,
0404
JBL 0081
JCB 0027
JVC 0080, 0398, 0490,
0680, 0710
JEAN 0036, 0078, 0119,
0183, 0263
JENSEN 0788
KEC 0207
KTV 0057, 0207
KAISUI 0036
KAPSCH 0190
KARCHER 0637
KATHREIN 0583
KENDO 0064
KENWOOD 0057
KNEISSEL 0286, 0462
KOLIN 0080, 0135, 0207
KORPEL 0064
KOYODA 0036
L&S ELECTRONIC 0835
LG 0057, 0064, 0087,
0135, 0205, 0741
LXI 0074, 0081, 0181,
0183, 0205
LEYCO 0064, 0291
LIESENK & TTER 0064
LOEWE 0539
LUXOR 0383, 0388
M ELECTRONIC 0036, 0064,
0131, 0132, 0136,
0190, 0314, 0373,
0401, 0507
MGA 0057, 0177, 0205
MTC 0057, 0087, 0539
MAGNADYNE 0274, 0543
MAGNAFON 0543
MAGNAVOX 0057, 0081, 1281,
1481
MANESTH 0291, 0347
MARANTZ 0057, 0064, 0081,
0583
MARK 0064
MATSUI 0036, 0064, 0235,
0398, 0514, 0543
MATSUSHITA 0277, 0677
MEDIATOR 0064
MEDION 0695, 0835, 1064
MEGATRON 0172, 0205
MEMOREX 0036, 0177, 0181,
0205, 0277, 0490,
1064
METZ 0474
MICROMAXX 0835
MICROSTAR 0835
MIDLAND 0044, 0074, 0078
MINERVA 0514
MINOKA 0439
MITSUBISHI 0057, 0120, 0135,
0177, 0181, 0205,
0207, 0263, 0277,
0539, 0863, 1277
MIVAR 0318,0319, 0543,
0636
MOTOROLA 0120
MULTITECH 0036, 0207
MYRYAD 0583
NAD 0183, 0205, 0388,
0893
NEC 0036, 0057, 0078,
0181, 0183, 0197,
0205, 0482, 0524,
1731
NEI 0064
NTC 0119
NECKERMANN 0064, 0583
NETSAT 0064
NEWAVE 0036, 0119, 0120,
0205
NIKKAI 0064, 0291
NIKKO 0057, 0119, 0205
NOKIA 0388, 0500, 0507,
0575, 0658
NORCENT 0775, 0851
NORDMENDE 0136, 0314,
0587
OCEANIC 0190, 0388
ONWA 0207, 0460
OPTIMUS 0181, 0193, 0277,
0677
OPTONICA 0120
ORION 0064, 0263, 0347,
0490, 0543
OSAKI 0291, 0439
OTTO VERSAND 0064, 0347,
0539, 0583
PALLADIUM 0397, 0445
PANAMA 0291
PANASONIC 0064, 0078, 0081,
0190, 0277, 0677,
1437
PATHE CINEMA 0265, 0347
PAUSA 0036
PENNEY 0057, 0074, 0078,
0087, 0183, 0205,
1374
PERDIO 0347
PHILCO 0057, 0064, 0081,
0172, 0205, 0207,
0274, 0490, 1688
PHILIPS 0027, 0057, 0064,
0078, 0081, 0119,
0135, 0205, 0401,
0583, 0717, 1481
PHONOLA 0064
PILOT 0057
PIONEER 0136, 0190, 0193,
0314, 0706, 0787,
0893
PORTLAND 0119
PRANDONI-PRINCE
0543
PRIMA 0788
PRISM 0078
PROFEX 0036, 0388
PROSCAN 0074
PROTECH 0036, 0064, 0274,
0291, 0445, 0695
PROTON 0036, 0057, 0205
PULSAR 0044
QUASAR 0078, 0277, 0677
QUELLE 0064, 0131, 0388,
0539
R-LINE 0064
RCA 0027, 0057, 0074,
0117, 0119, 0205,
0706, 1074, 1174,
1274, 1374, 1474,
1481, 1574
RFT 0455
RADIOSHACK 0057, 0074,
0181, 0205, 0207
RADIOLA 0064
RADIOMARELLI 0543
REALISTIC 0057, 0181, 0205,
0207
REDIFFUSION 0388
REOC 0741
REVOX 0064
REX 0190, 0286, 0291
ROADSTAR 0036, 0291, 0445
RUNCO 0044, 0057, 0524,
0630
SBR 0064
SEG 0291, 0695
SEI 0543
SKY 0064
SSS 0207
SABA 0136, 0190, 0314,
0362
SACCS 0265
SAGEM 0637
SAISHO 0036, 0291, 0543
SALORA 0190, 0380, 0388,
0575
SAMBERS 0543
SAMPO 0036, 0057, 0119,
0120, 0181, 0198,
0205, 0677, 1782
SAMSUNG 0036, 0057, 0064,
0087, 0117, 0119,
0181, 0205, 0291,
0397, 0583, 0614,
0645, 0729, 0793,
0839, 0841
SANSEI 0478
SANSUI 0490
SANYO 0131, 0181, 0207,
0235, 0366, 0826
SCHAUB LORENZ 0388
SCHNEIDER 0064, 0274, 0398,
0695
SCOTCH 0205
SCOTT 0205, 0207, 0263
xii
SEARS 0074, 0081, 0181,
0183, 0198, 0205
SELECO 0190, 0286
SEMIVOX 0207
SEMP 0183
SHARP 0057, 0120, 0677
SHEN YING 0036, 0119
SHENG CHIA 0036, 0120, 0263
SIAREM 0543
SIEMENS 0064, 0222
SINUDYNE 0543
SKANTIC 0383
SKYGIANT 0207
SKYWORTH 0064
SOLAVOX 0190
SONITRON 0235
SONOKO 0036, 0064
SONOLOR 0190, 0235
SONTEC 0064
SONY 0027, 0677, 0861,
1127, 1532, 1678
SOUNDESIGN 0205, 0207
SOUNDWAVE 0064, 0445
SOWA 0078, 0087, 0119,
0183, 0205
SQUAREVIEW 0198
STANDARD 0036
STARLITE 0207
STERN 0190, 0286
SUPREME 0027
SYLVANIA 0057, 0081, 0198
SYMPHONIC 0198, 0207
SYNCO 0027, 0087, 0119,
0120, 0205, 0478
SYSLINE 0064
T + A 0474
TCM 0835
TMK 0205
TNCI 0044
TVS 0490
TACICO 0036, 0119, 0205
TAI YI 0036
TANDY 0120, 0190
TASHIKO 0119, 0677
TATUNG 0036, 0064, 0078,
0081, 0087, 0181,
0183, 0543
TEAC 0036, 0064, 0291,
0439, 0445, 0482,
0695, 1064
TEC 0274
TECHNEMA 0347
TECHNICS 0078, 0277, 0677
TECHWOOD 0078
TECO 0036, 0078, 0119,
0120, 0205, 0291,
0680
TEKNIKA 0081, 0087, 0119,
0177, 0207
TELEFUNKEN 0136, 0289,
0362, 0652, 0729
TELEMEISTER 0347
TELETECH 0036
TENSAI 0347
TERA 0057
THOMSON 0136, 0314, 0587,
0652, 1474
THORN 0064, 0131, 0388,
0539
TOSHIBA 0087, 0181, 0183,
0535, 0645, 0677,
0859, 1283, 1383,
1683, 1731
TRIUMPH 0543
TUNTEX 0036, 0057, 0119
UHER 0347
UNIVERSUM 0064, 0131, 0132,
0291, 0373, 0397,
0519
VECTOR RESEARCH
0057
VESTEL 0064
VICTOR 0080, 0277, 0677,
0680
VIDEOSAT 0274
VIDIKRON 0081
VIDTECH 0205
VIEWSONIC 1782
VISION 0347
VOXSON 0190
WALTHAM 0383
WARDS 0057, 0081, 0205,
0893
WATSON 0064, 0347
WAYCON 0183
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
0064, 0347, 0490,
0650
YAMAHA 0057, 0172, 0677,
0796, 0860,
2900 (projector),
2901 (projector),
2903,
2904 (projector)
YAPSHE 0277
YOKO 0064, 0291
ZENITH 0044, 0119, 0205,
0490
VCR
ASA 0064, 0108
ADMIRAL 0075
ADVENTURA 0027
AIKO 0305
AIWA 0027, 0064, 0334,
0375, 0379
AKAI 0068, 0342
AKIBA 0099
ALBA 0099, 0305, 0342,
0379
AMERICA ACTION 0305
AMERICAN HIGH 0062
AMSTRAD 0027
ANAM 0064, 0253, 0267,
0305, 0507
ANAM NATIONAL 0253, 1589
ANITECH 0099
ASHA 0267
ASUKA 0064
AUDIOVOX 0064, 0305
BAIRD 0027, 0068, 0131
BASIC LINE 0099, 0305
BEAUMARK 0267
BELL & HOWELL 0131
BLAUPUNKT 0253
BRANDT 0347
BRANDT ELECTRONIC
0068
BROKSONIC 0211, 0375, 1506
BUSH 0099, 0305, 0379
CCE 0099, 0305
CGE 0027
CALIX 0064
CANON 0062
CARVER 0108
CIMLINE 0099
CINERAL 0305
CITIZEN 0064, 0305, 1305
COLT 0099
COMBITECH 0379
CRAIG 0064, 0074, 0099,
0267
CROWN 0099, 0305
CURTIS MATHES 0062, 0068,
0087, 1062
CYBERNEX 0267
CYRUS 0108
DAEWOO 0072, 0131, 0305,
0669, 1305
DANSAI 0099
DE GRAAF 0069
DECCA 0027, 0108
DENON 0069
DUAL 0068
DUMONT 0027, 0108, 0131
DYNATECH 0027
ESC 0267, 0305
ELCATECH 0099
ELECTROHOME 0064
ELECTROPHONIC 0064
EMEREX 0059
EMERSON 0027, 0062, 0064,
0070, 0072, 0211,
0267, 0305, 1305,
1506
FERGUSON 0068, 0347
FIDELITY 0027
FINLANDIA 0108, 0131
FINLUX 0027, 0069, 0108,
0131
FIRSTLINE 0064, 0070, 0072,
0099
FISHER 0074, 0131
FUJI 0060, 0062
FUJITSU 0027, 0072
FUNAI 0027
GE 0062, 0087, 0267,
0834, 1062, 1087
GEC 0108
GARRARD 0027
GENERAL 0072
GO VIDEO 0459
GOLDHAND 0099
GOLDSTAR 0064, 0252, 0507,
1264
GOODMANS 0027, 0064, 0099,
0305
GRADIENTE 0027
GRAETZ 0068, 0131, 0267
GRANADA 0108, 0131
GRANDIN 0027, 0064, 0099
GRUNDIG 0099, 0108, 0253,
0374
HCM 0099
HI-Q 0074
HANSEATIC 0064
HARLEY DAVIDSON
0027
HARMAN/KARDON 0108
HARWOOD 0099
HINARI 0099, 0267, 0379
HITACHI 0027, 0064, 0068,
0069, 0267
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS
0069
HYPSON 0099
ITT 0068, 0131, 0267
ITV 0064, 0305
IMPERIAL 0027
INTERFUNK 0108
JVC 0068, 0072, 0094
JENSEN 0068
KEC 0064, 0305
KLH 0099
KAISUI 0099
KENWOOD 0068, 0094
KODAK 0062, 0064
KOLIN 0068, 0070
KORPEL 0099
LG 0064, 0069, 0072,
0507
LXI 0064
LENCO 0305
LEYCO 0099
LLOYD’S 0027
LOEWE 0064, 0108, 1589
LOGIK 0099, 0267
LUXOR 0070, 0075, 0131
M ELECTRONIC 0027
MEI 0062
MGA 0070, 0267
MGN TECHNOLOGY
0267
MTC 0027, 0267
MAGNASONIC 1305
MAGNAVOX 0027, 0062, 0066,
0108, 1808
MAGNIN 0267
MANESTH 0072, 0099
MARANTZ 0062, 0108
MARTA 0064
MATSUI 0375, 0379
MATSUSHITA 0062
MEDION 0375
MEMOREX 0027, 0062, 0064,
0066, 0074, 0075,
0131, 0267, 0334,
0375, 1264
MEMPHIS 0099
METZ 0064, 0374, 1589
MINOLTA 0069
MITSUBISHI 0068, 0070, 0094,
0108, 0834
MOTOROLA 0062, 0075
MULTITECH 0027, 0099
MURPHY 0027
MYRYAD 0108
NAD 0131
NEC 0062, 0064, 0068,
0075, 0094, 0131
NATIONAL 0253
NECKERMANN 0108
NESCO 0099
NEWAVE 0064
NIKKO 0064
NOBLEX 0267
NOKIA 0068, 0131, 0267
NORDMENDE 0068, 0347
OCEANIC 0027, 0068
OKANO 0342, 0375
OLYMPUS 0062, 0253
OPTIMUS 0064, 0075, 0131,
0459
ORION 0211, 0375, 0379,
1506
OSAKI 0027, 0064, 0099
OTTO VERSAND 0108
PALLADIUM 0064, 0068, 0099
PANASONIC 0062, 0252, 0253,
0643, 1062, 1589
PATHE MARCONI 0068
PENNEY 0062, 0064, 0069,
0267, 1062, 1264
PENTAX 0069
PERDIO 0027
PHILCO 0062
PHILIPS 0062, 0108, 0645,
1108, 1208
PHONOLA 0108
xiii
APPENDIX
PILOT 0064
PIONEER 0069, 0094, 0108
POLK AUDIO 0108
PROFITRONIC 0267
PROLINE 0027
PROSCAN 0087, 1087
PROTEC 0099
PULSAR 0066
PYE 0108
QUASAR 0062, 1062
QUELLE 0108
RCA 0062, 0069, 0087,
0267, 0834, 1062,
1087
RADIOSHACK 0027
RADIOLA 0108
RADIX 0064
RANDEX 0064
REALISTIC 0027, 0062, 0064,
0074, 0075, 0131
REOC 0375
REPLAYTV 0641, 0643
REX 0068
ROADSTAR 0064, 0099, 0267,
0305
RUNCO 0066
SBR 0108
SEG 0267
SEI 0108
STS 0069
SABA 0068, 0347
SALORA 0070
SAMPO 0064, 0075
SAMSUNG 0072, 0267, 0459
SANKY 0066, 0075
SANSUI 0027, 0068, 0094,
1506
SANYO 0074, 0131, 0267
SAVILLE 0379
SCHAUB LORENZ 0027, 0068,
0131
SCHNEIDER 0027, 0099, 0108
SCOTT 0070, 0072, 0211
SEARS 0027, 0062, 0064,
0069, 0074, 0131,
1264
SELECO 0068
SEMP 0072
SHARP 0075, 0834
SHINTOM 0099, 0131
SIEMENS 0064, 0108, 0131
SILVA 0064
SINGER 0072, 0099
SINUDYNE 0108
SONIC BLUE 0641, 0643
SONTEC 0064
SONY 0027, 0059, 0060,
0062, 0663, 1259
SUNKAI 0375
SUNSTAR 0027
SUNTRONIC 0027
SYLVANIA 0027, 0062, 0108,
0070, 1808
SYMPHONIC 0027
TMK 0267
TANDY 0027, 0131
TASHIKO 0027, 0064
TATUNG 0027, 0068, 0072,
0094, 0108
TEAC 0027, 0068, 0305,
0334, 0669
TECHNICS 0062, 0253
TECO 0062, 0064, 0068,
0075
TEKNIKA 0027, 0062, 0064
TELEAVIA 0068
TELEFUNKEN 0068, 0347
TENOSAL 0099
TENSAI 0027
THOMAS 0027
THOMSON 0068, 0087, 0094,
0347
THORN 0068, 0131
TIVO 0645, 0663
TOSHIBA 0068, 0070, 0072,
0094, 0108, 0872
TOTEVISION 0064, 0267
UHER 0267
UNITECH 0267
UNIVERSUM 0027, 0064, 0108,
0267
VECTOR 0072
VICTOR 0068, 0094
VIDEO CONCEPTS 0072
VIDEOMAGIC 0064
VIDEOSONIC 0267
VILLAIN 0027
WARDS 0027, 0062, 0069,
0074, 0075, 0087,
0099, 0108, 0267
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
0099
XR-1000 0027, 0062, 0099
YAMAHA 0068
YAMI SHI 0099
YO KA N 00 99
YOKO 0267
ZENITH 0027, 0060, 0066,
1506
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA
6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.
135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.
SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.
RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.
YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.
J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.
17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
©
2006 All rights reserved.
RX-V2700
Printed in Malaysia WJ55210
RX-V2700
AV Receiver
OWNER’S MANUAL
U
RX-V2700_U-cv.fm Page 1 Thursday, August 24, 2006 3:36 PM
Documenttranscriptie
RX-V2700_U-cv.fm Page 1 Thursday, August 24, 2006 3:36 PM U RX-V2700 RX-V2700 AV Receiver © 2006 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA All rights reserved. OWNER’S MANUAL Printed in Malaysia WJ55210 IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 10 CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. • Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the product is operated. Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference. Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions should be followed. Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards. Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water – for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool; and the like. Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the product. Any mounting of the product should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer. A product and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the product and cart combination to overturn. Caution-i 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, and these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to. Power Sources – This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your product dealer or local power company. For products intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions. Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug. Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the product. Lightning – For added protection for this product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product due to lightning and power-line surges. Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal. Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock. Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind into this product through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product. Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions: a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged, b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the product, c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water, IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS d) 20 21 22 23 If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to its normal operation, e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way, and f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance - this indicates a need for service. Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other hazards. Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the product is in proper operating condition. Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer. Heat – The product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING MAST ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE GROUND CLAMP ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT (NEC SECTION 810–20) ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS (NEC SECTION 810–21) GROUND CLAMPS Note to CATV system installer: This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM (NEC ART 250. PART H) NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE FCC INFORMATION (for US customers) 1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620. The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. Caution-ii CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back of this unit. 3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. 4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign objects may fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. 6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. 10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cable. 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, keep the power cord and outdoor antennas disconnected from a wall outlet or the unit during a lightning storm. 14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. 15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 16 Install this unit near the AC outlet and where the AC power plug can be reached easily. 17 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 18 Before moving this unit, press MASTER ON/OFF to release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit, the main room, Zone 2 and Zone 3 and then disconnect the AC power plug from the AC wall outlet. 19 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC wall outlet. Voltages are as follows: ................................. 110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. As long as this unit is connected to the AC wall outlet, it is not disconnected from the AC power source even if you turn off this unit by MASTER ON/OFF. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot and fully insert. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. POUR LES CONSOMMATEURS CANADIENS Pour éviter les chocs électriques, introduire la lame la plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond. Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below. MODEL: Serial No.: The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference. COMPLIANCE INFORMATION STATEMENT (DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY PROCEDURE) Responsible Party: Address: Yamaha Electronics Corporation, U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Avenue Buena Park, CA 90620 Telephone: 714-522-9105 Fax: 714-670-0108 Type of Equipment: AV Receiver Model Name: RX-V2700 Caution-iii • This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. • Operation is subject to the following conditions: – This device may not cause harmful interference. – This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation. See the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section at the end of this manual if interference to radio reception is suspected. TRADEMARK NOTICES Note on Source Code Distribution Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. Manufactured under license from Digital Theater Systems, Inc. “DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “NEO:6”, and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. Copyright 1996, 2003 Digital Theater Systems, Inc. All right reserved. This product includes software code subject to the GNU General Public License (GPL) or the GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL). The copy, distribution, or change of this software code is licensed under the terms of the GPL or the LGPL. The source code is available at the following website: http://www.global.yamaha.com/download/ The source code is also available on a physical media (such as a CD-ROM) at actual cost. Contact: AV products division, YAMAHA CORPORATION, 10-1 Nakazawa-cho, Hamamatsu 430-8650, Japan iPod® In principle, the source code is offered for 3 years from the day of purchase. “iPod” is a trademark of Apple Computer, Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. We Want You Listening For A Lifetime MPEG Layer-3 audio coding technology licensed from Fraunhofer IIS and Thomson. YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels. This receiver supports network connections. “HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA CORPORATION. The XM name and related logos are registered trademarks of XM Satellite Radio Inc. Neural Surround™ name and related logos are trademarks owned by Neural Audio Corporation. Windows XP, Windows Media Audio, Windows Media Connect are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft corporation in the United States and/or countries. 1 En CONTENTS INTRODUCTION FEATURES .............................................................4 GETTING STARTED ............................................5 Supplied accessories .................................................. 5 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS..........................6 Front panel................................................................. 6 Remote control .......................................................... 8 Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control ................................. 10 Preparing the remote control ................................... 11 Front panel display .................................................. 12 Rear panel ................................................................ 14 PREPARATION CONNECTIONS................................................... 15 Placing speakers ...................................................... 15 Connecting speakers ................................................ 16 Using bi-amplification connections......................... 19 Information on jacks and cable plugs ...................... 20 Information on HDMI ............................................. 21 Audio and video signal flow.................................... 22 Connecting a TV monitor or projector .................... 23 Connecting other components ................................. 24 Connecting a multi-format player or an external decoder ......................................... 28 Connecting a YAMAHA iPod universal dock ........ 29 Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel .... 29 Connecting the network........................................... 30 Connecting the FM and AM antennas..................... 31 Connecting the power cable .................................... 32 Setting the speaker impedance ................................ 33 Turning on and off the power .................................. 34 AUTO SETUP ....................................................... 35 USING AUDIO FEATURES............................... 52 Enjoying pure hi-fi sound ........................................ 52 Adjusting the tonal quality ...................................... 52 Adjusting the speaker level...................................... 53 Enjoying multi-channel sources in 2-channel stereo .............................................. 53 Selecting the Compressed Music Enhancer mode .................................................... 54 Selecting the night listening mode........................... 55 FM/AM TUNING ................................................. 56 FM/AM controls and functions ............................... 56 Automatic tuning ..................................................... 57 Manual tuning.......................................................... 58 Automatic preset tuning........................................... 59 Manual preset tuning ............................................... 60 Selecting preset stations........................................... 61 Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 62 XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING .................. 63 Connecting the XM Passport System ...................... 63 XM Satellite Radio controls and functions.............. 64 Activating XM Satellite Radio ................................ 65 Basic XM Satellite Radio operations....................... 67 Setting the XM Satellite Radio preset channels ...... 72 Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information...... 73 USING iPod........................................................... 75 Controlling iPod ...................................................... 75 USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES.............. 77 Navigating the network and USB menus ................ 77 Using a PC server or YAMAHA MCX-2000 ......... 79 Using the Internet Radio.......................................... 80 Using a USB memory device or a USB portable audio player ........................... 81 Using shortcut buttons ............................................. 81 RECORDING ....................................................... 83 Using Auto Setup..................................................... 35 ADVANCED OPERATION BASIC OPERATION PLAYBACK .......................................................... 40 Basic procedure ....................................................... 40 Selecting audio input jacks (AUDIO SELECT)...... 42 Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component......... 43 Using your headphones ........................................... 43 Muting the audio output .......................................... 43 Operating the amplifier functions of this unit by using the graphical user interface (GUI) screen................................................................... 44 Playing video sources in the background of an audio source.................. 45 Using the sleep timer ............................................... 45 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS ............................. 46 Selecting sound field programs ............................... 46 Sound field program descriptions............................ 47 Enjoying unprocessed input sources........................ 51 2 En ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS .... 84 Selecting decoders ................................................... 84 GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN............................................................ 87 Stereo/Surround (Stereo/Surround menu) ............... 88 Input Select .............................................................. 94 Manual Setup (Sound) ............................................. 97 Manual Setup (Video) ........................................... 101 Manual Setup (Basic) ............................................ 104 Manual Setup (NET/USB)..................................... 109 Manual Setup (Option) .......................................... 111 System Memory..................................................... 115 Signal Info. (Input signal information).................. 116 Language ............................................................... 117 CONTENTS REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES................. 118 INTRODUCTION Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components .......................................... 118 Setting remote control codes ................................. 120 Programming codes from other remote controls ... 122 Changing source names in the display window..... 123 Macro programming features ................................ 124 Clearing configurations ......................................... 127 USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION .. 130 Connecting the Zone 2 and Zone 3 components ... 130 Controlling Zone 2 or Zone 3 ................................ 131 ADVANCED SETUP ......................................... 134 PREPARATION Using ADVANCED SETUP ................................. 134 Setting remote control ID ...................................... 137 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION BASIC OPERATION TROUBLESHOOTING..................................... 139 RESETTING THE SYSTEM ............................ 149 GLOSSARY ........................................................ 150 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM INFORMATION ............................................ 153 PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION ............................................ 154 SPECIFICATIONS ............................................ 155 APPENDIX (at the end of this manual) ADVANCED OPERATION SOUND OUTPUT IN EACH SOUND FIELD PROGRAM ............ i GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE.................. v GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE............................................................ vi LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODE ............. ix ADDITIONAL INFORMATION APPENDIX About this manual • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the front panel or the ones on the remote control. In case the button names differ between the front panel and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses. • This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority. • This unit equips GUI display menu language switching capability. In this manual, the illustrations of the GUI are examples when you set the GUI language to English. 3 En FEATURES FEATURES Built-in 7-channel power amplifier Network features ◆ Minimum RMS output power (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω) Front: 140 W + 140 W Center: 140 W Surround: 140 W + 140 W Surround back: 140 W + 140 W ◆ NETWORK port to connect a PC and YAMAHA MCX-2000 or access the Internet Radio via a LAN ◆ DHCP automatic or manual network configuration Sound field programs ◆ Proprietary YAMAHA technology for the creation of sound fields ◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder ◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS Neo:6, DTS 96/24 decoder ◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic II/Dolby Pro Logic IIx decoder ◆ Neural Surround decoder (U.S.A. and Canada models only) ◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP ◆ SILENT CINEMA Sophisticated AM/FM tuner ◆ 40-station random and direct preset tuning ◆ Automatic preset tuning ◆ Preset station shifting capability (preset editing) XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only) ◆ XM Satellite Radio tuning capability (using the “XM Passport System” sold separately) ◆ Neural Surround decoder to play back the surround sound content of XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels, resulting in a full surround sound experience HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) ◆ HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or high-definition video (includes 1080p video signal transmission) as well as multi-channel digital audio based on HDMI version 1.2a ◆ Analog video to HDMI digital video up-conversion (composite video ↔ S-video ↔ component video → HDMI digital video) capability for monitor out ◆ Analog video up-scaling from 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) or 480p/576p to 720p or 1080i iPod controlling capability ◆ DOCK terminal to connect a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately), which supports iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini 4 En USB features ◆ USB port to connect a USB memory device or a USB portable audio player Other features ◆ YPAO (YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) for automatic speaker setup ◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter ◆ GUI (graphical user interfece) menus that allows you to optimize this unit to suit your individual audio/video system ◆ GUI display menu language switching capability (English, Japanese, French, German, Spanish and Russian) ◆ 6 or 8-channel additional input jacks for discrete multichannel input ◆ Analog video interlace/progressive conversion from 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) to 480p/576p ◆ S-video signal input/output capability ◆ Component video input/output capability includes (3 COMPONENT VIDEO INs and 1 MONITOR OUT) ◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks ◆ Pure Direct mode for pure hi-fi sound for all sources ◆ Cinema and music night listening modes ◆ Compressed Music Enhancer mode to improve the sound quality of compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) to that of a high-quality stereo ◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes, learning, macro and buttons and display backlight capability ◆ ZONE 2/ZONE 3 custom installation facility ◆ Zone switching capability between the main zone and ZONE 2/ZONE 3 using ZONE CONTROLS ◆ Zone 2 OSD (on-screen display) capability ◆ Sleep timer GETTING STARTED GETTING STARTED INTRODUCTION Supplied accessories Check that you received all of the following parts. Remote control POWER POWER POWER STANDBY AV TV NET/USB AUDIO SEL PHONO TUNER V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT DTV VCR 1 SLEEP CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control Batteries (6) (AAA, LR03) POWER CD TUNER STANDBY CD-R SELECT DTV CBL/SAT MD/TAPE NET/USB AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME – – – SOURCE TV MUTE LEVEL TV INPUT PRESET/CH VCR 1 DVR/VCR 2 DVD V-AUX/DOCK TV MUTE PRESET SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE VOLUME PURE DIRECT A/B/C/D/E MUTE AUDIO ENTER A/B/C/D/E STRAIGHT DISPLAY RETURN EFFECT MEMORY CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STEREO SUR. DECODE SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 2 NIGHT ENHANCER 0 + 10 ENT 1 MEMORY 9 FREQ/TEXT EON NET RADIO USB MODE ID1 ID2 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 PTY SEEK START REC PC/MCX OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RENAME Speaker terminal wrench Power cable Optimizer microphone Indoor FM antenna (U.S.A., Canada, China, Asia, General, and Korea models) Indoor FM antenna (Europe, U.K. and Australia models) AM loop antenna 5 En CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel This section describes only the amplifier controls and functions of this unit. See the following pages for details about other control and functions. • AM/FM tuning .......................................... see page 56 • XM satellite radio tuning .......................... see page 64 1 2 3 456 7 8 9 0 A B C PURE DIRECT VOLUME TONE CONTROL AUDIO SELECT REC OUT/ ZONE2 A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT EDIT INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM SILENT CINEMA OPTIMIZER MIC S VIDEO PHONES VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO VIDEO AUX OPTICAL USB ON OFF MASTER D E F 1 MASTER ON/OFF Turns this unit on or off (see page 34). 2 MAIN ZONE ON/OFF Turns on the main zone or sets it to the standby mode (see page 34). Notes • In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in order to receive infrared signals from the remote control. • When you turn on this unit, there will be a 4 to 5-second delay before this unit can reproduce sound. • This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF is pressed inward to the ON position. 3 INPUT selector Selects the desired input source (see page 40). 6 En G H I (U.S.A. model) 4 AUDIO SELECT Toggles the priority for the type of audio input jack between “AUTO”, “HDMI”, “COAX/OPT” and “ANALOG” when one component is connected to two or more input jacks (see page 42). 5 TONE CONTROL Adjusts the bass/treble balance of the front left, front right and center channels in conjunction with the PROGRAM selector (see page 52). 6 REC OUT/ZONE2 Selects the input source you want to direct to the audio/ video recorder and Zone 2 outputs independently of the input source you are listening to or watching in the main zone (see page 83). 7 STRAIGHT Turns the sound field programs off or on. When the “STRAIGHT” mode is selected, 2-channel or multichannel input signals are output directly from their respective speakers without effect processing (see page 51). CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS 8 MULTI ZONE buttons ZONE 3 ON/OFF Turns on Zone 3 only or sets it to the standby mode (see page 131). Note These buttons are operational only when MASTER ON/OFF is pressed inward to the ON position. ZONE CONTROLS Switches the zone you want to control between the main zone, Zone 2 and Zone 3 (see page 131). y After you press ZONE CONTROLS, the indicator for the currently selected zone flashes in the front panel display for approximately 5 seconds. While the indicator is flashing, perform the desired operation. E OPTIMIZER MIC jack Use to connect and input audio signals from the supplied optimizer microphone in the “Auto Setup” procedure (see page 35). F PHONES jack Outputs audio signals for private listening with headphones (see page 43). G VIDEO AUX jacks Input audio and video signals from a portable external source such as a game console or a video camera (see page 29). y To reproduce the source signals input at these jacks, select “V-AUX” as the input source. Note 9 Front panel display Shows information about the operational status of this unit (see page 12). The audio signals input at the DOCK terminal on the rear panel take priority over the ones input at the VIDEO AUX jacks. 0 ENHANCER Turns on or off the Compressed Music Enhancer mode (see page 54). H USB port Use to connect a USB memory device or a USB portable audio player (see page 81). A Remote control sensor Receives signals from the remote control (see page 11). I VOLUME Controls the output level of all audio channels. B NIGHT Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 55). y C PURE DIRECT Turns on or off the Pure Direct mode (see page 52). This does not affect the AUDIO OUT (REC) level. ■ Opening and closing the front panel door When you want to use the controls behind the front panel door, open the door by gently pressing on the lower part of the panel. Keep the door closed when not using these controls. To open, press gently on the lower part of the panel. 7 En INTRODUCTION ZONE 2 ON/OFF Turns on Zone 2 only or sets it to the standby mode (see page 131). D PROGRAM selector • Selects sound field programs (see page 46). • Adjusts the bass/treble balance in conjunction with TONE CONTROL (see page 52). CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Remote control ■ Remote control controls and functions This section describes only the amplifier controls and functions of this unit. See the following pages for details about other control and functions. • AM/FM tuning .......................................... see page 56 • XM satellite radio tuning .......................... see page 64 • Controlling a TV ..................................... see page 118 • Controlling other components ................. see page 119 • Controlling option components ............... see page 120 POWER POWER TV AV POWER STANDBY NET/USB AUDIO SEL PHONO 3 TUNER V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT DTV VCR 1 SLEEP CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD The operation mode of the remote control buttons in the shaded area below depends on the operation mode selector position. Set the operation mode selector to AMP to control this unit. D 1 Infrared window Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate (see page 11). E F G 2 TRANSMIT indicator Flashes while the remote control is sending infrared signals. 1 2 Note 3 Input selector buttons Select the input source you want to control. y The selected input source name appears in the display window on the remote control showing which source is currently operational. 4 SELECT H 4 Display window Shows the name of the selected input source that you can control. I 5 LIGHT Lights up the remote control buttons and the display window. AMP + 5 6 + + SOURCE TV VOL CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE PRESET/CH LEVEL J K SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE 7 TV PURE DIRECT L M AUDIO ENTER A/B/C/D/E STRAIGHT DISPLAY RETURN EFFECT MEMORY 8 CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STEREO SUR. DECODE SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 2 NIGHT ENHANCER + 10 ENT 9 0 A 1 MEMORY 9 0 FREQ/TEXT EON NET RADIO USB MODE PTY SEEK START OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR O P Q R S t U C (U.S.A. model) 8 En RENAME 7 Cursor buttons k / n / l / h, ENTER Move the items or cursor and adjust the parameters in the GUI screens or front panel display. 8 Sound field program selector buttons Select sound field programs (see page 46). REC PC/MCX B N 6 LEVEL Selects the speaker channel to be adjusted and sets the output level (see page 53). 9 SUR. DECODE Activates decoders to play back 2-channel sources in surround (see page 84). 0 MEMORY 1/2 Recalls “MEMORY 1” or “MEMORY 2” of “System Memory” (see page 115). A Network and USB input selector buttons Select the sub input source of NET/USB (see page 78). PC/MCX Selects a PC server or YAMAHA MCX-2000 as the sub input source of NET/USB. CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS SOURCE Operates the component selected with an input selector button (see page 119). USB Selects a USB memory device or a USB portable audio player as the sub input source of NET/USB. TV Operates the TV assigned to either DTV or PHONO (see page 118). Notes Notes • Press NET/USB to select “NET/USB” as the input source before you press any of the network and USB input selector buttons stated above to select the corresponding sub input source of NET/USB. • When you press any of the network and USB input selector buttons, the contents previously played for the corresponding sub input source of NET/USB is automatically played. • To set the remote control codes for other components, see page 120. • When you set the remote control codes for both DTV and PHONO (see page 120), priority is given to the one set for DTV. B MACRO ON/OFF Turns on or off the macro function (see page 124). C MACRO Programs a series of operations to be controlled with a single button (see page 124). D STANDBY Sets the main zone to the standby mode (see page 34). Note This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed inward to the ON position. E POWER Turns on the main zone (see page 34). Note This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed inward to the ON position. F AUDIO SEL Toggles the priority for the type of audio input jack between “AUTO”, “HDMI”, “COAX/OPT” and “ANALOG” when one component is connected to two or more input jacks (see page 42). G SLEEP Sets the sleep timer (see page 45). H SELECT k / n Selects another input source that you can control independently of the input source selected with the input selector buttons. I Operation mode selector Selects the operation mode of the remote control buttons in the shaded area. AMP Operates the amplifier function of this unit. J VOLUME +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. K MUTE Mutes the audio output. Press again to restore the audio output to the previous volume level (see page 43). L PURE DIRECT Turns on or off the pure direct mode (see page 52). M SET MENU Activates the GUI screen (see page 44). N STRAIGHT Turns the sound field programs off or on. When the “STRAIGHT” mode is selected, 2-channel or multichannel input signals are output directly from their respective speakers without effect processing (see page 51). O EXTD SUR. Switches between 5.1 and 6.1/7.1-channel playback of multi-channel sources (see page 84). P SELECT Selects decoders for 2-channel sources (see pages 84 and 85). Q ENHANCER Turns on or off the Compressed Music Enhancer mode (see page 54). R NIGHT Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 55). S RENAME Changes the name of the input source in the display window (see page 123). T CLEAR Clears remote control functions acquired from the learn, macro and/or rename features (see page 127). U LEARN Programs remote control codes of functions from other remote controls (see page 122). 9 En INTRODUCTION NET RADIO Selects the Internet radio as the sub input source of NET/USB. CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control This section describes the function of each control on the Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control used to control the amplifier functions of Zone 2 or Zone 3. See the following pages for details about other controls and functions. 1 Input selector buttons Select the desired input source of Zone 2 or Zone 3. • AM/FM tuning ........................................ see page 56 • XM Satellite Radio tuning ...................... see page 64 3 POWER Turns on Zone 2 or Zone 3. 2 ID1/ID2 switch Switches the remote control ID between ID1 and ID2 (see page 121). Note 3 This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed inward to the ON position. 4 4 STANDBY Sets Zone 2 or Zone 3 to the standby mode. POWER CD TUNER 1 DTV STANDBY CD-R CBL/SAT MD/TAPE NET/USB Note VCR 1 DVR/VCR 2 V-AUX/DOCK DVD This button is operational only when MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed inward to the ON position. PRESET VOLUME 5 5 VOLUME +/– Increases or decreases the volume level of Zone 2 or Zone 3. MUTE 6 6 MUTE Mutes the sound of Zone 2 or Zone 3. Press again to restore the audio output to the previous volume level. A/B/C/D/E 7 ZONE 2/ZONE 3 switch Switches between the operation mode of Zone 2 and that of Zone 3. ID1 ID2 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 2 7 (U.S.A. model) 10 En CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Preparing the remote control Notes 2 1 3 1 Press the part and slide the battery compartment cover off. 2 Insert the four supplied batteries (AAA, LR03) according to the polarity markings (+ and –) on the inside of the battery compartment. 3 Slide the cover back until it snaps into place. ■ Installing batteries in the Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control 1 • Change all of the batteries if you notice the following conditions: – the operation range of the remote control decreases. – the TRANSMIT indicator does not flash or its light becomes dim. • Do not use old batteries together with new ones. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. • We strongly recommend using alkaline batteries. • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. • Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations. • If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the remote control code and program any acquired functions that may have been cleared. ■ Using the remote control The remote control transmits a directional infrared ray. Be sure to aim the remote control directly at the remote control sensor on this unit during operation. Remote control sensor 3 2 Approximately 6 m (20 ft) 1 Take off the battery compartment cover. 2 Insert the two supplied batteries (AAA, LR03) according to the polarity markings (+ and –) on the inside of the battery compartment. 3 Snap the battery compartment cover back into place. 30 30 Notes • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote control. • Do not drop the remote control. • Do not leave or store the remote control in the following types of conditions: – places of high humidity, such as near a bath – places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove – places of extremely low temperatures – dusty places 11 En INTRODUCTION ■ Installing batteries in the remote control CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel display Note The XM indicator is only applicable to the U.S.A. and Canada models and the cursor on the left of the XM indicator lights up only when “XM” is selected as the input source. For details, see “Basic XM Satellite Radio operations” on page 67. 1 2 3 RECOUT 4 NET/USB V-AUX DOCK 5 DVR/VCR 2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE 6 CD-R CD PHONO 7 MULTI CH TUNER XM neural VIRTUAL HiFi DSP YPAO ENHANCER SILENT DSD PCM WMA A B C D E F DIGITAL PL x EX MP3 dB VOLUME MUTE 96/24 L C R LFE SL SB SR CINEMA MATRIX DISCRETE 96 24 8 neural DSD PCM WMA VIRTUAL HiFi DSP YPAO ENHANCER SILENT CINEMA DIGITAL PL x EX MATRIX DISCRETE MP3 G 96 24 9 H I 0 L M N O P J K TUNED STEREO AUTO MEMORY PS ZONE2 PTY ZONE3 RT NIGHT CT SLEEP EON PTY HOLD TUNED STEREO AUTO MEMORY PS ZONE2 PTY ZONE3 RT NIGHT CT SLEEP EON PTY HOLD A ........ U.S.A. and Canada models only P ........ U.K. and Europe models only 1 HDMI indicator Lights up when the signal of the selected input source is input at HDMI IN 1, HDMI IN 2 or HDMI IN 3 jacks (see page 21). 2 RECOUT indicator Lights up when this unit is in the recording input source selecting mode (see page 83). 8 Multi-information display Shows the name of the current sound field program and other information when adjusting or changing settings. 9 96/24 indicator Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit. 0 Input channel and speaker indicators Presence speaker indicators 3 DOCK indicator Lights up when you station your iPod in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 29). L C R LFE SL SB SR Presence and surround back speaker indicators Light up according to the number of presence and surround back speakers set for “Presence” (see page 106) and “Surround Back” (see page 106) in “Speaker Set” when “Test Tone” in “Basic” is set to “ON” (see page 105). 5 Input source indicators The corresponding cursor lights up to show the currently selected input source. 7 MUTE indicator Flashes while the MUTE function is on (see page 43). 12 En Surround back speaker indicators Input channel indicators Indicate the channel components of the current digital input signal. 4 Battery charge indicator Lights up when this unit charges the battery of the stationed iPod in the standby mode of this unit (see page 75). 6 VOLUME level indicator Indicates the current volume level. Input channel indicators y You can make settings for the presence and surround back speakers automatically by running “Auto Setup” (see page 35) or manually by adjusting settings for “Presence” (see page 106) and “Surround Back” (see page 106) in “Speaker Set”. CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS B DSP indicators The respective indicator lights up when any of the DSP sound field programs are selected. CINEMA DSP indicator Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program (see page 47). HiFi DSP indicator Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field program (see page 47). C VIRTUAL indicator Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see page 51). D YPAO indicator Lights up when you run “Auto Setup” and when the speaker settings set in “Auto Setup” are used without any modifications (see page 35). E ENHANCER indicator Lights up when the Compressed Music Enhancer mode is turned on (see page 54). F Signal format indicators The respective indicator lights up when this unit is reproducing DSD (Direct Stream Digital), PCM (Pulse Code Modulation), WMA (Windows Media Audio), WAV (RIFF Wave Form Audio) or MP3 (MPEG-1 Audio Layer3) audio signals. G Dolby decoder indicators The respective indicator lights up when any of the Dolby decoders of this unit function. H Sound field indicators Light up to indicate the active DSP sound fields. Presence DSP sound field Listening position Surround left DSP sound field Surround right DSP sound field Surround back DSP sound field I Headphones indicator Lights up when headphones are connected (see page 43). J SILENT CINEMA indicator Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound field program is selected (see page 51). K DTS decoder indicators The respective indicator lights up when any of the DTS decoders of this unit function. L Tuner indicators Lights up when this unit is in the FM, AM or XM Satellite Radio tuning mode. TUNED indicator Lights up when this unit is tuned into a station (see page 56). STEREO indicator Lights up when this unit is receiving a strong signal for an FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator is lit (see page 56). AUTO indicator Lights up when this unit is in the automatic tuning mode (see page 56). MEMORY indicator Flashes to show that a station can be stored (see page 59). M ZONE2/ZONE3 indicators Lights up when Zone 2 or Zone 3 is turned on (see page 131). N NIGHT indicator Lights up when you select a night listening mode (see page 55). O SLEEP indicator Lights up while the sleep timer is on (see page 45). P Radio Data System indicators (U.K. and Europe models only) PS, PTY, RT and CT Light up according to the selected Radio Data System display mode. EON Lights up when the EON data service is being received. PTY HOLD Lights up while searching for the Radio Data System stations in the PTY SEEK mode. 13 En INTRODUCTION A neural indicator (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Lights up when the Neural Surround decoder is activated (see page 85). CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Rear panel 1 MONITOR OUT 2 3 COMPONENT VIDEO A DVD B DTV C CBL/SAT Y 4 VIDEO DVD DTV CBL/SAT VCR 1 IN OUT IN 6 7 ANTENNA MONITOR OUT DVR/VCR 2 OUT GND FM Y 5 AC IN AM S VIDEO PB PB PR PR IN (PLAY) HDMI VIDEO OUT (REC) R MD/ + SPEAKERS SP1 + PRESENCE L WRENCH HOLDER L TAPE IN3 REMOTE IN IN OUT OUT 1 2 R CBL/ SAT GND PHONO IN2 L DTV R CD-R CD CENTER FRONT(6CH) SURROUND CENTER FRONT SURROUND SINGLE(SB) ZONE 2 SURROUND BACK/ BI-AMP + ZONE ZONE 3 VIDEO SINGLE CENTER + + AC OUTLETS R IN(PLAY) IN1 OUT(REC) AUDIO SUB WOOFER WOOFER MULTI CH INPUT DIGITAL INPUT DOCK + + SURROUND L SUR.BACK/ SUB SB(8CH) R PRESENCE PRE OUT SP2 L ZONE OUT DIGITAL OUTPUT + DVD OPTICAL COAXIAL 1 CD OUT 2 DVD DVR/ 3 VCR2 4 CD 5 DVD 6 DTV 7 CBL/ SAT 8 MD/ TAPE R + + FRONT L 9 CD-R NETWORK 1 8 9 0 A B C 2 CONTROL OUT RS-232C D E CENTER SUB WOOFER F FRONT(6CH) SURROUND SB(8CH) MULTI CH INPUT G 1 COMPONENT VIDEO jacks See pages 23 and 24 for connection information. 20 Audio component jacks See page 26 for connection information. 3 Video component jacks See pages 23 and 24 for connection information. 4 ANTENNA terminals See page 31 for connection information. 5 WRENCH HOLDER Use to hook the supplied speaker terminal wrench when not in use (see page 18). 6 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) See page 32 for details. 7 AC IN/OUTLET(S) See page 32 for connection information. 8 HDMI connectors See page 21 for connection information. 9 REMOTE jacks See page 130 for details. A DOCK terminal See page 29 for connection information. 14 En CENTER FRONT SURROUND SINGLE(SB) ZONE 2 ZONE 3 (U.S.A. model) ZONE VIDEO SUR.BACK/ SUB WOOFER PRESENCE PRE OUT H ZONE OUT I B NETWORK port Use to connect a network cable for network connections. See page 30 for connection information. C XM jack (U.S.A. and Canada models only) See page 63 for connection information. D DIGITAL INPUT/OUTPUT jacks See page 24 for connection information. E CONTROL OUT jack This is a control expansion terminal for custom installation. F RS-232C terminal This is a control expansion terminal for factory use only. Consult your dealer for details. G Speaker terminals See page 16 for connection information. H MULTI CH INPUT jacks See page 28 for connection information. I PRE OUT jacks See page 27 for connection information. J ZONE OUT jacks See page 130 for connection information. CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS Placing speakers The speaker layout below shows the speaker setting we recommend. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP and multi-channel audio sources. PL PR FR Center speaker (C) The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system. Place the center speaker centrally between the front speakers and as close to the monitor as possible, such as directly over or under it. 30˚ SL SR 60˚ 80˚ SL SR SBL Surround left and right speakers (SL and SR) The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds. Place these speakers behind your listening position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor. SBR 30 cm (12 in) or more Surround back left and right speakers (SBL and SBR) The surround back speakers supplement the surround speakers and provide more realistic front-to-back transitions. Place these speakers directly behind the listening position and at the same height as the surround speakers. They should be positioned at least 30 cm (12 in) apart. Ideally, they should be positioned at the same width as that of the front speakers. PR FR PL SW FL SR SBR C SBL SL 1.8 m (6 ft) 0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft) 0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft) PL PR FR FL C 1.8 m (6 ft) Presence left and right speakers (PL and PR) The presence speakers supplement the sound from the front speakers with extra ambient effects produced by CINEMA DSP (see page 153). These effects include sounds that filmmakers intend to locate a little farther back behind the screen in order to create more theater-like ambience. Place these speakers at the front of the room about 0.5 to 1 m (1 to 3 ft) outside the front speakers, facing slightly inward, and about 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor. Subwoofer (SW) The use of a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for high fidelity sound reproduction of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS sources. The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections. 15 En PREPARATION PREPARATION C FL Front left and right speakers (FL and FR) The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. Place these speakers at an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same. CONNECTIONS Connecting speakers Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass. CAUTION • Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this unit is turned off (see page 34). • Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or speakers. • Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speaker still creates interference with the monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor. • If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set “SPEAKER IMP.” to “6ΩMIN” before using this unit (see page 33). 4 ohm speakers can be also used as the front speakers (see page 135). Notes • A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. Cables are colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridge. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals of this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals. • The low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “Small” or to “None” in “Speaker Set” (see pages 105 and 106) are directed to the speakers selected in “Bass Out” (see page 107). • You can connect both surround back and presence speakers to this unit, however they do not output sound simultaneously. You can set to prioritize either set of speakers using the “PR/SB Priority” parameter in “Audio Option” (see page 101). • You can use the PRESENCE terminals to connect the Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers as well as the presence speakers (see page 130). Subwoofer Surround back speakers Left Right Presence speakers Left Right Center speaker R + + R + SP1 SPEAKERS + PRESENCE SURROUND BACK/ BI-AMP SINGLE SURROUND L CENTER + + L SUB WOOFER + R SP2 L PRE OUT + R + FRONT + L (U.S.A. model) Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers (see page 130) Left Right Surround speakers Left Right Front speakers 16 En CONNECTIONS FRONT terminals Connect front left and right speakers to these terminals. CENTER terminals Connect a center speaker to these terminals. ■ Connecting the speaker cable 1 SURROUND terminals Connect surround left and right speakers to these terminals. Remove approximately 10 mm (0.4 in) of insulation from the end of each speaker cable and then twist the exposed wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. 10 mm (0.4 in) Note When you use a surround back speaker, connect the speaker to the left SURROUND BACK terminal (SINGLE). 2 PRESENCE terminals Connect presence left and right speakers to these terminals. Loosen the knob using the supplied speaker terminal wrench. Speaker terminal wrench SUBWOOFER jack Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier (such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System) to this jack. Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 3 Insert one bare wire into the hole on the side of each terminal. 4 Tighten the knob to secure the wire using the supplied speaker terminal wrench. 17 En PREPARATION SURROUND BACK terminals Connect surround back left and right speakers to these terminals. CONNECTIONS 5 Hook the speaker terminal wrench onto the WRENCH HOLDER on the rear panel of this unit when not in use. ■ Connecting the banana plug (except U.K., Europe, Asia and Korea models) The banana plug is a single-pole electrical connector widely used to terminate speaker cables. Banana plug ■ Connecting to the SP2 speaker terminals 1 Connect Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers to these terminals (see page 130). 1 Tighten the knob using the supplied speaker terminal wrench. Speaker terminal wrench Open the tab. Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 2 2 Insert the banana plug connector into the end of the corresponding terminal. Insert one bare wire into the hole on the terminal. y 3 Close the tab to secure the wire. 18 En You can also use the banana plug with the SP2 speaker terminals. Open the tab and then insert one banana plug into the hole on the terminal. Do not close the tab after connecting the banana plug. CONNECTIONS Using bi-amplification connections ■ Bi-amplification connection To make the bi-amplification connections, use the FRONT and SURROUND BACK terminals as shown below. To activate the bi-amplification connections, set “BI-AMP” to “ON” in “ADVANCED SETUP” (see page 136). This unit + SURROUND BACK/ BI-AMP + FRONT SINGLE PREPARATION Some of the speakers have speaker wire connections that allow bi-amplification to enhance the performance of the speaker system. This unit allows you to make biamplification connection to one speaker system. Check if your speakers support bi-amplification. As these speakers are shipped to you, you will note shorting bars or bridges, one connecting the two red input terminals and the other connecting the two black input terminals. Remove these shorting bars or bridges only if you plan to bi-amplify your speakers. + ■ Conventional connection If you want to connect your speakers as traditional loudspeakers using the conventional connection method, connect your speakers using the regular left and right speaker wire connections and ignore the second set of terminals. R + L This unit R + + FRONT L Right Left Front speakers Note Remove the shorting bars or bridges to separate the LPF (low pass filter) and HPF (high pass filter) crossovers. Right Left Front speakers Shorting bars or bridges Shorting bars or bridges 19 En CONNECTIONS Information on jacks and cable plugs Audio jacks and cable plugs DIGITAL DIGITAL L R COAXIAL OPTICAL (White) (Red) (Orange) L R C AUDIO Left and right Coaxial analog audio digital audio cable plugs cable plug Video jacks and cable plugs VIDEO S VIDEO (Yellow) O V S Optical digital audio cable plug Composite video cable plug S-video cable plug COMPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR (Green) (Blue) (Red) Y PB PR Component video cable plugs ■ Audio jacks ■ Video jacks This unit has three types of audio jacks. Connection depends on the availability of audio jacks on your other components. This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection depends on the availability of input jacks on your video monitor. AUDIO jacks For conventional analog audio signals transmitted via left and right analog audio cables. Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks. VIDEO jacks For conventional composite video signals transmitted via composite video cables. DIGITAL COAXIAL jacks For digital audio signals transmitted via coaxial digital audio cables. DIGITAL OPTICAL jacks For digital audio signals transmitted via optical digital audio cables. Note You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to the signals input at the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital signals. 20 En S VIDEO jacks For S-video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and chrominance (C) video signals transmitted on separate wires of S-video cables. COMPONENT VIDEO jacks For component video signals, separated into the luminance (Y) and chrominance (PB, PR) video signals transmitted on separate wires of component video cables. y This unit equips the video conversion function. See pages 22 and 102 for details. CONNECTIONS Information on HDMI This unit has the HDMI IN 1, HDMI IN 2, HDMI IN 3 and HDMI OUT jacks for digital audio and video signal input/ output. Connect the HDMI IN 1, HDMI IN 2 or HDMI IN 3 jack of this unit to the HDMI output jack of other HDMI components (such as a DVD player). Connect the HDMI OUT jack of this unit to the HDMI IN jack of other HDMI components (such as a TV and a projector). The video or audio signals input at the HDMI IN 1, HDMI IN 2 or HDMI IN 3 jack of the selected input source are output at the HDMI OUT jack of this unit. Note ■ HDMI compatibility with this unit Audio signal types Audio signal formats Compatible HDMI components 2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, etc. Multi-ch Linear PCM 8ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, etc. DSD 2/5.1ch, 2.8224 MHz, 1 bit SACD, etc. Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video, etc. PREPARATION You can check the potential problem about the HDMI connection (see page 117). ■ HDMI jack and cable plug HDMI HDMI cable plug This unit’s HDMI interface is based on the following standards: • HDMI Version 1.2a (High-Definition Multimedia Interface Specification Version 1.2a) licensed by HDMI Licensing, LLC. • HDCP Revision 1.1 (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection System Revision 1.1) licensed by Digital Content Protection, LLC. Notes • When CPPM copy-protected DVD audio is played back, video and audio signals may not be output depending on the type of the DVD player. • This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI components. y • We recommend using an HDMI cable shorter than 5 meters (16 feet) with the HDMI logo printed on it. • Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack ↔ DVI-D jack) to connect this unit to other DVI components. Notes • Do not disconnect or connect the cable or turn off the power of the HDMI components connected to the HDMI OUT jack of this unit while data is being transferred. Doing so may disrupt playback or cause noise. • Audio signals input at input jacks other than the HDMI IN 1, HDMI IN 2 or HDMI IN 3 of this unit cannot be digitally output at the HDMI OUT jack. • If you turn off the power of the video monitor connected to the HDMI OUT jack via a DVI connection, this unit may fail to establish the connection to the component. • The analog video signals input at the composite video, S-video and component video jacks can be digitally up-converted to be output at the HDMI OUT jack. Set “Conversion” to “On” in “Video” (see page 102) to activate this feature. 21 En CONNECTIONS Audio and video signal flow ■ Audio signal flow Input ■ Video signal flow Input Output Output HDMI HDMI DIGITAL AUDIO (COAXIAL) COMPONENT VIDEO DIGITAL AUDIO (OPTICAL) S VIDEO AUDIO VIDEO Digital output Through Analog output Video conversion (see page 102) Notes Component interlace/progressive up-conversion (see page 102) • 2-channel as well as multi-channel PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS signals input at the HDMI IN 1, HDMI IN 2 or HDMI IN 3 jack can be output at the HDMI OUT jack only when “Support Audio” is set to “Other” (see page 115). • Audio signals input at the HDMI IN jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT and DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks. HDMI interlace/progressive up-conversion and resolution upscaling (see page 102) Notes • When the analog video signals are input at the COMPONENT VIDEO, S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks, the priority order of the input signals is as follows: 1. COMPONENT VIDEO 2. S VIDEO 3. VIDEO • The analog video signals output at the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks can be deinterlaced from 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) to 480p/576p. Set “Component I/P” to “On” in “Video” to activate this feature (see page 102). • Digital video signals input at the HDMI IN 1, HDMI IN 2 or HDMI IN 3 jack cannot be output to analog video output jacks. • The analog component video signals with 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) of resolution are converted to the s-video or composite video signals and output at the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT and VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks. • Component interlace/progressive conversion (see page 102) and HDMI up-scaling (see page 102) are available only when “Conversion” is set to “On” (see page 102). • Use the “HDMI Up-Scaling” parameter in “Video” to deinterlace and convert the resolution of the analog video signals output at the HDMI OUT jack (see page 102). • The GUI screen signal is not output at the VCR 1 OUT and DVR/VCR 2 OUT jacks and is not recorded. 22 En CONNECTIONS Connecting a TV monitor or projector Connect your TV (or projector) to the HDMI OUT jack, the COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks, the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack or the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit. CAUTION Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between components are complete. y Notes • Some video monitors connected to this unit via a DVI connection fail to recognize the HDMI audio/video signals being input if they are in the standby mode. In this case, the HDMI indicator flashes irregularly. • Set “Conversion” in “Video” to “On” (see page 102) to display the short message displays. • Set “Wall Paper” in “Video” to “Yes” or “Gray” (see page 104) to display the parameter displays. • The GUI screen appears with the wall paper or gray background depending on the input video signal format and the setting of the parameters in “Wall Paper” (see page 104). COMPONENT VIDEO MONITOR OUT MONITOR OUT Y S VIDEO PB VIDEO HDMI PR OUT (U.S.A. model) Y PB V PR Component video in S Video in S-video in HDMI in TV (or projector) indicates recommended connections indicates alternative connections 23 En PREPARATION You can select to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this unit. Use the “Support Audio” parameter in “Option” to select the component to play back HDMI audio signals (see page 115). CONNECTIONS Connecting other components CAUTION Do not connect this unit or other components to the AC power supply until all connections between components are complete. Notes • When “Conversion” is set to “Off” (see page 102), be sure to make the same type of video connections as those made for your TV (see page 23). For example, if you connected your TV to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit, connect your other components to the VIDEO jacks. • When “Conversion” is set to “On” (see page 102), the converted video signals are output only at the MONITOR OUT jacks. When recording a source, you must make the same type of video connections between each component. • To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to each DIGITAL INPUT or DIGITAL OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for “Option”, “Optical Output”, or “Coaxial Input” in “I/O Assignment” (see page 96). • If you connect your DVD player to both the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) and the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jacks, priority is given to the signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack. • The short message display does not appear when the component video signals with 720p, 1080i or 1080p resolutions are input. • The short message display does not appear when the component video signals with 480p/576p resolutions are input and output at the VIDEO or S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack. ■ Connecting a DVD player DVD player HDMI out Optical out Coaxial out Audio out Component out S-video out C PR PB Y Video out S COMPONENT VIDEO A DVD R V VIDEO DVD Y PB HDMI PR L R IN1 DIGITAL INPUT DVD OPTICAL COAXIAL 2 DVD 5 DVD (U.S.A. model) indicates recommended connections indicates alternative connections 24 En L O CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting a DVD recorder, PVR or VCR Note *1 When you connect another VCR to this unit, connect it to the VCR 1 terminals (S VIDEO IN, VIDEO IN, AUDIO IN, S VIDEO OUT, VIDEO OUT and AUDIO OUT jacks) same as DVR/VCR 2 terminals except the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack. *1 VIDEO VCR 1 IN OUT IN DVR/VCR 2 OUT L PREPARATION R IN DVR/VCR 2 OUT DIGITAL OUTPUT DIGITAL INPUT OPTICAL COAXIAL DVR/ 3 VCR2 R L V S-video in R L Video in V Audio in S Audio out Video out C S-video out Coaxial out (U.S.A. model) 9 CD-R S DVD recorder, PVR or VCR ■ Connecting set-top boxes Satellite receiver, cable TV receiver HDTV decoder Component out Component out S S COMPONENT VIDEO DTV V L R Audio out V Video out L S-video out R S-video out O Video out Y Audio out PB Optical out Optical out HDMI out PR HDMI out O PR PB Y VIDEO DTV CBL/SAT CBL/SAT Y PB HDMI PR L IN3 R CBL/ SAT IN2 DTV DIGITAL INPUT OPTICAL 6 DTV 7 CBL/ SAT (U.S.A. model) 25 En CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting audio components Notes • To make a digital connection to a component other than the default component assigned to either the DIGITAL INPUT jack or the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack, select the corresponding setting for “Option”, “Optical Output”, or “Coaxial Input” in “I/O Assignment” (see page 96). • Connect your turntable to the GND terminal of this unit to reduce noise in the signal. However, you may hear less noise without the connection to the GND terminal for some turntables. • The PHONO jacks are only compatible with a turntable with an MM or a high-output MC cartridge. To connect a turntable with a lowoutput MC cartridge to the PHONO jacks, use an in-line boosting transformer or an MC-head amplifier. • When you connect both the DIGITAL INPUT (OPTICAL) jack and the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack to an audio component, the priority is given to the DIGITAL INPUT (COAXIAL) jack. Audio out Optical in L O R Audio in CD recorder L R IN (PLAY) OUT (REC) MD/ L TAPE R GND PHONO CD-R CD L R IN(PLAY) OUT(REC) AUDIO DIGITAL OUTPUT DIGITAL INPUT OPTICAL COAXIAL 1 CD 8 4 CD MD/ TAPE 9 CD-R (U.S.A. model) R Ground Audio out L R L O C Audio out Coaxial out R Optical out L R Audio out O L Audio in Optical in Turntable 26 En CD player MD recorder or tape deck CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting an external amplifier This unit has more than enough power for any home use. However, if you want to add more power to the speaker output or if you want to use another amplifier, connect an external amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks. Notes 1 2 CENTER FRONT 3 PREPARATION • When you make connections to the PRE OUT jacks, do not make connections to the SPEAKERS terminals. • The signals output at the FRONT PRE OUT and CENTER PRE OUT jacks are affected by the TONE CONTROL settings (see page 52). • Each PRE OUT jack outputs the same channel signals as the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. • Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on the subwoofer (see page 53). • Some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack depending on the settings for “Speaker Set” (see page 105) and “Bass Out” (see page 107). 4 SURROUND SINGLE(SB) L R SUR.BACK/ SUB WOOFER PRESENCE PRE OUT 5 1 CENTER PRE OUT jack Center channel output jack. 2 FRONT PRE OUT jacks Front channel output jacks. 3 SURROUND PRE OUT jacks Surround channel output jacks. 4 SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks Surround back or presence channel output jacks. When you only connect one external amplifier for the surround back channel, connect it to the SINGLE (SB) jack. y • Set the “Surround Back” to “Large x2”, “Large x1”, “Small x2” or “Small x1” and “Presence” to “None” (see page 106) to output the surround back channel signals at SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks. • Set the “Presence” to “Yes” and “Surround Back” to “None” (see page 106) to output the presence channel signals at SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks. 5 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier. 27 En CONNECTIONS Connecting a multi-format player or an external decoder This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder, sound processor or pre-amplifier. If you set “Input Channels” to “8ch” in “MULTI CH” (see page 97), you can use the input jacks assigned as “Front Input” in “Multi CH Assign” (see page 97) together with the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to input 8-channel signals. Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels. Notes • When you select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks as the input source (see page 43), this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot select sound field programs. • This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature. For 6-channel input For 8-channel input (REC) (PLAY) CENTER FRONT(6CH) SURROUND MD/ L TAPE L *1 UT R R CENTER SUB WOOFER FRONT(6CH) SURROUND SB(8CH) L CENTER L MULTI CH INPUT L R R R SUB SB(8CH) WOOFER MULTI CH INPUT R L R L R Front out Center out Subwoofer out Surround out L Surround back out Surround out Front out Center out Subwoofer out SUB WOOFER Multi-format player/ External decoder Multi-format player/ External decoder Note *1 28 En The analog audio input jacks assigned as “Front Input” in “Multi CH Assign” (see page 97). CONNECTIONS Connecting a YAMAHA iPod universal dock Using the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel CAUTION Do not connect this unit to the AC power supply until all connections between components are complete. Use the VIDEO AUX jacks on the front panel to connect a game console or a video camera to this unit. CAUTION Be sure to turn off the volume of this unit and other components before making connections. Note The audio signals input at the DOCK terminal on the rear panel take priority over the ones input at the VIDEO AUX jacks. (U.S.A. model) PURE DIRECT VOLUME TONE CONTROL AUDIO SELECT REC OUT/ ZONE2 A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT EDIT INPUT ZONE CONTROLS ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO AUX PHONES USB ON OFF MASTER S VIDEO VIDEO L S V L AUDIO R OPTICAL R O DOCK YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) S-Video output Video output Audio output Optical output Game console or video camera 29 En PREPARATION This unit is equipped with the DOCK terminal on the rear panel that allows you to connect a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) where you can station your iPod and control playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control. Connect a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) to the DOCK terminal on the rear panel of this unit using its dedicated cable. CONNECTIONS Connecting the network To connect this unit to your network, plug one end of a network cable (CAT-5 or higher straight cable) into the NETWORK port of this unit, and plug the other end into one of the LAN ports on your router that supports the DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol) server function. The following diagram shows a connection example where this unit is connected to one of the LAN ports on a 4-port router. To enjoy music files saved on your PC and YAMAHA MCX-2000 or access the Internet Radio, each device must be connected properly in the network. Note If the DHCP server function on your router is disabled, you need to configure the network settings manually (see page 109). YAMAHA MCX-2000 YAMAHA MCX-C15 Internet YAMAHA MCX-A10 (with optional speakers) WAN LAN Modem Router Network cable NETWORK 30 En PC CONNECTIONS Connecting the FM and AM antennas Both FM and AM indoor antennas are supplied with this unit. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal strength. 2 Press and hold the tab of the AM ANT terminal. 3 Insert one of the AM loop antenna lead wires into the AM ANT terminal. 4 Release the tab of the AM ANT terminal. 5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 to connect the other lead wire to the GND terminal. Notes Indoor FM antenna (supplied) AM loop antenna (supplied) ANTENNA FM GND AM (U.S.A. model) Outdoor AM antenna Use a 5 to 10 m (16.4 to 32.8 ft) vinyl-covered wire extended outdoors from a window. Ground (GND terminal) For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. y ■ Connecting the AM loop antenna 1 Once you have properly connected the AM loop antenna to this unit, orient the AM loop antenna for the best reception when you tune into AM stations (see page 56). Set up the AM loop antenna. 31 En PREPARATION • Be sure to set the tuner frequency step (Asia and General models only) according to the frequency spacing in your area (see page 136). • The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. • The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. • A properly installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, install an outdoor antenna. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about outdoor antennas. CONNECTIONS Connecting the power cable ■ Connecting the AC power cable CAUTION Use the supplied AC cable. Do not use other AC power cables as doing so may result in fire or electrical shock. Plug the supplied AC power cable into the AC inlet after all other connections are complete, then plug the AC power cable into an AC wall outlet. (U.S.A. model) AC IN To the AC wall outlet AC OUTLETS ■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) CAUTION The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local voltage BEFORE plugging the power cable into the AC wall outlet. Improper setting of the VOLTAGE SELECTOR may cause damage to this unit and create a potential fire hazard. Rotate the VOLTAGE SELECTOR clockwise or counterclockwise to the correct position using a straight slot screwdriver. Voltages are as follows: ..............................110/120/220/230–240 V AC, 50/60 Hz VOLTAGE SELECTOR 230240V 32 En Voltage indication ■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED) U.K. and Australia models..................................... 1 outlet Korea model............................................................... None Other models......................................................... 2 outlets Use these outlet(s) to supply power to any connected components. Connect the power cable of your other components to these outlet(s). Power to these outlet(s) is supplied when this unit is turned on. However, power to these outlet(s) is cut off when this unit is turned off. For information on the maximum power or the total power consumption of the components that can be connected to these outlet(s), see “SPECIFICATIONS” on page 155. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However, the stored data will be lost in case the power cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet or if the power supply is cut off for more than one week. CONNECTIONS Setting the speaker impedance CAUTION 4 If you are to use 6 ohm speakers, set “SPEAKER IMP.” to “6ΩMIN” as follows BEFORE using this unit. 4 ohm speakers can be also used as the front speakers. Press STRAIGHT on the front panel repeatedly to select “6ΩMIN”. The following display appears in the front panel display. STRAIGHT EFFECT (U.S.A. model) PREPARATION PURE DIRECT VOLUME TONE CONTROL AUDIO SELECT REC OUT/ ZONE2 A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT SPEAKER IMP. EDIT INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT CINEMA PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO 6 MIN OPTICAL VIDEO AUX USB ON OFF MASTER 2,5 1 3 5 2,4 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position to save the new setting and turn off this unit. Make sure this unit is turned off. See page 34 for details about turning on or off this unit. MASTER 2 Press and hold STRAIGHT on the front panel and then press MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit. This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu appears in the front panel display. STRAIGHT The setting you made is reflected next time you turn on this unit. While holding down EFFECT 3 Note MASTER Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel to select “SPEAKER IMP.”. The following display appears in the front panel display. PROGRAM SPEAKER IMP. 8 MIN 33 En CONNECTIONS Turning on and off the power When all connections are complete, turn on this unit. MAIN ZONE ON/OFF (U.S.A. model) (U.S.A. model) STANDBY POWER POWER TV AV PURE DIRECT STANDBY POWER POWER NET/USB AUDIO SEL SLEEP VOLUME PHONO AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL REC OUT/ ZONE2 A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER TUNER CD MULTI CH IN NIGHT EDIT INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO PHONES VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO VIDEO AUX OPTICAL USB ON OFF MASTER MASTER ON/OFF ■ Turning on this unit Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel inward to the ON position to turn on this unit. When you turns on this unit by pressing MASTER ON/ OFF, the main zone is turned on. ■ Turning on the main zone from the standby mode Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel (or POWER on the remote control) to turn on the main zone. MAIN ZONE POWER ON/OFF or MASTER Front panel ■ Turning off this unit Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel again to release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit. Front panel Remote control ■ Set the main zone to the standby mode Press MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel (or STANDBY on the remote control) to set the main zone to the standby mode. MAIN ZONE STANDBY MASTER ON/OFF or Front panel Notes • MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel as well as POWER and STANDBY on the remote control are operational only when MASTER ON/OFF is pressed inward to the ON position. • As usual, we recommend using the standby mode to turn off this unit. 34 En Front panel Remote control AUTO SETUP AUTO SETUP This unit employs the YPAO (YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer) technology which lets you avoid troublesome listening-based speaker setup and achieves highly accurate sound adjustments automatically. The supplied optimizer microphone collects and this unit analyzes the sound your speakers produce in your actual listening environment. Using Auto Setup 1 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. (U.S.A. model) AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL REC OUT/ ZONE2 A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/TUNING Notes MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT EDIT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT • Connect a video monitor to run “Auto Setup” (see page 23). • Be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output during the “Auto Setup” procedure. • To achieve the best results, make sure the room is as quiet as possible while the “Auto Setup” procedure is in progress. If there is too much ambient noise, the results may not be satisfactory. ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT CINEMA PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO VIDEO AUX OPTICAL USB Omni-directional microphone y • If an error occurs during the “Auto Setup” procedure and an error or warning message appears in the GUI screen or in the front panel display, see the “Auto Setup” section in “TROUBLESHOOTING” on pages 147 and 148 for a complete list of error and warning messages and proper remedies. • The initial setting for each parameter is indicated in bold. • If the volume level and the crossover frequency of your subwoofer can be adjusted, set the volume level to about half way (or slightly less) and set the crossover frequency to the maximum. AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME – – – SOURCE TV MUTE LEVEL TV INPUT PRESET/CH MENU BAND SRCH MODE PURE DIRECT AUDIO ENTER A/B/C/D/E STRAIGHT RETURN MEMORY Place the optimizer microphone at your normal listening position on a flat level surface with the omni-directional microphone heading upward. Optimizer microphone 4 TV MUTE SET MENU TITLE 2 4,13 5-12 DISPLAY EFFECT (U.S.A. model) y It is recommended that you use a tripod (etc.) to affix the optimizer microphone at the same height as your ears would be when you are seated in your listening position. You can use a 6 mm diameter screw to fix the optimizer microphone to a tripod (etc.). 35 En PREPARATION PREPARATION Once you have connected the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel and have placed it in a suitable location in your listening room, run “Auto Setup” in the GUI screen. AUTO SETUP 3 4 Make sure of the following check points before starting the Auto Setup operations. • Speakers are connected appropriately. • Supplied optimizer microphone is connected to this unit and placed appropriately. • Headphones are disconnected from this unit. • The room is sufficiently quiet. • The video monitor connected to this unit is turned on. Set the operation mode selector to AMP and then press SET MENU to turn on the GUI screen. The GUI screen appears on the video monitor. 6 Press h to enter “Setup Menu”. Skip Wiring Check Distance Size 7 AMP Press k / n repeatedly to select “Wiring”, “Distance”, “Size”, “Equalizing”, or “Level”, and then press h to set the selected parameter. SET MENU SOURCE MENU PRESET/CH PRESET/CH SRCH MODE TV ENTER Currently selected menu item Stereo/Surround Sound Input Select Video Manual Setup Basic Auto Setup NET/USB System Memory Option ENTER A/B/C/D/E 8 A/B/C/D/E Press k / n repeatedly to select the desired parameter and then ENTER to confirm the selection. \ 5 Press k / n repeatedly and then h to select “Auto Setup”. “Setup Menu” is selected as the currently selected menu item. PRESET/CH PRESET/CH ENTER ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E Input Select Manual Setup Information Auto Setup Setup Menu System Memory Start Signal Info. Information Setup Menu Wiring Start Distance Size 36 En PRESET/CH PRESET/CH ENTER ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E AUTO SETUP 9 Skip Wiring Check Distance Size Wiring Skip Distance Check Size Equalizing Wiring Distance Skip Size Check Equalizing Level Distance Size Skip Equalizing Check: Natural Level Check: Flat Check: Front Size Equalizing Skip Level Check Level (Volume level) Checks and adjusts the volume level of each speaker. Choices: Check, Skip • Select “Check” to automatically check and adjust this item. • Select “Skip” to skip this item and perform no adjustments. This unit performs the following checks: Wiring (Speaker wiring) Checks which speakers are connected and the polarity of each speaker. Distance (Speaker distance) Checks the distance of each speaker from the listening position and adjusts the timing of each channel. Size (Speaker size) Checks the frequency response of each speaker and sets the appropriate low-frequency crossover for each channel. 10 Once you have selected the desired settings of each parameter, press l to return to the previous menu level and then press n to select “Start”. Information Setup Menu Start Start: ENTER Choices: Check, Skip • Select “Check” to automatically check and adjust the item. • Select “Skip” to skip the item and perform no adjustments. 37 En PREPARATION Equalizing (Parametric equalizer level) Adjusts the frequency and the parametric equalizer level of each channel to reduce coloration across the channels and create a cohesive sound field. This is particularly important if you use different brands or sizes of speakers for some channels or have a room with unique sonic characteristics. In addition, the frequency response of each channel is adjusted in accordance with the sound output from your front speakers. Choices: Check:Natural, Check:Flat, Check:Front, Skip • Select “Check:Natural” to average out the frequency response of all speakers with higher frequencies being less emphasized. Recommended if the “Check:Flat” setting sounds a little harsh. • Select “Check:Flat” to average the frequency response of all speakers. Recommended if all of your speakers are of similar quality. • Select “Check:Front” to adjust the frequency response of each speaker in accordance with the sound of your front speakers. Recommended if your front speakers are of much higher quality than your other speakers. • Select “Skip” to skip the selected item and perform no adjustments. Repeat steps 7 and 8 until you set all the desired parameters. AUTO SETUP y 11 If you are not satisfied with the results or want to manually adjust each parameter, set the parameters in “Basic” (see page 104). Press ENTER to start the setup procedure. This unit starts the auto setup procedure. Loud test tones are output from each speaker during the auto setup procedure. During the setup procedure, “Measuring...” appears in the GUI screen. We recommend getting out of the room while thus unit is in the auto setup procedure. The necessary time for the auto setup procedure depends on the environment of the listening room and connected speaker (from 30 seconds to 3 minutes). Notes • If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of your listening environment, run “Auto Setup” again to recalibrate your system. • The distances displayed in the “Distance” results may be longer than the actual distance depending on the characteristics of your subwoofer. • In the “Equalizing” results, different values may be set for the same band to provide finer adjustments. PRESET/CH 13 ENTER Press SET MENU to exit from the GUI screen. A/B/C/D/E SET MENU MENU SRCH MODE y Notes • To stop the Auto Setup procedure and set this unit to the pause mode, press one of the cursor buttons (k / n / l / h) or ENTER. In the pause mode, press k to retry the procedure, and l to cancel the Auto Setup procedure. • If an error message appears and this unit stops the setup procedure, see the “Auto Setup” section in “TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 147, and after carrying out the remedy, retry the Auto Setup procedure. 12 Once all items are set successfully, following display appears in the GUI screen. Equalizing Level Result Exit Retry Detail Setup Measurement Over Successfully • Press n and select “Setup” to set the measured values. • Press k and select “Retry” to retry the Auto Setup procedure. • Press h and select “Detail” to view information about measurement results and warning messages. For more details about warning messages, see the “Auto Setup” section in “TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 147. • Press l and select “Exit” to exit from the Auto Setup procedure. If you select “Exit”, “Don’t Setup?” appears on the screen. To set the measured values and exit, select “Yes”. To cancel the settings and exit, select “No”. 38 En • After you have completed the “Auto Setup” procedure, be sure to disconnect the optimizer microphone. • The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. Keep it away from direct sunlight and do not place it on top of this unit. ■ Reviewing the result of the auto setup Use this feature to review the result of the auto setup. 1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and then press SET MENU to turn on the GUI screen. AMP SET MENU SOURCE MENU SRCH MODE TV Stereo/Surround Sound Input Select Video Manual Setup Basic Auto Setup NET/USB System Memory Option AUTO SETUP 2 Press k / n repeatedly and then h to select “Auto Setup”. PRESET/CH PRESET/CH ENTER Note ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E “---” appears when no speaker is connected to the corresponding speaker channel. Distance (Speaker distance) Displays the speaker distance from the listening position. Press l / h to switch the unit to display the value of the each speaker distance. Press k to select “Information”. Note 4 Information Wiring Setup Menu Distance Start Size “---” appears when no speaker is connected to the corresponding speaker channel. Press h and then n repeatedly to select the desired check items. PRESET/CH PRESET/CH ENTER ENTER Size (Speaker size) Displays the size of the connected speakers. The bass cross over frequency (“Cross”) appears at the bottom of the menu area. • “LRG” appears when the connected speaker has the ability to reproduce the low-frequency signals effectively. • “SML” appears when the connected speaker does not have the ability to reproduce the low-frequency signals effectively. A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E Note Wiring Distance Size Right Left NRM Front NRM Center NRM Sur. NRM NRM S.Back NRM NRM PRNS NRM NRM SubWfr NRM Reload:ENTER “---” appears when no speaker is connected to the corresponding speaker channel. Equalizing (Speaker equalizing) Displays the result of the adjustment of the frequency responses of each connected speaker. Note Gray line appears when no speaker is connected to the corresponding speaker channel. Level (speaker level) Displays the speaker output level of the connected speakers. Note Gray line appears when no speaker is connected to the corresponding speaker channel. 39 En PREPARATION 3 Wiring (Speaker wiring) Displays the polarity of each connected speaker. • “NRM” appears when the polarity of the connected speaker is normal. • “REV” appears when the polarity of the connected speaker is reversed. PLAYBACK PLAYBACK CAUTION Extreme caution should be exercised when you play back CDs encoded in DTS. If you play back a CD encoded in DTS on a DTS-incompatible CD player, you will only hear some unwanted noise that may damage your speakers. Check whether your CD player supports CDs encoded in DTS. Also, check the sound output level of your CD player before you play back a CD encoded in DTS. y To play DTS-encoded CDs when using a digital audio connection, set “Decoder Mode” in “Input Select” to “DTS” before the playback (see page 96). Basic procedure 2 (U.S.A. model) PURE DIRECT Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or set the operation mode selector to AMP and then press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control) to select the desired input source. VOLUME TONE CONTROL AUDIO SELECT REC OUT/ ZONE2 A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER INPUT NIGHT EDIT INPUT ZONE CONTROLS ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO PHONES VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO AUX USB ON OFF MASTER 2 5 Front panel 4 or TV MUTE POWER TV POWER STANDBY POWER LEVEL AV TV INPUT PRESET/CH TITLE NET/USB AUDIO SEL PURE DIRECT NET/USB MENU SRCH MODE BAND SLEEP MUTE SET MENU AMP PHONO TUNER V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT DTV VCR 1 CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD A/B/C/D/E STRAIGHT 2 + + + 2 LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STEREO SUR. DECODE SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 TV VOL CH – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE 2 9 0 FREQ/TEXT EON NET RADIO USB NIGHT ENHANCER + 10 ENT MODE VOLUME TV 4 PC/MCX OFF ON MACRO LEARN TV DTV MULTI CH IN CLEAR RENAME Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. VCR 1 CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD The name of the currently selected input source appears in the front panel display and in the short message display for a few seconds. (U.S.A. model) 1 CD MD/TAPE Remote control PTY SEEK START REC SOURCE TUNER V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT EFFECT MEMORY CLASSICAL 1 MEMORY AMP SOURCE DISPLAY RETURN 5 SELECT PHONO AUDIO ENTER Available input sources NET/USB V-AUX DVR/VCR 2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD INPUT: MD/TAPE CD-R CD PHONO MULTI CH TUNER DVD y Currently selected input source • You can control this unit by using the graphical user interface (GUI) screen. See page 44 for details. • You can turn on or off the short message displays on the video monitor. See page 103 for details. Note For details about controlling XM Satellite Radio when “XM” is selected as the input source, see page 67. 40 En PLAYBACK 3 4 Start playback on the selected source component or select a broadcast station. • Refer to the operating instructions for the source component. • See page 56 for details about tuning instructions. • See page 67 for details about XM Satellite Radio tuning instructions. Rotate VOLUME on the front panel (or press VOLUME +/– on the remote control) to adjust the volume to the desired output level. Note Sound field programs and the Compressed Music Enhancer mode cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 43) and Audio input jack select is set to “ANALOG” (see page 42). y • Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program. • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with the corresponding input source. ■ Guide to contents VOLUME + or When you want to... VOLUME – 52 Adjust the tonal quality of the front speakers 52 Enjoy the compressed music sources in enhanced sound 54 y Edit parameters of sound field programs 88 See page 53 to adjust the level of each speaker. Enjoy the sources which have wide dynamic range at night 55 Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel (or press one of the sound field program selector buttons on the remote control repeatedly) to select the desired sound field program. The name of the selected sound field program appears in the front panel display and in the short message display. See page 47 for details about sound field programs. Use headphones 43 Enjoy multi-channel sources in 2-channel stereo 53 Select a decoder to play back sources with 84 Set this unit to the standby mode automatically 45 Remote control or CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STEREO PROGRAM Front panel 5 Remote control Currently selected sound field program category MOVIE Sci-Fi Currently selected sound field program 41 En BASIC OPERATION Enjoy pure hi-fi stereo sound Front panel 5 See page PLAYBACK AUTO Selecting audio input jacks (AUDIO SELECT) This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. Use this feature (Audio input jack select) to switch the input jack assigned to an input source when more than one jacks are assigned to an input source. y • We recommend setting Audio input jack select to “AUTO” in most cases. • You can adjust the default Audio input jack select of this unit by using “Audio Select” in “Option” (see page 114). • You can also set Audio input jack select setting in “Audio Select” in “Input Select” (see page 96). 1 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control) to select the desired input source. INPUT PHONO V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT or DTV Front panel 2 VCR 1 CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD Remote control Press AUDIO SELECT on the front panel (or AUDIO SEL on the remote control) repeatedly to select the desired Audio input jack select setting. AUDIO SELECT AUDIO SEL or Available input sources NET/USB V-AUX DVR/VCR 2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD A.SEL: MD/TAPE CD-R CD PHONO MULTI CH TUNER AUTO Currently selected Audio input jack select setting 42 En Automatically selects input signals in the following order: (1)HDMI (2)Digital signals (3)Analog signals HDMI Selects only HDMI signals. When HDMI signals are not input, no sound is output. COAX/OPT Automatically selects input signals in the following order: (1)Digital signals input at the COAXIAL jack. (2)Digital signals input at the OPTICAL jack. When no signals are input, no sound is output. ANALOG Selects only analog signals. If no analog signals are input, no sound is output. Note This feature is not available when no digital input jack (OPTICAL, COAXIAL and HDMI) are assigned. Use “I/O Assignment” in “Input Select” to reassign the respective input jack (see page 96). PLAYBACK Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT component Use this feature to select the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks (see page 28) as the input source. Using your headphones Connect a pair of headphones with a stereo analog audio cable plug to the PHONES jack on the front panel. Rotate the input selector on the front panel to select MULTI CH INPUT (or MULTI CH IN on the remote control). PURE DIRECT VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL REC OUT/ ZONE2 A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/TUNING MAN'L/AUTO FM ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT INPUT MEMORY FM/AM EDIT INPUT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC S VIDEO SILENT CINEMA VIDEO PHONES ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO VIDEO AUX OPTICAL USB ON OFF MASTER MULTI CH IN or Front panel Remote control Use “MULTI CH” menu in “Input Select” to set the parameters for MULTI CH INPUT (see page 97). y When you select a sound field program, SILENT CINEMA mode activates automatically (see page 51). Note Sound field programs and the Compressed Music Enhancer mode cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 46) and Audio input jack select is set to “ANALOG” (see page 42). Notes • When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the speaker terminals. • When headphones are used, only front L/R channel signals are output. • All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the left and right headphone channels. Muting the audio output Press MUTE on the remote control to mute the audio output. Press MUTE again to resume the audio output. MUTE y • You can also rotate VOLUME on the front panel or press VOLUME +/– on the remote control to resume the audio output. • You can adjust the muting level by using the “Muting Type” parameter in “Sound” (see page 100). • The MUTE indicator flashes in the front panel display when the audio output is muted and disappears from the front panel display when the audio output is resumed. 43 En BASIC OPERATION y PLAYBACK Operating the amplifier functions of this unit by using the graphical user interface (GUI) screen This unit features a sophisticated graphical user interface (GUI) screen that helps you to control the amplifier function of this unit. With the GUI screen, you can view the information of the signals being input and the status of this unit. You can also set up this unit using the GUI screen (see page 87). ■ Items in GUI screen Currently selected decoder Currently selected input source Currently selected menu item DVD Pro Logic Stereo/Surround Sound Input Select Video Manual Setup Basic Auto Setup NET/USB System Memory Option Sci-Fi Currently selected sound field program Menu area Manual Setup -40.0dB Current menu directory Volume level (see page 41) y • Set the operation mode selector to AMP when you operate this unit by using GUI screen. • See page 87 for details about the contents in the menu area. • This unit reserves the previously selected GUI screen. ■ Basic controls in the GUI screen AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME SOURCE – TV MUTE 1 LEVEL – TV INPUT PRESET/CH – MENU BAND SRCH MODE PURE DIRECT 4 A/B/C/D/E STRAIGHT MEMORY 44 En 3 AUDIO ENTER RETURN 2 Cursor l Press to return to the previous menu level. MUTE SET MENU TITLE 2 Set to AMP TV DISPLAY EFFECT 1 ENTER Press to select the currently selected menu item and move to the next menu level. 5 3 SET MENU Press to display or turn off the GUI screen. 4 Cursor k / n Press to select the item in the current menu level. 5 Cursor h Press to select the currently selected menu item and move to the next menu level. PLAYBACK Playing video sources in the background of an audio source 3 You can combine a video image from a video source with sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy listening to classical music while viewing beautiful scenery from the video source on the video monitor. Press SLEEP on the remote control repeatedly to set the amount of time. Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. SLEEP Press the input selector buttons on the remote control to select a video source and then an audio source. SLEEP 120min. SLEEP OFF SLEEP 90min. SLEEP 30min. SLEEP 60min. NET/USB PHONO TUNER V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT DTV VCR 1 CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD The SLEEP indicator flashes while you are switching the amount of time for the sleep timer. Once the sleep timer is set, the SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel display, and the display returns to the selected sound field program. Audio sources SLEEP 120min. SLEEP y Set the “BGV” parameter in the “MULTI CH” menu to the desired setting to select the default background video input source of the MULTI CH INPUT sources (see page 97). Flashes Using the sleep timer Use this feature to automatically set the main zone to the standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also automatically turns off any external components connected to the AC OUTLET(S) (see page 32). 1 Press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control to select the desired input source. STRAIGHT Analog SLEEP Lights up ■ Canceling the sleep timer Press SLEEP on the remote control repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears in the front panel display. SLEEP NET/USB PHONO TUNER V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT DTV 2 VCR 1 CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD Start playback on the selected source component or select a broadcast station. Refer to the operating instructions for the source component. See page 56 for details about tuning instructions. SLEEP OFF Disappears The SLEEP indicator turns off, and “SLEEP OFF” disappears from the front panel display after a few seconds. y The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing STANDBY on the remote control (or MAIN ZONE ON/OFF on the front panel) to set the main zone to the standby mode. 45 En BASIC OPERATION Video sources SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from almost any stereo or multi-channel sound source. This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA digital sound field processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience. y • When you set the “Decoder Mode” parameter in “Input Select” to “Auto”, this unit selects the appropriate digital decoder according to the input signal. • The YAMAHA CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources. • The YAMAHA HiFi DSP sound field programs recreate real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in actual concert halls, music venues, movie theaters, etc. Thus, you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from the front, back, left and right. • You can select sound field programs and adjust the parameters by using the GUI screen. See page 88 for details. Selecting sound field programs Notes • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with the corresponding input source. • Sound field programs cannot be selected when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 43) and Audio input jack select is set to “ANALOG” (see page 42). • When you play back DSD sources with any sound field program, this unit converts the DSD signals to PCM signals and then applies the selected program. • When you play back DTS 96/24 sources with any sound field program, this unit applies the selected program without activating the DTS 96/24 decoder. • Sampling frequencies higher than 48 kHz are sampled down to 48 kHz or lower and then sound field programs are applied. y You can select the desired sound field programs and setting the parameters by using GUI screen. see page 88 for details. ■ Front panel operations ■ Remote control operations (U.S.A. model) AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME – – – AMP SOURCE PURE DIRECT TV MUTE TV INPUT TV MUTE VOLUME LEVEL AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL REC OUT/ ZONE2 A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT EDIT PRESET/CH SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE PURE DIRECT INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO AUDIO ENTER OPTICAL A/B/C/D/E STRAIGHT OPTIMIZER MIC PHONES VIDEO AUX USB ON OFF DISPLAY RETURN EFFECT MEMORY MASTER CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STEREO SUR. DECODE SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 PROGRAM selector 1 MEMORY 9 MOVIE 6 7 8 2 NIGHT ENHANCER 0 + 10 ENT Sound field program selector buttons (U.S.A. model) Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel. The name of the selected sound field program appears in the front panel display and in the short message display. 46 En Set the operation mode selector to AMP and then press one of the sound field program selector buttons on the remote control repeatedly. The name of the selected sound field program appears in the front panel display and in the short message display. SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Sound field program descriptions y Select a sound field program based on your listening preference, not merely on the name of the program, etc. Remote control button Category of the program Name of the program Created sound fields (see page 13) CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP MOVIE 4 MOVIE Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques. DSP Level Init. Delay Room Size Sur. Init. Delay Sur. Room Size SB. Init. Delay SB Room Size Dialogue Lift Program description Available sound field parameters (see page 89) y For audio music sources, we also recommend using the Pure Direct mode (see page 52), the “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 51) or surround decode mode (see page 84). CLASSICAL ENTERTAIN 1 3 CLASSICAL Hall in Munich HiFi DSP This is a large fan-shaped concert hall which has approximately 2500 seats. Almost the whole interior is made of wood. There is relatively little reflection from the walls, and sound spreads finely and beautifully. DSP Level Init. Delay CLASSICAL ENTERTAIN 1 3 Room Size Liveness CLASSICAL Dialogue Lift Hall in Vienna HiFi DSP A classic shoe-box type concert hall with approximately 1700 seats. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections which produce a very full, rich sound. DSP Level Init. Delay CLASSICAL ENTERTAIN 1 3 Room Size Liveness CLASSICAL Dialogue Lift Hall in Amsterdam HiFi DSP This is a large 2200 seat shoe-box type concert hall in Amsterdam. It has a circular stage with seats located behind the stage. DSP Level Init. Delay CLASSICAL ENTERTAIN 1 3 Room Size Liveness CLASSICAL Dialogue Lift Church in Freiburg HiFi DSP This program creates the acoustic environment of a big church located in south Germany. The reverberation delay is very long while the early reflections are smaller than with other sound field programs. DSP Level Init. Delay Liveness Rev. Time Rev. Delay Rev. Level Dialogue Lift 47 En BASIC OPERATION ■ For music audio sources SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS CLASSICAL 1 CLASSICAL Chamber HiFi DSP This program creates a relatively wide space with a high ceiling like an audience hall in a palace. It offers pleasant reverberations that are suitable for courtly music and chamber music. DSP Level Init. Delay LIVE/CLUB 2 Liveness Rev. Time LIVE/CLUB Rev. Delay Rev. Level Dialogue Lift Village Vanguard HiFi DSP A traditional jazz club in New York, located on 7th Avenue. This room has a low ceiling, and the “stage” is located at the corner of the room. This program creates an intimate “close-to-the music” feel. DSP Level Init. Delay LIVE/CLUB 2 Room Size Liveness LIVE/CLUB Dialogue Lift Warehouse Loft HiFi DSP This program simulates a space enclosed by concrete. An energetic sound field is created with relatively clear reflections from the walls. DSP Level Init. Delay LIVE/CLUB 2 Room Size Liveness LIVE/CLUB Rev. Time Rev. Delay Rev. Level Dialogue Lift Cellar Club HiFi DSP This program simulates a live house with a low ceiling and homey atmosphere. A realistic, live sound field features powerful sound as if the listener is in a row in front of a small stage. DSP Level Init. Delay LIVE/CLUB 2 Room Size Liveness LIVE/CLUB Dialogue Lift The Roxy Theatre HiFi DSP The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was recorded at LA’s hottest rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left of the hall. DSP Level Init. Delay LIVE/CLUB 2 Room Size Liveness LIVE/CLUB Rev. Time Rev. Delay Rev. Level Dialogue Lift The Bottom Line HiFi DSP This is the sound field at stage front in The Bottom Line, a famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound. DSP Level Init. Delay Room Size Liveness Dialogue Lift ■ For various sources Note The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit. ENTERTAIN 3 ENTERTAINMENT Sports This program allows the listeners to enjoy stereo sport broadcasts and studio variety programs with enriched live feeling. In sports broadcasts, the voices of the commentator and sportscaster are positioned clearly on the center while the atmosphere of the stadium expands in an optimum space to offer the listeners with a feeling of presence in the stadium. DSP Level Init. Delay 48 En Room Size Sur. Init. Delay Sur. Room Size SB Init. Delay SB Room Size Dialogue Lift SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS ENTERTAIN 3 ENTERTAINMENT Action Game This sound field has been optimized for action games such as car racing and FPS games. It uses the reflection data that limits the effects range per channel in order to offer a powerful playing environment with a being-there feeling by enhancing various effects tones while maintaining a clear sense of directions. DSP Level Init. Delay ENTERTAIN 3 Room Size Sur. Init. Delay Sur. Room Size SB Init. Delay SB Room Size Dialogue Lift ENTERTAINMENT Roleplaying Game This sound field has been optimized for role-playing and adventure games. It combines the sound field effects for movies and the sound field design used with “Action Game” to represent the depth and 3D feeling of the field during play, while offering movie-like surround effects in the movie scenes in the game. DSP Level Init. Delay Room Size Sur. Init. Delay Sur. Room Size SB Init. Delay SB Room Size Dialogue Lift ■ For visual sources of music The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit. LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 2 3 ENTERTAINMENT Music Video HiFi DSP This sound field offers an image of a concert hall for live performance of pop, rock and jazz music. The listener can indulge oneself in a hot live space thanks to the presence sound field that emphasizes the vividness of vocals and solo play and the beat of rhythm instruments, and to the surround sound field that reproduces the space of a big live hall. DSP Level Init. Delay ENTERTAIN 3 Room Size Sur. Init. Delay ENTERTAINMENT Sur. Room Size SB Init. Delay SB Room Size Dialogue Lift Recital/Opera This program controls the amount of reverberations at an optimum level and emphasizes the depth and clarity of human voices. “Opera” offers the reverberations of an orchestra box in front of the listener at the same time as providing the acoustic positioning and feeling of presence on the stage. The surround sound field is relatively moderate, but the data for concert hall effects are used to represent the inherent beauty of music. The listener will not be fatigued even after long hours of opera entertainment. DSP Level Init. Delay Room Size Sur. Init. Delay Sur. Room Size SB Init. Delay SB Room Size Dialogue Lift ■ For movie sources y You can select the desired decoder used with following sound field program (except “Mono Movie”). See page 85 for details. Note The available sound field parameters and the created sound fields differ depending on the input sources and the settings of this unit. MOVIE 4 MOVIE Standard This program create a sound field emphasizing the surrounding feeling without disturbing the original acoustic positioning of multi-channel audio such as Dolby Digital and DTS. It has been designed with the concept of “an ideal movie theater”, in which the audience is surrounded by beautiful reverberations from the left, right and rear. DSP Level Sur. Init. Delay Sur. Room Size Sur. Liveness SB Init. Delay SB Room Size SB Liveness Dialogue Lift 49 En BASIC OPERATION Note SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS MOVIE MOVIE 4 Spectacle This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions). DSP Level Init. Delay Room Size Sur. Init. Delay MOVIE MOVIE 4 Sur. Room Size SB Init. Delay SB Room Size Dialogue Lift Sci-Fi This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques. DSP Level Init. Delay Room Size Sur. Init. Delay MOVIE MOVIE 4 Sur. Room Size SB Init. Delay SB Room Size Dialogue Lift Adventure This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible. DSP Level Init. Delay Room Size Sur. Init. Delay MOVIE MOVIE 4 Sur. Room Size SB Init. Delay SB Room Size Dialogue Lift Drama This sound field features stable reverberations that match a wide range of movie genres from serious dramas to musicals and comedies. The reverberations are modest but offer an optimum 3D feeling, reproducing effects tones and background music softly but cubically around clear words and center positioning in a way that does not fatigue the listener even after long hours of viewing. DSP Level Init. Delay Room Size Sur. Init. Delay MOVIE MOVIE 4 Sur. Room Size SB Init. Delay SB Room Size Dialogue Lift Mono Movie This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth using only the presence sound field. DSP Level Init. Delay Room Size Liveness Rev. Time Rev. Level Rev. Delay Dialogue Lift ■ Stereo playback STEREO 5 STEREO 2ch STEREO Use this program to mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels. See page 53 for details. Direct STEREO 5 STEREO 7ch STEREO HiFi DSP Use this program to output sound from all speakers. When you play back multi-channel sources, this unit downmixes the source to 2 channels, and then output the sound from all speakers. This program creates a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc. Center Level Surround L Level 50 En Surround R Level Sur. Back Level Presence L Level Presence R Level SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS ■ Using sound field programs without surround speakers (Virtual CINEMA DSP) Enjoying unprocessed input sources Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates virtual speakers to reproduce the natural sound field. When you set “Surround” to “None” (see page 106), Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program (see page 47). When this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode, 2-channel stereo sources are output from only the front left and right speakers. Multi-channel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels without any additional effect processing. Note You can also select the “STRAIGHT” mode by using GUI screen. See page 88 for details. Press STRAIGHT on the front panel (or on the remote control) to select “STRAIGHT”. STRAIGHT EFFECT ■ Enjoying multi-channel sources and sound field programs with headphones (SILENT CINEMA) SILENT CINEMA allows you to enjoy multi-channel music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS sources, through ordinary headphones. SILENT CINEMA activates automatically whenever you connect headphones to the PHONES jack while listening to CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field programs (see page 47). When activated, the SILENT CINEMA indicator lights up in the front panel display. EFFECT STRAIGHT Format Dolby Digital Description Standard processing for Dolby Digital sources. DTS Standard processing for DTS sources. When the input source is DTS-ES Discrete or DTS-ES Matrix format, the respective indicator appears in the front panel display. DSD Plays back DSD (Direct Stream Digital) sources. PCM Plays back PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) sources. Notes • SILENT CINEMA does not activate when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 43). • SILENT CINEMA is not effective when the Pure Direct (see page 52) or “2ch Stereo” mode (see page 53) is selected, or when this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 51). STRAIGHT or BASIC OPERATION Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate even when “Surround” is set to “None” (see page 106) in the following cases: – when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 43). – when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. – when the Pure Direct (see page 52) or “2ch Stereo” mode (see page 53) is selected, or when this unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode (see page 51). y Plays back multi-channel PCM (Pulse Code Modulation) sources. MPCM Analog Plays back analog sources. ■ Deactivating the “STRAIGHT” mode Press STRAIGHT on the remote control so that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel display. The sound effect is turned back on. STRAIGHT STRAIGHT or EFFECT EFFECT 51 En USING AUDIO FEATURES USING AUDIO FEATURES Enjoying pure hi-fi sound Adjusting the tonal quality Use the Pure Direct mode to enjoy the pure fidelity sound of the selected source. When the Pure Direct mode is activated, this unit plays back the selected source with the least circuitry. Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble for the front L/R, center, presence L/R speaker channels and the subwoofer channel. 1 Press PURE DIRECT on the front panel (or on the remote control) to turn on or off the Pure Direct mode. The PURE DIRECT button on the front panel lights up while this unit is in the Pure Direct mode. The front panel display automatically dims. Press TONE CONTROL on the front panel repeatedly to select the high-frequency response (TREBLE) or the low-frequency response (BASS). TONE CONTROL PURE DIRECT or PURE DIRECT 2 Front panel Remote control Rotate the PROGRAM selector to adjust the high-frequency response (TREBLE) or the low-frequency response (BASS). Notes • When you play back the multi-channel PCM sources (less than 192 kHz), this unit downmixes the multi-channel signals according to the “Speaker Set” in “Basic” (see page 105). • When the component connected to the HDMI IN jacks is selected as the input source and Audio input jack select is set to “AUTO” or “HDMI”, this unit does not turn off the video circuitry in the Pure Direct mode. • When you set Audio input jack select to “AUTO”, “HDMI” or “COAX/OPT” (see page 42) and play back the Dolby Digital, DTS or multi channel PCM sources, this unit activates the corresponding decoder. • The following operations are not possible when this unit is in the Pure Direct mode: – switching the sound field program – displaying the GUI screen – operating video functions (video conversion, etc.) • The Pure Direct mode is automatically canceled whenever this unit is turned off. y The front panel display turns on momentarily when an operation is performed. PROGRAM ■ Bypassing the tone control circuitry Press TONE CONTROL repeatedly to select BYPASS and cancel the tone control. TONE CONTROL Notes • If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the low-frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the surround speakers may not match that of the front L/R, center, presence L/R speakers and the subwoofer. • TONE CONTROL is not effective when PURE DIRECT is selected, or when MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source. y Use “Tone Control” parameter in “Sound” menu to adjust the balance of bass and treble output to your speakers or headphones by using GUI screen. See page 99 for details. 52 En USING AUDIO FEATURES Adjusting the speaker level You can adjust the output level of each speaker while listening to a music source. This is also possible when playing sources input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Enjoying multi-channel sources in 2-channel stereo You can mix down multi-channel sources to 2 channels and enjoy playback in 2-channel stereo. Note This operation will override the level adjustments made in “Auto Setup” (see page 35) and “Speaker Level” (see page 109). 1 Set the operation mode to AMP and then press STEREO on the remote control repeatedly to select “2ch Stereo”. Set the operation mode selector to AMP and then press LEVEL on the remote control repeatedly to select the speaker you want to adjust. AMP SOURCE STEREO 5 TV AMP LEVEL SOURCE TITLE BAND TV 2ch Stereo Adjusted speaker FRONT L Front left speaker CENTER Center speaker FRONT R Front right speaker SUR. R Surround right speaker SB L Surround back right speaker SB R Surround back left speaker SUR. L Surround left speaker SWFR Subwoofer PRNS L Presence left speaker PRNS R Presence right speaker y • You can use a subwoofer with this program when “Bass Out” is set to “SWFR” or “Both” (see page 107). • You can also select the “2ch Stereo” mode by rotating the PROGRAM selector on the front panel. • You can also select the “2ch Stereo” mode and adjust the parameter by using GUI screen. See page 88 for details. y • Once you press LEVEL on the remote control, you can also select the speaker by pressing k / n. • Instead of “SB R” and “SB L”, “SB” is displayed if “Surround Back” is set to either “Small x1” or “Large x1” (see page 106). 2 Press l / h on the remote control to adjust the speaker output level. • Press h to increase the value. • Press l to decrease the value. Control range: –10 dB to +10 dB PRESET/CH ENTER A/B/C/D/E 53 En BASIC OPERATION Display USING AUDIO FEATURES Selecting the Compressed Music Enhancer mode Compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) are created by a lossy compression scheme where the audio is resampled to lower the bit rate and to remove sounds that are indistinguishable to typical human hearing. The Compressed Music Enhancer feature of this unit enhances your listening experience by regenerating the missing harmonics in a compression artifact. As a result, flattened complexity due to the loss of high-frequency fidelity as well as lack of bass due to the loss of low-frequency bass is compensated, providing improved performance of the overall sound system. Notes • When you play back DSD sources or PCM sources whose sampling frequencies are higher than 48 kHz, this unit samples them down to 48 kHz or lower and applies the Compressed Music Enhancer mode. • The Compressed Music Enhancer mode is not effective with any of the sound field programs. y You can also select the Compressed Music Enhancer mode and adjust the parameter by using GUI menu. See page 88 for details. Press ENHANCER on the front panel (or set the operation mode selector to AMP and then press ENHANCER on the remote control) repeatedly to select the desired Compressed Music Enhancer mode. The following short message appears on the video monitor and the ENHANCER indicator lights up in the front panel display. AMP ENHANCER or SOURCE ENHANCER ENT TV ENHANCER MUSICENHANCER 2chEnhancer 54 En Lights up Choices: 2ch Enhancer, 7ch Enhancer, Off • Select “2ch Enhancer” to play back compression artifacts in 2-channel stereo. • Select “7ch Enhancer” to play back compression artifacts in 7-channel stereo. • Select “Off” to turn off the Compressed Music Enhancer mode. Note When you select “Off”, this unit returns to the previously selected sound field program. USING AUDIO FEATURES Selecting the night listening mode The night listening modes are designed to improve listenability at lower volumes or at night. Choose either “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” depending on the type of material you are playing. 1 Press NIGHT on the front panel (or set the operation mode selector to AMP and then press NIGHT on the remote control) repeatedly to select “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC”. y “NIGHT:CINEMA” and “NIGHT:MUSIC” adjustments are stored independently. Notes • You cannot use the night listening modes in the following cases: – when the Pure Direct mode (see page 52) is selected. – when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is selected as the input source (see page 43). – when headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. • The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness depending on the input source and surround sound settings you use. AMP NIGHT SOURCE or NIGHT + 10 TV BASIC OPERATION Choices: NIGHT:CINEMA, NIGHT:MUSIC, OFF • Select “NIGHT:CINEMA” when watching films to reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes. • Select “NIGHT:MUSIC” when listening to music sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds. • Select “OFF” if you do not want to use this feature. y When a night listening mode is selected, the NIGHT indicator lights up in the front panel display. 2 Press l / h on the remote control to adjust the effect level while “NIGHT:CINEMA” or “NIGHT:MUSIC” is displayed in the front panel display. PRESET/CH ENTER A/B/C/D/E Remote control Effect.Lvl:MID Choices: MIN, MID, MAX • Select “MIN” for minimum compression. • Select “MID” for standard compression. • Select “MAX” for maximum compression. 55 En FM/AM TUNING FM/AM TUNING There are 2 tuning methods: automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. You can also use the automatic and manual preset tuning features to store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups). Furthermore, you can recall any preset stations and exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other. Note Orient the connected FM and AM antennas for the best reception. FM/AM controls and functions ■ Front panel functions 1 2 AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL REC OUT/ ZONE2 A/B/C/D/E ■ Remote control functions 3 45 6 7 PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM PHONO 1 CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD POWER DTV TUNING MODE TUNER V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT VCR 1 1 DTV EDIT INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO OPTIMIZER MIC PHONES ZONE 3 L R AUDIO VCR 1 DVR/VCR 2 OPTICAL VIDEO AUX 1 INPUT selector Selects “TUNER” as the input source. + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE 2 3 LEVEL PRESET/CH SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE DISPLAY 3 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h • Selects one of the 8 preset station numbers (1 to 8) when the colon (:) is displayed in the front panel display (see page 59). • Selects the tuning frequency when the colon (:) is not displayed in the front panel display (see page 58). 4 PRESET/TUNING, EDIT • Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h between selecting preset station numbers and selecting the tuning frequency. • Edits the assignments of preset stations (see page 60). 5 FM/AM Switches the reception band between FM and AM (see page 57). 6 MEMORY Stores a preset station in the memory. Hold down this button for more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset tuning (see page 59). 7 TUNING MODE Switches between automatic tuning (the AUTO indicator is turned on) and manual tuning (the AUTO indicator is turned off) (see page 57). 3 5 ENTERTAIN 2 3 4 SUR. DECODE SELECT EXTD SUR. 1 MEMORY VOLUME A/B/C/D/E MUTE ID1 ID2 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 MOVIE 1 5 PRESET 5 EFFECT LIVE/CLUB STEREO 9 Set to SOURCE PURE DIRECT A/B/C/D/E STRAIGHT RETURN MEMORY 4 TV AUDIO ENTER CLASSICAL 2 A/B/C/D/E Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E) (see page 59). V-AUX/DOCK DVD AMP (U.S.A. model) 56 En CBL/SAT MD/TAPE NET/USB SELECT ZONE 2 SOURCE PROGRAM STANDBY CD-R ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO CD TUNER 6 7 8 2 NIGHT ENHANCER 0 + 10 ENT (U.S.A. model) 1 TUNER Selects “TUNER” as the input source. This unit is turned into the last selected station. 2 BAND Switches the reception band between FM and AM (see page 57). This unit is turned into the last selected AM or FM station. 3 PRESET/CH k / n Selects one of the 8 preset station numbers (1 to 8) when the colon (:) is displayed in the front panel display (see page 60). 4 Numeric buttons Use numbers 1 through 8 to select preset stations (see page 61). 5 A-E/CAT. l / h, A/B/C/D/E Selects one of the preset station groups (A to E) (see page 59). FM/AM TUNING Automatic tuning 3 Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. Press TUNING MODE so that the AUTO indicator lights up in the front panel display. TUNING MODE (U.S.A. model) PURE DIRECT VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL REC OUT/ ZONE2 A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING/CH PRESET/ TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT EDIT INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT CINEMA PHONES S VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R VIDEO AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO AUX A USB FM 97.70MHz AUTO ON OFF MASTER 1 1 No colon (:) 4 32 3 Lights up If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING to turn the colon (:) off. BASIC OPERATION Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER” as the input source. PRESET/ TUNING INPUT EDIT 4 Front panel 2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display. Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h once to begin automatic tuning. When this unit is tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator lights up and the frequency of the received station is shown in the front panel display. • Press h to tune into a higher frequency. • Press l to tune into a lower frequency. FM/AM FM or AM PRESET/TUNING A FM 97.70MHz TUNED Lights up 57 En FM/AM TUNING Manual tuning 3 If the signal received from the station you want to select is weak, tune into it manually. Press TUNING MODE so that the AUTO indicator disappears from the front panel display. TUNING MODE Note Manually tuning into an FM station automatically switches the tuner to monaural reception to increase the signal quality. (U.S.A. model) A PURE DIRECT FM 97.70MHz VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL REC OUT/ ZONE2 A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT EDIT INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS No colon (:) MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT CINEMA PHONES S VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R VIDEO AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO AUX USB ON OFF If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, tuning is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn the colon (:) off. MASTER 1 4 32 3 PRESET/ TUNING 1 Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER” as the input source. EDIT 4 INPUT Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h to tune into the desired station manually. Hold down the button to continue searching. PRESET/TUNING Front panel 2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” appears in the front panel display. FM/AM FM 58 En or AM FM/AM TUNING Automatic preset tuning 3 You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store up to 40 FM stations with strong signals (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups) in order. You can then recall any preset station easily by selecting the preset station number. Press and hold MEMORY for more than 3 seconds. The preset station number as well as the MEMORY and AUTO indicators flashes. After approximately 5 seconds, automatic presetting starts from the current frequency and proceeds toward higher frequencies. MEMORY (U.S.A. model) MAN'L/AUTO FM PURE DIRECT VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL REC OUT/ ZONE2 A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT EDIT INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT CINEMA PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO AUX A1:FM 97.70MHz USB ON OFF AUTO MEMORY MASTER 1 Rotate the INPUT selector to select “TUNER” as the input source. Front panel Press FM/AM to select “FM” as the reception band. “FM” appears in the front panel display. FM/AM When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front panel display shows the frequency of the last preset station. y INPUT 2 Flashes FM • You can specify the preset number from which this unit stores FM stations. Press A/B/C/D/E and then PRESET/ TUNING/CH l / h repeatedly after you perform step 3 to select the preset station number under which the first station will be stored. • You can begin tuning toward lower frequencies to store FM stations automatically. Press PRESET/TUNING so that the colon (:) disappears from the front panel display and then press PRESET/TUNING/CH l after pressing and holding MEMORY for more than 3 seconds. Notes • Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is cleared when you store a new station under the same preset station number. • If the number of received stations does not reach 40 (E8), automatic preset tuning automatically stops after searching for all the available stations. • Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually and store it as described in “Manual preset tuning” on page 60. 59 En BASIC OPERATION 1 Flashes 2 3 FM/AM TUNING Manual preset tuning 4 You can also store up to 40 stations (A1 to E8: 8 preset station numbers in each of the 5 preset station groups) manually. Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h to select a preset station number (1 to 8) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. • Press h to select a higher preset station number. • Press l to select a lower preset station number. (U.S.A. model) PRESET/TUNING PURE DIRECT VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL REC OUT/ ZONE2 A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT EDIT INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO PHONES VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO AUX USB ON OFF MASTER A1:FM 97.70MHz 3 4 2,5 Preset station number 1 2 MEMORY Tune into a station automatically or manually. See pages 57 and 58 for tuning instructions. Press MEMORY. The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel display for approximately 5 seconds. 5 Flashes Press MEMORY while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The station band and frequency appear in the front panel display with the preset station group and number you have selected. The MEMORY indicator disappears from the front panel display. MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM MEMORY MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM Flashes 3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset station group (A to E) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The selected preset station group letter appears. Check that the colon (:) appears in the front panel display. A1:FM 97.70MHz The displayed station has been stored as A1. A/B/C/D/E Notes A :FM 97.70MHz Preset station Colon (:) group 60 En MEMORY Flashes • Any stored station data existing under a preset station number is cleared when you store a new station under the same preset station number. • The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. FM/AM TUNING Selecting preset stations 2 You can tune into any desired station simply by selecting the preset station group and number under which it was stored. (U.S.A. model) Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel (or PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control) to select the desired preset station number (1 to 8). The preset station group and number appear in the front panel display along with the station band and frequency. PURE DIRECT PRESET/CH VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL REC OUT/ ZONE2 A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT EDIT INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM SILENT CINEMA OPTIMIZER MIC S VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R VIDEO AUDIO VIDEO AUX PHONES OPTICAL PRESET/TUNING or USB ENTER ON OFF MASTER A/B/C/D/E 1 2 Front panel Remote control AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME SOURCE – – TV INPUT MUTE LEVEL PRESET/CH SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE 1,2 TV 1 BASIC OPERATION – TV MUTE PURE DIRECT A1:FM 97.70MHz AUDIO ENTER A/B/C/D/E STRAIGHT RETURN DISPLAY EFFECT MEMORY (U.S.A. model) y When performing this operation with the remote control, set the operation mode selector to SOURCE and then press TUNER to select “TUNER” as the input source. 1 Press A/B/C/D/E on the front panel (or set the operation mode selector to SOURCE and then press A-E/CAT. l / h on the remote control) to select the desired preset station group (A to E). The preset station group letter appears in the front panel display and changes each time you press the button. A/B/C/D/E Front panel or PRESET/CH AMP SOURCE ENTER TV A/B/C/D/E Remote control 61 En FM/AM TUNING Exchanging preset stations 3 You can exchange the assignments of two preset stations with each other. The example below describes the procedure to exchange preset station “E1” with “A5”. Select preset station “A5” using A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h. “A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. See “Selecting preset stations” on page 61. (U.S.A. model) A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING PURE DIRECT VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL REC OUT/ ZONE2 A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT EDIT INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO PHONES VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO VIDEO AUX OPTICAL USB ON OFF MASTER A5:FM 97.70MHz MEMORY 3 3 2,4 1 2 Select preset station “E1” using A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h. See “Selecting preset stations” on page 61. Press and hold EDIT for more than 3 seconds. “E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. Flashes 4 Flashes Press EDIT again. “EDIT E1–A5” appears in the front panel display and the assignments of the two preset stations are exchanged. PRESET/ TUNING EDIT PRESET/ TUNING EDIT EDIT E1:FM 97.70MHz Flashes 62 En MEMORY Flashes E1-A5 XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING XM Satellite Radio is a satellite radio service with millions of listeners across the United States and Canada, broadcasting live daily. The XM Satellite Radio channel lineup includes over 160 digital channels of choice from coast to coast: 67 commercial-free music channels, featuring hip hop to opera, classical to country, bluegrass to blues; 33 channels of premier sports, talk, comedy, children’s and entertainment programming; and more than 20 channels of the traffic and weather information for major metropolitan areas nationwide. Because XM Satellite Radio is a subscription service, you will need to set up an account and activate service with XM using your XM Satellite Radio ID number. To check your ID number, follow “Activating XM Satellite Radio” on page 65. For further information on XM Satellite Radio services, visit the XM Satellite Radio website at “http://www.xmradio.com/” (for residents in the United States) or “http://www.xmradio.ca/” (for residents in Canada). This unit is equipped with the Neural Surround decoder (U.S.A. and Canada models only) that plays back the surround sound content of the XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels, resulting in a full surround sound experience. Notes Connect XM Passport and XM Passport Home Dock (sold separately) to the XM jack on the rear panel of this unit. For details, see the operating instructions provided with XM Passport System. XM (U.S.A. model) ■ Information from XM Satellite Radio Inc. XM monthly service subscription sold separately. XM Passport and XM Passport Home Dock required to receive XM service (sold separately). Installation costs and other fees and taxes, including a one-time activation fee may apply. Subscription fee is consumer only. All fees and programming subject to change. Channels with frequent explicit language are indicated with an “XL”. Channel blocking is available for XM radio receivers by calling “1800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346)” (for residents in the United States) or “1-877-GET-XMSR (1-877-438-9677)” (for residents in Canada). Subscriptions subject to Customer Agreement available at “http:// www.xmradio.com/” (for residents in the United States) or “http://www.xmradio.ca/” (for residents in Canada). XM service only available in the 48 continuous United States and Canada. “XM Ready” is a trademark of XM Satellite Radio Inc. © 2006 XM Satellite Radio Inc. All rights reserved. XM Passport and XM Passport Home Dock (sold separately) 63 En BASIC OPERATION • The XM Satellite Radio service is only available in the 48 contiguous United States (not available in Alaska and Hawaii) and Canada. • XM Passport System and monthly subscription are sold separately. For details, visit the XM Satellite Radio website at “http://www.xmradio.com/” (for residents in the United States) or “http://www.xmradio.ca/” (for residents in Canada). • For information on obtaining the XM Passport System, visit the XM Satellite Radio website at “http://www.xmradio.com/” (for residents in the United States) or “http://www.xmradio.ca/” (for residents in Canada), or consult your local retailer that sells XM Ready products. • To ensure optimal reception of the XM Satellite Radio signals, the XM Passport System must be placed at or near a southerly facing window with no obstacles in the path to the sky. You can mount it indoors or outdoors. Connecting the XM Passport System XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING XM Satellite Radio controls and functions Note The following controls are available only when “XM” is selected as the input source. Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or set the operation mode selector to SOURCE and then press XM on the remote control) to select “XM” as the input source. ■ Front panel functions ■ Remote control functions POWER POWER 2 AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL REC OUT/ ZONE2 A/B/C/D/E 3 4 PRESET/TUNING/CH PRESET/ TUNING 56 MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM XM 1 TUNING MODE POWER STANDBY 1 AV TV 1 NET/USB AUDIO SEL SLEEP PHONO TUNER V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT CD 1 MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD 4 EDIT DTV CD CD-R 2 3 DTV DISPLAY VCR 1 5 4 7 INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT STANDBY CBL/SAT MD/TAPE NET/USB VCR 1 DVR/VCR 2 SEARCH MODE CATEGORY POWER XM TUNER 6 ENT DVD V-AUX/DOCK 9 0 8 ZONE CONTROLS 8 MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL SELECT AMP PHONES VIDEO AUX + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE Set to SOURCE VOLUME PRESET A/B/C/D/E SOURCE (U.S.A. model) LEVEL 1 INPUT selector Selects “XM” as the input source. 2 CATEGORY (All Channel Search mode) Changes the channel category while staying in the All Channel Search mode. (Category Search mode) Changes the channel category. (Preset Search mode) Changes the preset channel group (A to E). 3 PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h (All Channel Search mode) Searches for a channel within all channels. Press and hold for quick search. (Category Search mode) Searches for a channel within the selected category. Press and hold for quick search. (Preset Search mode) Changes the preset channel number (1 to 8). 4 SEARCH MODE Changes the search mode between the All Channel Search, Category Search, and Preset Search modes (see page 68). 5 MEMORY Stores a preset channel in the memory (see page 72). 6 DISPLAY Displays the XM Satellite Radio information such as channel number, channel name, category, artist name, or song title displayed in the front panel display or in the OSD (see page 73). 64 En 2 3 SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE PURE DIRECT AUDIO ENTER A-E/CAT. STRAIGHT DISPLAY RETURN EFFECT MEMORY CLASSICAL 4 PRESET/CH TV LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 STEREO SUR. DECODE SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 2 NIGHT ENHANCER 9 1 MEMORY 0 + 10 ENT NET RADIO USB 5 6 7 6 2 9 0 MUTE A-E/CAT. DISPLAY PRESET/CH ALL PRESET ID1 ID2 CAT. ZONE 2 ZONE 3 NUMBER 7 A B 8 REC PC/MCX OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RENAME (U.S.A. model) 1 XM Selects “XM” as the input source. 2 PRESET/CH k / n (All Channel Search mode) Searches for a channel within all channels. Press and hold for quick search. (Category Search mode) Searches for a channel within the selected category. Press and hold for quick search. (Preset Search mode) Changes the preset channel number (1 to 8). 3 MEMORY Stores a preset channel in the memory (see page 72). 4 Numeric buttons (All Channel Search or Category Search mode) Use 1 to 9 and 0 to enter a channel number directly. (Preset Search mode) Use 1 to 8 to enter a preset channel number directly. XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING 5 SRCH MODE Changes the search mode between the All Channel Search, Category Search, and Preset Search modes (see page 68). 6 A-E/CAT. l / h (All Channel Search mode) Changes the channel category. (Category Search mode) Changes the channel category. (Preset Search mode) Changes the preset channel group (A to E). 7 DISPLAY Displays the XM Satellite Radio information such as channel number, channel name, category, artist name, or song title displayed in the front panel display or on the video monitor (see page 73). Activating XM Satellite Radio To sign up for an account with the XM Satellite Radio service, an XM Satellite Radio ID number is required. Follow the procedure below to check your ID number, and then visit the website or call toll-free with a major credit card handy for signing up. For residents in the United States URL: http://activate.xmradio.com/ Toll-free: 1-800-XM-RADIO (1-800-967-2346) For residents in Canada URL: https://activate.xmradio.ca/on-line-activation/ activation.jsp Toll-free: 1-877-GET-XMSR (1-877-438-9677) BASIC OPERATION 8 ENT Confirms an entered channel number in the Direct Number Access mode (see page 71). 9 ALL Selects the All Channel Search mode (see page 68). 0 NUMBER Press and hold before you press the input selector or numeric buttons to switch the function to entering numbers. A PRESET Selects the Preset Search Mode (see page 70). B CAT. Selects the Category Search mode (see page 69). 65 En XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING (U.S.A. model) 2 PURE DIRECT VOLUME TONE CONTROL AUDIO SELECT REC OUT/ ZONE2 A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/TUNING/CH TUNING MODE MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM ENHANCER NIGHT Check the XM Satellite Radio reception level and adjust the orientation of XM Passport System for a better percentage of the reception level. EDIT SEARCH MODE CATEGORY DISPLAY INPUT ZONE CONTROLS ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE y MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT CINEMA VIDEO S VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO AUX PHONES You can display the XM Satellite Radio reception level by using the “Antenna Level” parameter in “Input Select” (see page 94). USB ON OFF MASTER 1 3 Notes • If “CHECK ANTENNA” appears in the front panel display, XM Passport System may not be connected to the XM jack on the rear panel of this unit properly. See “Connecting the XM Passport System” on page 63 and check the connection. • The “Antenna Level” parameter in “Input Select” (See page 94) cannot be adjusted by using the remote control. Instead, you need to adjust the orientation of XM Passport System connected to the XM jack of this unit for a better percentage of the reception level. AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE 1 SOURCE 1 POWER POWER TV AV XM POWER STANDBY NET/USB AUDIO SEL SLEEP PRESET/CH LEVEL PHONO TUNER V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT DTV VCR 1 CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD 3 SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE TV PURE DIRECT AUDIO ENTER A-E/CAT. STRAIGHT DISPLAY RETURN EFFECT MEMORY (U.S.A. model) 1 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or set the operation mode selector to SOURCE and then press XM on the remote control) to select “XM” as the input source. The cursor on the left of the XM indicator lights up in the front panel display. 3 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel (or PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control) to select channel “0”. PRESET/CH PRESET/TUNING or INPUT ENTER A/B/C/D/E Front panel Note Front panel You cannot select channel “0” if the All Channel Search mode (see page 68) is not selected. or AMP 4 XM SOURCE TV Remote control 66 En DVR/VCR 2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE Check the XM Satellite Radio ID number displayed in the front panel display and write it down. ID:_____________________________________ Lights up V-AUX Remote control CD-R CD PHONO MULTI CH TUNER XM XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING Basic XM Satellite Radio operations 1 (U.S.A. model) PURE DIRECT VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL REC OUT/ ZONE2 A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING/CH PRESET/ TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT EDIT SEARCH MODE CATEGORY DISPLAY INPUT ZONE CONTROLS ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or set the operation mode selector to SOURCE and then press XM on the remote control) to select “XM” as the input source. The cursor on the left of the XM indicator lights up in the front panel display and the XM Satellite Radio information (such as channel number, channel name, category, artist name, or song title) for the currently selected channel appears in the front panel display. MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM S VIDEO SILENT CINEMA OPTIMIZER MIC ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R VIDEO AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO AUX PHONES INPUT USB ON OFF MASTER INPUT selector POWER TV XM button XM PHONO POWER STANDBY Front panel POWER AV NET/USB AUDIO SEL TUNER CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD AMP XM SOURCE DTV VCR 1 TV SELECT Remote control AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME – – – SOURCE TV Lights up Set to SOURCE (U.S.A. model) V-AUX DVR/VCR 2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD-R CD PHONO MULTI CH TUNER XM [001] Preview y When you select “XM” as the input source, this unit automatically recalls the previously selected channel. Note The XM Satellite Radio signals cannot be output at the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks. 2 Search for a channel by using one of the XM Satellite Radio search modes. • To select a channel from the all channel list, see “All Channel Search mode” on page 68. • To select a channel by category, see “Category Search mode” on page 69. • To select a channel from the preset channels, see “Preset Search mode” on page 70. • To select the desired channel directly by entering the channel number, see “Direct Number Access mode” on page 71. y • You can use the Neural Surround decoder to enjoy the surround sound content of XM Satellite Radio broadcasts in multi-channels (see page 84). • You can set the XM Satellite Radio preset channels (see page 72). • You can display the XM Satellite Radio information in the front panel display or on the video monitor (see page 73). 67 En BASIC OPERATION V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT or SLEEP XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING ■ All Channel Search mode 2 (U.S.A. model) Press CATEGORY on the front panel (or A-E/CAT. l / h on the remote control) repeatedly to change the channel category. PURE DIRECT PRESET/CH VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL REC OUT/ ZONE2 A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/TUNING/CH MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT EDIT SEARCH MODE CATEGORY DISPLAY INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS A/B/C/D/E MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM SILENT CINEMA OPTIMIZER MIC S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO VIDEO AUX PHONES or OPTICAL ENTER USB ON OFF A/B/C/D/E MASTER 2 Front panel 3 1 3 TV MUTE LEVEL TV INPUT PRESET/CH TITLE MUTE SET MENU PURE DIRECT MENU SRCH MODE BAND AUDIO ENTER A-E/CAT. STRAIGHT RETURN MEMORY 1 2,3 DISPLAY Remote control Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel (or PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control) repeatedly to search for a channel within all channels. EFFECT (U.S.A. model) 1 PRESET/CH PRESET/TUNING Press SEARCH MODE on the front panel (or SRCH MODE on the remote control) repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH”. or EDIT Remote control SET MENU MENU SRCH MODE Front panel ENTER A/B/C/D/E Front panel PRESET/ TUNING Remote control ALL CH SEARCH 68 En or y You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel (or PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control). XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING ■ Category Search mode (U.S.A. model) 2 Press CATEGORY on the front panel (or A-E/CAT. l / h on the remote control) repeatedly to change the channel category. PURE DIRECT PRESET/CH VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL REC OUT/ ZONE2 A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/TUNING/CH MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT EDIT SEARCH MODE CATEGORY DISPLAY INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM SILENT CINEMA OPTIMIZER MIC S VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R VIDEO AUDIO VIDEO AUX PHONES A/B/C/D/E or OPTICAL ENTER USB ON OFF MASTER A/B/C/D/E 2 Front panel 3 1 3 TV MUTE LEVEL TV INPUT PRESET/CH MUTE SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE PURE DIRECT AUDIO ENTER A-E/CAT. STRAIGHT RETURN MEMORY 1 2,3 DISPLAY EFFECT Remote control Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel (or PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control) repeatedly to search for a channel within the selected channel category. PRESET/CH 1 Press SEARCH MODE on the front panel (or SRCH MODE on the remote control) repeatedly to select “CAT SEARCH”. PRESET/ TUNING SET MENU or or ENTER A/B/C/D/E Front panel Remote control MENU EDIT Front panel PRESET/TUNING SRCH MODE Remote control y You can search for a channel quickly by pressing and holding PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel (or PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control). CAT SEARCH 69 En BASIC OPERATION (U.S.A. model) XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING ■ Preset Search mode Prior to selecting a preset channel in the Preset Search mode, you must preset XM Satellite Radio channels. For details, see “Setting the XM Satellite Radio preset channels” on page 72. 2 Press CATEGORY on the front panel (or A-E/CAT. l / h on the remote control) repeatedly to change the preset channel group (A to E). y PRESET/CH The initial factory setting of all preset channels (A1 to E8) is “[001] Preview”. A/B/C/D/E or (U.S.A. model) ENTER A/B/C/D/E PURE DIRECT Front panel VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL REC OUT/ ZONE2 A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/TUNING/CH MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER Remote control NIGHT EDIT SEARCH MODE CATEGORY DISPLAY INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM SILENT CINEMA OPTIMIZER MIC S VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R VIDEO AUDIO VIDEO AUX PHONES 3 OPTICAL USB ON OFF MASTER 2 3 1 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel (or PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control) repeatedly to change the preset channel number (1 to 8). PRESET/CH TV MUTE LEVEL TV INPUT PRESET/CH MUTE SET MENU PURE DIRECT TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE A-E/CAT. STRAIGHT RETURN MEMORY PRESET/TUNING or AUDIO ENTER 1 2,3 ENTER A/B/C/D/E DISPLAY EFFECT (U.S.A. model) Front panel 1 Press SEARCH MODE on the front panel (or SRCH MODE on the remote control) repeatedly to select “PRESET SEARCH”. PRESET/ TUNING SET MENU or EDIT MENU SRCH MODE Front panel Remote control PRESET SEARCH 70 En Remote control y You can also select the preset channel number directly by pressing the numeric buttons (1 to 8) on the remote control. XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING ■ Direct Number Access mode 2 LEVEL PRESET/CH TITLE SET MENU PURE DIRECT MENU 1 SRCH MODE BAND AUDIO ENTER A-E/CAT. PARAMETER STRAIGHT DISPLAY RETURN EFFECT MEMORY CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STEREO SUR. DECODE SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 2 NIGHT ENHANCER 0 + 10 ENT 1 MEMORY 9 MOVIE Press the numeric buttons on the remote control to enter the desired three-digit channel number. For example, to enter the number 123, press the numeric buttons as shown below. 2 CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 (U.S.A. model) 1 The display changes as follows. Press SRCH MODE on the remote control repeatedly to select “ALL CH SEARCH” or “CAT SEARCH”. <XM> --1 SET MENU MENU SRCH MODE Remote control BASIC OPERATION <XM> -12 ALL CH SEARCH or <XM>123 CAT SEARCH y • To enter a one-digit or two-digit channel number, press the numeric buttons on the remote control and then press ENT to confirm the input number. • Instead of pressing ENT to tune into the channel immediately, you can wait a few seconds until this unit confirms the entered channel number. • If no button is pressed within a few seconds after you enter a one-digit or two-digit number, this unit automatically confirms the entered channel number. • Pressing a button other than the numeric buttons or ENT cancels the Direct Number Access mode procedure. 71 En XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING Setting the XM Satellite Radio preset channels 2 You can use this feature to store up to 40 XM Satellite Radio channels (A1 to E8: 8 preset channel numbers in each of the 5 preset channel groups). You can then recall any preset channel easily by selecting the preset channel group and number as described in “Preset Search mode” on page 70. Press MEMORY on the front panel (or MEMORY on the remote control). The MEMORY indicator flashes in the front panel display for approximately 5 seconds. MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM or Front panel RETURN MEMORY Remote control (U.S.A. model) PURE DIRECT MEMORY VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL REC OUT/ ZONE2 A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING/CH PRESET/ TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT EDIT SEARCH MODE CATEGORY Flashes DISPLAY INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM SILENT CINEMA OPTIMIZER MIC S VIDEO PHONES ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R VIDEO AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO AUX USB ON OFF Note MASTER 3 4 LEVEL 3,4 2,5 PRESET/CH 2,5 SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE PURE DIRECT AUDIO ENTER A-E/CAT. STRAIGHT RETURN MEMORY DISPLAY EFFECT (U.S.A. model) 1 You must proceed to and carry out steps 3 through 5 while the MEMORY indicator is flashing in the front panel display. Search for a channel you want to set as a preset channel by using one of the XM Satellite Radio search modes. See “Basic XM Satellite Radio operations” on page 67 for details. 3 Press CATEGORY on the front panel (or A-E/CAT. l / h on the remote control) repeatedly to select a preset channel group (A to E) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The preset channel group letter appears in the front panel display. PRESET/CH A/B/C/D/E or ENTER A/B/C/D/E [043] XMU Front panel Remote control Currently selected channel number C [043] XMU Currently selected preset channel group 72 En MEMORY Flashes XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING 4 Press PRESET/TUNING/CH l / h on the front panel (or PRESET/CH k / n on the remote control) repeatedly to select a preset channel number (1 to 8) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The preset channel number appears in the front panel display. Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information You can display the XM Satellite Radio information (such as channel number, channel name, category, artist name, or song title) for the currently selected channel in the front panel display or in the OSD. (U.S.A. model) PRESET/CH PURE DIRECT PRESET/TUNING or VOLUME ENTER AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL REC OUT/ ZONE2 A/B/C/D/E PRESET/TUNING/CH PRESET/ TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT EDIT SEARCH MODE CATEGORY A/B/C/D/E DISPLAY INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM SILENT CINEMA OPTIMIZER MIC S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO AUX PHONES USB ON OFF Front panel Remote control MASTER DISPLAY [043] XMU MEMORY LEVEL PRESET/CH SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE PURE DIRECT AUDIO ENTER A-E/CAT. STRAIGHT Flashes Currently selected preset channel number BASIC OPERATION C5 RETURN MEMORY DISPLAY DISPLAY EFFECT (U.S.A. model) 5 Press MEMORY on the front panel (or MEMORY on the remote control) to set the selected XM Satellite Radio channel as a preset channel while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. A colon (:) appears next to the preset channel number for confirmation, and the MEMORY indicator turns off in the front panel display. Note If a status message or an error message appears in the front panel display or on the video monitor, see the “XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only)” section in “TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 139 for appropriate remedies. ■ Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information in the front panel display MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM or Front panel RETURN MEMORY Remote control Press DISPLAY on the front panel or on the remote control repeatedly to toggle between the following XM Satellite Radio information display modes. TUNING MODE Channel number / name C5: [043] XMU Front panel or Channel category Colon (:) DISPLAY Note Artist name / Song title Remote control Once you set a new preset channel, the one previously stored in the same preset channel group and number is cleared. 73 En XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING When the channel number / name is displayed: ■ Displaying the XM Satellite Radio information on the video monitor [043] XMU When the channel category is displayed: Press DISPLAY on the remote control. The following information screen is displayed on the video monitor. TUNING MODE or DISPLAY <CAT>Rock Front panel Remote control When the artist name / song title is displayed: XM Information CH NUMBER CH NAME CATEGORY NAME TITLE Coldplay / Spe Hold : ENTER y • The front panel display can indicate up to 14 alphanumeric characters at once. You can set whether to display the XM Satellite Radio information in the front panel display in a continuous manner or by 14 alphanumeric characters at once by using the “Scroll” parameter in “Front Panel Disp.” (see page 112). • If the XM Satellite Radio information contains a character that cannot be recognized by this unit, the character will be displayed with a space. Note If you press DISPLAY while the XM Satellite Radio information display is scrolling from right to left in the front panel display, the XM Satellite Radio information display mode toggles as described above. 74 En All CH Search 043 XMU Rock Coldplay Speed of sound y • To turn off the displayed information screen, press DISPLAY on the front panel (or on the remote control). • You can select the amount of time the XM Satellite Radio information is displayed in on the video monitor by using the “On Screen” parameter in “Manual Setup” (see page 103). • To hold the XM Satellite Radio information screen, press ENTER on the remote control while it is being displayed on the video monitor. • The XM Satellite Radio information screen on hold is released if you press ENTER on the remote control again or if you change the XM Satellite Radio channel. • This unit can save up to two XM Satellite Radio information screens for future reference. To view the previous two XM Satellite Radio information screens, press TITLE on the remote control repeatedly while the current XM Satellite Radio information screen is being hold. USING IPOD USING iPod Once you have stationed your iPod in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit (see page 29), you can enjoy playback of your iPod using the supplied remote control. You can also use the Compressed Music Enhancer mode of this unit to improve the sound quality of the compression artifacts (such as the MP3 format) stored on your iPod (see page 54). Notes • Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported. • Some features may not be compatible depending on the model or the software version of your iPod. y Controlling iPod You can control your iPod when “V-AUX” is selected as the input source. The operations of your iPod can be done with the aid of the GUI screen of this unit (menu browse mode) or without it (simple remote mode). ■ Controlling iPod in the simple remote mode You can perform the basic operations of your iPod (play, stop, skip, etc.) using the supplied remote control without the aid of the GUI screen of this unit. y • You can view the photos or video clips stored on your iPod. • Operations can be also done with the controls on your iPod. ■ Controlling iPod in the menu browse mode You can perform the advanced operations of your iPod using the supplied remote control with the aid of the GUI screen of this unit. The name of the song being played appears in the front panel display according to the “Scroll” parameter in “Front Panel Disp.” (see page 112). You can also browse the songs stored on your iPod in the GUI screen. Further, you can change or adjust settings for your iPod to suit your personal preferences. Notes • Operations cannot be done with the controls on your iPod. • The YAMAHA logo appears in the display window of your iPod. • There are some characters that cannot be displayed in the front panel display or in the GUI screen of this unit. Those characters are replaced with underscores “_”. • The “Settings” parameters can be changed or adjusted only in the GUI screen. Press ENTER on the remote control to toggle between the “Settings” parameter settings. • You cannot browse the photos or video clips stored on your iPod in the GUI screen. Instead, you must use the controls on your iPod to select the desired photos or video clips. • You can select the amount of time the GUI screen of iPod is displayed in on the video monitor by using the “On Screen” parameter in “Manual Setup” (see page 103). 75 En BASIC OPERATION • For a complete list of the remote control functions used to control your iPod, see the “iPod” column in “Controlling other components” on page 119. • For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and on the video monitor, see the “iPod” section in “TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 147. • Once your iPod is stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit, this unit begins signal transmission with your iPod. • Once the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete, “iPod connected” appears in the front panel display and the DOCK indicator lights up in the front panel display. • Only the analog audio and video signals of your iPod are input at the DOCK terminal, and the analog audio signals can be output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. • Your iPod battery is automatically charged when your iPod is stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit as long as this unit is turned on. You can also select whether this unit charges the battery of the stationed iPod or not when this unit is in the standby mode by selecting the “Standby Charge” parameter in “iPod” (see page 104). • While the stationed iPod is being charged in the standby mode of this unit, the battery charge indicator (see page 12) appears in the front panel display. Once the charge is complete (or after 4 hours from the start of the charge), the indicator disappears. USING iPod 1 Set the operation mode selector to SOURCE and then press DISPLAY on the remote control. The following display appears in the video monitor. AMP SOURCE DISPLAY TV Shuffle (Shuffle) Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in random order. Choices: Off, Songs, Albums • Select “Off ” to deactivate this feature. • Select “Songs” to set this unit to play songs in random order. • Select “Albums” to set this unit to play albums in random order. Note Top When “Shuffle” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, “ ” appears in the top right corner while songs or albums are being shuffled. Playlists Artists Albums Songs Genres Composers Settings 2 Press k / n / l / h on the remote control to navigate the iPod menu and then press ENTER to begin playback of the selected song. PRESET/CH PRESET/CH A/B/C/D/E Note When “Repeat” is set to a setting other than “Off ”, “ ” or “ ” appears in the top right corner while one song or a sequence of songs are being repeated. ■ The functions of the play information display ENTER ENTER Repeat (Repeat) Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a sequence of songs. Choices: Off, One, All • Select “Off ” to deactivate this feature. • Select “One” to set this unit to repeat one song. • Select “All” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of songs. A/B/C/D/E 5 6 7 Play Information Choices: Playlists (playlists), Artists (artists), Albums (albums), Songs (songs), Genres (genres), Composers (composers), Settings (settings) • Playlists > Songs • Artists > Albums > Songs • Albums > Songs • Songs • Genres > Artists > Albums > Songs • Composers > Albums > Songs • Settings > Shuffle, Repeat 1 1/9 Frankie Zipper 2 Made-to-order 3 Road to India 4 0:51 1 Track number/total tracks 2 Name of the album 3 Name of the song 4 Elapsed time 5 h (playback) or e (pausing) 6 Shuffle and repeat icons 7 Name of the artist 8 Progress bar 9 Remaining time 76 En 8 -7:44 9 USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES This unit is equipped with network and USB features that allow you to enjoy WAV (PCM format only), MP3 and WMA files saved on your PC, YAMAHA MCX-2000, USB memory device and USB portable audio player or access the Internet Radio. Notes • YAMAHA MCX-2000 may not be for sale in some locations. • For further details about networking, refer to the operation manuals supplied with your network devices. Also refer to technical reference books, if needed. • Some WAV, MP3 and WMA files may not be playable or may be noisy when played. y • For a complete list of the remote control functions used to control the network and USB features, see the “PC/MCX-2000/Internet Radio/USB” column in “Controlling other components” on page 119. • For a complete list of status messages that appear in the front panel display and on the video monitor, see the “Network and USB” section in “TROUBLESHOOTING” on page 144. The following diagram shows the construction of the network and USB menu. NET/USB PC/MusicCAST (MCX-2000) Internet Radio USB Server* Playlists Selects a song by playlist stored on the server. Refer to the documents of the server for details about the playlist file format, the process of creating the playlist file, etc. Artists Selects a song by artist. In addition, you can select an album within the artist (MCX-2000 only). Albums Selects a song by album. Songs Selects a song directly. Genres Selects a song by genre. In addition, you can select an album within the genre (MCX-2000 only). Recall Play Makes this unit recall play from MCX-2000 or another client. For details, refer to the instruction manual of MCX-2000. Bookmarks Selects an Internet Radio station that has been added to the “Bookmarks” list (see page 80). Locations Selects an Internet Radio station or a Podcast service by location. Genres Selects an Internet Radio station or a Podcast service by genre. New Stations Selects an Internet Radio station from the ones that have recently started the service. Popular Stations Selects an Internet Radio station from the list of popular stations. Podcasts Selects a Podcast service by location or genre. Help Broadcasts voice-assisted guidelines on various topics of the related Internet service. Files/Directories Selects a file by navigating directories. Note * Only the available PC servers and MCX-2000 are displayed. 77 En BASIC OPERATION Navigating the network and USB menus USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES The following procedure shows the basic steps to navigate the network and USB menus. See pages 79 and 80 for details about each sub input source. 3 Press k / n to select the desired sub input source and then press h or ENTER. y Note You can also select the desired sub input source by pressing the corresponding button on the remote control (see page 8). “Please wait” may appear whenever it takes time for communication. This is not a system malfunction. Wait for a while. FREQ/TEXT EON NET RADIO USB REC 1 Set the operation mode selector to SOURCE and then press NET/USB on the remote control to select “NET/USB” as the input source. The cursor on the left of the NET/USB indicator lights up in the front panel display, and the contents previously played for the corresponding sub input source of NET/USB is automatically played. PC/MCX 4 AMP Press k / n / l / h on the remote control to select the desired song or Internet Radio station. • Press k / n to select the desired menu. • Press h to enter the selected menu. • Press l to return to the previous menu level. y NET/USB SOURCE • “h” in the right corner of each menu line indicates that there is a submenu available in the next menu level. • You can press ENTER or MENU to enter the selected menu or to return to the previous menu level. TV Lights up 5 NET/USB V-AUX DVR/VCR 2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD-R CD PHONO MULTI CH TUNER Press ENTER to play the selected song or to listen to the selected station. y 2 Press DISPLAY on the remote control to display the top NET/USB menu. The following display appears on the video monitor. If any other screen appears on the video monitor, press MENU on the remote control repeatedly until the top NET/USB menu appears. Top PC/MusicCAST Internet Radio USB DISPLAY 78 En • See page 76 for details about the functions of the play information display. • Some items do not appear in the play information display depending on the selected sub input source. USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES Using a PC server or YAMAHA MCX-2000 Use this feature to enjoy music files saved on your PC or YAMAHA MCX-2000. MCX-2000 is a music server that enhances the concept of YAMAHA exclusive MusicCAST, a digital music delivery method over a personal network. 1 Install Windows Media Connect 2.0 on your PC, or register this unit on your YAMAHA MCX-2000. • Refer to “Installing Windows Media Connect 2.0 on your PC” on page 79 and “Registering this unit on the YAMAHA MCX-2000” on page 80. • This procedure is needed only the first time. Turn on your PC or MCX-2000. The PC server or MCX-2000 is added to the server list on the submenu of PC/MusicCAST. 3 Select a desired server or MusicCAST to begin playback. With Windows Media Connect 2.0, you can play back the audio files on your PC. For details refer to the documents of Windows Media Connect 2.0. 1 Install Windows Media Connect 2.0 on your PC. You can download the installer of Windows Media Connect 2.0 from the Microsoft website. 2 Turn on your PC and then share a folder on the PC. The Shared folder is added to the server list on the submenu of PC/MusicCAST. Notes • Some security software installed on your PC (anti-virus software, firewall software, etc.) may block the access of this unit to your PC. In such cases, configure the security software appropriately. • If you are using a PC with Windows XP Professional, and the PC is logging on to a domain, you may not be able to connect the PC server. In such cases, log on to the local machine instead of the domain. Notes • YAMAHA MCX-2000 may not be for sale in some locations. • You can connect this unit to up to 4 PC servers and 1 MCX-2000, and each server must be connected to the same subnet as this unit. • Some WAV, MP3 and WMA files on your PC may not be playable or may be noisy when played. • (MCX-2000 only) Files marked with an asterisk (*) have not been converted to MP3 format. You cannot play back such files immediately unless you set the “Receive PCM Stream” setting of this unit to “ON” on MCX-2000. For details, refer to the instruction manual of MCX-2000. y • While a song is being played, the time elapsed is displayed at the bottom of the playback information screen. • You can use b / a to skip backward/forward and h / s to start/stop playback independently from the menu on the video monitor. • You can set the settings for repeat and shuffle mode by using the “Play Style” parameters in “NET/USB” (see page 110). • You can set whether to display the operation status in the front panel display in a continuous manner or by the first 14 characters after scrolling all characters once by using “Scroll” in “Front Panel Disp.” (see page 112). 79 En BASIC OPERATION 2 ■ Installing Windows Media Connect 2.0 on your PC USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES ■ Registering this unit on the YAMAHA MCX-2000 You must register this unit on your YAMAHA MCX-2000 so that this unit can be recognized by your YAMAHA MCX-2000. For details, refer to the operation manual supplied with your YAMAHA MCX-2000. 1 Turn off this unit. Using the Internet Radio Use this feature to listen to Internet Radio stations. This unit uses the vTuner Internet Radio station database service particularly customized for this unit, providing over 2000 radio station database. Further, you can store your favorite stations with bookmarks. Notes 2 Set your YAMAHA MCX-2000 to the “Auto Config” mode. 3 Turn on this unit. • MCX-2000 is added to the server list on the submenu of PC/MCX. • The client ID of this unit appears in the OSD of your YAMAHA MCX-2000 (shown as CLXXXXX), and this completes the automatic configuration procedure. Notes • The latter part of the client ID of this unit is same as the last 5 digits of the MAC address of this unit. For details about MAC address, see page 111. • To clear the registered client ID of this unit, use the “Manual Config” mode of your YAMAHA MCX-2000 (refer to the instruction manual of MCX-2000) and then set “N-RESET” in the advanced setup menu of this unit to “RESET” (see page 136). • The client control functions of MusicCAST over this unit other than “View Play Info”, “Receive PCM Stream” and “Edit Client title” are not available. Avoid using these functions as it will stop the playback on this unit. • This service may be discontinued without notice. • Some Internet Radio stations may not be played even if they are selected in the NET RADIO menu. • To listen to the Internet Radio, connect this unit to your network (see page 30). • A narrowband Internet connection (i.e. 56K modem, ISDN) will not provide satisfactory results, and a broadband connection is strongly recommended (i.e. a cable modem, an xDSL modem, etc.). For detailed information, consult with your ISP. y • You can use h / s to start/stop playback independently from the menu on the video monitor. • “Podcast” is a type of the Internet Radio service, and there are a number of Podcast services available on the Internet. The Podcast is not a continuous service. That is, this unit stops playback when an episode of the Podcast ends. • Some security devices (such as firewall) may block the access of this unit to Internet Radio stations. In such cases, configure the security settings appropriately. ■ Storing your favorite Internet Radio stations with bookmarks Use this feature to select your favorite Internet Radio stations quickly. Press and hold TITLE on the remote control while the selected Internet Radio station service is being broadcast. The stored Internet Radio station is added to the “Bookmarks” list (see page 77). y To remove the stored station from the list, select the item in the first level of the “Bookmarks” list and then press and hold TITLE on the remote control. 80 En USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES Using a USB memory device or a USB portable audio player Use this feature to enjoy WAV (PCM format only), MP3 and WMA files saved on your USB memory device or USB portable audio player connected to the USB port on the front panel of this unit. Notes Using shortcut buttons Use this feature to access the desired music sources (WAV, MP3 and WMA files on the connected PC, MCX-2000 or USB storage devices and Internet Radio stations) directly. You can preset 8 items in each sub input sources. ■ Assigning the items to the numeric button (1-8) • This unit supports USB mass storage class devices using FAT 16 or FAT 32. • Only the first partition is displayed in the GUI menu. You cannot select files in other partitions. • Up to 8 levels of directory hierarchy and 500 music files per directory are recognized. • Some devices may not work properly even if they meet the requirements. • Some WAV, MP3 and WMA files may not be playable or may be noisy when played. • When you connect your USB memory device or USB portable audio player, there may be an about 10 seconds delay. 1 y 2 • While a song is being played, the time elapsed is displayed at the bottom of the playback information screen. • You can use b / a to skip backward/forward and h / s to start/stop playback independently from the menu in the OSD. • You can set the settings for repeat and shuffle mode by using the “Play Style” parameters in “NET/USB” (see page 110). • You can set whether to display the operation status in the front panel display in a continuous manner or by the first 14 characters after scrolling all characters once by using “Scroll” in “Front Panel Disp.” (see page 112). Select a desired music source you want to assign to the numeric button (1-8), and then play back the source. See page 78 for details. 3 Press MEMORY. This unit in the memory preset mode. The MEMORY indicator flashes and following message appears in the video monitor and front panel display. Set the operation mode selector to SOURCE and then press NET/USB on the remote control to select “NET/USB” as the input source. AMP NET/USB SOURCE TV MEMORY Connect a USB jack of a USB memory device or USB portable audio player to the USB port on the front panel of this unit. -:PC/MCX Preset number ENHANCER MEMORY Flashes NIGHT S y When you do not complete each of the following steps within 5 seconds, the memory preset mode is automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 3. USB USB memory device or USB portable audio player 81 En BASIC OPERATION RETURN ■ Connecting a USB memory device or a USB potable audio player USING NETWORK/USB FEATURES 4 Press desired numeric buttons (1-8). The number of the selected numeric button appears in the video monitor or front panel display. NET/USB CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STEREO SUR. DECODE SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 V-AUX DVR/VCR 2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MOVIE MD/TAPE CD-R CD PHONO MULTI CH 3 Press one of the numeric button (1-8) which the desired item is assigned to select the item as the input source. The selected preset number appears in the front panel display, and this unit starts the playback of the source assigned to the selected numeric button. CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STEREO SUR. DECODE SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 MOVIE TUNER 1:PC/MCX MEMORY NET/USB Selected preset number Flashes V-AUX DVR/VCR 2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD-R CD PHONO MULTI CH TUNER 1:PC/MCX Selected preset number 5 Press ENTER or MEMORY to confirm the preset. Notes PRESET/CH or RETURN ENTER MEMORY A/B/C/D/E ■ Select an item by using numeric buttons (1-8) 1 Set the operation mode selector to SOURCE and then press NET/USB on the remote control to select “NET/USB” as the input source. AMP NET/USB SOURCE TV 2 Select the desired sub input source. FREQ/TEXT EON NET RADIO USB REC PC/MCX 82 En • “Empty Memory!” appears in the front panel display and the short message display when you press the numeric button (1-8) to which no items are assigned. • This unit does not recall the correct item assigned to the selected numeric button (1-8) in the following cases: – the connected USB device is incorrect. – the PC or MCX-2000 which stores the selected item is turned off or disconnected from the network. – the selected Internet Radio station is temporary unavailable or out of service. – the directory of the selected item has been changed. y This unit stores the relative position of the preset items in a directory or playlist, and does not recall the correct item by using numeric buttons (1-8) if you add or delete music files to or from the same directory or playlist as the preset items. In such cases, preset the desired item to the numeric buttons (1-8) again. We recommend the following methods: PC server/MCX-2000 Create eight playlists which contain desired items, and then preset the top item of each playlist to the numeric buttons (1-8). When you change the items which are preset to the numeric buttons (1-8), replace the registered items in the playlist with the desired items without deleting the playlist. USB devices Create eight directories which contain desired items in a directory beside the directory which contains all music files, and then preset the top item of each directory to the numeric buttons (1-8). When you change the items which are preset to the numeric buttons (1-8), replace the items in the directory to the desired items without deleting the directory. RECORDING RECORDING Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operating instructions for those components. CAUTION The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources encoded in DTS, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made. To play DTS-encoded DVDs and CDs (when using a digital audio connection) on your DTS-compatible player, follow its operating instructions to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output from the player. Notes y Do a test recording before you start an actual recording. If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. (U.S.A. model) 3 PURE DIRECT VOLUME AUDIO SELECT TONE CONTROL REC OUT/ ZONE2 A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT EDIT INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel to select the source component you want to record from. Select “SOURCE” to record the currently selected input source. ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT CINEMA PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO VIDEO AUX OPTICAL USB ON OFF MASTER 32 PROGRAM Front panel 1 Turn on all the connected components. 2 Press REC OUT/ZONE 2 repeatedly until the RECOUT indicator lights up in the front panel display. REC OUT/ ZONE2 4 Start playback on the selected source component or select a broadcast station. 5 Start recording on the recording component. RECOUT 83 En BASIC OPERATION • When this unit is set to the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit. • The settings of TONE CONTROL (see page 52), VOLUME, the speaker level (see page 109) and the sound field programs (see page 47) do not affect recorded material. • The source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded. • The XM Satellite Radio signals (U.S.A. and Canada models only) cannot be output at the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks. • Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. Likewise, analog signals input at the AUDIO IN jacks are not output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your source component is connected to provide only digital or analog signals, you can only record digital or analog signals. • A given input source is not output on the same OUT (REC) channel. • S-video and composite video signals pass independently through the video circuits of this unit. Therefore, when recording or dubbing video signals input from a video source component that provides only an S-video or a composite video signal, you can record only an S-video or a composite video signal on your VCR. • The analog audio signals input at the DOCK terminal can be output at the analog AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks for recording. • Check the copyright laws in your country to record from CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS Selecting decoders 2 ■ Selecting decoders for 2-channel sources (surround decode mode) Use this feature to play back sources with selected decoders. You can play back 2-channel sources on multichannels. 1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and then press SUR. DECODE on the remote control to select the surround decode mode. AMP SUR. DECODE SOURCE 6 Press SELECT on the remote control repeatedly to select the desired decoder. You can select from the following modes depending on the type of source you are playing and your personal preference. SELECT 7 y • You can select the desired decoder by pressing SELECT and then press l / h repeatedly on the remote control. • You can select the desired decoder and adjust the decoder parameter settings by using GUI screen. See page 88 for details. TV ■ Decoder descriptions Remote control button Category of the program Name of the decoder (Decoder Type) SUR. DECODE PLIIxMusic PLIIMusic SUR.DECODE 6 Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “Surround Back” is set to “None” (see page 106). Panorama Dimension Center Width Program description Available sound field parameters (see page 89) SUR.DECODE 6 SUR. DECODE PRO LOGIC Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources. SUR.DECODE 6 SUR. DECODE PLIIx Movie PL II Movie Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for movie sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “Surround Back” is set to “None” (see page 106). SUR.DECODE 6 SUR. DECODE PLIIx Music PL II Music Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for music sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “Surround Back” is set to “None” (see page 106). Panorama 84 En Dimension Center Width ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS SUR.DECODE 6 SUR. DECODE PLIIx Game PL II Game Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for game sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “Surround Back” is set to “None” (see page 106). SUR.DECODE 6 SUR. DECODE Neo: 6 Cinema DTS processing for movie sources. SUR.DECODE 6 SUR. DECODE Neo:6 Music DTS processing for music sources. Center Image SUR.DECODE 6 neural sur. SUR. DECODE (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Neural Surround processing for any sources. The Neural Surround decoder is compatible with PCM signals (32 kHz, 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 64 kHz, 88.2 kHz and 96 kHz) and analog 2channel input sources. When Neural Surround-incompatible signals are being input while the Neural Surround decoder is selected, multichannel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels without any additional effect processing and the Neural Surroundincompatible PCM signals are played back in stereo. The Neural Surround decoder is especially suitable for the XM HD Surround program of XM Satellite Radio. y When you select the surround decode mode for Dolby Digital, DTS or DTS 96/24 sources, this unit automatically selects “SURROUND DECODE Dolby Digital”, “SURROUND DECODE DTS” or “SURROUND DECODE DTS 96/24” program. ADVANCED OPERATION ■ Selecting decoders used with sound field programs Use this feature to select the desired decoder used with MOVIE sound field programs (except “Mono Movie”). See page 49 for details about MOVIE sound field program. 1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and then press MOVIE on the remote control repeatedly to select the desired MOVIE sound field programs. Available decoders (Decoder Type) Decoder PRO LOGIC PLIIx Movie PLII Movie AMP MOVIE SOURCE 4 TV 2 Neo:6 Cinema Functions Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources Dolby Pro Logic IIx (or Dolby Pro Logic II) processing for movie sources. The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “Surround Back” is set to “None” (see page 106). DTS processing for movie sources Press SELECT repeatedly to select the desired decoder used with the selected sound field program. You can select from the following decoders depending on the type of source you are playing and your personal preference. y • You can select the desired decoder by pressing SELECT and then press l / h repeatedly on the remote control. • You can also select decoders used with sound field programs by using GUI screen. Set “Decoder Type” in Stereo/Surround” to the desired setting (see page 88). 85 En ADVANCED SOUND CONFIGURATIONS ■ Selecting decoders for multi-channel sources If you connected surround back speakers, use this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for multi-channel sources using the Dolby Pro Logic IIx, Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES decoders. 1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and then press EXTD SUR. on the remote control repeatedly to switch between 5.1 and 6.1/7.1channel playback. AMP EXTD SUR. SOURCE 8 TV 2 Press l / h repeatedly to select a decoder while the name of the decoder is displayed. PRESET/CH ENTER Decoders You can select from the following decoders depending on the format of the source you are playing. Decoder Functions PLIIxMovie q D+PLIIx Movie DTS+PLIIx Movie MPCM+PLIIx Movie DSD+PLIIx Movie Plays back multi-channel sources in 7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx movie decoder. PLIIxMusic q D+PLIIx Music DTS+PLIIx Music MPCM+PLIIx Music DSD+PLIIx Music Plays back multi-channel sources in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Pro Logic IIx music decoder. DTS ES DTS 96/24 ES Plays back DTS signals in 6.1/ 7.1 channels using the DTS-ES decoder. DOLBY D EX DTS+DOLBY EX MPCM+DOLBY EX DSD+DOLBY EX Plays back multi-channel sources in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX decoder. A/B/C/D/E Auto AUTO When a signal flag that can be recognized by this unit is input, this unit selects the optimum decoder to play back the signal in 6.1/7.1 channels. If this unit cannot recognize the flag or no flag is present in the input signal, it cannot automatically be played in 6.1/7.1 channels. 86 En Off OFF Decoders are not used to create 6.1/7.1 channels. Notes • “PLIIx Movie” is available only when “Surround Back” (see page 106) is set to “Small x2” or “Large x2”. • Some 6.1/7.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal flag that can be automatically detected by this unit. When playing these kinds of discs in 6.1/7.1 channels, select a decoder manually from “PLIIx Music”, “EX/ES” or “EX”. • 6.1/7.1-channel playback is not possible even if you press EXTD SUR. in the following cases: – when “Surround” (see page 106) or “Surround Back” (see page 106) is set to “None”. – when the component connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks is being played. – when the source being played does not contain surround left and right channel signals. – when a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played. – when the “2ch Stereo” (see page 53) or Pure Direct (see page 52) mode is selected. • When this unit is turned off, this setting will be reset to “Auto”. • The Pro Logic IIx decoder is not available when “Surround Back” is set to “None” (see page 106). GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN This unit features a sophisticated graphical user interface (GUI) screen that helps you to control the amplifier function of this unit. With the GUI screen, you can view the information of the signals being input and the status of this unit. ■ Stereo/Surround Sound Input Select Video Manual Setup Basic Auto Setup NET/USB System Memory Option Stereo/Surround (Stereo/Surround menu) Use this feature to select the sound field programs and customize the program parameter settings (see page 88). ■ Input Select (Input select menu) Use this feature to select the input source and customize the parameters of each input source. ■ Manual Setup (Manual setup menu) Use this feature to manually adjust speaker and system parameters (see page 97). Sound (Sound menu) Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker settings, alter the quality and tone of the sound output by the system or compensate for video signal processing delays when using LCD monitors or projectors (see page 97). ADVANCED OPERATION Video (Video menu) Use this feature to manually adjust the video parameters (see page 101). Basic (Basic menu) Use this feature to manually adjust the basic speaker parameters (see page 104). NET/USB (Network and USB menu) Use this menu to manually adjust the network and USB system parameters (see page 109). Option (Option menu) Use this feature to manually adjust the optional system parameters (see page 111). ■ Auto Setup (Auto setup menu) Use this menu to run Auto Setup and specify which speaker parameters to be adjusted (see page 35). ■ System Memory (System memory menu) Use this feature to store and recall various settings of this unit (see page 115). ■ Signal Info. (Signal information) Use this feature to check audio signal information (see page 116). ■ Language (GUI language menu) Use this feature to select the language of your choice that appears in the GUI screen of this unit (see page 117). y • You can also select the GUI language using “GUI LANGUAGE” parameter in “ADVANCED SETUP” in the front panel display (see page 136). • See page 44 for details about the operations in GUI screen. 87 En GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN Stereo/Surround (Stereo/Surround menu) 4 Press k / n repeatedly to select the desired programs. PRESET/CH Use this feature to select the sound field programs (see page 46), the surround decode mode, the “STRAIGHT” mode (See page 51) or the Compressed Music Enhancer mode (See page 54), and adjust the parameters of each program. ■ Selecting sound field programs and setting the parameters by using GUI screen 1 ENTER A/B/C/D/E 5 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and then press SET MENU on the remote control. Press h on the remote control and then k / n to select the desired parameter. PRESET/CH PRESET/CH AMP ENTER ENTER SET MENU SOURCE A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E MENU SRCH MODE TV y 2 Press k / n / l / h on the remote control to select “Stereo/Surround” and then press h. You can select “Initialize” to set all the parameters of the selected sound field program to the default values. See page 93 for details. 6 PRESET/CH PRESET/CH Press h and then press l / h to adjust the selected parameter. PRESET/CH PRESET/CH ENTER ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E ENTER ENTER A/B/C/D/E Input Assign Dimmer Support Audio 3 7 Stereo/Surround CLASSICAL Input Select LIVE/CLUB Manual Setup ENTERTAINMENT PRESET/CH ENTER ENTER A/B/C/D/E 88 En Press ENTER or k / n to confirm the setting of the selected parameter. PRESET/CH PRESET/CH Press k / n repeatedly to select the desired category of the programs and then press h. PRESET/CH A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E or ENTER A/B/C/D/E ENTER A/B/C/D/E GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN ■ Sound field parameter descriptions You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so that the sound fields are recreated accurately in your listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program. Sound field parameter Features Decoder Type Decoder type. Selects the decoder used with the SUR. DECODE or MOVIE programs. See pages 84 and 85 for details. DSP Level DSP level. Adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range. Depending on the acoustics of your listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP effect level relative to the level of the direct sound. Control range: –6 dB to +3 dB Initial delay. Presence, surround, and surround back initial delay. Changes the apparent distance from the source sound by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the closer the sound source seems to the listener. The larger the value, the farther it seems. For a small room, set to a small value. For a large room, set to a large value. Control range: 1 to 99 ms (Init. Delay) 1 to 49 ms (Sur. Init. Delay and SB Init. Delay) Source sound Level Level Early reflections Level Init. Delay Sur. Init. Delay SB Init. Delay Time Time Time Delay Delay ADVANCED OPERATION Delay Sound source Reflection face Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms 89 En GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN Sound field parameter Room Size Sur. Room Size SB Room Size Features Room size. Presence, surround, and surround back room size. Adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from one to two doubles the apparent length of the room. Control range: 0.1 to 2.0 Time Early reflections Level Level Level Source sound Time Time Sound source Small value = 0.1 Liveness Sur. Liveness SB Liveness Large value = 2.0 Liveness. Surround and surround back liveness. Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of a sound source decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. This parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate and thus the “liveness” of the room. Control range: 0 to 10 Source sound Time Small reflected sound Small value = 0 90 En Level Dead Level Level Live Time Time Large reflected sound Large value = 10 GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN Sound field parameter Rev. Time Features Reverberation time. Adjusts the amount of time taken for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB at 1 kHz. This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range. Set a longer reverberation time for “dead” sources and listening room environments, and a shorter time for “live” sources and listening room environments. Control range: 1.0 to 5.0 s Source sound Reverberation Reverberation Early reflections 60 dB Rev. Time Sound source 60 dB Rev. Time Short reverberation Rev. Time Long reverberation Small value = 1.0 s Large value = 5.0 s Reverberation delay. Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel as if you are in a larger acoustic environment. ADVANCED OPERATION Control range: 0 to 250 ms Level Rev. Delay 60 dB Source sound (dB) 60 dB Reverberation Time Rev. Delay Rev. Time 91 En GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN Sound field parameter Rev. Level Features Reverberation level. Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes. Level Control range: 0 to 100% Source sound Rev. Level Time Dialogue Lift Dialogue lift. Adjusts the height of the front and center channel sounds by assigning some of the front and center channel elements to the presence speakers. The larger the parameter, the higher the position of the front and center channel sound. Choices: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 ■ Stereo program parameter descriptions Sound field parameter 2ch Stereo Direct Features 2-channel stereo direct. Bypasses the decoders and DSP processors of this unit for pure hi-fi stereo sound when playing 2-channel analog sources. Choices: Auto, Off y • Select “Auto” to bypass the decoders, DSP processors and the tone control circuitry only when “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB (see page 52). • Select “Off” not to bypass the decoders, DSP processors and the tone control circuitry when “BASS” and “TREBLE” are set to 0 dB. • When multi-channel signals (Dolby Digital and DTS) are input, they are downmixed to 2 channels and output from the front left and right speakers. • The low-frequency signals input from the front left and right speakers are redirected to the subwoofer in the following cases: – “Bass Out” is set to “Both” (see page 107). – “Front” is set to “Small” (see page 105) and “Bass Out” is set to “SWFR” (see page 107). 7ch Stereo Center Level Surround L Level Surround R Level Sur. Back Level Presence L Level Presence R Level 92 En 7-channel stereo center, surround left, surround right, surround back, presence left and presence right levels. Adjusts the volume level of each channel in the 7-channel stereo mode. Control range: 0 to 100% GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN ■ The Compressed Music Enhancer mode parameter descriptions The Compressed Music Enhancer mode 2ch Enhancer 7ch Enhancer Features 2-channel enhancer or 7-channel enhancer effect level. Select “High” or “Low” to adjust the effect for the high-frequency. Choices: High, Low ■ Decoder parameter descriptions Decoder parameter Pro Logic IIx Music PRO LOGIC II Music Panorama PRO LOGIC IIx Music PRO LOGIC II Music Dimension Features Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music panorama. Sends stereo signals to the surround speakers as well as the front speakers for a wraparound effect. Choices: Off, On Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music dimension. Adjusts the sound field either towards the front or towards the rear. Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front) Initial setting: STD (standard) PRO LOGIC IIx Music PRO LOGIC II Music Center Width Pro Logic IIx Music and Pro Logic II Music center width. Moves the center channel output completely towards the center speaker or towards the front left and right speakers. A larger value moves the center channel output towards the front left and right speakers. Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from the center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only from the front left and right speakers) DTS Neo:6 Music Center Image DTS Neo:6 Music center image. Adjusts the front left and right channel output relative to the center channel to make the center channel more or less dominant as necessary. Control range: 0.0 to 1.0 Initial setting: 0.3 ■ Initialize (Program parameters initialization) Use this feature to initialize the parameter of the selected sound field program. Choices: No, Yes SB Room Size Dialogue Lift Initialize No Yes • Select “Yes” to set the program parameters to the factory default settings. • Select “No” to cancel the program parameter initialization. y Use the “Sur. Initialize” feature in “Option” to initialize the parameters of each sound field program within a sound field program group (see page 114). 93 En ADVANCED OPERATION Initial setting: 3 GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN Input Select 1 Use this feature to reassign digital input/outputs, select the input signal, rename the inputs, or adjust the level of the signal input at each input source. Set the operation mode selector to AMP and then press SET MENU on the remote control. The top display appears. AMP SET MENU SOURCE Input source Parameter MENU SRCH MODE TV XM (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Antenna Level Volume Trim Rename TUNER Volume Trim Rename PHONO CD CD-R MD/TAPE DVD DTV CBL/SAT VCR1 DVR/VCR2 I/O Assignment Audio Select Decoder Mode Volume Trim Rename V-AUX or DOCK I/O Assignment* Audio Select* Decoder Mode* Volume Trim Rename PC/MCX, NET RADIO or USB MULTI CH 2 Stereo/Surround Sound Input Select Video Manual Setup Basic Auto Setup NET/USB System Memory Option Select “Input Select” and then press h. CD-R Stereo/Surround Input Select Manual Setup Auto Setup MD/TAPE DVD DTV CBL/SAT Volume Trim I/O Assignment Audio Select Decoder Mode Volume Trim Rename Multi CH Assign BGV Notes • Some parameters described above may not be available for all input sources and some parameters are only available for specific input sources. • When iPod is stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit, “DOCK” appears in the “Input Select” menu instead of “V-AUX”. In such cases, the parameters marked with asterisk (*) in the above table does not appears in the input source parameter menu. • When you select “NET/USB” as the input source, selected sub input source (PC/MCX, NET RADIO or USB) appears in the Input Select menu. 3 Select the desired input source (CD, DVD, etc.) and then press h or ENTER to access and adjust. ■ Antenna Level (Antenna level) Use this feature to check the current reception level of the XM Passport System connected to the XM jack of this unit (see page 63). For the best reception, orient the XM Passport System so that a value of 60% or more is displayed here. Display status: None, 0 to 100% Antenna Level Antenna Level 100% Volume Trim Rename Notes • “None” is displayed if the XM Passport System is not connected to this unit. In this case, check the antenna connections (see page 63). • The “Antenna Level” parameter cannot be adjusted by using the remote control. Instead, you need to adjust the orientation of the XM Passport System connected to the XM jack of this unit for a better percentage of the reception level. 94 En GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN ■ Volume Trim (Volume trimming) Use this feature to adjust the level of the signal input at each input source. This is useful if you want to balance the level of each input source to avoid sudden changes in volume when switching between input sources. Control range: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB Initial setting: 0.0 dB 3 Audio Select Decoder Mode 0.0dB Volume Trim Press k / n to select the character you want to use and l / h to move to the next one. • You can use up to 8 characters for each input. • Press n to change the character in the following order, or press k to go in the reverse order: CAPITAL A to Z, space SMALL a to z, space FIGURE 0 to 9, space MARK !, #, %, &, etc. • Press ENTER to switch between character types. • Repeat steps 1 to 3 to rename each input. Rename Note Even if you select “Français”, “Deutsch”, Espaсol” or “Русский” in “Language” (see page 117), you cannot use accent symbols or cyrillic alphabets for the name of each input. y This parameter also affects the signals output at ZONE OUT jacks. Note 4 • You can only adjust the volume for the current input source using this setting. y ■ Rename (Rename) Use this feature to change the name of the inputs in the GUI screen or the front panel display menu. (DVD is used as the source component in the following example.) Press l / h to place the _ (under-bar) under the space or character you want to edit. CAPITAL Volume Trim DVD OK 2 Note You can only change the name of the current input source (except for multi channel input sources) using this setting. Decoder Mode Rename • Select “RESET” to set the name of the selected input to default. • This feature is useful when you change the input or output assignment for digital jacks and component video input jacks. • You can also change the name of the input source that appears in the display window on the remote control. Refer to “Changing source names in the display window” on page 123”. RESET Press ENTER repeatedly to select a character type (CAPITAL/SMALL/FIGURE/MARK). 95 En ADVANCED OPERATION 1 Press l / h to select OK and press ENTER when complete. GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN ■ I/O Assignment (Input/output assignment) Use this feature to assign the input/output jacks according to the component to be used if the initial settings of this unit do not correspond to your needs. Change the following parameters to reassign the respective jacks and effectively connect more components. Once the input/output jacks are reassigned, you can select the corresponding component by using the INPUT selector on the front panel (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). Optical Output Component Video I/O Assignment HDMI Audio Select Decoder Mode Example 1: Assigning the COAXIAL 1 CD jack to the DVD input. 1 Select “Input Select” in the GUI screen and then select “DVD”. 2 Select “I/O Assignment” and then “Coaxial Input”. 3 Select “1 CD”. Example 2: Clearing a jack assignment. 1 Select “Input Select” and then select the desired input source (“DVD”, etc.). 2 Select “I/O Assignment” and then select the desired jack assignment (“Coaxial Input”, “Optical Input”, “Optical Output”, “Component Video”, or “HDMI”). 3 Select “None” and then press ENTER to clear the assignment. ■ Audio Select (Audio input jack select) This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. You can select the type of input signal you want to use. Choices: Auto, HDMI, Coax/Opt, Analog I/O Assignment Audio Select Auto Decoder Mode HDMI Volume Trim Coax/Opt • Select “Auto” when you want signals to be input to this unit in the following order: HDMI signals, digital signals and analog signals. • Select “HDMI” when you only want HDMI signals to be input to this unit. If no HDMI signals are input, no sound is output. • Select “Coax/Opt” when you want digital signals to be input to this unit at the OPTICAL or COAXIAL jacks. Use if HDMI signals are also being input. • Select “Analog” when you only want analog signals to be input to this unit. If no analog signals are input, no sound is output. y • You can also select the audio input jack by pressing AUDIO SELECT on the front panel (or AUDIO SEL on the remote control). See page 42 for details. • You can set the default Audio input jack select of this unit by using “Audio Select” in “Option” (see page 114). Note This feature is not available when no digital input jack (OPTICAL, COAXIAL and HDMI) are assigned. In addition, “HDMI” is not available as an Audio input jack select setting when the HDMI IN 1, HDMI IN 2 and HDMI IN 3 jacks are not used. Use “I/O Assignment” in “Input Select” to reassign the respective input jack (see page 96). ■ Decoder Mode (Decoder mode) Use this feature to switch the input mode. You can designate the reassigned digital input jacks (see page 96) for specific audio signals (DTS, etc.). Choices: Auto, DTS I/O Assignment Notes • You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same type of jack. • When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to signals input at the COAXIAL jack. 96 En Audio Select Decoder Mode Auto Volume Trim DTS Rename • Select “Auto” if you want this unit to automatically detect input signal types and select the appropriate input mode. • Select “DTS” if you want this unit to select DTS as the input mode. GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN ■ Multi CH Assign (Multi channel assignment) Use this feature to set the direction of the signals input into the center, subwoofer and surround channels when a source component is connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. If you input 8-channel signals from an external decoder, use this feature to select jacks for the additional front signals. Manual Setup (Sound) Use this menu to adjust the sound parameters. 1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and then press SET MENU on the remote control. AMP SET MENU SOURCE MENU SRCH MODE Volume Trim TV Rename Multi CH Assign Input Channels BGV Front Input 2 Press k / n on the remote control to select “Manual Setup” and then press h. PRESET/CH Input Channels (Input channels) This setting is used to select the number of channels input from an external decoder. Choices: 6ch, 8ch PRESET/CH ENTER ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E Note If “Zone2 Amplifier” (page 113) is set to “INT:[SP1]”, “INT:[SP2]” or “INT:Both”, no sound is output from the surround back speakers even if you select “8ch”. In this case, select “6ch” and set the output setting of the external component to 6 channels. 3 Press k / n / l / h on the remote control to select “Sound” and then press h. ENTER ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E ■ BGV (Back ground video) LFE Level Use this feature to select the video source played in the background of the sources input from the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Rename DVR/VCR 2 Multi CH Assign V-AUX BGV Last Off Dynamic Range 4 Sound Parametric EQ Video Tone Control Basic Audio Option Select the desired parameters and then press h to access and adjust. PRESET/CH Choices: DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2, V-AUX, Last, Off • Select “Last” to set this unit to automatically select the last selected video source as the background video source. • Select “Off” to set this unit not to play the video source in the background. ENTER A/B/C/D/E 97 En ADVANCED OPERATION PRESET/CH PRESET/CH Front Input (Front input) If you selected “8ch” in Input Channels, you can select analog jacks at which front signals from an external decoder will be input. Choices: DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR1, DVR/VCR2, V-AUX, CD, CD-R, MD/TAPE GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN ■ LFE Level (Low-frequency effect level) ■ Parametric EQ (Parametric equalizer) Use this feature to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries low-frequency special effects which are only added to certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals. Control range: –20.0 to 0.0 dB Control step: 1.0 dB Use this feature to adjust the parametric equalizer of each speaker. 0.0dB Speaker LFE Level Dynamic Range Front R Press h to access the settings window. Note Depending on the settings of “LFE Level”, some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER jack. ■ Dynamic Range (Dynamic range) Use this feature to select the amount of dynamic range compression to be applied to your speakers or headphones. This setting is effective only when the unit is decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals. Choices: MAX (maximum), STD (standard), MIN (minimum) STD Front L Audio Option 2 Headphone (Headphone low-frequency effect level) Select to adjust the headphone LFE level. MAX Tone Control Press k / n / l / h to select Test Tone or the speaker you want to adjust. • Select “Test Tone” to choose whether turns on or off the test tone output when adjusting the tonal quality of each speaker. • Select “Front L” to adjust the tonal quality of the front left speaker. • Select “Front R” to adjust the tonal quality of the front right speaker. • Select “Center” to adjust the tonal quality of the center speaker. • Select “Surround L” to adjust the tonal quality of the surround left speaker. • Select “Surround R” to adjust the tonal quality of the surround right speaker. • Select “Surround Back L” to adjust the tonal quality of the surround back left speaker. • Select “Surround Back R” to adjust the tonal quality of the surround back right speaker. • Select “Presence L” to adjust the tonal quality of the presence left speaker. • Select “Presence R” to adjust the tonal quality of the presence right speaker. • Select “Subwoofer” to adjust the tonal quality of the subwoofer. Speaker (Speaker low-frequency effect level) Select to adjust the speaker LFE level. Headphone Test Tone 1 Headphone Speaker Parametric EQ MIN PARAM Test Tone Speaker (Speaker dynamic range) Select to adjust the speaker compression. Front L Front R Headphone (Headphone dynamic range) Select to adjust the headphone compression. • Select “MAX” to preserve the greatest amount of dynamic range. • Select “STD” for general use. • Select “MIN” for listening to sources at low volume levels. RESET EDIT EXIT Band / Gain Center 3 Press k / n / l / h to select “PARAM” and then press ENTER to select a parameter from “Band” (band), “Freq.” (frequency) or “Q” (Q factor). y You cam adjust the gain with any parameter. 98 En GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN 4 Press n to select “EDIT” and press ENTER to access the edit window. Test Tone Band Gain Freq. Q Control (Tone control) Choices: Speakers, Headphones #1 0.0dB 125.0Hz 1.000 Control Speakers Front L Bass Headphones Front R Treble Center The parameter selected in “PARAM” is highlighted. • Press l / h to adjust the parameter. • Press k / n to adjust the “Gain”. • Press ENTER to exit the edit window. y • When you select “Band” in step 3, you can use this menu as a graphic equalizer. • The “Band #1” and “Band #2” can adjust the frequencies below of 198.4 Hz. • When you select “Subwoofer” in step 1 and “Band” in step 3, you can adjust “Band #1” and “Band #2” only. • For more information on the parametric equalizer, see page 98. 5 y “Speaker” and “Headphone” adjustments are stored independently. The adjustments for “Speaker” affects the front left/right, center, presence left/right speaker channels and Subwoofer channel. Bass (Bass control) Use this feature to adjust low-frequencies output to your speakers or headphones. Choices: 125Hz, 350Hz, 500Hz Control range: – 6.0 dB to +6.0 dB Initial setting: 0.0 dB Speaker Freq : 350Hz Gain : 0.0dB y If you want to reset all “Parametric EQ” parameter settings for the selected speaker, select “RESET” and press ENTER. 6 Select “EXIT” and press ENTER to exit the settings window. ■ Tone Control (Tone control) Use this feature to adjust the balance of bass and treble output to your speakers or headphones. Choices: Control, Bass, Treble, Audio Bypass Note Tone Control is not effective when: – PURE DIRECT (see page 52) is selected. – MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source. Control Bass ADVANCED OPERATION Repeat steps 3 and 4 until you are satisfied with the results. • Select “Speakers” to adjust the bass/treble balance of your speakers. • Select “Headphones” to adjust the bass/treble balance of your headphones. +6 Treble +0 Audio Bypass -6 Treble (Treble control) Use this feature to adjust high-frequencies output to your speakers or headphones. Choices: 2.5kHz, 3.5kHz, 8.0kHz Control range: – 6.0 dB to +6.0 dB Initial setting: 0.0 dB Speaker Freq : 3.5kHz Gain : 0.0dB Control Bass Treble Auto Bypass +6 +0 -6 99 En GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN Auto Bypass (Auto bypass) Use this feature to select whether the audio output bypasses the tone control circuitry when “TREBLE” and “BASS” are set to 0 dB (see page 52). Choices: Auto, Off Audio Delay (Audio delay) Use this feature to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the video image. This may be necessary when using certain LCD monitors, projectors or high definition monitors. Control range: 0 to 240 ms Bass Treble Auto Bypass Auto Muting Type Off Audio Delay 0ms Max Volume Initial Volume • Select “AUTO” if you want the signals to bypass the tone control circuitry to provide the purest signal possible. • Select “OFF” if you do not want the signals to bypass the tone control circuitry. ■ Audio Option (Audio options) Use this feature to adjust the overall audio settings of this unit. Muting Type (Muting type) Use this feature to adjust how much the mute function reduces the output volume. Choices: Full, –20dB Max Volume (Maximum volume) Use this feature to set the maximum volume level in the main zone. This feature is useful to avoid the unexpected laud sound by mistake. For example, the original volume range is 16.5 dB to –80.0 dB. However, when “Max Volume” is set to –5.0 dB, the volume range becomes –5.0 dB to –80.0 dB. Control range: 16.5 dB, 15.0 dB to –30.0 dB Control step: 5.0 dB Muting Type Audio Delay Max Volume +16.5dB Initial Volume Muting Type Full Audio Delay -20dB Max Volume • Select “Full” to completely mute all the audio output. • Select “–20dB” to reduce the current volume by 20 dB. Notes • When a test tone is output, the “Max Volume” setting is automatically deactivated because the volume level is automatically set to 0 dB regardless of the current “Max Volume” setting. • The “Max Volume” setting takes priority over the “Initial Volume” setting (see page 100). For example, “Initial Volume” is set to –20.0 dB and then “Max Volume” is set to –30.0 dB, the volume level is automatically set to -30.0 dB when you turn on the power of this unit next time. Initial Volume (Initial volume) Use this feature to set the volume level of the main zone when the power of this unit is turned on. Choices: Off, –80 dB to +16.5 dB Control step: 0.5 dB Audio Delay Max Volume Initial Volume 100 En Off GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN Manual Setup (Video) Note The “Max Volume” setting takes priority over the “Initial Volume” setting. Therefore, Initial Volume cannot be set beyond the existing “Max Volume” setting. ■ Channel Mute (Channel mute) Use this menu to adjust the video parameters. 1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and then press SET MENU on the remote control. Use this feature to mute specific speaker channels. AMP Mode (Mode) Use this feature to activate or deactivate the “Channel Mute” setting for each speaker. Choices: Off, On SET MENU SOURCE 2 Presence R MENU SRCH MODE TV Press k / n on the remote control to select “Manual Setup” and then press h. Subwoofer Mode Off Front L On PRESET/CH PRESET/CH Front R ENTER ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E • Select “Off” to deactivate the “Channel Mute” settings. • Select “On” to activate the “Channel Mute” settings. Each speaker settings Choices: Mute, Off 3 PRESET/CH PRESET/CH Mode Front L Mute Front R Off ENTER ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E Center • Select “Mute” to mute the selected speaker channel. • Select “Off” not to mute the selected speaker channel. • “Front L” sets whether to mute the audio output from the front left speaker. • “Front R” sets whether to mute the audio output from the front right speaker. • “Center” sets whether to mute the audio output from the center speaker. • “Surround L” sets whether to mute the audio output from the surround left speaker. • “Surround R” sets whether to mute the audio output from the surround right speaker. • “Surround Back L” sets whether to mute the audio output from the surround back left speaker. • “Surround Back R” sets whether to mute the audio output from the surround back right speaker. • “Presence L” sets whether to mute the audio output from the presence left speaker. • “Presence R” sets whether to mute the audio output from the presence right speaker. • “Subwoofer” sets whether to mute the audio output from the subwoofer. Sound 4 Video Conversion Basic Component I/P NET/USB HDMI Up-Scaling Select the desired parameters and then press h to access and adjust. PRESET/CH ENTER A/B/C/D/E 101 En ADVANCED OPERATION Subwoofer Press k / n / l / h on the remote control to select “Video” and then press h. GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN Note Use the “V-RESET” in “ADVANCED SETUP” to set the parameters in “Manual Setup (Video)” (except “Short Message” and “On Screen”) to the factory presets (see page 136). ■ Conversion (Video conversion) Use this feature to activate or deactivate the video conversion as well as the HDMI up-conversion of the analog video signals input at the composite video, S-video and component video jacks. Choices: Off, On ■ Component I/P (Component interlace/progressive conversion) Use this feature to activate or deactivate the analog interlace/progressive conversion of the analog video signals input at the composite video, S-video and component video jacks so that the analog video signals deinterlaced from 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) to 480p/576p are output at the COMPONENT MONITOR OUT jacks. Choices: Off, On Conversion Off Conversion On Component I/P Off HDMI Up-Scaling On HDMI Aspect Component I/P HDMI Up-Scaling • Select “Off” to deactivate the video conversion as well as the HDMI up-conversion of the analog video signals. • Select “On” to activate the video conversion as well as the HDMI up-conversion of the analog video signals. Notes • This unit does not convert 480 line video signals and 576 line video signals interchangeably. • The analog component video signals with 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) of resolution are converted to the s-video or composite video signals and output at the S VIDEO MONITOR OUT and VIDEO MONITOR OUT jacks. • The converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR OUT jacks. When recording a video source, you must make the same type of video connections between each component. • When composite video or S-video signals from a VCR are converted to component video signals, the picture quality may suffer depending on your VCR. • Even when “Conversion” is set to “On”, HDMI digital signals are not converted to analog video signals. • If “Conversion” is set to “Off”, the “Component I/P” and “HDMI Up-Scaling” features are deactivated. • Set “Conversion” to “On” to display the short message display. • Unconventional signals input at the composite video or S-video jacks cannot be converted or may be output abnormally. In such cases, set “Conversion” to “Off”. • When non-standard video signals (such as video signals from a game console) are input, this unit may not convert the signals even if you “Conversion” to “On”. • When the analog component video signals with 480p of resolution are input at the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks and the video monitor is connected to the VIDEO MONITOR OUT or S VIDEO MONITOR OUT jack of this unit, the GUI screen is not displayed on the video monitor. 102 En • Select “On” to activate the analog interlace/progressive up-conversion of the analog video signals. • Select “Off” to deactivate the analog interlace/ progressive up-conversion of the analog video signals. Notes • This menu item is not available and hence not visible in the GUI screen if “Conversion” is set to “Off”. • If your video monitor does not support analog video signals with 480p/576p of resolution, the GUI screen may not be displayed on your video monitor when “Component I/P” is set to “On”. Use “V-RESET” in “ADVANCED SETUP” to set the “Component I/P” parameter to the factory preset setting (see page 136). ■ HDMI Up-Scaling (HDMI up-scaling) Use this feature to activate or deactivate the HDMI upconversion of the analog video signals input at the composite video, S-video and component video jacks so that the up-scaled analog video signals are output at the HDMI OUT jack. This unit up-scales the analog video signals as follows: • 480i (NTSC)/576i (PAL) → 480p/576p, 1080i or 720p • 480p/576p → 1080i or 720p Choices: Through, 480p (or 576p), 1080i, 720p Conversion Component I/P Through HDMI Up-Scaling 480p HDMI Aspect 1080i Short Message 720p • Select “Through” not to up-scale any analog video signals. • Select “480p” (or “576p”), “1080i” or “720p” to upscale analog video signals to 480p or 576p, 1080i or 720p of resolution. GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN ■ Short Message (Short message display) Notes • This menu item is not available and hence not visible in the GUI menu if “Conversion” is set to “Off” (see page 102). • When you set “TV FORMAT” in “ADVANCED SETUP” to “NTSC” (see page 136), “480p” appears in the choices of “HDMI Up-Scaling”, and when you set “TV FORMAT” to “PAL”, “576p” appears in the choices of “HDMI Up-Scaling”. Use this feature to activate or deactivate the short message display function. Choices: Off, On HDMI Up-Scaling HDMI Aspect Off ■ HDMI Aspect (HDMI aspect ratio) Short Message On Use this feature to select the adjustment of aspect ratio for HDMI video signal sources. Choices: Through, 16:9 Normal, Smart Zoom On Screen Component I/P HDMI Up-Scaling HDMI Aspect Through Short Message 16:9 Normal On Screen Smart Zoom Position • Select “On” to activate the short message display function. The contents of the front panel display appear at the bottom of the screen each time you operate this unit. • Select “Off” to deactivate the short message display function. Note Notes • When “HDMI Up-Scaling” is set to “Through”, you cannot make any adjustments to “HDMI Aspect”. • When “HDMI Aspect” is set to “Smart Zoom”, the video images of the edge of the video monitor are rather stretched. • When the video signals are input at HDMI IN jacks or the signals are input with 720p or 1080i of resolution, the setting of “HDMI Aspect” does not affect the video signals output at the HDMI OUT jack. ■ On Screen (On-screen display time) Use this feature to set the amount of time to display the XM Satellite Radio information, iPod or NET/USB menu on the video monitor after you perform a certain operation. Choices: Always, 10sec, 30sec HDMI Aspect Always Short Message 10sec On Screen 30sec Position Wall Paper • Select “Always” to display the menu screen unceasingly during an operation. • Select “10sec” to turn off the menu screen 10 seconds after you perform a certain operation. • Select “30sec” to turn off the menu screen 30 seconds after you perform a certain operation. 103 En ADVANCED OPERATION • Select “Through” if you do not make any adjustments to the aspect ratio for HDMI video signal sources. • Select “16:9 Normal” to display video images with 4:3 of aspect ratio on your video monitor with 16:9 of aspect ratio. Black stripes appear on the right and left sides as a result. • Select “Smart Zoom” to fit video images with 4:3 of aspect ratio to your video monitor with 16:9 of aspect ratio. The short message display does not appear in the following cases: – when the component video signals with 720p, 1080i or 1080p resolutions are input – When HDMI video signals are input GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN ■ Position (GUI screen position) Use this feature to adjust the vertical and horizontal position of the GUI screen. Control range: –5 (downward/left) to +5 (upward/right) Manual Setup (Basic) Use this menu to manually adjust any speaker setting. 1 Short Message / :+5 / :-5 On Screen Set the operation mode selector to AMP and then press SET MENU on the remote control. AMP + Position SET MENU SOURCE MENU Wall Paper SRCH MODE TV • Press k to raise the position of the GUI display. • Press n to lower the position of the GUI display. • Press h to shift the position of the GUI display to the right. • Press l to shift the position of the GUI display to the left. 2 Press k / n on the remote control to select “Manual Setup” and then press h. ■ Wall Paper (Wall paper) On Screen Wall Paper Yes A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E 3 None ENTER ENTER Use this feature to display the wall paper or gray background in your video monitor when there is no video signal being input. Choices: None, Yes, Gray Position PRESET/CH PRESET/CH Press k / n / l / h on the remote control to select “Basic” and then press h. PRESET/CH PRESET/CH Gray ENTER ENTER A/B/C/D/E • Select “None” not to display any background in your video monitor. • Select “Yes” to display a background image (the photograph of a piano) in your monitor when there is no video signal being input. • Select “Gray” to display a gray background in your monitor when there is no video signal being input. A/B/C/D/E Sound Video Test Tone Basic Speaker Set NET/USB Speaker Distance Option Speaker Level Note When “Conversion” is set to “Off”, no background is displayed even if “Wall Paper” is set to “Yes”. 4 Select the desired parameters and then press h to access and adjust. PRESET/CH ENTER A/B/C/D/E 104 En GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN y • Most of the parameters described in the basic menu are set automatically when you run “Auto Setup”. You can use the basic menu to make further adjustments, but we recommend running “Auto Setup” first. • You can reset these parameters by performing the “Auto Setup” procedure (see page 35). Front (Front speakers) Choices: Large, Small ■ Test Tone (Test tone) Turns the test tone output on or off for “Speaker Set”, “Speaker Distance” and “Speaker Level” settings. Choices: Off, On Test Tone Off Speaker Set On Speaker Distance y If you use a handheld sound pressure level meter, hold at arm’s length and point upwards so that the meter is in the listening position. With the meter set to the 70 dB scale and to C SLOW, calibrate each speaker to 75 dB. Notes ■ Speaker Set (Speaker settings) Large Center Small Surround • Select “Large” (large) if you have large front speakers that reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. All the front left and right channel signals are directed to the front left and right speakers. • Select “Small” (small) if you have small front speakers that do not reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels are directed to the speakers selected in “Bass Out” (see page 107). Notes • When “Bass Out” is set to “Front” (see page 107), the LFE signals found in Dolby Digital or DTS sources, the lowfrequency signals of the front left and right channels, and the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “Small” are all directed to the front left and right speakers regardless of the “FRONT SP” setting. • When “Bass Out” is set to “Front” (see page 107), you can select only “Large” in “Front”. If the value of “Front” is set to other than “Large” in advance, this unit change the value to “Large” automatically. Center (Center speaker) Choices: Large, Small, None Use to manually adjust any speaker setting. Test Tone Front Large Center Small Speaker Set Front Surround None Speaker Distance Center Surround Back Speaker Level Surround y • If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers, you can change these settings according to your preference. • When the diameter of the woofer section of the speaker unit is larger than 16 cm (6.5 in), set the correspondent speaker setting parameter to “Large”. • Select “Large” (large) if you have a large center speaker that reproduces low-frequency signals effectively. All the center channel signals are directed to the center speaker. • Select “Small” (small) if you have a small center speaker that does not reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the center channel are directed to the speakers selected in “Bass Out”. • Select “None” (none) if you did not connect a center speaker. The center channel signals are directed to the front left and right speakers. 105 En ADVANCED OPERATION • Loud test tones will be output when “On” is selected. In this case, make sure no children are present in the listening room. • If you select “On” and enter the “Speaker Set”, “Speaker Level” or “Speaker Distance” menu, the test tone is output from the selected speakers. Front GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN Surround (Surround left/right speakers) Choices: Large, Small, None Surround Back (Surround back left/right speakers) Choices: Large x1, Small x1, Small x2, Large x2, None Front Center Large Center Surround Small Surround Large x1 Surround Back None Surround Back Small x1 Presence Small x2 Bass Out Large x2 Presence • Select “Large” (large) if you have large surround left and right speakers that reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. All the surround channel signals are directed to the surround left and right speakers. • Select “Small” (small) if you have small surround left and right speakers that do not reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the surround left and right channels are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT”. • Select “None” (none) if you did not connect surround speakers. This unit is set to the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (see page 51) and “Surround Back” is automatically set to “None”. • Select “Large x1” (large x 1) if you have a large surround back speaker that reproduces low-frequency signals effectively. All the surround back left and right channel signals are directed to the surround back left speaker. • Select “Small x1” (small x 1) if you have a small surround back speaker that does not reproduce lowfrequency signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the surround back left and right channels are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT” and the rest of the signals are directed to the surround back left speaker. • Select “Small x2” (small x 2) if you have two small surround back speakers that do not reproduce lowfrequency signals effectively. The low-frequency signals of the surround back left and right channels are directed to the speakers selected in “LFE/BASS OUT”. • Select “Large x2” (large x 2) if you have two large surround back speakers that reproduce low-frequency signals effectively. All the surround back left and right channel signals are directed to the surround back left and right speakers. • Select “None” (none) if you did not connect surround back speakers. The surround back channel signals are directed to the surround left and right speakers. Presence (Presence speakers) Use this feature if you want to use the presence speakers connected to this unit. Choices: Yes, None Surround Surround Back Presence None Bass Out Yes Bass Cross Over • Select “NONE” (none) if you did not connect presence speakers. • Select “YES” (yes) if you connected presence speakers and want to use them. 106 En GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN Bass Out (Bass out) Use this feature to select the speakers that output the LFE (low-frequency effect) and the low-frequency signals. Choices: Both, SWFR, Front Surround Back SWFR Phase (Subwoofer Phase) Use this feature to switch the phase of your subwoofer if bass sounds are lacking or unclear. Choices: Normal, Reverse Bass Out Presence Bass Cross Over Bass Out Both SWFR Phase Normal Bass Cross Over SWFR PR/SB Priority Reverse SWFR Phase Front Notes Bass Cross Over (Bass cross over) Use this feature to select the crossover frequency of all the speakers set to “Small” or to “None” in “Speaker Set” (see pages 105 and 106). All frequencies below the selected frequency will be sent to the subwoofer or to the speakers set to “Large” in “Speaker Set” (see pages 105 and 106). Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz, 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz, 120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz Presence 40Hz Bass Out 60Hz Bass Cross Over 80Hz SWFR Phase 90Hz PR/SB Priority 100Hz PR/SB Priority (Presence/surround back speaker priority) Use this feature to prioritize either the presence or the surround back speakers when playing sources that contain surround back channel signals using the CINEMA DSP sound field programs. Choices: Presence, Surround Back Bass Cross Over SWFR Phase Presence PR/SB Priority Surround Back ADVANCED OPERATION • Select “Both” (both) if you connected a subwoofer. The low-frequency signals of any source are output from the subwoofer. The LFE signals as well as the low-frequency signals of other speakers set to “Small” are directed to the subwoofer. The low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels are directed to the front left and right speakers and the subwoofer regardless of the “Front” setting (see page 107). • Select “SWFR” (subwoofer) if you connected a subwoofer. The LFE signals as well as the lowfrequency signals of other speakers set to “Small” are directed to the subwoofer. • Select “Front” (front) if you did not connect a subwoofer. The LFE signals, the low-frequency signals of the front left and right channels, and the lowfrequency signals of other speakers set to “Small” are all directed to the front left and right speakers regardless of the “Front” setting (see page 107). • Select “Normal” if you do not want to reverse the phase of your subwoofer. • Select “Reverse” to reverse the phase of your subwoofer. • Select “Presence” to use the presence speakers even when surround back channel signals are input. The signals for the surround back channel will be output from the surround speakers. • Select “Surround Back” to use the surround back speakers when surround back channel signals are detected in a CINEMA DSP program. The presence channel signals are output from the front speakers. 107 En GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN ■ Speaker Distance (Speaker distance) Use this feature to manually adjust the distance of each speaker and the delay applied to the respective channel. Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the main listening position. However, this is not possible in most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all sounds will arrive at the listening position at the same time. Test Tone Subwoofer Speaker Set Unit Speaker Distance Front L Speaker Level Front R Center Speaker distances Control range: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft) Initial setting: Front L/Front R/Subwoofer/Presence L/ Presence R/Subwoofer: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) CENTER: 2.60 m (8.5 ft) Surround L/Surround R/Surround Back L/ Surround Back R: 2.40 m (8.0 ft) Control step: 0.1 m (0.5 ft) • Select “Front L” to adjust the distance of the front left speaker. • Select “Front R” to adjust the distance of the front right speaker. • Select “Center” to adjust the distance of the center speaker. • Select “Surround L” to adjust the distance of the surround left speaker. • Select “Surround R” to adjust the distance of the surround right speaker. • Select “Surround Back L” to adjust the distance of the surround back left speaker. • Select “Surround Back R” to adjust the distance of the surround back right speaker. • Select “Presence L” to adjust the distance of the presence left speaker. • Select “Presence R” to adjust the distance of the presence right speaker. • Select “Subwoofer” to adjust the distance of the subwoofer. 108 En Notes • You cannot adjust the distance of speakers set to “None” in Speaker Set. • If you are only using one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND BACK (SINGLE) jack, and adjust the distance in “Surround Back L”. • “Center”, “Surround L”, “Surround R”, “Surround Back L”, “Surround Back R”, “Subwoofer”, “Presence L” and “Presence R” cannot be adjusted if “Center” (see page 105), “Surround” (see page 106), “Surround Back” (see page 106), “Bass Out” (see page 107) and “Presence” (see page 106) are set to “None” respectively. • Instead of “Surround Back L” and “Surround Back R”, “Surround Back” is displayed if “Surround Back” is set to either “Small x1” or “Large x1” (see page 106). Unit (Unit) Selects the unit for displaying the values of “Speaker Distance” parameter. Choices: Meter (m), Feet (ft) Initial setting:Feet (U.S.A. and Canada models) Meter (Other models) Presence R Subwoofer Unit Meter Front L Feet Front R • Select “Meter” to input speaker distances in meters. • Select “Feet” to input speaker distances in feet. GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN ■ Speaker Level (Speaker level) Use this feature to manually balance the speaker levels between the front left or surround left speakers and each speaker selected in “SPEAKER SET” (see page 105). Speaker Set Presence R Speaker Distance Subwoofer Speaker Level Front L Manual Setup (NET/USB) Use this menu to adjust the network and USB system parameters. Video Basic Front R NET/USB Network Option Play Style Center Notes • You cannot adjust the level of channels set to “None” in Speaker Set. • If you are only using one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND BACK (SINGLE) jack, and adjust the balance in “Surround Back L”. ■ Network (Network settings) Use this feature to view the network parameters (IP address, etc.) or to change them manually. Network DHCP Play Style IP Address Information Subnet Mask Note The above display is an example. DHCP (DHCP setting) When this parameter is set to “ON”, network parameters for “IP Address”, “Subnet Mask”, “Default Gateway”, “DNS Server (P)” and “DNS Server (S)” obtained from a DHCP enabled router are displayed. If DHCP server function is not available, set this parameter to “Off” to configure the network parameters manually. Choices: On, Off IP Address (IP address) Use this parameter to specify an IP address assigned to this unit. This value must not duplicate the one used for other devices in the target network. Subnet Mask (Subnet mask) Use this parameter to specify the subnet mask value assigned to this unit. y For most of the cases, the subnet mask value can be set as “255.255.255.0”. Default Gateway (Default gateway) Use this parameter to specify the IP address of the default gateway. 109 En ADVANCED OPERATION Control range: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB Initial setting: Front L/Front R/Subwoofer/Presence L/ Presence R/Subwoofer: 0.0 dB CENTER/Surround L/Surround R/Surround Back L/ Surround Back R: –1.0 dB Control step: 0.5 dB • Select “Front L” to adjust the balance of the front left speaker. • Select “Front R” to adjust the balance of the front right speaker. • Select “Center” to adjust the balance of the center speaker. • Select “Surround L” to adjust the balance of the surround left speaker. • Select “Surround R” to adjust the balance of the surround right speaker. • Select “Surround Back L” to adjust the balance of the surround back left speaker. • Select “Surround Back R” to adjust the balance of the surround back right speaker. • Select “Presence L” to adjust the balance of the presence left speaker. • Select “Presence R” to adjust the balance of the presence right speaker. • Select “Subwoofer” to adjust the balance of the subwoofer. Information GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN DNS Server (P) (Primary DNS server) DNS Server (S) (Secondary DNS server) Use this parameter to specify the IP address of the primary and secondary DNS (Domain Name System) servers. ■ Play Style (Playback styles) Use this feature to adjust the playback style according to your preference. You can shuffle songs in a random order or repeat one specific song or a sequence of songs. Note Network If you have only one DNS address, enter the DNS address in “DNS Server (P)”. If you have two or more DNS addresses, enter one of them in “DNS Server (P)” and another in “DNS Server (S)”. Setup (Setup) Select “Setup” to confirm the settings of the “Network” parameters. 1 Press k / n on the remote control repeatedly and then press h to select and enter the desired network parameter. Note When “DHCP” is set to “ON”, you cannot select and adjust any other network settings. To specify the other parameters, you need to first set “DHCP” to “OFF”. 2 To specify the parameter, press k / n repeatedly to change the number and press l / h to select the digit to change. 3 Press ENTER to confirm the parameter. 4 Repeat steps 1 through 3 to configure each network parameter. 5 Select “Setup” and then press ENTER to finish configuration. Note In case you have changed your network configuration, you may need to reconfigure the network settings again. y You can reset the network settings of this unit to the initial factory settings by using “N-RESET” in the advanced setup menu (see page 136). 110 En Play Style Repeat Information Shuffle Repeat (Repeat) Use this feature to set this unit to repeat one song or a sequence of songs. Choices: Off, Single, All • Select “Off” to deactivate this feature. • Select “Single” to set this unit to repeat one song. • Select “All” to set this unit to repeat a sequence of songs. Notes • When “Repeat” is set to a setting other than “Off”, “ ” or “ ” appears in the top right corner of the playback status screen while one song or a sequence of songs are being repeated. • If “Repeat” is set to “Single”, the setting will be reset to “Off” when the main zone, Zone 2 and Zone 3 are turned off. Shuffle (Shuffle) Use this feature to set this unit to play songs or albums in a random order. Choices: Off, On • Select “Off” to deactivate this feature. • Select “On” to set this unit to play songs or albums in a random order. Note When “Shuffle” is set to “On”, “ ” appears in the top right corner of the playback status screen while songs or albums are being shuffled. GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN ■ Information (Network information) Use this feature to display the network system information. Network Play Style Information MAC Address 00:00:00:00:00:00 Status 100 BASE-TX Full Duplex Manual Setup (Option) This menu adjusts the optional system settings. 1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and then press SET MENU on the remote control. AMP SET MENU SOURCE System ABCDE123 Note The above display is an example. TV 2 MAC Address (MAC (Media Access Control) address) This information displays the MAC address that is assigned to this unit. Status (Network status) This information displays the current link status of the network. Display status: 10BASE-T, 100BASE-TX, Full Duplex, Half Duplex, No Link MENU SRCH MODE Press k / n on the remote control to select “Manual Setup” and then press h. PRESET/CH PRESET/CH ENTER ENTER A/B/C/D/E 3 Note A/B/C/D/E Press k / n / l / h on the remote control to select “Option” and then press h. System (System ID) This information displays the system ID that is assigned to this unit. ENTER ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E Video Front Panel Disp. Basic iPod Option Zone OSD Zone2 Set Zone3 Set 4 Select the desired parameters and then press h to access and adjust. PRESET/CH ENTER A/B/C/D/E 111 En ADVANCED OPERATION PRESET/CH PRESET/CH “No Link” appears when network connection is not made. GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN ■ Front Panel Disp. (Front panel display setting) ■ Zone OSD (on-screen display) Dimmer (Dimmer) Use this feature to adjust the brightness of the front panel display. Control range: – 4 to 0 0 Dimmer Scroll Use this feature to display the operational status of Zone 2 as well as Zone 3 on the Zone 2 video monitor connected to the ZONE VIDEO jacks on the rear panel of this unit. The Zone 2 and Zone 3 information to be displayed is listed as follows: • The input source of Zone 2 and Zone 3 • The volume level of Zone 2 and Zone 3 • The audio mute status of Zone 2 and Zone 3 • The tonal quality status of Zone 2 and Zone 3 • The XM Satellite Radio information when XM is selected as the input source of Zone 2 and Zone 3 Choices: Off, Zone2, Zone2&Zone3 Scroll (Front panel display message scroll) Use this feature to set whether to display the information (such as song title or channel name) in the front panel display in a continuous manner or by the first 14 alphanumeric characters after scrolling all characters once when “XM”, “DOCK” or “NET/USB” is selected as the input source. Choices: Continue, Once Dimmer Scroll Continue Once Front Panel Disp. Off iPod Zone2 Zone OSD Zone2&Zone3 Zone2 Set Zone3 Set • Select “Off” not to display any operational status of Zone 2 and Zone 3 on the Zone 2 video monitor. • Select “Zone2” to display the operational status of Zone 2 only on the Zone 2 video monitor. • Select “Zone2&Zone3” to display the operational status of Zone 2 and Zone 3 on the Zone 2 video monitor. Notes • Select “Continue” to display the operation status in the front panel display in a continuous manner. • Select “Once” to display the operation status in the front panel display by the first 14 alphanumeric characters after scrolling all characters once. ■ iPod (iPod settings) Standby Charge (iPod Charge on the standby mode) Use this feature to select whether this unit charges the battery of the stationed iPod or not when this unit is in the standby mode (see page 75). Choices: Off, Auto Off Standby Charge Auto • Select “Off” to charge the battery of the stationed iPod only when this unit is turned on. • Select “Auto” to charge the battery of the stationed iPod when this unit is turned on and in the standby mode. 112 En • If “Zone OSD” is set to “Zone2&Zone3”, changes to the operational status of Zone 3 is displayed on the Zone 2 video monitor. For example, if the input source of Zone 3 is changed while you are watching TV in Zone 2, the name of the changed input source of Zone 3 is displayed on your TV in Zone 2. • If “Zone OSD” is set to “Zone2&Zone3”, the display contents of Zone 2 and Zone 3 depends on whether or not Zone 2 and Zone 3 are turned on with ZONE 2 ON/OFF and ZONE 3 ON/ OFF on the front panel (see page 131). – If both Zone 2 and Zone 3 are turned on, the video signals of the current input source of Zone 2 and the corresponding OSD are displayed on the Zone 2 video monitor. – If Zone 2 is turned off and Zone 3 is turned on, only the corresponding OSD is displayed in the gray background regardless of the REC OUT/ZONE 2 status on the front panel. – If Zone 2 is turned on and Zone 3 is turned off, the video signals of the current input source of Zone 2 and the corresponding OSD are displayed on the Zone 2 video monitor. – If both Zone 2 and Zone 3 are turned off, no video signals and no OSD are displayed on the Zone 2 video monitor. GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN ■ Zone2 Set/Zone3 Set (Zone 2/Zone 3 setting) Zone2 Amplifier/Zone3 Amplifier (Zone 2/Zone 3 amplifier) Use to select how the Zone 2 and/or Zone 3 speakers are amplified. Choices: EXT, INT:[SP1], INT:[SP2], INT:Both Zone2 Volume/Zone3 Volume (Zone 2/Zone 3 volume) Use this feature to select how the volume control will operate with regard to the ZONE 2 OUTPUT or ZONE 3 OUTPUT jacks. Choices: Fixed, Variable Zone2 Amplifier Fixed Zone2 Volume Variable Zone2 Max Vol. Zone2 Amplifier EXT Zone2 Volume INT:[SP1] Zone2 Max Vol. INT:[SP2] Zone2 Initial Vol. Zone2 Max Vol./Zone3 Max Vol. (Zone 2/Zone 3 Maximum volume) Use this feature to set the maximum volume level in the Zone 2 or Zone 3. Control range: 16.5 dB, 15.0 dB to – 30.0 dB Control step: 5.0 dB ADVANCED OPERATION • Select “EXT” if you want to connect your Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers through an external amplifier connected to the ZONE 2 OUTPUT or ZONE 3 OUTPUT jacks on the rear panel of this unit. • Select “INT:[SP1]” to use the internal surround back amplifier of this unit when you want to connect your Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers directly to the SP1 speaker terminals on the rear panel of this unit. • Select “INT:[SP2]” to use the internal surround amplifier of this unit when you want to connect your Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers directly to the SP2 speaker terminals on the rear panel of this unit. • Select “INT:Both” to use the internal surround and surround back amplifiers of this unit when you want to connect your Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers directly to both the SP1 and the SP2 speaker terminals on the rear panel of this unit. • Select “Fixed” to fix the ZONE 3 OUTPUT volume level to a standard line level. • Select “Variable” to adjust the ZONE 3 OUTPUT volume simultaneously using VOL +/– on the remote control. Zone2 Amplifier Zone2 Volume Zone2 Max Vol. +16.5dB Zone2 Initial Vol. Notes • When “BI-AMP” is set to “ON” in the “ADVANCED SETUP” menu, “INT:[SP1]”, “INT:[SP2]” and “INT:Both” cannot be selected. • When “INT:Both” is selected for “ZONE2 AMP”, only “EXT” can be selected for “ZONE3 AMP”. • When “INT:Both” is selected for “ZONE3 AMP”, only “EXT” can be selected for “ZONE2 AMP”. • When you set “ZONE2 AMP” or “ZONE3 AMP” to “INT:[SP1]” or “INT:[SP2]” and the corresponding zone is turned on, no sound is output from the surround back speakers. • When you set “ZONE2 AMP” or “ZONE3 AMP” to “INT:Both” and the corresponding zone is turned on, no sound is output from both the surround speakers and the surround back speakers in the main zone. • When both “ZONE2 AMP” and “ZONE3 AMP” are set to “INT:[SP1]” or “INT:[SP2]” and Zone 2 and Zone 3 are turned on, no sound is output from both the surround speakers and the surround back speakers in the main zone. • When you use internal amplifiers for Zone 2 or Zone 3, some surround field programs may not work in the same way as when you do not use the internal amplifiers for Zone 2 or Zone 3. Note The “Zone2 Max Vol.” or “Zone3 Max Vol.” setting takes priority over the “Zone2 Initial Vol.” or “Zone3 Initial Vol.” setting. For example, “Zone2 Initial Vol.” is set to –20.0 dB and then “Zone2 Max Vol.” is set to –30.0 dB, the volume level is automatically set to –30.0 dB when you turn on the power of this unit next time.‘ 113 En GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN Zone2 Initial Vol./Zone3 Initial Vol. (Zone 2/Zone 3 Initial volume) Use this feature to set the volume level of Zone 2 or Zone 3 when the power of this unit is turned on. Choices: Off, –80 dB to +16.5 dB Control step: 0.5 dB ■ Audio Select (Default Audio input jack select) Use this feature to designate the default Audio input jack select setting when you turn on the power of this unit. Choices: Auto, Last Zone3 Set Zone2 Volume Sur.Initialize Zone2 Max Vol. Zone2 Initial Vol. Off Audio Select Auto Decoder Mode Last Memory Guard Note The “Zone2 Max Vol.” or “Zone3 Max Vol.” setting takes priority over the “Zone2 Initial Vol.” or “Zone3 Initial Vol.” setting. ■ Sur.Initialize (Surround initialize) Use this feature to initialize the parameters for each sound field program within sound field program groups. When you initialize a sound field program group, all of the parameter values within that group revert to their initial settings. Adjusted sound field parameter settings are displayed in blue. Choices: CLASSICAL, LIVE/CLUB, ENTERTAINMENT, MOVIE, STEREO, SUR. DECODE, All Zone2 Set Zone3 Set Sur.Initialize Audio Select Decoder Mode CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAINMENT MOVIE STEREO SUR. DECODE All • Press k / n / l / h to select the sound field program you want to initialize and then press ENTER. • Select “All” to initialize settings for all sound field program parameters. • Select “Auto” if you want this unit to automatically detect the type of input signals and select the appropriate Audio input jack select setting. • Select “Last” if you want this unit to automatically select the last selected Audio input jack select setting used for the connected input source. ■ Decoder Mode (Default decoder mode) You can select the decoder used by this unit. Choices: Auto, Last Sur. Initialize Audio Select Decoder Mode Auto Memory Guard Last HDMI Set • Select “Auto” if you want this unit to automatically detect input signal types and select the appropriate decoder. • Select “Last” if you want this unit to automatically select the last decoder used for the connected source. ■ Memory Guard (Memory Guard) Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP program parameter values and other system settings. Choices: Off, On Audio Select Note Sound field program groups cannot be initialized when “Memory Guard” is set to “On” (see page 114). Decoder Mode Memory Guard Off HDMI Set On Select “On” to protect: • DSP program parameters • All menu items except “Memory Guard” and “System Memory” – “Load”. • The start and reload of the “Auto Setup” procedure. 114 En GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN y When you select the protected parameter, “ ” appears at the bottom left of the GUI screen. ■ HDMI Set (HDMI settings) Use this feature to adjust the HDMI support audio. Decoder Mode Memory Guard HDMI Set Support Audio System Memory Use this feature to save up to six of your favorite settings that can be easily recalled when needed. You can save settings such as the following: • Sound field program parameters • Speaker settings • Speaker channel settings • LFE level • Dynamic range settings • Parametric equalizer settings ■ To save settings Support Audio (Support audio) Use this feature to select whether to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this unit. Choices: RX-V2700, Other 1 AMP SET MENU SOURCE TV RX-V2700 Other Press k / n / l / h on the remote control repeatedly to select “System Memory” and then press h. 3 Select “Save” and then press ENTER. The display of the current settings appears in the GUI screen. Sci-Fi Current Memory 1 SpeakerCH LFE Level D-Range PEQ 3/4/0.1 0dB MAX YPAO Natural Memory 2 Note The HDMI video signals input at the HDMI IN 1, HDMI IN 2 or HDMI IN 3 jack of this unit are always output at the HDMI OUT jack of this unit. 4 Press k / n on the remote control repeatedly to select the desired memory number to save the current settings of this unit and then press h. “Save: ENTER” appears in the bottom right corner of the window. 5 Press ENTER to save the current settings of this unit. 115 En ADVANCED OPERATION • Select “RX-V2700” to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit. The HDMI audio signals input at the HDMI IN jacks of this unit are not output to the HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack on the rear panel of this unit. • Select “Other” to play back HDMI audio signals on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack. MENU SRCH MODE 2 Support Audio Set the operation mode selector to AMP and then press SET MENU on the remote control. GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN ■ To load settings 1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and then press SET MENU on the remote control. AMP SET MENU SOURCE MENU SRCH MODE Signal Info. (Input signal information) You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel, bit rate and flag data of the current input signal. You can display the format, sampling frequency, channel, bit rate and flag data of the current input signal. TV 1 2 Press k / n / l / h on the remote control repeatedly to select “System Memory” and then press h. Set the operation mode selector to AMP and then press SET MENU on the remote control. The top display appears. AMP SET MENU SOURCE 3 MENU SRCH MODE Select “Load” and then press ENTER. TV Sci-Fi Current SpeakerCH LFE Level D-Range PEQ Memory 1 Memory 2 3/4/0.1 0dB MAX Reset Memory 3 4 5 Press k / n on the remote control repeatedly to select the desired memory number to load and then press h. “Load: ENTER” appears in the bottom right corner of the window. 2 Stereo/Surround Sound Input Select Video Manual Setup Basic Auto Setup NET/USB System Memory Option Press k / n repeatedly to select “Signal Info.”. The audio information about the input source appears in the GUI screen. Press ENTER to load settings. PRESET/CH y “Memory 1” and “Memory 2” settings can be recalled simply by pressing MEMORY 1 or MEMORY 2 on the remote control. When you press MEMORY 1, “Load Memory 1? Yes:Press Again” appears in the GUI and “Press MEMORY1!” appears in the front panel display. Press MEMORY 1 once more to recall the settings. 1 MEMORY 2 9 0 When you press MEMORY 2, “Load Memory 2? Yes:Press Again” appears in the GUI and “Press MEMORY2!” appears in the front panel display. Press MEMORY 2 once more to recall the settings. ENTER A/B/C/D/E 3 Press l / h repeatedly to select “Audio Info.” or “Video Info.”. Auto Setup System Memory Signal Info. PRESET/CH Language Audio Info. Video Format --Sampling 48kHz Channel ??? Bitrate --Dialogue --Flag1 --Flag2 --- 1 MEMORY 2 9 0 ENTER A/B/C/D/E Auto Setup System Memory Signal Info. Language 116 En Video Info. Audio HDMI Signal ----HDMI Resolution ----Analog Resolution 480i 480i HDMI Error --- GRAPHIC USER INTERFACE (GUI) SCREEN ■ Audio information Format (Signal format) Signal format. When this unit cannot detect a digital signal, it automatically switches to analog input. Note “---” appears when this unit cannot detect any signals. Sampling (Sampling frequency) The number of samples per second taken from a continuous signal to make a discrete signal. Note “---” appears when this unit cannot detect the sampling frequency. Language Use this feature to select the language of the menu items and messages that appears in the GUI (graphical user interface) screen of this unit. Choices: English (English), (Japanese), Français (French), Deutsch (German), Español (Spanish), Русский (Russian) y You can also select the GUI language using the “GUI LANGUAGE” parameter in “ADVANCED SETUP” in the front panel display (see page 136). 1 Channel (Input channel) The number of source channels in the input signal (front/surround/LFE). For example, a multi-channel soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2 surround channels and LFE, is displayed as “3/2/0.1”. Set the operation mode selector to AMP and then press SET MENU on the remote control. The top display appears. AMP SET MENU SOURCE MENU SRCH MODE TV Note “---” appears when there is no source channel available. Bitrate (Bit rate) The number of bits passing a given point per second. Sound Input Select Video Manual Setup Basic Auto Setup NET/USB System Memory Option ADVANCED OPERATION Note Stereo/Surround “---” appears when this unit cannot detect the bit rate. Dialogue (Dialogue normalization level) The dialogue normalization level preset to the current input Dolby Digital and DTS signal. 2 Flag1/Flag2 (Signal flags) Flag data encoded in DTS, Dolby Digital, or PCM signals that cue this unit to automatically switch decoders. Press n on the remote control repeatedly to select Language and then press h. System Memory Signal Info. Language ■ Video information English Français HDMI Signal (HDMI signal type) Type of the source video signals and the video signals output at the HDMI OUT jack of this unit. 3 HDMI Resolution (HDMI resolution) Resolution of the source video signals and the video signals output at the HDMI IN jacks of this unit. Press k / n on the remote control repeatedly to select the language of your choice. 4 Press ENTER to confirm your selection. Analog Resolution (Analog resolution) Resolution of the source video signals and the analog video signals output at the COMPONENT MONITOR OUT jacks of this unit. HDMI Error (HDMI Error) Error message for HDMI sources or connected HDMI devices. See page 144 for details. 117 En REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audiovisual components made by YAMAHA and other manufacturers. To control your TV or other components, you must set up the appropriate remote control code for each input source (see page 120). Controlling this unit, a TV, or other components ■ Controlling this unit ■ Controlling a TV Set the operation mode selector to AMP to control this unit (see page 8). Set the operation mode selector to TV to control your TV. To control your TV, you must set the appropriate remote control code for DTV or PHONO (see page 120). When you set the remote control codes for both DTV and PHONO, priority is given to the one set for DTV. POWER POWER NET/USB AUDIO SEL PHONO TUNER V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT DTV VCR 1 *1 POWER STANDBY AV TV SLEEP CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD *1 POWER POWER POWER STANDBY AV TV NET/USB AUDIO SEL PHONO TUNER V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT SLEEP CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD DTV VCR 1 + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME SELECT SELECT AMP AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME SOURCE SOURCE – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE LEVEL PRESET/CH MENU SRCH MODE PURE DIRECT *1 A/B/C/D/E STRAIGHT DISPLAY EFFECT MEMORY – MUTE LEVEL PRESET/CH TV SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE PURE DIRECT AUDIO ENTER A/B/C/D/E STRAIGHT *1 DISPLAY RETURN EFFECT MEMORY LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN MOVIE CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 STEREO SUR. DECODE SELECT EXTD SUR. STEREO SUR. DECODE SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 5 6 7 8 2 9 0 FREQ/TEXT EON NET RADIO USB NIGHT ENHANCER + 10 ENT MODE *2 1 MEMORY PTY SEEK START ON 0 EON NET RADIO USB NIGHT ENHANCER + 10 ENT MODE PTY SEEK START *2 PC/MCX PC/MCX OFF 2 9 FREQ/TEXT MOVIE REC REC MACRO LEARN CLEAR OFF RENAME (U.S.A. model) Notes These buttons always control this unit regardless of the operation mode selector position. *2 These buttons control this unit only when the component operation mode selector is set to AMP. ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RENAME (U.S.A. model) Notes *1 These buttons always control your TV regardless of the operation mode selector position. Remote control *2 118 En – TV INPUT CLASSICAL 1 MEMORY *1 – TV MUTE AUDIO ENTER RETURN *1 TV SET MENU TITLE BAND *2 Digital TV/Cable TV TV POWER Turns on or off the power. TV VOL +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. TV MUTE Mutes the audio output. TV INPUT Changes the input source. These buttons control your TV only when the operation mode selector is set to TV. For details, see the “TV” column on page 119. REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Controlling other components TV MUTE Set the operation mode selector to SOURCE to control other components selected with the input selector buttons. You must set the appropriate remote control code for each input source in advance (see page 120). The following table shows the function of each control button used to control other components assigned to each input selector button. Be advised that some buttons may not correctly operate the selected component. 1 3 4 TV AV STANDBY POWER NET/USB AUDIO SEL TUNER V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT DTV VCR 1 SLEEP CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD 3 4 5 6 LEVEL SELECT 2 AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME – – – 7 LEVEL TV INPUT PRESET/CH MUTE SET MENU MENU SRCH MODE PURE DIRECT 8 9 AUDIO ENTER A/B/C/D/E STRAIGHT DISPLAY RETURN EFFECT MEMORY CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STEREO SUR. DECODE SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 1 MEMORY MOVIE 6 7 8 2 NIGHT ENHANCER 0 + 10 ENT FREQ/TEXT EON NET RADIO USB MODE 0 A PTY SEEK START REC PC/MCX SOURCE TV MUTE TV INPUT PRESET/CH TITLE BAND 9 The remote control has 14 modes (input areas) to control components so that the remote control can operate up to 14 different components. 2 POWER PHONO y 1 POWER OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RENAME TV MUTE SET MENU TITLE MENU BAND SRCH MODE PURE DIRECT (U.S.A. model) ENTER AUDIO DVD player/ VCR DVD recorder Cable TV/ Satellite tuner TV LD player CD player MD recorder/ CD recorder AV POWER Power *1 Power *1 VCR power Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 CH + TV Channel up channel up*3 Channel up Channel up TV TV TV TV TV TV TV channel up*3 channel up*3 channel up*3 channel up*3 channel up*3 channel up*3 channel up*3 CH – TV channel down*3 Channel down Channel down Channel down TV channel down*3 TITLE Title Title Title Title ENTER PRESET/CH k Power *1 *2 TV channel down*3 TV channel down*3 Tape deck Tuner Power *1 Power *1 TV channel down*3 TV channel down*3 iPod TV channel down*3 PC/MCX2000/ Internet Radio/USB TV channel down*3 Bookmark*7 Band Subsequent menu Menu enter Menu select Menu select Menu up Menu up Menu up Preset up (1 to 8) Up Up Down Down Menu down Menu down A-E/CAT. l Menu left Menu left Menu left Preset down (A to E) Previous menu*6 Previous menu A-E/CAT. h Menu right Menu right Menu right Preset up (A to E) Subsequent menu*6 Subsequent menu PRESET/CH n 5 RETURN, Return MEMORY Return Return Return 6 1-9, 0, +10 Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons 7 ll Search backward Search backward VCR search backward *2 hh Search forward Search forward VCR search forward *2 8 9 0 A Direction A/B Memory Numeric buttons Numeric buttons*9 Numeric buttons Numeric buttons VCR search Search backward *2 backward Search backward Search backward Search backward Search backward*4 Select NET RADIO VCR search forward *2 Search forward Search forward Search forward Search forward Search forward*4 Select USB Skip backward Skip backward Direction back Skip backward Skip backward*8 Skip forward Skip forward*8 b Skip backward Chapter/ Skip backward a Skip forward Chapter/ Direction Skip forward Skip forward Skip forward forward REC/ DISC SKIP Disc skip (player) Rec (recorder) Rec VCR rec *2 s Stop Stop VCR stop *2 VCR stop *2 Stop VCR pause *2 *2 VCR rec *2 e Pause Pause VCR pause p Play Play VCR play *2 VCR play *2 Play MENU Menu AUDIO Audio DISPLAY Display ENT Menu Menu Display Display Enter/recall Enter Pause Select PC/ MCX Disc skip Rec Rec Stop Stop Stop Stop Stop Pause Pause Pause Pause (Play/ Pause)*5 Play Play Play Play (Play/ Pause)*5 Play Previous menu Previous menu Display Display Audio Enter Display Display Display Note See page 120 for details about the items marked with asterisk (*). 119 En ADVANCED OPERATION Menu down Preset down (1 to 8) REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Notes *1 This button is operational only when the original remote control supplied with the component has a POWER button. These buttons operate your VCR only when you set the appropriate remote control code for VCR 1 (see page 120). *3 These buttons always control your TV regardless of the operation mode selector position. *4 Press and hold to search backward or forward. *5 Simple remote mode (see page 75). *6 Menu browse mode only (see page 75). *7 Press and hold to store your favorite Internet Radio stations with bookmarks (see page 80). *8 These buttons are not operational when the Internet Radio is selected as the sub input source of NET/USB. *9 Press 1-8 to assign or recall the preset items (see page 81). *2 ■ Selecting a component to be controlled You can select a component to be controlled independently of the input source selected with the input selector buttons. Press SELECT k / n repeatedly to select the desired component. The name of the component to be controlled appears in the display window on the remote control. Setting remote control codes You can control other components by setting the appropriate remote control codes. Codes can be set up for each input area. For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this manual. The following table shows the default component (Library: component category) and the remote control code for each input area. SELECT Remote control code default settings ■ Controlling optional components (Option mode) “OPTN” is an optional component control area that can be programmed with remote control functions independently from any input source. This area is useful for programming commands that are to be used only as a part of a macro function or for components that do not have a valid remote control code. To select the option mode, press SELECT n repeatedly until “OPTN” appears in the display window on the remote control. Input area Library (component category) Manufacturer Default code XM TUNER YAMAHA 2604 NET/USB TUNER YAMAHA 2607 PHONO TV – – TUNER TUNER YAMAHA 2602 CD CD YAMAHA 2300 MULTI CH INPUT DVD YAMAHA 2100 V-AUX/ DOCK TUNER YAMAHA 2606 CBL/SAT CABLE – – MD/TAPE MD YAMAHA 2500 CD-R CD-R YAMAHA 2400 DTV TV – – SELECT Note You cannot set a remote control code for the optional area. See page 122 to program buttons operated within this component control area. VCR 1 VCR – – DVR/VCR2 DVR YAMAHA 2807 DVD DVD YAMAHA 2100 Note You may not be able to operate your YAMAHA component even if a YAMAHA remote control code is preset as listed above. In this case, try setting another YAMAHA remote control code. 120 En REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 1 Set the operation mode selector to SOURCE and then press an input selector button to select the input area you want to set up. 4 NET/USB AMP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R Press the numeric buttons to enter the four-digit remote control code for the component you want to use. For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this manual. SOURCE V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT TV DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR 2 LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STEREO SUR. DECODE SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 9 0 DVD 5 2 CLASSICAL Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds using a ballpoint pen or similar object. The library name (ex. L;DVD) and the name of the selected input area (ex. DVD) appear alternately in the display window on the remote control. MOVIE Press ENTER to set the number. “OK” appears in the display window on the remote control if setting was successful. “NG” appears in the display window on the remote control if the setting was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3. y If you continuously want to set up another code for another component, press the input selector button, or SELECT k / n repeatedly to select the component, then repeat steps 2 through 5. LEARN Press LEARN again to exit from the setup mode. y • You can set a remote control code of a different type of component to an input area. Press l / h repeatedly to change the library (component category). Library choices: L;DVD, L;DVR, L;LD, L;CD, L;CDR, L;MD, L;TAP (tape), L;TUN (tuner), L;AMP, L;TV, L;CAB (cable), L;SAT (satellite), L;VCR • If you want to setup for another input area, press the input selector button, or press SELECT k / n repeatedly to select the input area. Notes • Be sure to press and hold LEARN for at least 3 seconds, otherwise the learning process will start. • If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 2. 3 Press ENTER. The four-digit code set for the selected component appears in the display window. Note 0000 appears in the display window if no code has been set. LEARN 7 Press p or AV POWER to confirm whether you can control your component using the remote control. POWER or AV y If operation is not possible and the manufacturer of your component has more than one code, try each of them until you find the correct one. Notes • “ERROR” appears in the display window on the remote control if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one button simultaneously. • The supplied remote control does not contain all possible codes for commercially available audio and video components (including YAMAHA components). If operation is not possible with any of the remote control codes, program the new remote control function using the learn feature (see “Programming codes from other remote controls”) or use the remote control supplied with the component. • Functions programmed using the learn feature take priority over remote control code functions. 121 En ADVANCED OPERATION 6 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Programming codes from other remote controls 2 Place this remote control about 5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in) apart from the other remote control on a flat surface so that their infrared transmitters are aimed at each other. TV AV POWER POWER MULTI CH IN SLEEP CD STANDBY NET/USB AUDIO SEL TUNER POWER PHONO DVD CD-R Other remote control PURE DIRECT MENU 5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in) AUDIO ENTER NET/USB AUDIO SEL (U.S.A. model) SRCH MODE BAND POWER MD/TAPE STANDBY DVR/VCR 2 AV VCR 1 POWER TV DTV SET MENU TITLE POWER SELECT LEVEL PRESET/CH V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT You can program remote control codes from other remote controls. Use the learn feature if you want to program functions not included in the basic operations covered by the remote control codes, or an appropriate remote control code is not available. You can program the function of other remote control to the buttons in the highlighted areas in the following illustration. The buttons can be programmed independently for each input area. SLEEP A/B/C/D/E STRAIGHT PHONO TUNER CD DISPLAY RETURN MULTI CH IN EFFECT MEMORY V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT DTV VCR 1 MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STEREO SUR. DECODE SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 2 NIGHT ENHANCER 0 + 10 ENT 1 MEMORY 9 SELECT FREQ/TEXT EON NET RADIO USB MODE MOVIE 3 Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “LEARN” and the name of the selected input area (ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display window on the remote control. PTY SEEK START REC AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOLUME – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE PC/MCX SOURCE OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RENAME TV (U.S.A. model) LEARN Note The remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn most of its functions. However, you may not be able to program some special signals or extremely long transmissions. Refer to the operating instructions for the other remote control. 1 Notes • Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for more than 3 seconds, the remote enters the remote control code setting mode. • If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 3. Set the operation mode selector to SOURCE and then press an input selector button to select an input area. NET/USB AMP 4 PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD Press the button for which you want to program the new function. “LEARN” appears in the display window on the remote control. SOURCE V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT TV DTV VCR 1 TV AV POWER TUNER SLEEP POWER MULTI CH IN STANDBY CD NET/USB AUDIO SEL POWER PHONO DVD CD-R AMP SELECT TV SOURCE MD/TAPE + DVR/VCR 2 – VOLUME VCR 1 + DTV – CH V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT + PURE DIRECT – MUTE SET MENU AUDIO A/B/C/D/E STRAIGHT TV VOL TV INPUT MENU PRESET/CH SRCH MODE LEVEL TITLE TV MUTE BAND ENTER 4 122 En EFFECT Make sure that the operation mode selector is set to SOURCE. When you set the operation mode selector to AMP and program a remote control codes from other remote controls, the programmed key cannot operate the amplifier function of this unit. DISPLAY Note RETURN (U.S.A. model) MEMORY 8 MOVIE EXTD SUR. 3 SELECT ENTERTAIN ENT ENHANCER 2 7 LIVE/CLUB SUR. DECODE + 10 NIGHT 1 STEREO 2 6 CLASSICAL 0 RENAME 1 MEMORY USB CLEAR 5 9 MACRO LEARN NET RADIO ON REC PC/MCX OFF (U.S.A. model) REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 5 Press and hold the button you want to program on the other remote control until “OK” appears in the display window on the remote control. “NG” appears in the display window on the remote control if learning was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 4. TV POWER PHONO DTV You can change the name of the input source that appears in the display window on the remote control if you want to use a different name than the factory preset. This feature is useful when you have set an input area to control a different component. AV 1 POWER TUNER MULTI CH IN SLEEP CD DVD CD-R POWER MD/TAPE STANDBY DVR/VCR 2 NET/USB AUDIO SEL VCR 1 V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT SELECT (U.S.A. model) Changing source names in the display window Other remote control Set the operation mode selector to AMP or SOURCE and then press an input selector button to select the input area you want to rename. The name of the selected input area appears in the display window. AMP NET/USB SOURCE TV y • If you want to program another function, repeat steps 4 and 5. • If you continuously want to program another function for another component, press SELECT k / n to select the component, and then repeat steps 4 and 5. 6 PHONO or TUNER V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD AMP DTV VCR 1 SOURCE TV (U.S.A. model) ADVANCED OPERATION Press LEARN again to exit the learning mode. LEARN Notes • “ERROR” appears in the display window on the remote control if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one button simultaneously. • This remote control can learn approximately 200 functions. However, depending on the signals learned, “FULL” may appear in the display before you program 200 functions. In this case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make room for further learning. • Learning may not be possible in the following cases: – when the batteries in the remote control for this unit or other components are weak. – when the distance between the two remote controls is too great or too small. – when the remote control infrared windows are not facing each other at the appropriate angle. – when the remote control is exposed to direct sunlight. – when the function to be programmed is continuous or uncommon. 2 Press RENAME using a ballpoint pen or similar object. RENAME Note If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the renaming mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, start over from 2. 123 En REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 3 Press k / n to select and enter a character. Pressing n changes the character as follows: A to Z, 1 to 9, 0, + (plus), – (hyphen), ; (semicolon), / (slash), and space. Pressing k changes the characters in reverse order. PRESET/CH ENTER A/B/C/D/E Macro programming features The macro programming feature makes it possible to perform a series of operations with the press of a single button. For example, when you want to play a CD, normally you would turn on the components, select the CD input, and press the play button to start playback. The macro programming feature lets you perform all of these operations simply by pressing the CD macro button. The buttons listed as macro buttons below are factory set with macro programs. You can also program your own macros (see page 126). ■ MACRO operations 4 Press h to move the cursor to the next position. Macro buttons (U.S.A. model) 1 MEMORY POWER POWER TV AV PRESET/CH STANDBY POWER 2 9 0 FREQ/TEXT EON NET RADIO USB NIGHT ENHANCER + 10 ENT MODE PTY SEEK START REC NET/USB AUDIO SEL SLEEP PC/MCX PHONO TUNER V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT DTV ENTER VCR 1 CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RENAME A/B/C/D/E MACRO MACRO ON/OFF y Press l to move the cursor to the previous position. 1 Set the MACRO ON/OFF selector to ON. OFF 5 Press ENTER to set the new name. “OK” appears in the display window on the remote control if renaming was successful. “NG” appears in the display window on the remote control if renaming was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3. ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR 2 Press the desired macro button. 3 Set the MACRO ON/OFF selector to OFF when you finish to using the macro programming operation. y If you continuously want to rename another input area, press the input selector button, or press SELECT k / n repeatedly to select the component, then repeat steps 3 through 5. 6 Press RENAME again to exit the renaming mode. OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RENAME Note Notes “ERROR” appears in the display window on the remote control if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one button simultaneously. • While the remote control is running a macro program, it does not accept any other operation until it has completed running the program (the transmission indicator stops flashing). • Continue to aim the remote control at the component the macro is operating until the macro operation is complete. y This feature is useful when you change the input or output assignment for digital jacks and component video input jacks. Refer to “Rename” on page 95. 124 En REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Default macro functions Pressing macro button To automatically transmit these signals in order First Second Third STANDBY STANDBY POWER POWER — — (*1) (*2) POWER TV XM POWER XM NET/USB POWER NET/USB PHONO PHONO TUNER TUNER CD CD MULTI CH IN MULTI CH IN V-AUX/DOCK V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT — — — (*3) CBL/SAT POWER MD/TAPE (*1) MD/TAPE CD-R DTV DTV VCR 1 VCR 1 DVR/VCR 2 — (CD area) (*4) — — — (MD/TAPE area) (*4) (CD-R area) (*4) — (VCR 1 area) (*4) DVR/VCR 2 (DVR/VCR 2 area) (*4) DVD DVD (DVD area) (*4) *1 You can turn on some components (including YAMAHA components) connected to this unit by connecting them to the AC OUTLETS on the rear panel of this unit. Power control may not be synchronized with this unit depending on the component. For details, refer to the operating instructions for the connected component. *2 When the remote control code for your TV is set up for either DTV or PHONO (see page 120), you can turn on the power of your TV without selecting an input source. The remote control code set up for DTV takes priority over the one for PHONO. *3 When TUNER is selected as the input source, this unit plays the last station received before the unit was set in the standby mode. *4 Playback can be started for any YAMAHA remote control-compatible MD recorder, CD player, CD recorder, DVD player, or DVD recorder. When using macros to operate other components, you will need to program the play button on the input area of that component (see page 122) or set a remote control code (see page 120). 125 En ADVANCED OPERATION CD-R — REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Programming macro operations You can program your own macro and use the macro programming feature to transmit several remote control commands in sequence at the press of a button. Be sure to set up remote control codes or perform learning operations before programming the macro. Note “AGAIN” appears in the display window if you press a button other than a macro button. 3 Notes • The default macro is not cleared when a new macro is programmed for a button. The default macro can be used again when the programmed macro is cleared. • It is not possible to add a new signal (macro step) to the default macro. Programming a macro changes all macro contents. • We do not recommend programming continuous operations such as volume control in a macro. 1 Press the buttons for the functions you want to include in the macro operation in sequence. You can set up to 10 steps (10 functions). After you have set 10 steps, “FULL” appears and the remote control automatically exits the macro mode. The following example is for programming the following procedure: Step 1 (“MCR 1”): Press DVD. Step 2 (“MCR 2”): Press AV POWER. Step 3 (“MCR 3”): Press SLEEP. Set the operation mode selector to AMP or SOURCE and then press MACRO using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “MCR ?” appears in the display window on the remote control. POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY 2 NET/USB AUDIO SEL AMP PHONO TUNER V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT MCR 2: AV POWER POWER MCR 3: SLEEP SLEEP CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD 3 SOURCE DTV VCR 1 TV 1 or MCR 1: DVD (U.S.A. model) MACRO AMP SOURCE Indicates the number of macro steps entered TV Note Flashes alternately so you can set the next step If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the macro programming mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 1. 2 Press the macro button you want to use to operate the macro. The macro button name (ex. “M;DVD”) and the selected component name (ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display window on the remote control. STANDBY POWER NET/USB PHONO TUNER V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT DTV VCR 1 To change the selected input area, press SELECT k / n. Pressing the input selector buttons will program a macro step, whereas SELECT k / n only changes the selected input area. 4 Press MACRO again using a ballpoint pen or similar object when the operation sequence you want to program is complete. Note CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD (U.S.A. model) 126 En Note “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press more than one button simultaneously. REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Clearing configurations You can clear all changes made in each function set, such as learned functions, macros, renamed input area names and setup remote control ID. 3 Press and hold CLEAR again for about 3 seconds. “WAIT” appears in the display window. If clearing was successful, “C;OK” appears in the display window on the remote control. ■ Clearing function sets CLEAR 1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP or SOURCE and then press CLEAR by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “CLEAR” appears in the display window. AMP y Once you have cleared a learned function for a button, the button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting, if you have set remote control codes). SOURCE TV CLEAR or Notes • “L;ALL” and “FCTRY” may take about 30 seconds to complete. • “C;NG” appears in the display window if clearing was unsuccessful. In this case start over from step 2. • “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than one button simultaneously. AMP SOURCE TV ADVANCED OPERATION Note If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the clearing mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 1. 2 Press k / n to select the clear mode. L;CD (etc.) (L; Name of an input area) Clears all learned functions in the respective input area. The name of a component is shown after a semicolon (;). Press an input selector button to select the input area. L;AMP Clears all learned functions for controlling the amplifier functions of this unit. L;ALL Clears all learned functions. M;ALL Clears all programmed macros. RNAME Clears all renamed source names. FCTRY Clears all remote functions and returns the remote to the factory settings. PRESET/CH ENTER A/B/C/D/E 127 En REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Clearing a learned function You can clear the function learned for a certain button in each control area. 1 3 Set the operation mode selector to AMP or SOURCE and then press an input selector button to select the input area containing the function you want to clear. The selected component name appears in the display window. Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen or similar object and then press the button you want to clear for about 3 seconds. “C;OK” appears in the display window if clearing was successful. Once “C;OK” appears in the display window on the remote control, release the ballpoint pen or similar object used to press CLEAR to exit the clearing mode. The remote control returns to the learning mode. AMP NET/USB SOURCE MODE TV PHONO or TUNER V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD LEARN DTV AMP VCR 1 PTY SEEK START CLEAR RENAME (U.S.A. model) SOURCE 2 Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “LEARN” and the selected component name (ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display window. LEARN Notes • Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for more than 3 seconds, the remote control enters the remote control code setting mode. • If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 2. 128 En y (U.S.A. model) TV • If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat step 4. • If you continuously want to clear another function for another component, press SELECT k / n to select the input area, then repeat step 4. • Once you clear a learned function, the button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have set remote control codes). 4 Press LEARN again to exit. Notes • “C;NG” appears in the display window on the remote control if clearing was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 2. • “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press more than one button simultaneously. REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Clearing a macro function You can clear the function programmed for a certain macro button. 1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP or SOURCE and then press MACRO using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “MCR ?” appears in the display window on the remote control. AMP SOURCE TV MACRO or AMP SOURCE TV Note If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the macro programming mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 1. ADVANCED OPERATION 2 Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen or similar object, then press the macro button you want to clear for about 3 seconds. “C;OK” appears in the display window on the remote control if clearing was successful. V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT DTV OFF ON VCR 1 MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD MACRO LEARN CLEAR RENAME (U.S.A. model) y • If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat step 2. • Once you clear a programmed function, the button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have set remote control codes). 3 Press MACRO again to exit the macro programming mode. Notes • “C;NG” appears in the display window on the remote control if clearing was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 2. • “ERROR” appears in the display window on the remote control if you press more than one button simultaneously. 129 En USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION This unit allows you to configure a multi-room audio/video system. The multi-zone configuration feature enables you to set this unit to reproduce separate input sources in the main room, second room (Zone 2) and third room (Zone 3). You can control this unit from the second or third room using the supplied remote control. Only analog signals are sent to the second and third rooms. Any source you want to listen to in the second or third room must be connected using the analog (AUDIO L/R) input jacks on this unit. Connecting the Zone 2 and Zone 3 components You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-room functions of this unit: • An infrared signal receiver in the second and/or third room. • An infrared emitter in the main room. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control in the second and/or third room to the main room (to a CD player or DVD player, for example). • An amplifier and speakers for the second and/or third room. • A video monitor for the second room y • You do not need an extra amplifier and speakers for the second and/or third room if you want to use the internal amplifiers of this unit. • Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-room configuration, we recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center for the Zone 2 and Zone 3 connections that best meet your requirements. REMOTE REMOTE IN Infrared signal receiver OUT REMOTE IN OUT OUT YAMAHA component YAMAHA component This unit REMOTE IN ■ Using external amplifiers To use an external amplifier in Zone 2 or Zone 3, connect the external amplifier to ZONE OUT terminals and select “EXT” in “Zone2 Amplifier” or “Zone3 Amplifier” (see page 113). ZONE 3 AUDIO OUT ZONE 2 VIDEO OUT ZONE 2 AUDIO OUT SP OUT Amplifier Amplifier MONITOR OUT DVD player (or other component) VIDEO IN AUDIO IN This unit MAIN SYSTEM Remote control Remote control Infrared signal receiver Infrared signal receiver ZONE 3 ZONE 2 Infrared emitter Main room (Main zone) REMOTE OUT Second room (Zone 2) Third room (Zone 3) REMOTE IN REMOTE IN Notes • Adjust the Zone 2/Zone 3 volume by using the amplifier in the second/third room when “Zone2 Volume” or “Zone3 Volume” are set to “Fixed” (see page 113). • To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT use the Zone 2/Zone 3 feature with CDs encoded in DTS. 130 En USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION ■ Using the internal amplifiers of this unit IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTICE The SP1 or SP2 speaker terminals of this Receiver should not be connected to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or more than one loudspeaker per channel. Connection to a Passive Loudspeaker Selector Box or multiple speakers per channel could create an abnormally low impedance load resulting in amplifier damage. See this owner’s manual for correct usage. Compliance with minimum speaker impedance information for all channels must be maintained at all times. This information is found on the back panel of your Receiver. If you want to use one internal amplifier (SP1 or SP2) of this unit Connect the Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers directly to the SP1 or SP2 speaker terminals and select either “INT:[SP1]” or “INT:[SP2]” for “Zone2 Amplifier” or “Zone3 Amplifier” (see page 113). If you want to use two internal amplifiers (both SP1 and SP2) of this unit Connect the Zone 2 or Zone 3 speakers directly to the SP1 and SP2 speaker terminals and select “Both” for “Zone2 Amplifier” or “Zone3 Amplifier” (see page 113). R + SP1 – PRESENCE – + L R SP2 L + R + SURROUND BACK/ – BI-AMP – + L SINGLE – Second room (Zone 2) Third room (Zone 3) Controlling Zone 2 or Zone 3 You can select the zone you want to control by using the control buttons on the front panel or on the remote control. 2 Press ZONE CONTROLS on the front panel repeatedly to select the zone you want to control. ZONE CONTROLS ■ Selecting Zone 2 or Zone 3 Front panel operations 1 Press ZONE 2 ON/OFF or ZONE 3 ON/OFF on the front panel to individually turn on or off Zone 2 or Zone 3. Each time you press ZONE CONTROLS, the front panel display changes as shown below, and the indicator for the currently selected zone flashes for approximately 5 seconds. However, no indicator flashes when the main zone is selected. ZONE2 ZONE3 ZONE ON/OFF ZONE 2 ZONE 3 y Once MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel is pressed inward to the ON position, you can also press POWER and STANDBY on the remote control to turn on the main zone, Zone 2 and Zone 3. No indicator flashes when the main zone is selected. ZONE2 Controls the Zone 2 amplifier or tuner functions. ZONE3 Controls the Zone 3 amplifier or tuner functions. 131 En ADVANCED OPERATION This unit USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION y • You must complete this step within 5 seconds while the selected zone flashes in the front panel display. Otherwise, the currently selected zone mode is automatically canceled. In this case, press ZONE CONTROLS again. • The initial setting is ZONE2 when both Zone 2 and Zone 3 are turned on. 3 Refer to “Selecting the input source of Zone 2 or Zone 3”, “Adjusting the volume level of Zone 2 or Zone 3”, “Adjusting the balance of the speaker level in Zone 2 or Zone 3” or “Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2 or Zone 3” on page 133 to perform further operations. Remote control operations 1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and then press SELECT k repeatedly to select the zone you want to control. “ZONE 2” or “ZONE 3” is displayed in the display window on the remote control. ■ Turning on or off Zone 2 and/or Zone 3 using the remote control POWER and STANDBY on the remote control work differently depending on the selected zone that appears in the display window on the remote control. • When the main zone, Zone 2 or Zone 3 mode is selected (see page 132), you can turn on the main zone, Zone 2 or Zone 3 or set them to the standby mode individually. • When the all mode is selected, pressing POWER turns on the main zone, Zone 2 and Zone 3 simultaneously and pressing STANDBY sets them to the standby mode simultaneously. Control mode Display window Name of the selected input area Turns on the main zone only or sets it to the standby mode. Zone 2 mode “ZONE 2” or “2;name of the selected input area” Turns on Zone 2 or sets it to the standby mode. Zone 3 mode “ZONE 3” or “3;name of the selected input area” Turns on Zone 3 or sets it to the standby mode. “ALL” POWER: turns on the main zone, Zone 2 and Zone 3. STANDBY: sets the main zone, Zone 2 and Zone 3 to the standby mode. Main zone mode AMP SOURCE SELECT TV POWER and STANDBY All mode Notes or 2 3 Refer to “Selecting the input source of Zone 2 or Zone 3”, “Adjusting the volume level of Zone 2 or Zone 3”, “Adjusting the balance of the speaker level in Zone 2 or Zone 3” or “Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2 or Zone 3” on page 133 to perform further operations. Press SELECT k / n to exit from the Zone 2/Zone 3 mode. 132 En • When the remote control is in the main zone mode, “MAIN” appears for a few seconds when POWER or STANDBY is pressed. • “ALL” appears in the display window on the remote control only when SELECT n is pressed. ■ Selecting the input source of Zone 2 or Zone 3 Rotate the INPUT selector on the front panel (or set the operation mode selector to AMP and then press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control) to select the input source of the selected zone. If the remote control is used to select the input source, “2: name of the selected input area” or “3: name of the selected input area” is displayed in the display window on the remote control when Zone 2 or Zone 3 is selected respectively. USING MULTI-ZONE CONFIGURATION Note INPUT When you use the external amplifiers in Zone 2 or Zone 3, VOLUME +/– can be used only when “Zone2 Volume” or “Zone3 Volume” is set to “Variable” in “Zone2 Set” or “Zone3 Set” (see page 113). ■ Adjusting the balance of the speaker level in Zone 2 or Zone 3 or NET/USB AMP PHONO SOURCE TUNER V-AUX/DOCK CBL/SAT TV DTV VCR 1 CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DVR/VCR 2 DVD Press TONE CONTROL repeatedly to select “BALANCE” and then rotate PROGRAM on the front panel to adjust the balance of the front left and right speaker level of the selected zone. (U.S.A. model) • Select TUNER as the input source to use the TUNER features in the selected zone. For details about the TUNER operations, see “FM/AM TUNING” on page 56. • Select XM as the input source to use the XM Satellite Radio features in the selected zone. For details about the XM Satellite Radio operations, see “XM SATELLITE RADIO TUNING” on page 63. Note The selected input source is shared across all zones. • You must complete this step within 5 seconds while the selected zone flashes in the front panel display. Otherwise, the currently selected zone mode is automatically canceled. In this case, press ZONE CONTROLS on the front panel again. • When a video monitor is connected to one of the ZONE VIDEO jacks, you can display the control information of Zone 2 or Zone 3 and XM Satellite Radio information on the video monitor screen. Set “Zone OSD” to “Zone2&Zone3” or “Zone2” (see page 112). PROGRAM ■ Adjusting the tonal quality of Zone 2 or Zone 3 Set the operation mode selector to AMP and then press CH +/– on the remote control to adjust the high-frequency response (TREBLE) or TV VOL +/– to adjust the low-frequency response (BASS) respectively. + TV VOL – AMP SOURCE BASS TV ■ Adjusting the volume level of Zone 2 or Zone 3 + CH – Rotate VOLUME on the front panel (or press VOLUME +/– on the remote control) to adjust the volume level of the selected zone. VOLUME + or VOLUME TREBLE y You can also adjust the tonal quality of Zone 2 or Zone 3 by using TONE CONTROL on the front panel. For details, see “Adjusting the tonal quality” on page 52. Note – Check that “ZONE 2” or “ZONE 3” is displayed in the display window of the remote control before you adjust the tonal quality of the corresponding zone (see page 132). y Press MUTE on the remote control to mute the sound output to the selected zone. 133 En ADVANCED OPERATION y TONE CONTROL ADVANCED SETUP ADVANCED SETUP This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. The advanced setup menu offers additional operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. Notes • The settings you make are reflected next time you press MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit (see page 34). • Only MASTER ON/OFF, STRAIGHT and the PROGRAM selector are effective while you are using the advanced setup menu. • All the other operations cannot be made while you are using the advanced setup menu. • The advanced setup menu is only available in the front panel display. Using ADVANCED SETUP 3 (U.S.A. model) PURE DIRECT VOLUME TONE CONTROL AUDIO SELECT REC OUT/ ZONE2 A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel to select the parameter you want to adjust. The name of the selected parameter appears in the front panel display. See page 135 for a complete list of available parameters. NIGHT EDIT INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT CINEMA PHONES S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL VIDEO AUX USB ON OFF MASTER 1-2,5 1 3 PROGRAM 2,4 Currently selected parameter Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit. Currently selected parameter setting SPEAKER IMP. 8 MIN MASTER 2 4 Press and hold STRAIGHT on the front panel and then press MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit. This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu appears in the front panel display. Press STRAIGHT on the front panel repeatedly to change the selected parameter setting. STRAIGHT EFFECT STRAIGHT EFFECT While holding down 5 MASTER Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position to save the new setting and turn off this unit. MASTER y The settings you made are reflected next time you turn on this unit. 134 En ADVANCED SETUP ■ Speaker impedance SPEAKER IMP. Use this feature to set the speaker impedance of this unit so that it matches that of your speakers. Choices: 8ΩMIN, 6ΩMIN • Select “8ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 8 Ω . • Select “6ΩMIN” to set the speaker impedance to 6 Ω . SPEAKER IMP. Speaker Front 8ΩMIN Impedance level The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. The impedance of each speaker must be 8 Ω or higher. Surround back Front 6ΩMIN WAKE ON RS232C Use this feature to set this unit to transmit data via the RS232C interface when this unit is in the standby mode. Choices: YES, NO Initial setting: [U.S.A. and Canada models]: YES [Other models]: NO • Select “YES” to set this unit to transmit data via the RS-232C interface. • Select “NO” to set this unit not to transmit data via the RS-232C interface. ■ Remote control AMP ID Center Surround ■ Wake on RS-232C access The impedance of each speaker must be 4 Ω or higher. RC AMP ID Use this feature to set the AMP ID of this unit for remote control recognition (see page 121). Choices: ID1, ID2 • Select “ID1” when the remote control AMP ID library code is set to “2001”. • Select “ID2” when the remote control AMP ID library code is set to “2002”. Center Surround The impedance of each speaker must be 6 Ω or higher. Surround back USER PRESET Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings (see page 149). Choices: CANCEL, RESET • Select “CANCEL” not to reset any parameters of this unit. • Select “RESET” to reset the parameters of this unit. Notes • This setting completely resets all the parameters of this unit. However, the advanced setup menu parameters will not be initialized. • The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit. ■ Remote sensor REMOTE SENSOR Use this feature to activate or deactivate the signalreceiving capability of the remote control sensor on the front panel of this unit. Choices: ON, OFF • Select “ON” if you want to activate the signalreceiving capability of the remote control sensor. • Select “OFF” if you want to deactivate the signalreceiving capability of the remote control sensor. Note We recommend setting the parameter to “ON” in most cases. You need to set the corresponding remote control AMP library code for the remote control (see page 121). ■ Remote control TUNER ID RC TUNER ID Use this feature to set the TUNER ID of this unit for remote control recognition (see page 138). Choices: ID1, ID2 • Select “ID1” when the remote control TUNER ID library code is set to “2602”. • Select “ID2” when the remote control TUNER ID library code is set to “2603”. Note You need to set the corresponding remote control TUNER library code for the remote control (see page 138). ■ Remote control XM ID RC XM ID (U.S.A. and Canada models only) Use this feature to set the XM ID of this unit for remote control recognition (see page 138). Choices: ID1, ID2 • Select “ID1” when the remote control XM ID library code is set to “2604”. • Select “ID2” when the remote control XM ID library code is set to “2605”. Note You need to set the corresponding remote control XM library code for the remote control (see page 138). 135 En ADVANCED OPERATION ■ User presets Note ADVANCED SETUP ■ Tuner frequency step TUNER FRQ STEP (Asia and General models only) Use this feature to set the tuner frequency step according to the frequency spacing in your area. Choices: AM10/FM100, AM9/FM50 • Select “AM10/FM100” for North, Central and South America. • Select “AM9/FM50” for all other areas. ■ Bi-AMP BI-AMP Use to activate or deactivate the bi-AMP function. Choices: ON, OFF • Select “ON” if you want to activate the bi-AMP function. • Select “OFF” if you want to deactivate the bi-AMP function. Note When “BI-AMP” is set to “ON”, the SURROUND BACK terminals cannot be used to connect surround back speakers in that the SURROUND BACK terminals are already used for the bi-AMP connection (see page 19). ■ Video reset VIDEO RESET Use to initialize the parameter settings for “Video” in “Manual Setup” (see page 101). Choices: YES, CANCEL Note The parameter setting for “Short Message” or “On Screen” is not initialized (see page 101). ■ Network reset NETWORK RESET Use this feature to reset the network settings of this unit (see page 109) to the initial factory settings. Choices: CANCEL, RESET • Select “CANCEL” not to reset any network settings of this unit. • Select “RESET” to reset the network settings of this unit. Notes • The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit. • When the network settings are reset, “DHCP” in “NET/USB” is automatically set to “On” (see page 109) and the registered client ID of this unit on your YAMAHA MCX-2000 is cleared (see page 80). 136 En ■ TV format TV FORMAT Use this feature to set the color encoding format of your television. Choices: NTSC, PAL Initial setting: [U.S.A., Canada, General and Korea models]: NTSC [Other models]: PAL Note This parameter setting only affects the video monitor connected to the MONITOR OUT jacks and does not affect the Zone 2 video monitor connected to the ZONE 2 VIDEO jacks. ■ Monitor check for HDMI up-scaling MONITOR CHECK Use this feature to activate or deactivate the monitor check function of this unit. When this parameter is set to “YES”, this unit receives the information of the available video signal resolutions from the video monitor connected via HDMI (see page 102). Choices: YES, SKIP ■ GUI language GUI LANGUAGE Use this feature to select the language of your choice that appears in the GUI (graphical user interface) menu of this unit. Choices: ENGLISH (English), JAPANESE (Japanese), FRENCH (French), GERMAN (German), SPANISH (Spanish), RUSSIAN (Russian) ADVANCED SETUP Setting remote control ID 4 When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you may be able to operate the other components simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case, set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit separately. Press the numeric buttons to enter the four-digit remote control code for the input area you want to use. CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STEREO SUR. DECODE SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 9 0 MOVIE ■ Setting remote control AMP ID 1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP or SOURCE. AMP SOURCE AMP or TV 2 SOURCE Remote control AMP codes Select one of the following codes to set the remote control AMP code for the input area you want to use. TV AMP library code Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds using a ballpoint pen or similar object and then press l / h repeatedly until “L;AMP” appears in the display window on the remote control. (remote control setting) Function Remote control AMP ID 2001 (initial setting) To operate this unit using the default code. ID1 (initial setting) 2002 To operate this unit using an alternative code. ID2 PRESET/CH Note ENTER A/B/C/D/E 5 Press ENTER to set the number. “OK” appears in the display window if setting was successful. “NG” appears in the display window if the setting was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 1. PRESET/CH Notes • Be sure to press and hold LEARN for at least 3 seconds, otherwise the learning process will start. • If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 1. 3 Press ENTER. The four-digit code set for the selected input area appears in the display window on the remote control. ENTER A/B/C/D/E 6 Press LEARN again to exit from the setup mode. LEARN PRESET/CH ENTER A/B/C/D/E 137 En ADVANCED OPERATION You need to set the corresponding remote control AMP ID (see page 135). LEARN ADVANCED SETUP ■ Setting remote control tuner ID or XM ID 4 1 Set the operation mode selector to AMP or SOURCE and then press TUNER or XM on the remote control to select the tuner or XM to change the remote control ID. Press the numeric buttons to enter the four-digit remote control code for the input area you want to use. AMP CLASSICAL LIVE/CLUB ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 STEREO SUR. DECODE SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 9 0 MOVIE TUNER SOURCE TV or or Remote control tuner codes Select one of the following codes to set the remote control tuner code for the input area you want to use. AMP XM SOURCE TV 2 Tuner library code Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds using a ballpoint pen or similar object and then press l / h repeatedly until “L;TUN” and “TUNER”, or “L;TUN” and “XM” alternately appear in the display window on the remote control. PRESET/CH (remote control setting) To operate this unit using the default code. ID1 (initial setting) 2603 To operate this unit using an alternative code. ID2 Remote control XM codes Select one of the following codes to set the remote control XM code for the input area you want to use. XM library code ENTER A/B/C/D/E (remote control setting) Press ENTER. The four-digit code set for the selected input area appears in the display window on the remote control. Function Remote control XM ID 2604 (initial setting) To operate this unit using the default code. ID1 (initial setting) 2605 To operate this unit using an alternative code. ID2 • Be sure to press and hold LEARN for at least 3 seconds, otherwise the learning process will start. • If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, start over from step 1. 3 Remote control tuner ID 2602 (initial setting) LEARN Notes Function Note You need to set the corresponding remote control tuner ID or XM ID (see page 135). 5 PRESET/CH Press ENTER to set the number. “OK” appears in the display window if setting was successful. “NG” appears in the display window if the setting was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 1. PRESET/CH ENTER A/B/C/D/E ENTER A/B/C/D/E 6 Press LEARN again to exit from the setup mode. LEARN 138 En TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING Refer to the table below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, turn off this unit, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center. ■ General Problem This unit fails to turn on or enters the standby mode soon after the power is turned on. No sound. Cause Remedy See page The power cable is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. Connect the power cable firmly. — The speaker impedance setting is incorrect. Set the speaker impedance to match your speakers. 33 The protection circuitry has been activated. Make sure that all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection does not touch anything other than its respective connection. 16 This unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning or strong static electricity). Set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds and then use it normally. — Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 23-29 The optimizer microphone is connected. Disconnect the optimizer microphone. 38 Audio input jack select is set to “HDMI”, “COAX/OPT” or “ANALOG”. Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO”. 42 Audio input jack select is set to “ANALOG” while playing a source encoded in Dolby Digital or DTS. Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO” or “COAX/OPT”. 42 No appropriate input source has been selected. Select an appropriate input source with the INPUT selector on the front panel (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. 16 The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. — The sound is muted. Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– on the remote control to resume audio output and then adjust the volume. 43 Signals this unit cannot reproduce are being input from a source component, such as a CD-ROM. Play a source whose signals can be reproduced by this unit. — The HDMI components connected to this unit do not support the HDCP copy protection standards. Connect HDMI components that support the HDCP copy protection standards. 21 “Support Audio” is set to “Other” and “HDMI” audio signals are not being played back on this unit. Set “Support Audio” to “RX-V2700” in “Option”. 115 40, 43 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 139 En TROUBLESHOOTING Problem No picture. Cause The output and input for the picture are connected to different types of video jacks. Remedy See page Set “Conversion” to “On” or connect your source components in the same way as you connect your video monitor to this unit. 102 “Short Message” is set to “OFF”. Set “Short Message” to “On”. 103 “Wall Paper” is set to “None”. Set “Wall Paper” to “Yes” or “Gray”. 104 “Conversion” is set to “Off”. Set “Conversion” to “On”. 102 Non-standard video signals are input. Short message displays do not appear in the video monitor. The signals input at the HDMI IN1, HDMI IN2 or HDMI IN3 jack are being output at the HDMI OUT jack. Video signals in the progressive format or HDTV video signals are being input. The sound suddenly goes off. The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. Check that the speaker impedance setting is correct. 33, 135 Check that the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn this unit back on. — The sleep timer has turned off this unit. Turn on this unit, and play the source again. — The sound is muted. Press MUTE or VOLUME +/– on the remote control to resume audio output. 43 Sound is heard from the speaker on one side only. Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 16 Incorrect settings in “Speaker Level”. Adjust the “Speaker Level” settings. 109 Only the center speaker outputs substantial sound. When playing a monaural source with a CINEMA DSP program, the source signal is directed to the center channel, and the front and surround speakers output effect sounds. No sound is heard from the center speaker. “Center” in “Speaker Set” is set to “None”. Set “Center” to “Small” or “Large”. 105 One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for “7ch Stereo”) has been selected. Try another sound field program. 47 No sound is heard from the presence speakers. The sound field programs are turned off. Press STRAIGHT to turn them on. 51 You are using a source or program combination that does not output sound from all channels. Try another sound field program. 40 No sound is heard from the surround speakers. “Surround” in “Speaker Set” is set to “None”. Set “Surround” to “Small” or “Large”. 106 This unit is in the “STRAIGHT” mode and a monaural source is being played back. Press STRAIGHT on the front panel so that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the front panel display. 51 No sound is heard from the subwoofer. “Bass Out” in “Speaker Set” is set to “Front” when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played. Set “Bass Out” to “SWFR” or “Both”. 107 “Bass Out” in “Speaker Set” is set to “SWFR” or “Front” when a 2-channel source is being played. Set “Bass Out” to “Both”. 107 The source does not contain lowfrequency signals. 140 En TROUBLESHOOTING Problem No sound is heard from the surround back speakers. Cause Remedy See page “Surround” in “Speaker Set” is set to “None” and “Surround Back” is automatically set to “None”. Set “Surround” and “Surround Back” to a setting other than “None”. 106 “Surround Back” in “Speaker Set” is set to “None”. Set “Surround Back” to a setting other than “None”. 106 The connected component is not set to output Dolby Digital or DTS digital signals. Make an appropriate setting following the operating instructions for your component. — Audio input jack select is set to “ANALOG”. Set Audio input jack select to “AUTO”. 42 Incorrect cable connections. Connect the audio cables firmly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. — No connection from the turntable to the GND terminal. Connect the grounding cable of your turntable to the GND terminal of this unit. 26 The volume level is low while a record is being played. The record is being played on a turntable with an MC cartridge. Connect your turntable to this unit through an MChead amplifier. 26 The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. The component connected to the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned off. Turn on the power of the component. — The sound effect cannot be recorded. It is not possible to record the sound effect with a recording component. A source cannot be recorded by a digital recording component connected to the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. The source component is not connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks of this unit. Dolby Digital or DTS sources cannot be played. (Dolby Digital or DTS indicator in the front panel display does not light up.) A humming sound is heard. Connect the source component to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks. 24, 26 Some components cannot record Dolby Digital or DTS sources. The source component is not connected to the analog AUDIO IN jacks of this unit. Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO IN jacks. 26 The sound field parameters and some other settings of this unit cannot be changed. “Memory Guard” in “Option” is set to “On”. Set “Memory Guard” to “Off”. 114 141 En ADDITIONAL INFORMATION A source cannot be recorded by an analog component connected to the AUDIO OUT (REC) jacks. TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause Remedy See page This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the power cable from the AC wall outlet and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds. — “CHECK SP WIRES” appears in the front panel display. Speaker cables are short-circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. 16 There is noise interference from digital or radio frequency equipment. This unit is too close to the digital or highfrequency equipment. Move this unit further away from such equipment. — The picture is disturbed. The video source uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent dubbing. This unit suddenly enters the standby mode. The internal temperature becomes too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated. Wait about 1 hour for this unit to cool down and then turn it back on. — ■ Tuner Problem FM stereo reception is noisy. FM AM Cause The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. Remedy See page Check the antenna connections. 31 Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. — Use the manual tuning method. 58 There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multi-path interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multi-path interference. — The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. — Use the manual tuning method. 58 Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned into. This unit has been disconnected for a long period. Preset the stations again. The desired station cannot be tuned into with the automatic tuning method. The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and orient it for the best reception. — Use the manual tuning method. 58 There are continuous crackling and hissing noises. Noises can result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to eliminate all noise. — There are buzzing and whining noises. A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV set. — 142 En 59, 60 TROUBLESHOOTING ■ XM Satellite Radio (U.S.A. and Canada models only) If an operation takes longer than usual or an error occurs, one of the following messages may appear in the front panel display. In this case, read the cause and follow the corresponding remedies. Status message Cause Remedy See page CHECK ANTENNA The XM Passport and XM Passport Home Dock are not connected to the XM jack of this unit or do not work properly. Check XM Passport and XM Passport Home Dock connections and orient for the best reception level. 63 UPDATING The XM user encryption code is being updated. Wait until the encryption code is updated. — NO SIGNAL The signal is too weak. Adjust the orientation of the XM Passport System for the best reception level. 63 LOADING It takes longer than four seconds for audio or text data to be decoded. Wait until the decoding process has finished. — OFF AIR The XM Satellite Radio channel you selected is not currently broadcasting any signals. Check the channel number again or select another XM Satellite Radio channel. — <XM> - - - The Channel Station ID (SID) is no longer available. --- / --- No artist name or song title is available. <CAT> - - - No channels are available for the selected category. Select another channel category by pressing CATEGORY on the front panel (or A-E/CAT. j / i on the remote control) repeatedly. 69 Cause Remedy See page The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees offaxis from the front panel. 11 ■ Remote control Problem The remote control does not work or function properly. Wrong distance or angle. Reposition this unit. The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. The batteries do not last long and get quickly exhausted. Using alkaline batteries is strongly recommended. The operation mode selector is set incorrectly. Set the operation mode selector correctly. When operating this unit, set it to the AMP position. When operating the component selected by the input selector button, set it to the SOURCE position. When operating the TV set in the DTV or PHONO area, set it to the TV position. — Set the remote control code correctly using “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this manual. 120 Try setting another code of the same manufacturer using “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this manual. 120 The remote control code was not correctly set. The library code of the remote control and the remote control ID of this unit do not match. — Match the remote control ID of this unit with the corresponding remote control library code. 11 — 121, 135 143 En ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause Remedy See page The remote control does not work or function properly. Even if the remote control code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. Program the necessary functions independently into the programmable buttons using the Learn feature. The remote control does not learn new functions. The batteries of this remote control and/or the other remote control are too weak. Replace the batteries. The distance between the two remote controls is too much or too little. Place the remote controls at the proper distance. The signal coding or modulation of the other remote control is not compatible with this remote control. Learning is not possible. Memory capacity is full. Delete other unnecessary functions to make room for the new functions. 127 Remedy See page 122 11 122 — ■ HDMI Error message Cause Device Over The number of the connected HDMI components is over the limit. Reduce the number of the connected HDMI components. — HDCP Error HDCP authentication failed. Check that the connected HDMI components support the HDCP copy protection standards. — ■ Network and USB Problem The PC server/MCX-2000/ Internet Radio does not function properly. Cause Remedy See page The IP address is not set properly. Set the DHCP server function of the router to ON. Alternately, perform manual configuration according to the current operating environment. 109 The network cable is not connected. Connect it properly. 30 The PC does not have Windows Media Connect 2.0 installed in it. Install Windows Media Connect 2.0 in the PC. — The music is recorded in a format that cannot be played on this unit. This unit cannot play music formats other than WMA, MP3 and WAV (PCM format). Also note that it cannot play certain music files even if these are recorded in the WMA, MP3 or WAV format. Play music recorded in a format that this unit is compatible with. — The music is copyright-protected. This unit cannot play copyright-protected music. — Windows Media Connect 2.0 cannot be connected. The Windows XP PC is logging on to a domain. Log on to the local machine instead of the domain. — The MusicCAST server cannot be connected. You are attempting to connect to MCX-1000. The MusicCAST server that can be connected by this unit is MCX-2000. Use MCX-2000 or the PC server. — Auto Configuration is not executed. Execute “Auto Configure”. 79 The music in the PC server cannot be played back. 144 En TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Cause Remedy See page “Disconnected” is displayed even when a USB device is present. This unit recognized the USB device as an illegal device. Turn this unit off then on again. 81 The Internet Radio cannot be played. The firewall of the network device is activated. The Internet Radio can be played only when it passes through the port designated by each radio station. The port number is variable depending on radio station. Check the firewall setting of the network device. — Connection to the Internet is disconnected. Check the configuration of the network device, and then contact the network connection provider. — The music files and directories in the USB device cannot be viewed. The music files and directories are placed in locations other than the FAT area. Place music files and directories in the FAT area. — You are attempting to browse directory hierarchies of over 8 levels or a directory with more than 500 files. Modify the data structure on your USB device. — The USB device cannot be recognized. The connected USB device is other than a USB mass storage class USB memory device or USB portable audio player. This unit can recognize only a USB mass storage class USB memory device or USB portable audio player. Also note that it cannot recognize certain USB devices even when they are devices as described above. 81 Some devices may become easier to recognize when they are inserted before turning this unit on. 81 The connected USB device is incorrect. Connect the USB device that stores the preset item. 81 The directory that stores the selected item is changed. Preset the desired item to the numeric button (1-8) again. 81 This unit does not recall the selected item by using numeric buttons (1-8). The USB device is not connected correctly. Connect the correct USB device properly. 81 The PC or MCX-2000 that stores the selected item is turned off. Turn on the PC or MCX-2000. 79 The selected Internet Radio station is temporary unavailable or out of service. Try again when the selected Internet Radio is providing the service. 80 Preset other Internet Radio stations. 81 Status message Please wait Please wait (Starting Server) Cause Remedy See page This unit is in the middle of recognizing the connection with your network. This is not a system malfunction. Wait for a while. — This unit is in the middle of recognizing the connection with your USB memory device or USB portable audio player. This is not a system malfunction. Wait for a while. — This unit is in the middle of waking up MCX-2000 that has been set to the standby mode. Wait for approximately 20 seconds. — 145 En ADDITIONAL INFORMATION This unit does not recall the correct item by using numeric buttons (1-8). TROUBLESHOOTING Status message Connect error Disconnected Access error Unable to play Cause There is a problem with the signal path from your network to this unit. Remedy Check the connection between this unit and the LAN port on your router or hub. 30 Make sure your router is properly connected and turned on. Also, make sure your modem is properly connected and turned on when you are attempting to listen to Internet Radio. 30 Your USB memory device or USB portable audio player has been disconnected from the USB port of this unit. Check the connection between this unit and your USB memory device or USB portable audio player. — The PC server or MCX-2000 previously connected to this unit no longer exists. Connect this unit to the available PC server or MCX-2000. 79 There is a problem with the signal path from your USB memory device or USB portable audio player to this unit. Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB memory device or USB portable audio player to the USB port of this unit. 34 Try resetting your USB memory device or USB portable audio player. — This unit cannot access your USB memory device or USB portable audio player. Try another USB memory device or USB portable audio player. — There is a problem with the signal path from your USB memory device or USB portable audio player to this unit. Turn off this unit and reconnect your USB memory device or USB portable audio player to the USB port of this unit. 34 Try resetting your USB memory device or USB portable audio player. — Make sure Windows Media Connect 2.0 is installed on your PC. — Check that the songs currently stored on your PC are playable (MP3, WMA, and WAV). — Store some other playable music files (MP3, WMA, and WAV) on your PC. — Try preparing a network exclusively for use with this unit to separate it from general network traffic. — 81 This unit cannot play back the songs currently stored on your PC. The network may be overloaded with heavy traffic, and playback is interrupted. List updated The list of the contents stored on your PC server or MCX-2000 has been updated. Bookmark ON The desired Internet Radio station has been added to the “Bookmarks” list. Bookmark OFF The stored Internet Radio station has been removed from the “Bookmarks” list. Empty Memory! No items are assigned to the selected numeric button. Assign the desired item to the numeric button. Not found! This unit cannot find the assigned item for the selected numeric button. Connect the USB device that stores the preset item. 146 En See page Turn on the PC or MCX-2000. 79 Try again when the selected Internet Radio is providing the service. 80 Preset the desired item to the numeric button (1-8) again. 81 TROUBLESHOOTING ■ iPod Note In case of a transmission error without a status message appearing in the front panel and on the video monitor, check the connection to your iPod (see page 29). Status message Loading... Cause Remedy See page This unit is in the middle of recognizing the connection with your iPod. This unit is in the middle of acquiring song lists from your iPod. Connect error There is a problem with the signal path from your iPod to this unit. Turn off this unit and reconnect the YAMAHA iPod universal dock to the DOCK terminal of this unit. 29 Try resetting your iPod. — Only iPod (Click and Wheel), iPod nano, and iPod mini are supported. — Unknown iPod The iPod being used is not supported by this unit. iPod connected Your iPod is properly stationed in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as the YDS-10, sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit, and the connection between your iPod and this unit is complete. Disconnected Your iPod was removed from a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit. Station your iPod back in a YAMAHA iPod universal dock (such as YDS-10 sold separately) connected to the DOCK terminal of this unit. 29 Unable to play This unit cannot play back the songs currently stored on your iPod. Check that the songs currently stored on your iPod are playable. — Store some other playable music files on your iPod. — ■ Auto Setup Error message Connect MIC! Cause Optimizer microphone is not connected. Remedy See page Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. 35 Unplug Phones! Headphones are connected. Unplug the headphones. — No Setup Menu! All setup menu are set to “Skip”. Set the desired menu item to “Check”. 36 Memory Guard! “Memory Guard” is set to “On”. Set “Memory Guard” to “Off”. 114 147 En ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Before Auto Setup TROUBLESHOOTING During Auto Setup Error message Cause Remedy See page E01:No Front SP Front L/R channel signals are not detected. Check the front L/R speaker connections. 16 E02:No Sur. SP A surround channel signal is not detected. Check the surround speaker connections. 16 E03:No PRNS SP A presence channel signal is not detected. Check the presence speaker connections. 16 E04:SBR->SBL Only right surround back channel signal is detected. Connect the surround back speaker to the LEFT SURROUND BACK SPEAKERS terminal if you only have one surround back speaker. 16 Background noise is too loud. Try running “Auto Setup” in a quiet environment. — Turn off noisy electric equipment like air conditioners or move them away from the optimizer microphone. — E05:Noisy E06:Check Sur. Surround back speakers are connected, though surround L/R speakers are not. Connect surround speakers when you use surround back speakers. 16 E07:No MIC The optimizer microphone was unplugged during the “Auto Setup” procedure. Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. 35 The optimizer microphone does not detect test tones. Check the microphone setting. 35 Check the speaker connections and placement. 16 E08:No Signal E09:User Cancel The “Auto Setup” procedure was cancelled due to user activity. Run “Auto Setup” again. E10:Internal Err. An internal error occurred. Run “Auto Setup” again. 35 35 After Auto Setup Warning message W1:Out of Phase Cause Remedy Speaker polarity is not correct. This message may appear depending on the speakers even when the speakers are connected correctly. Check the speaker connections for proper polarity (+ or –). W2:Over Distance The distance between the speaker and the listening position is over 24 m (80 ft). Bring the speaker closer to the listening position. — W3:Level Error The difference of volume level among speakers is excessive. Readjust the speaker installation so that all speakers are set in locations with similar conditions. — W4:SP Mismatch The result of the wiring check of “Auto Setup” is different from “Speaker Set” in “Manual Setup”. 16 Use speakers of similar quality. — Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer. 35 Use “Speaker Set” in “Manual Setup” to adjust the speaker settings manually. 105 If the “ERROR” or “WARNING” screens appears, check the cause of the problem, then run “Auto Setup” again. If warning “W1” appears, corrections are made, but they may not be optimal. If warning “W2” or “W3” appears, no corrections are made. If error “E10” occurs repeatedly, please contact a qualified YAMAHA service center. 148 En 16 Check the speaker connections. Notes • • • • See page RESETTING THE SYSTEM RESETTING THE SYSTEM Use this feature to reset all the parameters of this unit to the initial factory settings. Notes • This procedure completely resets all the parameters of this unit. However, the advanced setup menu parameters will not be initialized. • The initial factory settings are activated next time you turn on this unit. y To cancel the initialization procedure at any time without making any changes, press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position. (U.S.A. model) 3 Rotate the PROGRAM selector on the front panel to select “PRESET”. PURE DIRECT VOLUME TONE CONTROL AUDIO SELECT REC OUT/ ZONE2 A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/TUNING MEMORY FM/AM MAN'L/AUTO FM TUNING MODE ENHANCER NIGHT EDIT INPUT ZONE ON/OFF STRAIGHT MAIN ZONE ZONE CONTROLS MULTI ZONE EFFECT YPAO ON/OFF PROGRAM OPTIMIZER MIC SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL PROGRAM PHONES VIDEO AUX USB ON OFF MASTER 1-2,5 1 3 2,4 USERPRESET Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position to turn off this unit. CANCEL 4 Press STRAIGHT on the front panel repeatedly to select “RESET”. MASTER STRAIGHT 2 Press and hold STRAIGHT on the front panel and then press MASTER ON/OFF inward to the ON position to turn on this unit. This unit turns on, and the advanced setup menu appears in the front panel display. EFFECT ADDITIONAL INFORMATION STRAIGHT EFFECT USERPRESET While holding down RESET MASTER y Select “CANCEL” to cancel the initialization procedure without making any changes. 5 Press MASTER ON/OFF on the front panel to release it outward to the OFF position to confirm your selection and turn off this unit. MASTER 149 En GLOSSARY GLOSSARY ■ Bi-amplification connection ■ Dolby Digital A bi-amplification connection uses two amplifiers for a speaker. One amplifier is connected to the woofer section of a loudspeaker while the other is connected to the combined mid and tweeter section. With this arrangement each amplifier operates over a restricted frequency range. This restricted range presents each amplifier with a much simpler job and each amplifier is less likely to influence the sound in some way. The internal crossover of the speaker consists of a LPF (low pass filter) and a HPF (high pass filter). As its name implies, the LPF passes frequencies below a cutoff and rejects frequencies above the cutoff frequency. Likewise, the HPF passes frequencies above its cutoff. Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. With 3 front channels (front L/R and center), and 2 surround stereo channels, Dolby Digital provides 5 full-range audio channels. With an additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (Low Frequency Effect), the system has a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range from maximum to minimum volume reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with unprecedented excitement and realism. With this unit, any sound environment from monaural up to a 5.1-channel configuration can be freely selected for your enjoyment. ■ Component video signal With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to output component signals. ■ Composite video signal With the composite video signal system, the video signal is composed of three basic elements of a video picture: color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component transmits these three elements combined. ■ Dialogue normalization Dialogue Normalization is a feature of Dolby Digital or DTS, which is used to keep the programs at the same average listening level so the user does not have to change the volume control between Dolby Digital or DTS programs. ■ Dolby Digital EX Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done using a matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the 2 in the original recording. For the best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic moving sound especially with scenes with “flyover” and “fly-around” effects. ■ Dolby Pro Logic II Dolby Pro Logic II is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround sources. This new technology enables a discrete 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources and “Game mode” for game sources. ■ Dolby Pro Logic IIx Dolby Pro Logic IIx is a new technology enabling discrete multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multi-channel sources. There are three modes available: “Music mode” for music sources, “Movie mode” for movie sources (for 2-channel sources only) and “Game mode” for game sources. 150 En GLOSSARY ■ Dolby Surround ■ HDMI Dolby Surround uses a 4-channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first industry-supported, uncompressed, all-digital audio/video interface. Providing an interface between any source (such as a set-top box or AV receiver) and an audio/video monitor (such as a digital television), HDMI supports standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as multi-channel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and supports 8channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to accommodate future enhancements and requirements. When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/video interface that meets the security requirements of content providers and system operators. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/”. ■ DSD Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as Super Audio CDs. Using DSD, signals are stored as single bit values at a high-frequency sampling rate of 2.8224 MHz, while noise shaping and oversampling are used to reduce distortion, a common occurrence with very high quantization of audio signals. Due to the high sampling rate, better audio quality can be achieved than that offered by the PCM format used for normal audio CDs. ■ DTS 96/24 ■ LFE 0.1 channel This channel reproduces low-frequency signals. The frequency range of this channel is from 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low-frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems. DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multi-channel sound on DVD video, and is fully backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate compared to the typical 48 kHz sampling rate. “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with fullquality full-motion video for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on DVD video. ■ MP3 ■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems) Digital Surround Neo:6 decodes the conventional 2-channel sources for 6channel playback by the specific decoder. It enables playback with the full-range channels with higher separation just like digital discrete signal playback. There are two modes available: “Music mode” for music sources and “Cinema mode” for movie sources. ■ Neo:6 ■ Neural Surround Neural Surround™ represents the latest advancement in surround technology and has been adopted by XM Satellite Radio for digital radio broadcast of surround recordings and live events in surround sound. Neural Surround™ employs psychoacoustic frequency domain processing which allows delivery of a more detailed sound stage with superior channel separation and localization of audio elements. System playback is scalable from 5.1 to 7.1 multi-channel surround playback. 151 En ADDITIONAL INFORMATION DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 6.1-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 6.1-channel sound (technically, front left and right, center, surround left and right, and LFE 0.1 (subwoofer) channels for a total of 5.1 channels). This unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1channel reproduction by adding the surround back channel to the existing 5.1-channel format. One of the audio compression methods used by MPEG. It employs the irreversible compression method, which achieves a high compression rate by thinning out the data of hardly audible part to the human ears. It is said to be capable of compressing the data quantity by about 1/11 (128 kbps) while maintaining a similar audio quality to music CD. GLOSSARY ■ PCM (Linear PCM) ■ S-video signal Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “Pulse Code Modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful images. ■ Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits Windows standard audio file format, which defines the method of recording the digital data obtained by converting audio signals. It does not specify the compression (coding) method so a desired compression method can be used with it. By default, it is compatible with the PCM method (no compression) and some compression methods including the ADPCM method. When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced. 152 En ■ WAV ■ WMA An audio compression method developed by Microsoft Corporation. It employs the irreversible compression method, which achieves a high compression rate by thinning out the data of hardly audible part to the human ears. It is said to be capable of compressing the data quantity by about 1/22 (64 kbps) while maintaining a similar audio quality to music CD. SOUND FIELD PROGRAM INFORMATION SOUND FIELD PROGRAM INFORMATION ■ Elements of a sound field ■ SILENT CINEMA What really creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In addition to making the sound live, these reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated as well as the size and shape of the room in which we are sitting. There are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the sound field in addition to the direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument. YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed on headphones. Early reflections Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms to 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one surface only (for example, from a wall or the ceiling). Early reflections actually add clarity to the direct sound. Reverberations These are caused by reflections from more than one surface (for example, from the walls, and the ceiling) so numerous that they merge together to form a continuous sonic afterglow. They are non-directional and lessen the clarity of the direct sound. Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberations taken together help us to determine the subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create sound fields. YAMAHA has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects even without any surround speakers by using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. ■ Sound output from each speaker Sound output from each speaker depends on the type of audio signals being input. Refer to the diagrams in the table below to understand the speaker layout for each sound field program. For details about the sound output from each speaker in sound field programs, refer to “SOUND OUTPUT IN EACH SOUND FIELD PROGRAM” in “APPENDIX” at the end of this manual. Note Be advised that there may be no or not enough sound output from speakers depending on the type of input source being played back. Furthermore, there may be some channels that can only be used partially when they are adjusted to specific aspects of movies, such as special sound effects, etc. y Except for “2ch Stereo”, “7ch Stereo”, and “STRAIGHT”, you can select a decoder to output sound from the surround back speakers (see page 47). ■ CINEMA DSP Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it is inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the audiovisual experience of a movie theater in the listening room of your own home. 153 En ADDITIONAL INFORMATION If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would be able to create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a dance floor, or a room with virtually any size at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field processor. ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION This unit employs YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) technology, together with the Parametric EQ settings (see page 98), to optimize the frequency characteristics of its parametric equalizer to match your listening environment. YPAO uses a combination of the following three parameters (Frequency, Gain and Q factor) to provide highly precise adjustment of the frequency characteristics. ■ Q factor The width of the specified frequency band is referred to as the Q factor. This parameter is adjustable between the values 0.5 and 10. ■ Frequency This parameter is adjustable in one-third octave increments between 32 Hz and 16 kHz. ■ Gain This parameter is adjustable in increments of 0.5 dB between –20 and +6 dB. YPAO adjusts frequency characteristics to suit your listening requirements using a combination of the above three parameters (Frequency, Gain and Q factor) for each equalizer band in this unit’s parametric equalizer. This unit has 7 equalizer bands for each channel. The use of multiple equalizer bands enables more precise adjustments of frequency characteristics (as in Figure 2). This is not possible using only a single equalizer band (as in Figure 1). Figure 1 Gain Frequency characteristic after correction Band 1 Frequency Original frequency characteristic Figure 2 Gain Frequency characteristic after correction Band 1 Frequency Band 2 154 En Original frequency characteristic SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS AUDIO SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround, Surround back 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω .................................... 140 W • Dynamic Power (IHF) 8/6/4/2 Ω ........................................................ 170/205/265/345 W • Maximum Useful Output Power (JEITA) [Asia, General, China and Korea models] 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ........................................................ 185 W • Maximum Output Power [U.K. and Europe models] 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω ....................................................... 200 W • Dynamic Headroom 8 Ω .................................................................................... 0.84 dB • IEC Output Power [U.K. and Europe models] 1 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω ..................................................... 145 W • Damping Factor (IHF) 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω ................................................. 150 or more • Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance PHONO .................................................................. 3.5 mV/47 kΩ CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ • Maximum Input Voltage PHONO (1 kHz, 0.1% THD) ................................ 60 mV or more CD, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .................................. 2.4 V or more • Rated Output Voltage/Output Impedance OUT (REC) ........................................................... 200 mV/900 Ω PRE OUT .................................................................. 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ SUBWOOFER .......................................................... 2.0 V/1.2 kΩ ZONE 2/ZONE 3 OUT ............................................. 1.0 V/1.4 kΩ • Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance CD, etc. (1 kHz, 40 mV, 8 Ω) ............................... 150 mV/100 Ω • Frequency Response CD to Front L/R, Pure Direct .......... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, +0/–3 dB • Total Harmonic Distortion PHONO to OUT (REC) (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) ......................................... 0.02% or less CD, etc. to Front L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 70 W, 8 Ω) ............................... 0.04% or less • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) PHONO (5 mV) to Front L/R [Australia, U.K. and Europe models] .................... 81 dB or more [Other models] ....................................................... 86 dB or more CD, etc. (250 mV) to Front L/R .......................... 100 dB or more • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Front L/R ............................................................... 150 µV or less • Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz) PHONO (shortened) to Front L/R ............... 60 dB/55 dB or more CD, etc. (5.1 kΩ shortened) to Front L/R ............... 60 dB/45 dB or more • Zone 2/Zone 3 Tone Control (Front L/R) BASS Boost/Cut .................................................... ±10 dB/100 Hz BASS Turnover Frequency .................................................450 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut .............................................. ±10 dB/10 kHz TREBLE Turnover Frequency ...........................................2.0 kHz • Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz) H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround back) ...........12 dB/oct. L.P.F. (Subwoofer) .........................................................24 dB/oct. VIDEO SECTION • Video Format [MONITOR OUT] (Wall Paper) [U.S.A., Canada, General and Korea models] ............ NTSC/PAL [U.K., Europe, Australia, Asia and China models] ................................................................................... PAL/NTSC • Video Format (Video Conversion) ..........................................................................................NTSC/PAL • Signal Level Composite ................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω S-video ............................ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω (C) Component ................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (PB/PR) • Maximum Input Level (Video Conversion Off) ............................................................................... 1.5 Vp-p or more • Signal to Noise Ratio (Video Conversion Off) .................................................................................... 60 dB or more • Frequency Response [MONITOR OUT] Component (Video Conversion Off) ............................................................. 5 Hz to 100 MHz, ±3 dB • Video Format [ZONE OUT] (Gray Back) [U.S.A., Canada, General and Korea models] .................... NTSC [U.K., Europe, Australia, Asia and China models] ................ PAL FM SECTION • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Asia and General models] ........ 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz [Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz • 50 dB Quieting Sensitivity (IHF) Mono/Stereo ........................................ 2.0/25 µV (17.3/39.2 dBf) • Usable Sensitivity (IHF) ....................................... 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf) • Selectivity (400 kHz) .............................................................. 70 dB • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo .................................................................... 0.2/0.3% • Stereo Separation (1 kHz) Stereo .....................................................................................42 dB • Frequency Response Stereo .............................................. 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2 dB • Antenna Input (unbalanced) ..................................................... 75 Ω 155 En ADDITIONAL INFORMATION • RIAA Equalization Deviation PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) .......................................... 0 ± 0.5 dB • Tone Control (Front L/R) BASS Boost/Cut ........................................................ ±6 dB/50 Hz BASS Turnover Frequency .................................. 125/350/500 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut ................................................ ±6 dB/20 kHz TREBLE Turnover Frequency .............................. 2.5/3.5/8.0 kHz SPECIFICATIONS AM SECTION • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 to 1710 kHz [Asia and General models] ................. 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz [Other models] ................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz • Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m GENERAL • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz [General and Asia model] ....................................... AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz [China model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz [Korea model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 60 Hz [Australia model] ............................................... AC 240 V, 50 Hz [U.K. and Europe models] ................................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz • Power Consumption [U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 500 W/630 VA [Other models] ................................................................... 500 W • Standby Power Consumption [U.S.A. and Canada models] .................................... 0.1 W or less [General model] (AC 240 V, 50 Hz) ...................... 0.33 W or less [Other models] ......................................................... 0.1 W or less • Maximum Power Consumption [General model only] 6ch, 10% THD ................................................................. 1100 W • AC Outlets [U.S.A. and Canada models] .... 2 (Total 100 W/0.8 A maximum) [Asia, General and China models] ....... 2 (Total 50 W maximum) [Australia and U.K. models] .... 1 (Total 100 W/0.4 A maximum) [Europe model] ......................... 2 (Total 100 W/0.4 A maximum) • Dimensions (W x H x D) ............................. 435 x 171 x 438.5 mm (17.1 x 6.7 x 17.3 in) • Weight .................................................................. 17.2 kg (37.9 lbs) * Specifications are subject to change without notice. 156 En SOUND OUTPUT IN EACH SOUND FIELD PROGRAM L Front left speaker SL Surround left speaker SBR Surround back right speaker C Center speaker SR Surround right speaker PL Presence left speaker R Front right speaker SBL Surround back left speaker PR Presence right speaker Speaker from which no sound is being output Speaker from which sound is being output *1 EX / PL x / : OFF *2 EX / PL x / : ON, PRIORITY: PRNS *3 EX / PL x / : ON, PRIORITY: SB Input source Program CLASSICAL Hall in Munich Hall in Vienna Hall in Amsterdam Church in Freiburg Chamber LIVE/CLUB Village Vanguard Warehouse Loft Cellar Club The Roxy Theatre The Bottom Line ENTERTAINMENT Sports Music Video Recital/Opera 2-channel audio (monaural) PL L SL L SBL SBR L SBL SBR L SL SR SL SBL SBR SBL SBR PL R L SR SL SBL SBR L SR SL SBL SBR PL R L SR SL L SR SL L SR SL SBL SBR SBL SBR SBL SBR L SR SL SBL SBR PL R L SR SL SR SL SBL SBR L SR SL SBL SBR SBL SBR L SR SL SBL SBR PL R L SR SL SR SL SBL SBR L SR SL SBL SBR L SR SL SBL SBR L SR SL SR R SR PR C SBL SBR PL R R PR C PL R (Dolby Digital) / (DTS) PR C PL R PR C PL L PR C 5.1/6.1-channel audio *3 R PR C PL R (Dolby Digital) / (DTS) PR C PL R PR C PL L PR C 5.1/6.1-channel audio *2 R PR C PL R PR C PR C PL R PR C PL R PR C PL R PR C PR C 5.1/6.1-channel audio *1 R SR APPENDIX PL (PRO LOGIC) L PR C PL R PR C PL SL MOVIE STANDARD SBL SBR PL SL ENTERTAINMENT Action Game Roleplaying Game PR C 2-channel audio (stereo) PR C SBL SBR R SR (Dolby Digital) / (DTS) i Input source Program MOVIE STANDARD (PLII Movie) (PLIIx Movie) (Neo:6 Cinema) 2-channel audio (monaural) PL L SL PR C SBL SBR 2-channel audio (stereo) PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR L SL PL R L SR SL PRIORITY: PRNS PL 5.1/6.1-channel audio *1 PR C SBL SBR 5.1/6.1-channel audio *2 PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR 5.1/6.1-channel audio *3 PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR R SR (Dolby Digital) / (DTS) (Dolby Digital) / (DTS) (Dolby Digital) / (DTS) PL PL PL PR C SBL SBR R SR PRIORITY: SB MOVIE Spectacle Sci-Fi Adventure Drama Mono Movie PL L SL STEREO 2ch Stereo PR C SBL SBR PL L SL L SR SL PR C SBL SBR PL R PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL R SR PR C SBL SBR R SR Monaural playback STEREO 7ch Stereo PL L SL PR C SBL SBR PL L SL ii L SR SL PR C PL R PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL L SR SL PR C PL R PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL L SR SL PR C PL R PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL L SR SL PR C PL R PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL R SR PR C R SR Input source Program SURROUND DECODE PRO LOGIC 2-channel audio (monaural) PL L SL PR C SBL SBR 2-channel audio (stereo) PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR L SL PL R L SR SL PRO LOGIC PL 5.1/6.1-channel audio *1 PR C SBL SBR 5.1/6.1-channel audio *2 PL R L SR SL Dolby Digital / DTS PR C SBL SBR 5.1/6.1-channel audio *3 PL R L SR SL Dolby Digital / DTS PR C SBL SBR R SR Dolby Digital / DTS PR C SBL SBR R SR Dolby Digital / DTS SURROUND DECODE PLII Movie PLII Music PLII Game PL L SL PR C SBL SBR L SR SL Movie/Game PL L SL PL R PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL Movie/Music/Game PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL Dolby Digital / DTS PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL Dolby Digital / DTS PR C SBL SBR R SR Dolby Digital / DTS PR C SBL SBR R SR Music SURROUND DECODE PLIIx Movie PLIIx Music PLIIx Game PL L SBL SBR L SR SL Movie/Game PL L SL PL R PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL Movie/Music/Game PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL Dolby Digital / DTS PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL Dolby Digital / DTS PR C SBL SBR R SR APPENDIX SL PR C Dolby Digital / DTS PR C SBL SBR R SR Music iii Input source Program SURROUND DECODE Neo:6 Cinema Neo:6 Music 2-channel audio (monaural) PL L SL PR C SBL SBR L SL PL R L SR SL Cinema PL 2-channel audio (stereo) PR C SBL SBR 5.1/6.1-channel audio *1 PL R L SR SL Cinema/Music PR C SBL SBR 5.1/6.1-channel audio *2 PL R L SR SL Dolby Digital / DTS PR C SBL SBR 5.1/6.1-channel audio *3 PL R L SR SL Dolby Digital / DTS PR C SBL SBR R SR Dolby Digital / DTS PR C SBL SBR R SR Music SURROUND DECODE neural sur. PL L SL PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL Dolby Digital / DTS PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL Dolby Digital / DTS PR C SBL SBR R SR Dolby Digital / DTS STRAIGHT PL L SL PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR R SR Monaural playback PURE DIRECT PL L SL PR C SBL SBR L SR SL Monaural playback iv PL R PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR PL R L SR SL PR C SBL SBR R SR GPL/LGPL ■ GNU GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE these conditions, and telling the user how to view a copy of this License. (Exception: if the Program itself is interactive but does not normally print such an announcement, your work based on the Program is not required to print an announcement.) Version 2, June 1991 Copyright (C) 1989, 1991 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Program, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Program, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. Preamble The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public License is intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software–to make sure the software is free for all its users. This General Public License applies to most of the Free Software Foundation’s software and to any other program whose authors commit to using it. (Some other Free Software Foundation software is covered by the GNU Library General Public License instead.) You can apply it to your programs, too. When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish), that you receive source code or can get it if you want it, that you can change the software or use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you know you can do these things. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Program. In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Program with the Program (or with a work based on the Program) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License. 3. To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid anyone to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender the rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the software, or if you modify it. You may copy and distribute the Program (or a work based on it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you also do one of the following: a) Accompany it with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, For example, if you distribute copies of such a program, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that you have. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. We protect your rights with two steps: (1) copyright the software, and (2) offer you this license which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the software. b) Accompany it with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give any third party, for a charge no more than your cost of physically performing source distribution, a complete machine-readable copy of the corresponding source code, to be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange; or, Also, for each author’s protection and ours, we want to make certain that everyone understands that there is no warranty for this free software. If the software is modified by someone else and passed on, we want its recipients to know that what they have is not the original, so that any problems introduced by others will not reflect on the original authors’ reputations. c) Accompany it with the information you received as to the offer to distribute corresponding source code. (This alternative is allowed only for noncommercial distribution and only if you received the program in object code or executable form with such an offer, in accord with Subsection b above.) Finally, any free program is threatened constantly by software patents. We wish to avoid the danger that redistributors of a free program will individually obtain patent licenses, in effect making the program proprietary. To prevent this, we have made it clear that any patent must be licensed for everyone’s free use or not licensed at all. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0. This License applies to any program or other work which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder saying it may be distributed under the terms of this General Public License. The “Program”, below, refers to any such program or work, and a “work based on the Program” means either the Program or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Program or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term “modification”.) Each licensee is addressed as “you”. Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running the Program is not restricted, and the output from the Program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Program (independent of having been made by running the Program). Whether that is true depends on what the Program does. 1. If distribution of executable or object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place counts as distribution of the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code. 4. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, or distribute the Program except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense or distribute the Program is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. 5. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Program or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Program (or any work based on the Program), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Program or works based on it. 6. Each time you redistribute the Program (or any work based on the Program), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute or modify the Program subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties to this License. 7. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Program at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Program by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Program. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Program or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Program, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a) You must cause the modified files to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. b) You must cause any work that you distribute or publish, that in whole or in part contains or is derived from the Program or any part thereof, to be licensed as a whole at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. c) If the modified program normally reads commands interactively when run, you must cause it, when started running for such interactive use in the most ordinary way, to print or display an announcement including an appropriate copyright notice and a notice that there is no warranty (or else, saying that you provide a warranty) and that users may redistribute the program under If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. v APPENDIX You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Program’s source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and give any other recipients of the Program a copy of this License along with the Program. The source code for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For an executable work, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the executable. However, as a special exception, the source code distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system, which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. Gnomovision version 69, Copyright (C) year name of author Gnomovision comes with ABSOLUTELY NO WARRANTY; for details type ‘show w’. This is free software, and you are welcome to redistribute it under certain conditions; type ‘show c’ for details. This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License. You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the program, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names: 8. 9. If the distribution and/or use of the Program is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Program under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Program specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Program does not specify a version number of this License, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. 10. The hypothetical commands ‘show w’ and ‘show c’ should show the appropriate parts of the General Public License. Of course, the commands you use may be called something other than ‘show w’ and ‘show c’; they could even be mouse-clicks or menu items–whatever suits your program. If you wish to incorporate parts of the Program into other free programs whose distribution conditions are different, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the program ‘Gnomovision’ (which makes passes at compilers) written by James Hacker. <signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1989 Ty Coon, President of Vice This General Public License does not permit incorporating your program into proprietary programs. If your program is a subroutine library, you may consider it more useful to permit linking proprietary applications with the library. If this is what you want to do, use the GNU Library General Public License instead of this License. ■ GNU LESSER GENERAL PUBLIC LICENSE Version 2.1, February 1999 Copyright (C) 1991, 1999 Free Software Foundation, Inc. 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA Everyone is permitted to copy and distribute verbatim copies of this license document, but changing it is not allowed. [This is the first released version of the Lesser GPL. It also counts as the successor of the GNU Library Public License, version 2, hence the version number 2.1.] NO WARRANTY Preamble 11. The licenses for most software are designed to take away your freedom to share and change it. By contrast, the GNU General Public Licenses are intended to guarantee your freedom to share and change free software–to make sure the software is free for all its users. 12. BECAUSE THE PROGRAM IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE PROGRAM, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE PROGRAM “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE PROGRAM IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE PROGRAM PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE PROGRAM AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE PROGRAM (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE PROGRAM TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER PROGRAMS), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Programs If you develop a new program, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, the best way to achieve this is to make it free software which everyone can redistribute and change under these terms. To do so, attach the following notices to the program. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. <one line to give the program’s name and a brief idea of what it does.> Copyright (C) <year> <name of author> This program is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. This program is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU General Public License along with this program; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA. Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. If the program is interactive, make it output a short notice like this when it starts in an interactive mode: vi This license, the Lesser General Public License, applies to some specially designated software packages–typically libraries–of the Free Software Foundation and other authors who decide to use it. You can use it too, but we suggest you first think carefully about whether this license or the ordinary General Public License is the better strategy to use in any particular case, based on the explanations below. When we speak of free software, we are referring to freedom of use, not price. Our General Public Licenses are designed to make sure that you have the freedom to distribute copies of free software (and charge for this service if you wish); that you receive source code or can get it if you want it; that you can change the software and use pieces of it in new free programs; and that you are informed that you can do these things. To protect your rights, we need to make restrictions that forbid distributors to deny you these rights or to ask you to surrender these rights. These restrictions translate to certain responsibilities for you if you distribute copies of the library or if you modify it. For example, if you distribute copies of the library, whether gratis or for a fee, you must give the recipients all the rights that we gave you. You must make sure that they, too, receive or can get the source code. If you link other code with the library, you must provide complete object files to the recipients, so that they can relink them with the library after making changes to the library and recompiling it. And you must show them these terms so they know their rights. We protect your rights with a two-step method: (1) we copyright the library, and (2) we offer you this license, which gives you legal permission to copy, distribute and/or modify the library. To protect each distributor, we want to make it very clear that there is no warranty for the free library. Also, if the library is modified by someone else and passed on, the recipients should know that what they have is not the original version, so that the original author’s reputation will not be affected by problems that might be introduced by others. Finally, software patents pose a constant threat to the existence of any free program. We wish to make sure that a company cannot effectively restrict the users of a free program by obtaining a restrictive license from a patent holder. Therefore, we insist that any patent license obtained for a version of the library must be consistent with the full freedom of use specified in this license. Most GNU software, including some libraries, is covered by the ordinary GNU General Public License. This license, the GNU Lesser General Public License, applies to certain designated libraries, and is quite different from the ordinary General Public License. We use this license for certain libraries in order to permit linking those libraries into nonfree programs. When a program is linked with a library, whether statically or using a shared library, the combination of the two is legally speaking a combined work, a derivative of the original library. The ordinary General Public License therefore permits such linking only if the entire combination fits its criteria of freedom. The Lesser General Public License permits more lax criteria for linking other code with the library. We call this license the “Lesser” General Public License because it does Less to protect the user’s freedom than the ordinary General Public License. It also provides other free software developers Less of an advantage over competing non-free programs. These disadvantages are the reason we use the ordinary General Public License for many libraries. However, the Lesser license provides advantages in certain special circumstances. For example, on rare occasions, there may be a special need to encourage the widest possible use of a certain library, so that it becomes a de-facto standard. To achieve this, non-free programs must be allowed to use the library. A more frequent case is that a free library does the same job as widely used non-free libraries. In this case, there is little to gain by limiting the free library to free software only, so we use the Lesser General Public License. written entirely by you; rather, the intent is to exercise the right to control the distribution of derivative or collective works based on the Library. In addition, mere aggregation of another work not based on the Library with the Library (or with a work based on the Library) on a volume of a storage or distribution medium does not bring the other work under the scope of this License. 3. In other cases, permission to use a particular library in non-free programs enables a greater number of people to use a large body of free software. For example, permission to use the GNU C Library in non-free programs enables many more people to use the whole GNU operating system, as well as its variant, the GNU/Linux operating system. Although the Lesser General Public License is Less protective of the users’ freedom, it does ensure that the user of a program that is linked with the Library has the freedom and the wherewithal to run that program using a modified version of the Library. The precise terms and conditions for copying, distribution and modification follow. Pay close attention to the difference between a “work based on the library” and a “work that uses the library”. The former contains code derived from the library, whereas the latter must be combined with the library in order to run. Once this change is made in a given copy, it is irreversible for that copy, so the ordinary GNU General Public License applies to all subsequent copies and derivative works made from that copy. This option is useful when you wish to copy part of the code of the Library into a program that is not a library. 4. TERMS AND CONDITIONS FOR COPYING, DISTRIBUTION AND MODIFICATION 0. This License Agreement applies to any software library or other program which contains a notice placed by the copyright holder or other authorized party saying it may be distributed under the terms of this Lesser General Public License (also called “this License”). Each licensee is addressed as “you”. A “library” means a collection of software functions and/or data prepared so as to be conveniently linked with application programs (which use some of those functions and data) to form executables. The “Library”, below, refers to any such software library or work which has been distributed under these terms. A “work based on the Library” means either the Library or any derivative work under copyright law: that is to say, a work containing the Library or a portion of it, either verbatim or with modifications and/or translated straightforwardly into another language. (Hereinafter, translation is included without limitation in the term “modification”.) “Source code” for a work means the preferred form of the work for making modifications to it. For a library, complete source code means all the source code for all modules it contains, plus any associated interface definition files, plus the scripts used to control compilation and installation of the library. Activities other than copying, distribution and modification are not covered by this License; they are outside its scope. The act of running a program using the Library is not restricted, and output from such a program is covered only if its contents constitute a work based on the Library (independent of the use of the Library in a tool for writing it). Whether that is true depends on what the Library does and what the program that uses the Library does. 1. You may copy and distribute verbatim copies of the Library’s complete source code as you receive it, in any medium, provided that you conspicuously and appropriately publish on each copy an appropriate copyright notice and disclaimer of warranty; keep intact all the notices that refer to this License and to the absence of any warranty; and distribute a copy of this License along with the Library. You may charge a fee for the physical act of transferring a copy, and you may at your option offer warranty protection in exchange for a fee. 2. You may modify your copy or copies of the Library or any portion of it, thus forming a work based on the Library, and copy and distribute such modifications or work under the terms of Section 1 above, provided that you also meet all of these conditions: a) The modified work must itself be a software library. b) You must cause the files modified to carry prominent notices stating that you changed the files and the date of any change. c) You must cause the whole of the work to be licensed at no charge to all third parties under the terms of this License. (For example, a function in a library to compute square roots has a purpose that is entirely well-defined independent of the application. Therefore, Subsection 2d requires that any application-supplied function or table used by this function must be optional: if the application does not supply it, the square root function must still compute square roots.) These requirements apply to the modified work as a whole. If identifiable sections of that work are not derived from the Library, and can be reasonably considered independent and separate works in themselves, then this License, and its terms, do not apply to those sections when you distribute them as separate works. But when you distribute the same sections as part of a whole which is a work based on the Library, the distribution of the whole must be on the terms of this License, whose permissions for other licensees extend to the entire whole, and thus to each and every part regardless of who wrote it. You may copy and distribute the Library (or a portion or derivative of it, under Section 2) in object code or executable form under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above provided that you accompany it with the complete corresponding machinereadable source code, which must be distributed under the terms of Sections 1 and 2 above on a medium customarily used for software interchange. If distribution of object code is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, then offering equivalent access to copy the source code from the same place satisfies the requirement to distribute the source code, even though third parties are not compelled to copy the source along with the object code. 5. A program that contains no derivative of any portion of the Library, but is designed to work with the Library by being compiled or linked with it, is called a “work that uses the Library”. Such a work, in isolation, is not a derivative work of the Library, and therefore falls outside the scope of this License. However, linking a “work that uses the Library” with the Library creates an executable that is a derivative of the Library (because it contains portions of the Library), rather than a “work that uses the library”. The executable is therefore covered by this License. Section 6 states terms for distribution of such executables. When a “work that uses the Library” uses material from a header file that is part of the Library, the object code for the work may be a derivative work of the Library even though the source code is not. Whether this is true is especially significant if the work can be linked without the Library, or if the work is itself a library. The threshold for this to be true is not precisely defined by law. If such an object file uses only numerical parameters, data structure layouts and accessors, and small macros and small inline functions (ten lines or less in length), then the use of the object file is unrestricted, regardless of whether it is legally a derivative work. (Executables containing this object code plus portions of the Library will still fall under Section 6.) Otherwise, if the work is a derivative of the Library, you may distribute the object code for the work under the terms of Section 6. Any executables containing that work also fall under Section 6, whether or not they are linked directly with the Library itself. 6. As an exception to the Sections above, you may also combine or link a “work that uses the Library” with the Library to produce a work containing portions of the Library, and distribute that work under terms of your choice, provided that the terms permit modification of the work for the customer’s own use and reverse engineering for debugging such modifications. You must give prominent notice with each copy of the work that the Library is used in it and that the Library and its use are covered by this License. You must supply a copy of this License. If the work during execution displays copyright notices, you must include the copyright notice for the Library among them, as well as a reference directing the user to the copy of this License. Also, you must do one of these things: a) Accompany the work with the complete corresponding machine-readable source code for the Library including whatever changes were used in the work (which must be distributed under Sections 1 and 2 above); and, if the work is an executable linked with the Library, with the complete machinereadable “work that uses the Library”, as object code and/or source code, so that the user can modify the Library and then relink to produce a modified executable containing the modified Library. (It is understood that the user who changes the contents of definitions files in the Library will not necessarily be able to recompile the application to use the modified definitions.) b) Use a suitable shared library mechanism for linking with the Library. A suitable mechanism is one that (1) uses at run time a copy of the library already present on the user’s computer system, rather than copying library functions into the executable, and (2) will operate properly with a modified version of the library, if the user installs one, as long as the modified version is interface-compatible with the version that the work was made with. c) Accompany the work with a written offer, valid for at least three years, to give the same user the materials specified in Subsection 6a, above, for a charge no more than the cost of performing this distribution. Thus, it is not the intent of this section to claim rights or contest your rights to work vii APPENDIX d) If a facility in the modified Library refers to a function or a table of data to be supplied by an application program that uses the facility, other than as an argument passed when the facility is invoked, then you must make a good faith effort to ensure that, in the event an application does not supply such function or table, the facility still operates, and performs whatever part of its purpose remains meaningful. You may opt to apply the terms of the ordinary GNU General Public License instead of this License to a given copy of the Library. To do this, you must alter all the notices that refer to this License, so that they refer to the ordinary GNU General Public License, version 2, instead of to this License. (If a newer version than version 2 of the ordinary GNU General Public License has appeared, then you can specify that version instead if you wish.) Do not make any other change in these notices. d) If distribution of the work is made by offering access to copy from a designated place, offer equivalent access to copy the above specified materials from the same place. e) Verify that the user has already received a copy of these materials or that you have already sent this user a copy. For an executable, the required form of the “work that uses the Library” must include any data and utility programs needed for reproducing the executable from it. However, as a special exception, the materials to be distributed need not include anything that is normally distributed (in either source or binary form) with the major components (compiler, kernel, and so on) of the operating system on which the executable runs, unless that component itself accompanies the executable. It may happen that this requirement contradicts the license restrictions of other proprietary libraries that do not normally accompany the operating system. Such a contradiction means you cannot use both them and the Library together in an executable that you distribute. 7. Each version is given a distinguishing version number. If the Library specifies a version number of this License which applies to it and “any later version”, you have the option of following the terms and conditions either of that version or of any later version published by the Free Software Foundation. If the Library does not specify a license version number, you may choose any version ever published by the Free Software Foundation. 14. NO WARRANTY 15. BECAUSE THE LIBRARY IS LICENSED FREE OF CHARGE, THERE IS NO WARRANTY FOR THE LIBRARY, TO THE EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW. EXCEPT WHEN OTHERWISE STATED IN WRITING THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND/OR OTHER PARTIES PROVIDE THE LIBRARY “AS IS” WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO THE QUALITY AND PERFORMANCE OF THE LIBRARY IS WITH YOU. SHOULD THE LIBRARY PROVE DEFECTIVE, YOU ASSUME THE COST OF ALL NECESSARY SERVICING, REPAIR OR CORRECTION. 16. IN NO EVENT UNLESS REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW OR AGREED TO IN WRITING WILL ANY COPYRIGHT HOLDER, OR ANY OTHER PARTY WHO MAY MODIFY AND/OR REDISTRIBUTE THE LIBRARY AS PERMITTED ABOVE, BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR DAMAGES, INCLUDING ANY GENERAL, SPECIAL, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THE USE OR INABILITY TO USE THE LIBRARY (INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA OR DATA BEING RENDERED INACCURATE OR LOSSES SUSTAINED BY YOU OR THIRD PARTIES OR A FAILURE OF THE LIBRARY TO OPERATE WITH ANY OTHER SOFTWARE), EVEN IF SUCH HOLDER OR OTHER PARTY HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. You may place library facilities that are a work based on the Library side-by-side in a single library together with other library facilities not covered by this License, and distribute such a combined library, provided that the separate distribution of the work based on the Library and of the other library facilities is otherwise permitted, and provided that you do these two things: a) Accompany the combined library with a copy of the same work based on the Library, uncombined with any other library facilities. This must be distributed under the terms of the Sections above. b) Give prominent notice with the combined library of the fact that part of it is a work based on the Library, and explaining where to find the accompanying uncombined form of the same work. 8. You may not copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library except as expressly provided under this License. Any attempt otherwise to copy, modify, sublicense, link with, or distribute the Library is void, and will automatically terminate your rights under this License. However, parties who have received copies, or rights, from you under this License will not have their licenses terminated so long as such parties remain in full compliance. 9. You are not required to accept this License, since you have not signed it. However, nothing else grants you permission to modify or distribute the Library or its derivative works. These actions are prohibited by law if you do not accept this License. Therefore, by modifying or distributing the Library (or any work based on the Library), you indicate your acceptance of this License to do so, and all its terms and conditions for copying, distributing or modifying the Library or works based on it. 10. 11. Each time you redistribute the Library (or any work based on the Library), the recipient automatically receives a license from the original licensor to copy, distribute, link with or modify the Library subject to these terms and conditions. You may not impose any further restrictions on the recipients’ exercise of the rights granted herein. You are not responsible for enforcing compliance by third parties with this License. If, as a consequence of a court judgment or allegation of patent infringement or for any other reason (not limited to patent issues), conditions are imposed on you (whether by court order, agreement or otherwise) that contradict the conditions of this License, they do not excuse you from the conditions of this License. If you cannot distribute so as to satisfy simultaneously your obligations under this License and any other pertinent obligations, then as a consequence you may not distribute the Library at all. For example, if a patent license would not permit royalty-free redistribution of the Library by all those who receive copies directly or indirectly through you, then the only way you could satisfy both it and this License would be to refrain entirely from distribution of the Library. If any portion of this section is held invalid or unenforceable under any particular circumstance, the balance of the section is intended to apply, and the section as a whole is intended to apply in other circumstances. It is not the purpose of this section to induce you to infringe any patents or other property right claims or to contest validity of any such claims; this section has the sole purpose of protecting the integrity of the free software distribution system which is implemented by public license practices. Many people have made generous contributions to the wide range of software distributed through that system in reliance on consistent application of that system; it is up to the author/donor to decide if he or she is willing to distribute software through any other system and a licensee cannot impose that choice. This section is intended to make thoroughly clear what is believed to be a consequence of the rest of this License. 12. 13. If the distribution and/or use of the Library is restricted in certain countries either by patents or by copyrighted interfaces, the original copyright holder who places the Library under this License may add an explicit geographical distribution limitation excluding those countries, so that distribution is permitted only in or among countries not thus excluded. In such case, this License incorporates the limitation as if written in the body of this License. The Free Software Foundation may publish revised and/or new versions of the Lesser General Public License from time to time. Such new versions will be similar in spirit to the present version, but may differ in detail to address new problems or concerns. viii If you wish to incorporate parts of the Library into other free programs whose distribution conditions are incompatible with these, write to the author to ask for permission. For software which is copyrighted by the Free Software Foundation, write to the Free Software Foundation; we sometimes make exceptions for this. Our decision will be guided by the two goals of preserving the free status of all derivatives of our free software and of promoting the sharing and reuse of software generally. END OF TERMS AND CONDITIONS How to Apply These Terms to Your New Libraries If you develop a new library, and you want it to be of the greatest possible use to the public, we recommend making it free software that everyone can redistribute and change. You can do so by permitting redistribution under these terms (or, alternatively, under the terms of the ordinary General Public License). To apply these terms, attach the following notices to the library. It is safest to attach them to the start of each source file to most effectively convey the exclusion of warranty; and each file should have at least the “copyright” line and a pointer to where the full notice is found. <one line to give the library’s name and a brief idea of what it does.> Copyright (C) <year> <name of author> This library is free software; you can redistribute it and/or modify it under the terms of the GNU Lesser General Public License as published by the Free Software Foundation; either version 2.1 of the License, or (at your option) any later version. This library is distributed in the hope that it will be useful, but WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY; without even the implied warranty of MERCHANTABILITY or FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. See the GNU Lesser General Public License for more details. You should have received a copy of the GNU Lesser General Public License along with this library; if not, write to the Free Software Foundation, Inc., 59 Temple Place, Suite 330, Boston, MA 02111-1307 USA Also add information on how to contact you by electronic and paper mail. You should also get your employer (if you work as a programmer) or your school, if any, to sign a “copyright disclaimer” for the library, if necessary. Here is a sample; alter the names: Yoyodyne, Inc., hereby disclaims all copyright interest in the library ‘Frob’ (a library for tweaking knobs) written by James Random Hacker. <signature of Ty Coon>, 1 April 1990 Ty Coon, President of Vice That’s all there is to it! LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES CABLE CD PLAYER AIWA 0184 ARCAM 0184 AUDIO RESEARCH 0184 AUDIO TON 0184 AUDIOLAB 0184 AUDIOMECA 0184 CAIRN 0184 CD RECORDER KENWOOD MARANTZ PHILIPS YAMAHA 0653 0653 0653 2400 DVD PLAYER ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS 0757 ALBA 0744 AMSTRAD 0740 APEX DIGITAL 0699, 0744, 0782, 0821, 0823, 0857, 1127 BLAUPINKT 0744 BLUE PARADE 0598 BUSH 0740 CENTREX 0699 CLATRONIC 0815 CYBERHOME 0741 DVD2000 0548 DAEWOO 0811, 0797 DANSAI 0797 DECCA 0797 DENON 0517 DIAMOND 0795 DIGITREX 0699 EMERSON 0618 ENTERPRISE 0618 FISHER 0697 GE 0549, 0744 GO VIDEO 0742 GOLDSTAR 0768 GRADIENTE 0678 GREENHILL 0744 GRUNDIG 0566 HITACHI 0600, 0691 HITEKER 0699 JVC 0585, 0650 KLH 0744 KENWOOD 0517, 0561 KOSS 0678 LG 0768 LIMIT 0795 MAGNAVOX 0530, 0702 MARANTZ 0566 MEMOREX 0858 MICO 0750 MICROSOFT 0549 MINTEK 0744 MITSUBISHI 0548 MUSTEK 0757 NESA 0744 ONKYO 0530 ORITRON 0678 PALSONIC 0699 PANASONIC 0517, 0659, 1389 PHILIPS 0530, 0566, 0673, 0881 PIONEER 0552, 0598, 0658, 0659 POLK AUDIO 0566 PROSCAN 0549 QWESTAR 0678 RCA 0549, 0598, 0744 ROTEL 0650 SM ELECTRONIC 0757 SAMSUNG 0600 SANYO 0697 SHARP 0657 SHERWOOD 0797 SHINSONIC 0560 SLIM ART 0811 SONY 0560, 0891 SYLVANIA 0702 TATUNG 0797 TEAC 0598, 0744 TECHNICS 0517 THETA DIGITAL 0598 THOMSON 0549 TOSHIBA 0530 URBAN CONCEPTS 0530 XBOX 0549 YAMAHA 0517, 0566, 0572, 2100 ZENITH 0530, 0618, 0768 ZEUS 0811 DVD RECORDER HITACHI PANASONIC PHILIPS PIONEER SHARP SONY TOSHIBA VICTOR YAMAHA 2815 2800, 2801, 2802 2808 2804, 2805, 2806 2812, 2813 2809, 2810, 2811 2803 2814 2807 LD PLAYER CARVER DENON MARANTZ MITSUBISHI NAD NAGSMI OPTIMUS PHILIPS PIONEER SALORA SONY TELEFUNKEN YAMAHA 0091 0086 0091 0086 0086 0086 0086 0091 0086 0091 0228 0086 2200 MD RECORDER KENWOOD ONKYO SHARP SONY YAMAHA 0708 0895 0888 0517 2500, 2501, 2502 RECEIVER (TUNER) ADC AIWA 0558 0185, 1116, 1415, 1432, 1668 ALCO 1417 ANAM 1636 APEX DIGITAL 1284 AUDIOLAB 1216 AUDIOTRONIC 1216 AUDIOVOX 1417 BOSE 1256 ix APPENDIX ABC 0030, 0035 AMERICAST 0926 BELL SOUTH 0926 BIRMINGHAM CABLE COMMUNICATIONS 0303 BRITISH TELECOM 0030 CABLE & WIRELESS 1095 DAERYUNG 0035, 0504, 0904, 1904 DIRECTOR 0503 FILMNET 0470 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 0030, 0303, 0503, 0837, GOLDSTAR 0171 HAMLIN 0036, 0300 JERROLD 0030, 0303, 0503, 0837 LG 0171 MNET 0470 MEMOREX 0027 MOTOROLA 0303, 0503, 0837, 1133 NTL 1095 NOOS 0844 ONO 1095 PVP STEREO VISUAL MATRIX 0030 PACE 0264, 1087, 1095 PANASONIC 0027, 0035, 0134 PARAGON 0027 PHILIPS 0332, 0344 PIONEER 0171, 0560, 0904, 1904 PULSAR 0027 QUASAR 0027 REGAL 0300, 0306 RUNCO 0027 SAGEM 0844 SAMSUNG 0027, 0171 SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 0035, 0504, 0904, 1904 SONY 1033 STARCOM 0030 SUPERCABLE 0303 TS 0030 TELE+1 0470 TELEWEST 1095 TORX 0030 TOSHIBA 0027 TRANS PX 0303 UNITED CABLE 0030 ZENITH 0027, 0552, 0926 CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS 0056 CARVER 0184, 0206 CYRUS 0184 DKK 0027 DMX ELECTRONICS 0184 DENON 0900 DYNAMIC BASS 0206 EMERSON 0332 FISHER 0206 GENEXXA 0059, 0332 GOODMANS 0332 GRUNDIG 0184 HARMAN/KARDON 0184, 0200 HITACHI 0059 JVC 0099 KENWOOD 0055, 0064 KRELL 0184 LXI 0332 LINN 0184 MCS 0056 MAGNAVOX 0184, 0332 MARANTZ 0056, 0184 MATSUI 0184 MEMOREX 0332 MERIDIAN 0184 MICROMEGA 0184 MIRO 0027 MISSION 0184 MYRYAD 0184 NAD 0027 NSM 0184 NAIM 0184 OPTIMUS 0027, 0059, 0064, 0206, 0332 PANASONIC 0056 PHILIPS 0184 PIONEER 0059, 0332 POLK AUDIO 0184 PROTON 0184 QED 0184 QUAD 0184 QUASAR 0056 RCA 0059, 0206, 0332 REALISTIC 0206 REVOX 0184 ROTEL 0184 SAE 0184 SANSUI 0184, 0332 SANYO 0206 SCOTT 0332 SEARS 0332 SHARP 0064 SIMAUDIO 0184 SONIC FRONTIERS 0184 SONY 0027 SYMPHONIC 0332 TAG MCLAREN 0184 TANDY 0059 TECHNICS 0056 THORENS 0184 THULE 0184 UNIVERSUM 0184 VICTOR 0099 WARDS 0184 YAMAHA 2300, 2301 CAMBRIDGE SOUNDWORKS 1397 CAPETRONIC 0558 CARVER 1116, 1216 CENTREX 1284 DENON 1387 FERGUSON 0558 FINE ARTS 1216 GRUNDIG 1216 HARMAN/KARDON 0137, 1331 INTEGRA 0162, 1325 JBL 0137, 1333 JVC 0101, 0558, 1401, 1522 KLH 1417, 1439 KENWOOD 1054, 1340 MCS 0066 MAGNAVOX 0558, 1116, 1216, 1296, MARANTZ 0066, 1116, 1216, 1316 MICROMEGA 1216 MUSICMAGIC 1116 MYRYAD 1216 NAD 0347 NORCENT 1416 ONKYO 0162, 0869, 1325 OPTIMUS 0558, 1050 PANASONIC 0066, 1315, 1545, 1790 PHILIPS 1116, 1216, 1293, 1295, 1296, 1310, 1316 PIONEER 0041, 0558, 1050, 1411 POLK AUDIO 1316 PROSCAN 1281 QUASAR 0066 RCA 0558, 1050, 1281, 1417, 1636, SABA 0558 SANSUI 1116 SCHNEIDER 0558 SONY 0185, 1085, 1185, 1685, 1785 STEREOPHONICS 1050 SUNFIRE 1340 TEAC 1417 TECHNICS 0066, 1335, 1336, 1545 TELEFUNKEN 0558 THOMSON 1281 THORENS 1216 UHER 0558 VENTURER 1417 VICTOR 0101 WARDS 0041, 0185 YAMAHA 0203, 1203, 1358, 2601 (TUNER ID1) 2602 (TUNER ID2) 2603 (XM ID1) 2604 (XM ID2) 2605 (iPod) 2606 (NET) 2607 SATELLITE TUNER @SAT ABSAT ALBA ALPHASTAR AMSTRAD ASTON x 1327 0150 0482 0799 0874 0169, 1156 ASTRO 0200 ATSAT 1327 AVALON 0423 BLAUPUNKT 0200 BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING 0874, 1202 CANAL DIGITAL 0880 CANAL SATELLITE 0880 CANAL+ 0880 CHAPARRAL 0243 CITYCOM 1203 CONNEXIONS 0423 CROSSDIGITAL 1136 CYRUS 0227 D-BOX 0750, 1154 DMT 1102 DNT 0227, 0423 DAERYUNG 0423 DAEWOO 1323 DIGENIUS 0326 DIRECTV 0274, 0419, 0593, 0666, 0751, 0776, 0846, 1103, 1136, 1169, 1776, 1883 DISH NETWORK SYSTEM 0802, 1032 DISHPRO 0802, 1032 DISTRATEL 0111 DREAM MULTIMEDIA 1264 ECHOSTAR 0194, 0423, 0637, 0802, 0880, 0898, 1032, 1113 ENGEL 1044 EXPRESSVU 0802 FTE 0890 FINLUX 0482 FRACARRO 0898 FUBA 0423 GE 0593 GOI 0802 GALAXIS 0890, 1138 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 0896 GOLD BOX 0880 GRUNDIG 0200, 0874 HTS 0802 HIRSCHMANN 0200, 0423 HITACHI 0482, 0846 HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEM 0776, 1169, 1776 HUMAX 0890, 1203 INVIDEO 0898 JVC 0802 KATHREIN 0150, 0200, 0227, 0276, 0685, 1248 KREISELMEYER 0200 LABGEAR 1323 LOGIX 1044 LORENZEN 0326 MAGNAVOX 0749, 0751 MANHATTAN 0482, 1044, 1110 MARANTZ 0227 MEDIASAT 0880 MEMOREX 0751 METRONIC 0111 MITSUBISHI 0776 MOTOROLA 0896 MYRYAD 0227 NEXT LEVEL 0896 NOKIA 0482, 0750, 0778, 1154, 1250, 1750 OCTALTV 1032 ORBITECH PACE 1127 0482, 0874, 1202, 1350 PANASONIC 0274, 0728, 0874, 1347 PANDA 0482 PAYSAT 0751 PHILIPS 0160, 0227, 0482, 0749, 0751, 0776, 0880, 1103, 1169, 1776 PIONEER 0880 PROMAX 0482 PROSCAN 0419, 0593 RCA 0170, 0419, 0593, 0882 RFT 0227 RADIOSHACK 0896 RADIOLA 0227 RADIX 0423 SKY 0874, 0883, 1202 SM ELECTRONIC 1227 SABRE 0482 SAGEM 0847, 1141, 1280 SAMSUNG 1044, 1136, 1303, 1319 SAT CONTROL 1327 SATSTATION 1110 SCHWAIGER 1138 SEEMANN 0423 SIEMENS 0200 SONY 0666, 0874, 1666 STAR CHOICE 0896 STRONG 1327 TPS 0847, 1280 TANTEC 0482 TECHNISAT 1126, 1127 TELESTAR 1127 THOMSON 0482, 0880, 1073, 1318 TOPFIELD 1233 TOSHIBA 0776, 0817, 1776 ULTIMATETV 0419, 0666 UNIDEN 0749, 0751 UNIVERSUM 0200 VENTANA 0227 WISI 0200, 0423, 0482 XSAT 0150 ZEHNDER 1102 ZENITH 0883, 1883 TAPE DECK AIWA 0056 CARVER 0056 GRUNDIG 0056 HARMAN/KARDON 0056 MAGNAVOX 0056 MARANTZ 0056 MYRYAD 0056 OPTIMUS 0054 PHILIPS 0056 PIONEER 0054 POLK AUDIO 0056 RCA 0054 REVOX 0056 SANSUI 0056 SONY 0270 THORENS 0056 WARDS 0054 YAMAHA 2700,2701 TV AGB AOC 0543 0036, 0057, 0087, 0119, 0120, 0135, 0205, 0207, 0478 ASA 0131 AWA 0036 ACURA 0036 ADDISON 0119, 0135, 0680 ADMIRAL 0120, 0190, 0490 ADVENT 0788 AIKO 0119 AKAI 0036, 0057, 0235, 0388, 0543, 0729, 0839 AKURA 0291 ALBA 0036, 0064, 0398, 0695 AMERICA ACTION 0207 AMPRO 0778 AMSTRAD 0036, 0064, 0198, 0398, 0439, 0460, 0543 ANAM 0036, 0207, 0277 ANAM NATIONAL 0277, 0677 ANITECH 0036 APEX DIGITAL 0775, 0792, 0794 AUDIOSONIC 0064, 0136 BANG & OLUFSEN 0592 BASIC 0036 BAUR 0064, 0388, 0539 BAYSONIC 0207 BEAUMARK 0205 BEKO 0397, 0513, 0741, 0742 BELL & HOWELL 0181 BEON 0064 BLAUPUNKT 0222 BLUE SKY 0695, 1064 BONDSTEC 0274 BRADFORD 0207 BRANDT 0136, 0362 BROKSONIC 0263, 0490 BUSH 0036, 0064, 0398, 0401, 0695, 1064 CCE 0064 CGE 0274 CTC 0274 CXC 0207 CANDLE 0057 CARNIVALE 0057 CARVER 0081, 0197 CASCADE 0036 CATHAY 0064 CELEBRITY 0027 CELERA 0792 CENTURION 0064 CHANGHONG 0792 CHING TAI 0036, 0119 CHUN YUN 0027, 0036, 0119, 0207 CHUNG HSIN 0080, 0135, 0207 CIMLINE 0036 CINERAL 0119, 0478 CITIZEN 0057, 0087, 0119 CLARION 0207 CLARIVOX 0064 CLATRONIC 0274, 0397 CONDOR 0347, 0397 CONRAC 0835 CONTEC CRAIG CROSLEY CROWN GRANADA 0064, 0235, 0366, 0543 GRANDIN 0637 GRUNDIG 0064, 0222, 0514, 0583, 0614 GRUNPY 0207 HCM 0036, 0439 HALLMARK 0205 HANKOOK 0057, 0205, 0207 HANSEATIC 0064, 0347, 0388, 0455, 0583 HANTAREX 0543 HARMAN/KARDON 0081 HARVARD 0207 HAVERMY 0120 HELLO KITTY 0478 HINARI 0036, 0064 HISAWA 0482 HITACHI 0036, 0057, 0119, 0132, 0136, 0172, 0190, 0205, 0252, 0383, 0508, 0575, 0605, 1172, 1283 HUA TUN 0036 HUANYU 0401 HYPSON 0064, 0291 ICE 0291, 0398 ITS 0398 ITT 0190, 0388, 0575 IMPERIAL 0274, 0397, 0445 INDIANA 0064 INFINITY 0081 INGELEN 0190 INNO HIT 0543 INNOVA 0064 INTEQ 0044 INTERFUNK 0064, 0190, 0274, 0388, 0539 INTERVISION 0064, 0291, 0404 JBL 0081 JCB 0027 JVC 0080, 0398, 0490, 0680, 0710 JEAN 0036, 0078, 0119, 0183, 0263 JENSEN 0788 KEC 0207 KTV 0057, 0207 KAISUI 0036 KAPSCH 0190 KARCHER 0637 KATHREIN 0583 KENDO 0064 KENWOOD 0057 KNEISSEL 0286, 0462 KOLIN 0080, 0135, 0207 KORPEL 0064 KOYODA 0036 L&S ELECTRONIC 0835 LG 0057, 0064, 0087, 0135, 0205, 0741 LXI 0074, 0081, 0181, 0183, 0205 LEYCO 0064, 0291 LIESENK & TTER 0064 LOEWE 0539 LUXOR 0383, 0388 M ELECTRONIC 0036, 0064, 0131, 0132, 0136, 0190, 0314, 0373, 0401, 0507 MGA 0057, 0177, 0205 MTC 0057, 0087, 0539 MAGNADYNE 0274, 0543 MAGNAFON 0543 MAGNAVOX 0057, 0081, 1281, 1481 MANESTH 0291, 0347 MARANTZ 0057, 0064, 0081, 0583 MARK 0064 MATSUI 0036, 0064, 0235, 0398, 0514, 0543 MATSUSHITA 0277, 0677 MEDIATOR 0064 MEDION 0695, 0835, 1064 MEGATRON 0172, 0205 MEMOREX 0036, 0177, 0181, 0205, 0277, 0490, 1064 METZ 0474 MICROMAXX 0835 MICROSTAR 0835 MIDLAND 0044, 0074, 0078 MINERVA 0514 MINOKA 0439 MITSUBISHI 0057, 0120, 0135, 0177, 0181, 0205, 0207, 0263, 0277, 0539, 0863, 1277 MIVAR 0318,0319, 0543, 0636 MOTOROLA 0120 MULTITECH 0036, 0207 MYRYAD 0583 NAD 0183, 0205, 0388, 0893 NEC 0036, 0057, 0078, 0181, 0183, 0197, 0205, 0482, 0524, 1731 NEI 0064 NTC 0119 NECKERMANN 0064, 0583 NETSAT 0064 NEWAVE 0036, 0119, 0120, 0205 NIKKAI 0064, 0291 NIKKO 0057, 0119, 0205 NOKIA 0388, 0500, 0507, 0575, 0658 NORCENT 0775, 0851 NORDMENDE 0136, 0314, 0587 OCEANIC 0190, 0388 ONWA 0207, 0460 OPTIMUS 0181, 0193, 0277, 0677 OPTONICA 0120 ORION 0064, 0263, 0347, 0490, 0543 OSAKI 0291, 0439 OTTO VERSAND 0064, 0347, 0539, 0583 PALLADIUM 0397, 0445 PANAMA 0291 PANASONIC 0064, 0078, 0081, 0190, 0277, 0677, 1437 PATHE CINEMA 0265, 0347 PAUSA 0036 PENNEY 0057, 0074, 0078, 0087, 0183, 0205, 1374 PERDIO 0347 PHILCO 0057, 0064, 0081, 0172, 0205, 0207, 0274, 0490, 1688 PHILIPS 0027, 0057, 0064, 0078, 0081, 0119, 0135, 0205, 0401, 0583, 0717, 1481 PHONOLA 0064 PILOT 0057 PIONEER 0136, 0190, 0193, 0314, 0706, 0787, 0893 PORTLAND 0119 PRANDONI-PRINCE 0543 PRIMA 0788 PRISM 0078 PROFEX 0036, 0388 PROSCAN 0074 PROTECH 0036, 0064, 0274, 0291, 0445, 0695 PROTON 0036, 0057, 0205 PULSAR 0044 QUASAR 0078, 0277, 0677 QUELLE 0064, 0131, 0388, 0539 R-LINE 0064 RCA 0027, 0057, 0074, 0117, 0119, 0205, 0706, 1074, 1174, 1274, 1374, 1474, 1481, 1574 RFT 0455 RADIOSHACK 0057, 0074, 0181, 0205, 0207 RADIOLA 0064 RADIOMARELLI 0543 REALISTIC 0057, 0181, 0205, 0207 REDIFFUSION 0388 REOC 0741 REVOX 0064 REX 0190, 0286, 0291 ROADSTAR 0036, 0291, 0445 RUNCO 0044, 0057, 0524, 0630 SBR 0064 SEG 0291, 0695 SEI 0543 SKY 0064 SSS 0207 SABA 0136, 0190, 0314, 0362 SACCS 0265 SAGEM 0637 SAISHO 0036, 0291, 0543 SALORA 0190, 0380, 0388, 0575 SAMBERS 0543 SAMPO 0036, 0057, 0119, 0120, 0181, 0198, 0205, 0677, 1782 SAMSUNG 0036, 0057, 0064, 0087, 0117, 0119, 0181, 0205, 0291, 0397, 0583, 0614, 0645, 0729, 0793, 0839, 0841 SANSEI 0478 SANSUI 0490 SANYO 0131, 0181, 0207, 0235, 0366, 0826 SCHAUB LORENZ 0388 SCHNEIDER 0064, 0274, 0398, 0695 SCOTCH 0205 SCOTT 0205, 0207, 0263 xi APPENDIX 0036, 0207 0207 0081 0036, 0064, 0207, 0397, 0445 CURTIS MATHES 0057, 0074, 0081, 0087, 0120, 0172, 0181, 0193, 0478, 0729, 1174, 1374 DAEWOO 0036, 0057, 0064, 0119, 0135, 0181, 0197, 0205, 0207, 0401, 0478, 0650, 0661, 1688 DANSAI 0064 DAYTON 0036 DE GRAAF 0235, 0575 DECCA 0064, 0543 DENON 0172 DIGATRON 0064 DIXI 0036, 0064 DUMONT 0044 DWIN 0747, 0801 ECE 0064 ELBE 0286 ELECTROBAND 0027 ELIN 0064, 0575 ELITE 0347 ELTA 0036 EMERSON 0181, 0205, 0207, 0263, 0388, 0490, 0650 ENVISION 0057,0840 EPSON 0860 ERRES 0064 ETHER 0036, 0057 ETRON 0036 EUROPHON 0543 FERGUSON 0064, 0100, 0136, 0265, 0314, 0362, 0587 FIDELITY 0388 FINLANDIA 0235, 0373 FINLUX 0064, 0131, 0132, 0373, 0543 FIRSTAR 0036, 0263 FIRSTLINE 0036, 0274, 0695 FISHER 0131, 0181, 0235, 0397 FLINT 0482 FORMENTI 0064, 0347 FORTRESS 0120 FRONTECH 0190, 0274, 0291 FUJITSU 0710, 0836 FUNAI 0207, 0198, 0291 FUTURETECH 0207 GE 0057, 0074, 0078, 0119, 0205, 0207, 0478, 0587, 1174, 1374, 1481 GEC 0064, 0543 GATEWAY 1782, 1783 GELOSO 0036 GENEXXA 0190 GIBRALTER 0044, 0057 GOLDSTAR 0057, 0064, 0136, 0181, 0205, 0404 GOODMANS 0064, 0398, 0401, 0661 GOREMJE 0397 GRADIENTE 0080, 0197 GRAETZ 0190, 0388 SEARS 0074, 0081, 0181, 0183, 0198, 0205 SELECO 0190, 0286 SEMIVOX 0207 SEMP 0183 SHARP 0057, 0120, 0677 SHEN YING 0036, 0119 SHENG CHIA 0036, 0120, 0263 SIAREM 0543 SIEMENS 0064, 0222 SINUDYNE 0543 SKANTIC 0383 SKYGIANT 0207 SKYWORTH 0064 SOLAVOX 0190 SONITRON 0235 SONOKO 0036, 0064 SONOLOR 0190, 0235 SONTEC 0064 SONY 0027, 0677, 0861, 1127, 1532, 1678 SOUNDESIGN 0205, 0207 SOUNDWAVE 0064, 0445 SOWA 0078, 0087, 0119, 0183, 0205 SQUAREVIEW 0198 STANDARD 0036 STARLITE 0207 STERN 0190, 0286 SUPREME 0027 SYLVANIA 0057, 0081, 0198 SYMPHONIC 0198, 0207 SYNCO 0027, 0087, 0119, 0120, 0205, 0478 SYSLINE 0064 T+A 0474 TCM 0835 TMK 0205 TNCI 0044 TVS 0490 TACICO 0036, 0119, 0205 TAI YI 0036 TANDY 0120, 0190 TASHIKO 0119, 0677 TATUNG 0036, 0064, 0078, 0081, 0087, 0181, 0183, 0543 TEAC 0036, 0064, 0291, 0439, 0445, 0482, 0695, 1064 TEC 0274 TECHNEMA 0347 TECHNICS 0078, 0277, 0677 TECHWOOD 0078 TECO 0036, 0078, 0119, 0120, 0205, 0291, 0680 TEKNIKA 0081, 0087, 0119, 0177, 0207 TELEFUNKEN 0136, 0289, 0362, 0652, 0729 TELEMEISTER 0347 TELETECH 0036 TENSAI 0347 TERA 0057 THOMSON 0136, 0314, 0587, 0652, 1474 THORN 0064, 0131, 0388, 0539 TOSHIBA 0087, 0181, 0183, 0535, 0645, 0677, 0859, 1283, 1383, 1683, 1731 TRIUMPH 0543 TUNTEX 0036, 0057, 0119 xii UHER 0347 UNIVERSUM 0064, 0131, 0132, 0291, 0373, 0397, 0519 VECTOR RESEARCH 0057 VESTEL 0064 VICTOR 0080, 0277, 0677, 0680 VIDEOSAT 0274 VIDIKRON 0081 VIDTECH 0205 VIEWSONIC 1782 VISION 0347 VOXSON 0190 WALTHAM 0383 WARDS 0057, 0081, 0205, 0893 WATSON 0064, 0347 WAYCON 0183 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 0064, 0347, 0490, 0650 YAMAHA 0057, 0172, 0677, 0796, 0860, 2900 (projector), 2901 (projector), 2903, 2904 (projector) YAPSHE 0277 YOKO 0064, 0291 ZENITH 0044, 0119, 0205, 0490 VCR ASA ADMIRAL ADVENTURA AIKO AIWA 0064, 0108 0075 0027 0305 0027, 0064, 0334, 0375, 0379 AKAI 0068, 0342 AKIBA 0099 ALBA 0099, 0305, 0342, 0379 AMERICA ACTION 0305 AMERICAN HIGH 0062 AMSTRAD 0027 ANAM 0064, 0253, 0267, 0305, 0507 ANAM NATIONAL 0253, 1589 ANITECH 0099 ASHA 0267 ASUKA 0064 AUDIOVOX 0064, 0305 BAIRD 0027, 0068, 0131 BASIC LINE 0099, 0305 BEAUMARK 0267 BELL & HOWELL 0131 BLAUPUNKT 0253 BRANDT 0347 BRANDT ELECTRONIC 0068 BROKSONIC 0211, 0375, 1506 BUSH 0099, 0305, 0379 CCE 0099, 0305 CGE 0027 CALIX 0064 CANON 0062 CARVER 0108 CIMLINE 0099 CINERAL 0305 CITIZEN 0064, 0305, 1305 COLT 0099 COMBITECH 0379 CRAIG 0064, 0074, 0099, 0267 CROWN 0099, 0305 CURTIS MATHES 0062, 0068, 0087, 1062 CYBERNEX 0267 CYRUS 0108 DAEWOO 0072, 0131, 0305, 0669, 1305 DANSAI 0099 DE GRAAF 0069 DECCA 0027, 0108 DENON 0069 DUAL 0068 DUMONT 0027, 0108, 0131 DYNATECH 0027 ESC 0267, 0305 ELCATECH 0099 ELECTROHOME 0064 ELECTROPHONIC 0064 EMEREX 0059 EMERSON 0027, 0062, 0064, 0070, 0072, 0211, 0267, 0305, 1305, 1506 FERGUSON 0068, 0347 FIDELITY 0027 FINLANDIA 0108, 0131 FINLUX 0027, 0069, 0108, 0131 FIRSTLINE 0064, 0070, 0072, 0099 FISHER 0074, 0131 FUJI 0060, 0062 FUJITSU 0027, 0072 FUNAI 0027 GE 0062, 0087, 0267, 0834, 1062, 1087 GEC 0108 GARRARD 0027 GENERAL 0072 GO VIDEO 0459 GOLDHAND 0099 GOLDSTAR 0064, 0252, 0507, 1264 GOODMANS 0027, 0064, 0099, 0305 GRADIENTE 0027 GRAETZ 0068, 0131, 0267 GRANADA 0108, 0131 GRANDIN 0027, 0064, 0099 GRUNDIG 0099, 0108, 0253, 0374 HCM 0099 HI-Q 0074 HANSEATIC 0064 HARLEY DAVIDSON 0027 HARMAN/KARDON 0108 HARWOOD 0099 HINARI 0099, 0267, 0379 HITACHI 0027, 0064, 0068, 0069, 0267 HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS 0069 HYPSON 0099 ITT 0068, 0131, 0267 ITV 0064, 0305 IMPERIAL 0027 INTERFUNK 0108 JVC 0068, 0072, 0094 JENSEN 0068 KEC 0064, 0305 KLH 0099 KAISUI KENWOOD KODAK KOLIN KORPEL LG 0099 0068, 0094 0062, 0064 0068, 0070 0099 0064, 0069, 0072, 0507 LXI 0064 LENCO 0305 LEYCO 0099 LLOYD’S 0027 LOEWE 0064, 0108, 1589 LOGIK 0099, 0267 LUXOR 0070, 0075, 0131 M ELECTRONIC 0027 MEI 0062 MGA 0070, 0267 MGN TECHNOLOGY 0267 MTC 0027, 0267 MAGNASONIC 1305 MAGNAVOX 0027, 0062, 0066, 0108, 1808 MAGNIN 0267 MANESTH 0072, 0099 MARANTZ 0062, 0108 MARTA 0064 MATSUI 0375, 0379 MATSUSHITA 0062 MEDION 0375 MEMOREX 0027, 0062, 0064, 0066, 0074, 0075, 0131, 0267, 0334, 0375, 1264 MEMPHIS 0099 METZ 0064, 0374, 1589 MINOLTA 0069 MITSUBISHI 0068, 0070, 0094, 0108, 0834 MOTOROLA 0062, 0075 MULTITECH 0027, 0099 MURPHY 0027 MYRYAD 0108 NAD 0131 NEC 0062, 0064, 0068, 0075, 0094, 0131 NATIONAL 0253 NECKERMANN 0108 NESCO 0099 NEWAVE 0064 NIKKO 0064 NOBLEX 0267 NOKIA 0068, 0131, 0267 NORDMENDE 0068, 0347 OCEANIC 0027, 0068 OKANO 0342, 0375 OLYMPUS 0062, 0253 OPTIMUS 0064, 0075, 0131, 0459 ORION 0211, 0375, 0379, 1506 OSAKI 0027, 0064, 0099 OTTO VERSAND 0108 PALLADIUM 0064, 0068, 0099 PANASONIC 0062, 0252, 0253, 0643, 1062, 1589 PATHE MARCONI 0068 PENNEY 0062, 0064, 0069, 0267, 1062, 1264 PENTAX 0069 PERDIO 0027 PHILCO 0062 PHILIPS 0062, 0108, 0645, 1108, 1208 PHONOLA 0108 TELEAVIA TELEFUNKEN TENOSAL TENSAI THOMAS THOMSON 0068 0068, 0347 0099 0027 0027 0068, 0087, 0094, 0347 THORN 0068, 0131 TIVO 0645, 0663 TOSHIBA 0068, 0070, 0072, 0094, 0108, 0872 TOTEVISION 0064, 0267 UHER 0267 UNITECH 0267 UNIVERSUM 0027, 0064, 0108, 0267 VECTOR 0072 VICTOR 0068, 0094 VIDEO CONCEPTS 0072 VIDEOMAGIC 0064 VIDEOSONIC 0267 VILLAIN 0027 WARDS 0027, 0062, 0069, 0074, 0075, 0087, 0099, 0108, 0267 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 0099 XR-1000 0027, 0062, 0099 YAMAHA 0068 YAMISHI 0099 YOKAN 0099 YOKO 0267 ZENITH 0027, 0060, 0066, 1506 APPENDIX PILOT 0064 PIONEER 0069, 0094, 0108 POLK AUDIO 0108 PROFITRONIC 0267 PROLINE 0027 PROSCAN 0087, 1087 PROTEC 0099 PULSAR 0066 PYE 0108 QUASAR 0062, 1062 QUELLE 0108 RCA 0062, 0069, 0087, 0267, 0834, 1062, 1087 RADIOSHACK 0027 RADIOLA 0108 RADIX 0064 RANDEX 0064 REALISTIC 0027, 0062, 0064, 0074, 0075, 0131 REOC 0375 REPLAYTV 0641, 0643 REX 0068 ROADSTAR 0064, 0099, 0267, 0305 RUNCO 0066 SBR 0108 SEG 0267 SEI 0108 STS 0069 SABA 0068, 0347 SALORA 0070 SAMPO 0064, 0075 SAMSUNG 0072, 0267, 0459 SANKY 0066, 0075 SANSUI 0027, 0068, 0094, 1506 SANYO 0074, 0131, 0267 SAVILLE 0379 SCHAUB LORENZ 0027, 0068, 0131 SCHNEIDER 0027, 0099, 0108 SCOTT 0070, 0072, 0211 SEARS 0027, 0062, 0064, 0069, 0074, 0131, 1264 SELECO 0068 SEMP 0072 SHARP 0075, 0834 SHINTOM 0099, 0131 SIEMENS 0064, 0108, 0131 SILVA 0064 SINGER 0072, 0099 SINUDYNE 0108 SONIC BLUE 0641, 0643 SONTEC 0064 SONY 0027, 0059, 0060, 0062, 0663, 1259 SUNKAI 0375 SUNSTAR 0027 SUNTRONIC 0027 SYLVANIA 0027, 0062, 0108, 0070, 1808 SYMPHONIC 0027 TMK 0267 TANDY 0027, 0131 TASHIKO 0027, 0064 TATUNG 0027, 0068, 0072, 0094, 0108 TEAC 0027, 0068, 0305, 0334, 0669 TECHNICS 0062, 0253 TECO 0062, 0064, 0068, 0075 TEKNIKA 0027, 0062, 0064 xiii RX-V2700_U-cv.fm Page 1 Thursday, August 24, 2006 3:36 PM U RX-V2700 RX-V2700 AV Receiver © 2006 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA All rights reserved. OWNER’S MANUAL Printed in Malaysia WJ55210-
1
-
2
-
3
-
4
-
5
-
6
-
7
-
8
-
9
-
10
-
11
-
12
-
13
-
14
-
15
-
16
-
17
-
18
-
19
-
20
-
21
-
22
-
23
-
24
-
25
-
26
-
27
-
28
-
29
-
30
-
31
-
32
-
33
-
34
-
35
-
36
-
37
-
38
-
39
-
40
-
41
-
42
-
43
-
44
-
45
-
46
-
47
-
48
-
49
-
50
-
51
-
52
-
53
-
54
-
55
-
56
-
57
-
58
-
59
-
60
-
61
-
62
-
63
-
64
-
65
-
66
-
67
-
68
-
69
-
70
-
71
-
72
-
73
-
74
-
75
-
76
-
77
-
78
-
79
-
80
-
81
-
82
-
83
-
84
-
85
-
86
-
87
-
88
-
89
-
90
-
91
-
92
-
93
-
94
-
95
-
96
-
97
-
98
-
99
-
100
-
101
-
102
-
103
-
104
-
105
-
106
-
107
-
108
-
109
-
110
-
111
-
112
-
113
-
114
-
115
-
116
-
117
-
118
-
119
-
120
-
121
-
122
-
123
-
124
-
125
-
126
-
127
-
128
-
129
-
130
-
131
-
132
-
133
-
134
-
135
-
136
-
137
-
138
-
139
-
140
-
141
-
142
-
143
-
144
-
145
-
146
-
147
-
148
-
149
-
150
-
151
-
152
-
153
-
154
-
155
-
156
-
157
-
158
-
159
-
160
-
161
-
162
-
163
-
164
-
165
-
166
-
167
-
168
-
169
-
170
-
171
-
172
-
173
-
174
Yamaha RX V2700 - AV Network Receiver de handleiding
- Categorie
- Ontvanger
- Type
- de handleiding
in andere talen
- English: Yamaha RX V2700 - AV Network Receiver Owner's manual
- italiano: Yamaha RX V2700 - AV Network Receiver Manuale del proprietario
- русский: Yamaha RX V2700 - AV Network Receiver Инструкция по применению
- français: Yamaha RX V2700 - AV Network Receiver Le manuel du propriétaire
- español: Yamaha RX V2700 - AV Network Receiver El manual del propietario
- Deutsch: Yamaha RX V2700 - AV Network Receiver Bedienungsanleitung
- português: Yamaha RX V2700 - AV Network Receiver Manual do proprietário
- dansk: Yamaha RX V2700 - AV Network Receiver Brugervejledning
- suomi: Yamaha RX V2700 - AV Network Receiver Omistajan opas
- čeština: Yamaha RX V2700 - AV Network Receiver Návod k obsluze
- svenska: Yamaha RX V2700 - AV Network Receiver Bruksanvisning
- Türkçe: Yamaha RX V2700 - AV Network Receiver El kitabı
- polski: Yamaha RX V2700 - AV Network Receiver Instrukcja obsługi
- română: Yamaha RX V2700 - AV Network Receiver Manualul proprietarului
Gerelateerde papieren
-
Yamaha RX-797 de handleiding
-
-
-
-
Yamaha RX-V3900 de handleiding
-
-
-
Yamaha HTR-6160 de handleiding
-
-
Andere documenten
-
TEAC AG-980 de handleiding
-
Hama 6 in 1 Universal Remote Control de handleiding
-
Sangean WFT-1 Handleiding
-
-
Toshiba PA5356C-1PRP Gebruikershandleiding
-
Bose AM301726 Handleiding
-
ONKYO DS-A1X de handleiding
-
Kenwood DVF-N7080 de handleiding
-
Polk Audio Pavilion 9880 Handleiding
-
Lutron Electronics QS Timeclock Handleiding
